# 40 CFR Part 1065

Engine-Testing Procedures

DRAFT Working Document

(LD Tier III NPRM changes in red , LD Tier III FRM changes in blue , Non-Road HDIUT NPRM changes in teal )



# 9/10/13aPart 1065—ENGINE-TESTING PROCEDURES

Subpart A—Applicability and General Provisions 1065.1 Applicability. 1065.2 Submitting information to EPA under this part. 1065.5 Overview of this part 1065 and its relationship to the standard-setting part. 1065.10 Other procedures. 1065.12 Approval of alternate procedures. 1065.15 Overview of procedures for laboratory and field testing. 1065.20 Units of measure and overview of calculations. 1065.25 Recordkeeping.

Subpart B—Equipment Specifications 1065.101 Overview. 1065.110 Work inputs and outputs, accessory work, and operator demand. 1065.120 Fuel properties and fuel temperature and pressure. 1065.122 Engine cooling and lubrication. 1065.125 Engine intake air. 1065.127 Exhaust gas recirculation. 1065.130 Engine exhaust. 1065.140 Dilution for gaseous and PM constituents. 1065.145 Gaseous and PM probes, transfer lines, and sampling system components. 1065.150 Continuous sampling. 1065.170 Batch sampling for gaseous and PM constituents. 1065.190 PM-stabilization and weighing environments for gravimetric analysis. 1065.195 PM-stabilization environment for in-situ analyzers.

Subpart C—Measurement Instruments 1065.201 Overview and general provisions. 1065.202 Data updating, recording, and control. 1065.205 Performance specifications for measurement instruments. MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE PARAMETERS AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS 1065.210 Work input and output sensors. 1065.215 Pressure transducers, temperature sensors, and dewpoint sensors. FLOW-RELATED MEASUREMENTS 1065.220 Fuel flow meter. 1065.225 Intake-air flow meter. 1065.230 Raw exhaust flow meter. 1065.240 Dilution air and diluted exhaust flow meters. 1065.245 Sample flow meter for batch sampling. 1065.248 Gas divider. CO AND CO 2 MEASUREMENTS 1065.250 Nondispersive infrared analyzer. HYDROCARBON MEASUREMENTS 1065.260 Flame ionization detector. 1065.265 Nonmethane cutter.1065.267 Gas chromatograph. 1065.269 Photoacoustic analyzer for ethanol and methanol. NO x AND N 2 O MEASUREMENTS 1065.270 Chemiluminescent detector. 1065.272 Nondispersive ultraviolet analyzer. 1065.275 N 2 O measurement devices. O 2 MEASUREMENTS 1065.280 Paramagnetic and magnetopneumatic O 2 detection analyzers. AIR-TO-FUEL RATIO MEASUREMENTS 1065.284 Zirconia (ZrO 2 ) analyzer. PM MEASUREMENTS 1065.290 PM gravimetric balance. 1065.295 PM inertial balance for field-testing analysis.

Subpart D—Calibrations and Verifications 1065.301 Overview and general provisions. 1065.303 Summary of required calibration and verifications 1065.305 Verifications for accuracy, repeatability, and noise. 1065.307 Linearity verification. 1065.308 Continuous gas analyzer system-respons e and updating-recording verification—for gas analyzers not continuously compensated for other gas species. 1065.309 Continuous gas analyzer system-respons e and updating-recording verification—for gas analyzers continuously compensated for other gas species. MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE PARAMETERS AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS 1065.310 Torque calibration. 1065.315 Pressure, temperature, and dewpoint calibration. FLOW-RELATED MEASUREMENTS 1065.320 Fuel-flow calibration. 1065.325 Intake-flow calibration. 1065.330 Exhaust-flow calibration. 1065.340 Diluted exhaust flow (CVS) calibration. 1065.341 CVS , PFD, and batch sampler verification (propane check). 1065.342 Sample dryer verification. 1065.345 Vacuum-side leak verification. CO AND CO 2 MEASUREMENTS 1065.350 H 2 O interference verification for CO 2 NDIR analyzers. 1065.355 H 2 O and CO 2 interference verification for CO NDIR analyzers. HYDROCARBON MEASUREMENTS 1065.360 FID optimization and verification. 1065.362 Non-stoichiometric raw exhaust FID O 2 interference verification. 1065.365 Nonmethane cutter penetration fractions. 1065.369 H 2 O, CO, and CO 2 interference verification for photoacoustic alcohol analyzers. NO x AND N 2 O MEASUREMENTS 1065.370 CLD CO 2 and H 2 O quench verification. 1065.372 NDUV analyzer HC and H 2 O interference verification. 1065.375 Interference verification for N 2 O analyzers.1065.376 Chiller NO 2 penetration. 1065.378 NO 2 -to-NO converter conversion verification. PM MEASUREMENTS 1065.390 PM balance verifications and weighing process verification. 1065.395 Inertial PM balance verifications.

Subpart E—Engine Selection, Preparation, and Maintenance 1065.401 Test engine selection. 1065.405 Test engine preparation and maintenance. 1065.410 Maintenance limits for stabilized test engines. 1065.415 Durability demonstration.

Subpart F—Performing an Emission Test in the Laboratory 1065.501 Overview. 1065.510 Engine mapping. 1065.512 Duty cycle generation. 1065.514 Cycle-validation criteria for operation over specific duty cycles. 1065.516 Sample system decontamination and preconditioning. 1065.518 Engine preconditioning. 1065.520 Pre-test verification procedur es and pre-test data collection. 1065.525 Engine starting, restarting, and shutdown. 1065.526 Repeating of void modes or test intervals. 1065.530 Emission test sequence. 1065.545 Verification of proportional flow cont rol for batch sampling. 1065.546 Verification of minimum dilution ratio for PM batch sampling. 1065.550 Gas analyzer range verification and drift verification

. 1065.590 PM sampling media (e.g., filters) preconditioning and tare weighing. 1065.595 PM sample post-conditioning and total weighing.

Subpart G—Calculations and Data Requirements 1065.601 Overview. 1065.602 Statistics. 1065.610 Duty cycle generation. 1065.630 Local acceleration of gravity. 1065.640 Flow meter calibration calculations. 1065.642 SSV, CFV, and PDP molar flow rate calculations. 1065.644 Vacuum-decay leak rate. 1065.645 Amount of water in an ideal gas. 1065.650 Emission calculations. 1065.655 Chemical balances of fuel, intake air, and exhaust. 1065.659 Removed water correction. 1065.660 THC, NMHC, and CH 4 determination. 1065.665 THCE and NMHCE determination. 1065.667 Dilution air background emission correction. 1065.670 NO x intake-air humidity and temperature corrections. 1065.672 Drift correction. Deleted: Validation

Deleted: Validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: 1980 international

Deleted: formula1065.675 CLD quench verification calculations. 1065.690 Buoyancy correction for PM sample media. 1065.695 Data requirements.

Subpart H—Engine Fluids, Test Fuels, Analytical Gases and Other Calibration Standards 1065.701 General requirements for test fuels. 1065.703 Distillate diesel fuel. 1065.705 Residual and intermediate residual fuel. 1065.710 Gasoline. 1065.715 Natural gas. 1065.720 Liquefied petroleum gas. 1065.725 High-level ethanol-gasoline blends. 1065.740 Lubricants. 1065.745 Coolants. 1065.750 Analytical gases. 1065.790 Mass standards.

Subpart I—Testing with Oxygenated Fuels 1065.801 Applicability. 1065.805 Sampling system. 1065.845 Response factor determination. 1065.850 Calculations.

Subpart J—Field Testing and Portable Emission Measurement Systems 1065.901 Applicability. 1065.905 General provisions. 1065.910 PEMS auxiliary equi pment for field testing. 1065.915 PEMS instruments. 1065.920 PEMS calibrations and verifications. 1065.925 PEMS preparation for field testing. 1065.930 Engine starting, restarting, and shutdown. 1065.935 Emission test sequence for field testing. 1065.940 Emission calculations.

Subpart K—Definitions and Other Reference Information 1065.1001 Definitions. 1065.1005 Symbols, abbreviations, acronyms, and units of measure. 1065.1010 Reference materials.

Subpart L—Methods for Unregulated and Special Pollutants 1065.1101 Applicability. SEMI-VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 1065.1103 General provisions for SVOC measurement. 1065.1105 Sampling system design. 1065.1107 Sample media and sample system preparation; sampler assembly. 1065.1109 Post-test sampler disassembly and sample extraction.1065.1111 Sample analysis.PART 1065—ENGINE-TESTING PROCEDURES

Subpart A—Applicability and General Provisions

§1065.1 Applicability. (a) This part describes the procedures that apply to testing we require for the following engines or for vehicles using the following engines: (1) Locomotives we regulate under 40 CFR part 1033. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 92 according to §1065.10. (2) Model year 2010 and later heavy-duty highway engines we regulate under 40 CFR part 86. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 86, subpart N, according to §1065.10. (3) Nonroad diesel engines we regulate under 40 CFR part 1039 and stationary diesel engines that are certified to the standards in 40 CFR part 1039 as specified in 40 CFR part 60, subpart IIII. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 89 according to §1065.10. (4) Marine diesel engines we regulate under 40 CFR part 1042. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 94 according to §1065.10. (5) Marine spark-ignition engines we regulate unde r 40 CFR part 1045. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 91 according to §1065.10. (6) Large nonroad spark-ignition engines we regul ate under 40 CFR part 1048, and stationary engines that are certified to the standards in 40 CFR part 1048 or as otherwise specified in 40 CFR part 60, subpart JJJJ. (7) Vehicles we regulate under 40 CFR part 1051 (such as snowmobiles and off-highway motorcycles) based on engine testing. See 40 CFR part 1051, subpart F, for standards and procedures that are based on vehicle testing. (8) Small nonroad spark-ignition engines we regulate under 40 CFR part 1054 and stationary engines that are certified to the standards in 40 CFR part 1054 as specified in 40 CFR part 60, subpart JJJJ. For earlier model years, manufacturers may use the test procedures in this part or those specified in 40 CFR part 90 according to §1065.10. (b) The procedures of this part may apply to other types of engines, as described in this part and in the standard-setting part. (c) The term “you” means anyone performing testing under this part other than EPA. (1) This part is addressed primarily to manufacturers of engines, vehicles, equipment, and vessels, but it applies equally to anyone who does testing under this part for such manufacturers. (2) This part applies to any manufacturer or supplier of test equipment, instruments, supplies, or any other goods or services related to the procedures, requirements, recommendations, or options in this part. (d) Paragraph (a) of this section identifies the parts of the CFR that define emission standards and other requirements for particular types of engines. In this part, we refer to each of these other parts generically as the ''standard-setting pa rt.'' For example, 40 CFR part 1051 is always the standard-setting part for snowmobiles. Note th at while 40 CFR part 86 is the standard-settingpart for heavy-duty highway engines, this refers specifically to 40 CFR part 86, subpart A, and to certain portions of 40 CFR part 86, subpart N, as described in 40 CFR 86.1301. (e) Unless we specify otherwise, the terms “procedures” and “test procedures” in this part include all aspects of engine testing, incl uding the equipment specifications, calibrations, calculations, and other protocols and procedural specifications needed to measure emissions. (f) For vehicles, equipment, or vessels subject to this part and regulated under vehicle-based, equipment-based, or vessel-based standards, use good engineering judgment to interpret the term ''engine'' in this part to include vehicles , equipment, or vessels, where appropriate. (g) For additional information regarding these test procedures, visit our Web site at www.epa.gov, and in particular http://www.epa.gov/nvfel/testing/regulations.htm. (h) This part describes procedures and specifi cations for measuring an engine’s exhaust emissions. While the measurements are geared toward engine-based measurements (in units of g/kW·hr), many of these provisions apply equally to vehicle-based measurements (in units of g/mile or g/kilometer). 40 CFR part 1066 describes the analogous procedures for vehicle-based emission measurements, and in many cases states that specific provisions of this part 1065 also apply for those vehicle-based measurements. Where material from this part 1065 applies for vehicle-based measurements under 40 CFR part 1066, it is sometimes necessary to include parenthetical statements in this part 1065 to prope rly cite secondary references that are different for vehicle-based testing. See 40 CFR part 1066 and the standard-setting part for additional information.

§1065.2 Submitting information to EPA under this part. (a) You are responsible for statements and information in your applications for certification,requests for approved procedures, selective enforcement audits, laboratory audits, productionline test reports, field test reports, or any other st atements you make to us related to this part 1065. If you provide statements or information to someone for submission to EPA, you are responsible for these statements and information as if you had submitted them to EPA yourself. (b) In the standard-setting part and in 40 CFR 1068.101, we describe your obligation to report truthful and complete informatio n and the consequences of failing to meet this obligation. See also 18 U.S.C. 1001 and 42 U.S.C. 7413(c)(2). This obligation applies whether you submit this information directly to EPA or through someone else. (c) We may void any certificates or approvals asso ciated with a submission of information if we find that you intentionally submitted false, inco mplete, or misleading information. For example, if we find that you intentionally submitted incomplete information to mislead EPA when requesting approval to use alternate test procedur es, we may void the certificates for all engines families certified based on emissi on data collected using the alternate procedures. This would also apply if you ignore data from incomplete te sts or from repeat tests with higher emission results. (d) We may require an authorized representative of your company to approve and sign the submission, and to certify that all of the information submitted is accurate and complete. This includes everyone who submits information, including manufacturers and others. (e) See 40 CFR 1068.10 for provisions related to confidential information. Note however that under 40 CFR 2.301, emission data is gene rally not eligible for confidential treatment. (f) Nothing in this part should be interpreted to limit our ability under Clean Air Act section 208 (42 U.S.C. 7542) to verify that engines conform to the regulations. Deleted: how to measure emissions from vehicles that are subject to standards in g/mile or g/kilometer. Those vehicle testing provisions extensively reference portions of this part 1065.§1065.5 Overview of this part 1065 and its relationship to the standard-setting part. (a) This part specifies procedures that apply gene rally to testing various categories of engines. See the standard-setting part for directions in ap plying specific provisions in this part for a particular type of engine. Before using this part’s procedures, read the standard-setting part to answer at least the following questions: (1) What duty cycles must I use for laboratory testing?(2) Should I warm up the test engine before measuring emissions, or do I need to measure coldstart emissions during a warm-up segment of the duty cycle? (3) Which exhaust constituents do I need to measur e? Measure all exhaust constituents that are subject to emission stan dards, any other exhaust constituents needed for calcu lating emission rates, and any additional exhaust constituents as specified in the standard-setting part. Alternatively, you may omit the measurement of N 2 O and CH 4 for an engine, provided it is not subject to an N 2 O or CH 4 emission standard. If you omit the measurement of N 2 O and CH 4 , you must provide other information and/ or data that will give us a reasonable basis for estimating the engine’s emission rates. (4) Do any unique specifications apply for test fuels? (5) What maintenance steps may I take before or between tests on an emission-data engine? (6) Do any unique requirements apply to stabilizing emission levels on a new engine? (7) Do any unique requirements apply to test limits, such as ambient temperatures or pressures? (8) Is field testing required or allowed, and are there different emission standards or procedures that apply to field testing? (9) Are there any emission standards specified at particular engine-operating conditions or ambient conditions? (10) Do any unique requirements apply for durability testing? (b) The testing specifications in the standard-setting part may differ from the specifications in this part. In cases where it is not possible to co mply with both the standa rd-setting part and this part, you must comply with the specifications in the standard-setting part. The standard-setting part may also allow you to deviate from the procedures of this part for other reasons. (c) The following table shows how this part divides testing specifications into subparts:

Table 1 of §1065.5—Description of Part 1065 subparts. This subpart Describes these specifications or procedures Subpart A Applicability and general provisions. Subpart B Equipment for testing. Subpart C Measurement instruments for testing. Subpart D Calibration and performance verifications for measurement systems. Subpart E How to prepare engines for testing, including service accumulation. Subpart F How to run an emission test over a predetermined duty cycle. Subpart G Test procedure calculations. Subpart H Fuels, engine fluids, analytical gases, and other calibration standards. Subpart I Special procedures related to oxygenated fuels. Subpart J How to test with portable emission measurement systems (PEMS).

§1065.10 Other procedures. (a) Your testing. The procedures in this part apply for all testing you do to show compliance with emission standards, with certain exceptions liste d in this section. In some other sections inthis part, we allow you to use other procedures (such as less precise or less accurate procedures) if they do not affect your ability to show that your engines comply with the applicable emission standards. This generally requires emission levels to be far enough below the applicable emission standards so that any errors caused by greater imprecision or inaccuracy do not affect your ability to state unconditionally that the e ngines meet all applicable emission standards. (b) Our testing. These procedures generally apply for testing that we do to determine if your engines comply with applicable emission standa rds. We may perform ot her testing as allowed by the Act. (c) Exceptions. We may allow or require you to use procedures other than those specified in this part in the following cases, which may apply to labo ratory testing, field testing, or both. We intend to publicly announce when we allow or require such exceptions. All of the test procedures noted here as exceptions to the specified procedures are considered generically as "other procedures." Note that the terms "special procedures" and "alternate procedures" have specific meanings; "special procedures" are t hose allowed by §1065.10(c)(2) and "alternate procedures" are those allowed by §1065.10(c)(7). (1) The objective of the procedures in this part is to produce emission measurements equivalent to those that would result from measuring emis sions during in-use operation using the same engine configuration as installed in a vehicle, equipment, or vessel. However, in unusual circumstances where these procedures may result in measurements that do not represent in-use operation, you must notify us if good engineer ing judgment indicates that the specified procedures cause unrepresentative emission measurements for your engines. Note that you need not notify us of unrepresentative aspects of the test procedure if measured emissions are equivalent to in-use emissions. This provision does not obligate you to pursue new information regarding the different ways your engine might operate in use, nor does it obligate you to collect any other in-use information to verify whether or not these test procedures are representative of your engine’s in-use operation. If you notify us of unrepresentative procedures under this paragraph (c)(1), we will cooperate with you to establish whether and how the procedures should be appropriately changed to result in more representative measurements. While the provisions of this paragraph (c)(1) allow us to be responsive to issues as they arise, we would generally work toward making these testing changes generally a pplicable through rulemaking. We will allow reasonable lead time for compliance with any resu lting change in procedures. We will consider the following factors in determining the importance of pursuing changes to the procedures: (i) Whether supplemental emission standards or other requirements in the standard-setting part address the type of operation of concern or otherwise prevent inappropriate design strategies. (ii) Whether the unrepresentative aspect of the pr ocedures affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable emission standards. (iii) The extent to which the established procedures require the use of emission-control technologies or strategies that are expected to ensure a comparable degree of emission control under the in-use operation that differs from the specified procedures. (2) You may request to use special procedures if your engine cannot be tested using the specified procedures. For example, this may apply if your engine cannot operate on the specified duty cycle. In this case, tell us in writing why you cannot satisfactorily test your engine using this part’s procedures and ask to use a different a pproach. We will approve your request if we determine that it would produce emission measurem ents that represent in-use operation and we determine that it can be used to show complian ce with the requirements of the standard-setting part. Where we approve special procedures that differ substantially from the specifiedprocedures, we may preclude you from participating in averaging, banking, and trading with the affected engine families. (3) In a given model year, you may use procedures required for later model year engines without request. If you upgrade your testing facility in stages, you may rely on a combination of procedures for current and later model year engines as long as you can ensure, using good engineering judgment, that the combination you us e for testing does not affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable emission standards. (4) In a given model year, you may ask to use procedures allowed for earlier model year engines. We will approve this only if you show us that using the procedures allowed for earlier model years does not affect your ability to show comp liance with the applicable emission standards. (5) You may ask to use emission data collected using other procedures, such as those of the California Air Resources Board or the Internatio nal Organization for Standardization. We will approve this only if you show us that using thes e other procedures does not affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable emission standards. (6) During the 12 months following the effective date of any change in the provisions of this part 1065, you may use data collected using procedures specified in the previously applicable version of this part 1065. This paragraph (c)(6) does not restrict the use of carryover certification data otherwise allowed by th e standard-setting part. (7) You may request to use alternate procedures that are equivalent to the specified procedures, or procedures that are more accurate or more precise than the specified procedures. We may perform tests with your engines using either the approved alternate procedures or the specified procedures. The following provisions apply to requests for alternate procedures: (i) Applications. Follow the instructions in §1065.12. (ii) Submission. Submit requests in wr iting to the Designated Compliance Officer. (iii) Notification. We may approve your reques t by telling you directly, or we may issue guidance announcing our approval of a specific alternate procedure, which would make additional requests for approval unnecessary. (d) If we require you to request approval to use other procedures under paragraph (c) of this section, you may not use them until we approve your request.

§1065.12 Approval of alternate procedures. (a) To get approval for an alternate procedure under §1065.10(c), send the Designated Compliance Officer an initial written request describing the alternate procedure and why you believe it is equivalent to the specified pro cedure. Anyone may request alternate procedure approval. This means that an individual engine manufacturer may request to use an alternate procedure. This also means that an instrument manufacturer may request to have an instrument, equipment, or procedure approved as an alternate procedure to those specified in this part. We may approve your request based on this information alone, whether or not it includes all the information specified in this section. Where we determine that your original submission does not include enough information for us to determine that the alternate procedure is equivalent to the specified procedure , we may ask you to submit supplemental information showing that your alternate procedure is consistently and reliably at least as accurate and repeatable as the specified procedure. (b) We may make our approval under this section conditional upon meeting other requirements or specifications. We may limit our approval, fo r example, to certain time frames, specific duty cycles, or specific emission standards. Based upon any supplemental information we receive Deleted: allowed

Deleted: allowed

Deleted: or, as described in this section

Deleted: to us in writingafter our initial approval, we may amend a previously approved alternate procedure to extend, limit, or discontinue its use. We intend to publicly announce alternate procedures that we
approve. (c) Although we will make every effort to approve only alternate procedures that completely meet our requirements, we may revoke our approval of an alternate procedure if new information shows that it is significantly not equivalent to th e specified procedure. If we do this, we will grant time to switch to testing using an allowed procedure, considering the following factors: (1) The cost, difficulty, and availability to switch to a procedure that we allow. (2) The degree to which the alternate procedure affects your ability to show that your engines comply with all applicab le emission standards. (3) Any relevant factors considered in our initial approval. (d) If we do not approve your proposed alternate procedure based on the information in your initial request, we may ask you to send additional information to fully evaluate your request

. While we consider the information specified in this paragraph (d) and the statistical criteria of paragraph (e) of this section to be sufficient to demonstrate equivalence, it may not be necessary to include all the information or meet the specified statistical criteria. For example, systems that do not meet the statistical criteria in paragraph (e) of this section because they have a small bias toward high emission results could be approved since they would not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance. (1) Theoretical basis . Give a brief technical description explaining why you believe the proposed alternate procedure should result in em ission measurements equivalent to those using the specified procedure. You may include equations, figures, and references. You should consider the full range of parameters that may affect equivalence. For example, for a request to use a different NO x measurement procedure, you should theoretically relate the alternate detection principle to the specified detection principle over the expected concentration ranges for NO, NO 2 , and interference gases. For a request to use a different PM measurement procedure, you should explain the principles by which the alternate procedure quantifies particulate mass similarly to the specified procedures. (2) Technical description . Describe briefly any hardware or software needed to perform the alternate procedure. You may include dimens ioned drawings, flowcharts, schematics, and component specifications. Explain any necessary calculations or other data manipulation. (3) Procedure execution . Describe briefly how to perform the alternate procedure and recommend a level of training an operator should have to achieve acceptable results. Summarize the installation, calibration, operation, and maintenance procedures in a step-by-step format. Describe how any calibration is performed using NIST-traceable standards or other similar standards we approve. Calibration must be sp ecified by using known quantities and must not be specified as a comparison with other allowed procedures. (4) Data-collection techniques . Compare measured emission results using the proposed alternate procedure and the specified procedure, as follows: (i) Both procedures must be calibrated independently to NIST-traceable standards or to other similar standards we approve. (ii) Include measured emission results from all applicable duty cycles. Measured emission results should show that the test engine meet s all applicable emission standards according to specified procedures. (iii) Use statistical methods to evaluate the emis sion measurements, such as those described in paragraph (e) of this section. Deleted: the following

Deleted: :(e) Absent any other directions from us, use a t -test and an F -test calculated according to §1065.602 to evaluate whether your proposed alternate procedure is equivalent to the specified procedure. We may give you specific directions regardin g methods for statistical analysis, or we may approve other methods that you propose. Such alternate methods may be more or less stringent than those specified in this paragraph (e). In determining the appropriate statistical criteria, we will consider the repeatability of meas urements made with the reference procedure. For example, less stringent statistical criteria may be appropriate for measuring emission levels so low that they adversely affect the repeatability of reference measurements. We recommend that you consult a statistician if you are unfamilia r with these statistical tests. Perform the tests as follows: (1) Repeat measurements for all applicable duty cycles at least seven times for each procedure. You may use laboratory duty cycles to evaluate field-testing procedures. Be sure to include all available results to evaluate the precision and accuracy of the proposed alternate procedure, as described in §1065.2. (2) Demonstrate the accuracy of the proposed alternate procedure by showing that it passes a two-sided t -test. Use an unpaired t -test, unless you show that a paired t -test is appropriate under both of the following provisions: (i) For paired data, the population of the paired differences from which you sampled paired differences must be independent. That is, th e probability of any given value of one paired difference is unchanged by knowledge of the value of another paired difference. For example, your paired data would violate this requirement if your series of paired differences showed a distinct increase or decrease that was dependent on the time at which they were sampled. (ii) For paired data, the population of paired differences from which you sampled the paired differences must have a normal (i.e., Gaussian ) distribution. If the population of paired difference is not normally distributed, consult a st atistician for a more appropriate statistical test, which may include transforming the data with a mathematical function or using some kind of non-parametric test. (3) Show that t is less than the critical t value, t crit , tabulated in §1065.602, for the following confidence intervals: (i) 90 % for a proposed alternate procedure for laboratory testing. (ii) 95 % for a proposed alternate procedure for field testing. (4) Demonstrate the precision of the proposed alternate procedure by showing that it passes an F

test. Use a set of at least seven samples from the reference procedure and a set of at least seven samples from the alternate procedure to perform an F-test. The sets must meet the following requirements: (i) Within each set, the values must be independent. That is, the probability of any given value in a set must be unchanged by knowledge of another value in that set. For example, your data would violate this requirement if a set showed a distinct increase or decrease that was dependent upon the time at which they were sampled. (ii) For each set, the population of values from which you sampled must have a normal (i.e., Gaussian) distribution. If the population of va lues is not normally distributed, consult a statistician for a more appropriate statistical test , which may include transforming the data with a mathematical function or using some kind of non-parametric test. (iii) The two sets must be independent of each other. That is, the probability of any given value in one set must be unchanged by knowledge of another value in the other set. For example, your data would violate this requirement if one value in a set showed a distinct increase or decrease Deleted: We may give you specific directions regarding methods for statistical analysis, or we may approve other methods that you propose.that was dependent upon a value in the other set. Note that a trend of emission changes from an engine would not violate this requirement. (iv) If you collect paired data for the paired t -test in paragraph (e)(2) in this section, use caution when selecting sets from paired data for the F -test. If you do this, select sets that do not mask the precision of the measurement procedure. We recommend selecting such sets only from data collected using the same engine, measurement instruments, and test cycle. (5) Show that F is less than the critical F value, F crit , tabulated in §1065.602. If you have several F

-test results from several sets of data, show that the mean F -test value is less than the mean critical F value for all the sets. Evaluate F crit , based on the following confidence intervals: (i) 90 % for a proposed alternate procedure for laboratory testing. (ii) 95 % for a proposed alternate procedure for field testing.

§1065.15 Overview of procedures for laboratory and field testing. This section outlines the procedures to test e ngines that are subject to emission standards. (a) In the standard-setting part , we set brake-specific emission standards in g/(kW·hr) (or g/(hp·hr)), for the following constituents: (1) Total oxides of nitrogen, NO x . (2) Hydrocarbons (HC), which may be expressed in the following ways: (i) Total hydrocarbons, THC. (ii) Nonmethane hydrocarbons, NMHC, which results from subtracting methane (CH 4 ) from THC. (iii) Total hydrocarbon-equivalent, THCE, which results from adjusting THC mathematically to be equivalent on a carbon-mass basis. (iv) Nonmethane hydrocarbon-equivalent, NMHCE, which results from adjusting NMHC mathematically to be equivalent on a carbon-mass basis. (3) Particulate mass, PM. (4) Carbon monoxide, CO. (5) Carbon dioxide, CO 2
. (6) Methane, CH 4
. (7) Nitrous oxide, N 2 O. (b) Note that some engines are not subject to st andards for all the emission constituents identified in paragraph (a) of this section. Note also that the standard-setting part may include standards for pollutants not listed in paragraph (a) of this section. (c) We generally set brake-specific emission standa rds over test intervals and/or duty cycles, as follows: (1) Engine operation. Testing may involve measuring emissions and work in a laboratory-type environment or in the field, as described in paragraph (f) of this section. For most laboratory testing, the engine is operated over one or more du ty cycles specified in the standard-setting part. However, laboratory testing may also include non- duty cycle testing (such as simulation of field testing in a laboratory). For fi eld testing, the engine is operated under normal in-use operation. The standard-setting part specifies how test intervals are defined for field testing. Refer to the definitions of “duty cycle” and “test interval” in §1065.1001. Note that a single duty cycle may have multiple test intervals and require weightin g of results from multiple test intervals to calculate a composite brake-specific emissions value to compare to the standard. (2) Constituent determination. Determine the tota l mass of each constituent over a test interval by selecting from the following methods:(i) Continuous sampling. In continuous sampling, measure the constituent’s concentration continuously from raw or dilute exhaust. Multiply this concentration by the continuous (raw or dilute) flow rate at the emission sampling locati on to determine the constituent’s flow rate. Sum the constituent’s flow rate continuously over the test interval. This sum is the total mass of the emitted constituent. (ii) Batch sampling. In batch sampling, continuous ly extract and store a sample of raw or dilute exhaust for later measurement. Extract a sample proportional to the raw or dilute exhaust flow rate. You may extract and store a proportional sa mple of exhaust in an appropriate container, such as a bag, and then measure HC, CO, and NO x concentrations in the container after the test interval. You may deposit PM from proportionally extracted exhaust onto an appropriate substrate, such as a filter. In this case, divide the PM by the amount of filtered exhaust to calculate the PM concentration. Multiply batc h sampled concentrations by the total (raw or dilute) flow from which it was extracted during the te st interval. This product is the total mass of the emitted constituent. (iii) Combined sampling. You may use continu ous and batch sampling simultaneously during a test interval, as follows: (A) You may use continuous sampling for some constituents and batch sampling for others. (B) You may use continuous and batch sampling for a single constituent, with one being a redundant measurement. See §1065.201 for more information on redundant measurements. (3) Work determination. Determine work over a test interval by one of the following methods: (i) Speed and torque. Synchronously multiply speed and brake torque to calculate instantaneous values for engine brake power. Sum engine brake power over a test interval to determine total work. (ii) Fuel consumed and brake-specific fuel cons umption. Directly measure fuel consumed or calculate it with chemical balances of the fuel, intake air, and exhaust. To calculate fuel consumed by a chemical balance, you must also measure either intake-air flow rate or exhaust flow rate. Divide the fuel consumed during a test interval by the brake-specific fuel consumption to determine work over the test in terval. For laboratory testing, calculate the brake-specific fuel consumption using fuel consumed and speed and torque over a test interval. For field testing,refer to the standard-setting part and §1065.915 for selecting an appropriate value for brakespecific fuel consumption. (d) Refer to §1065.650 for calculations to determine brake-specific emissions. (e) The following figure illustrate s the allowed measurement configur ations described in this part 1065:Figure 1 of §1065.15—Default test procedures and other specified procedures.

Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Transient Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous
Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Alternate procedure approval required for PM Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Transient Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required for PM Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Transient Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous
Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Alternate procedure approval required for PM Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Transient Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required for PM

Power

Continuous

Raw Gaseous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake-specific Emissions for Steady-state Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Power

Continuous

Raw Gaseous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake-specific Emissions for Steady-state Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Default procedures Other specified procedures Power

Continuous

Raw Gaseous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake-specific Emissions for Steady-state Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Default procedures Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Power

Continuous

Raw Gaseous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake-specific Emissions for Steady-state Duty Cycle Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Default procedures Other specified procedures

Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Field Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures
Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Field Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures Other specified procedures Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Field Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures
Other specified procedures Alternate procedure approval required Power

Continuous Fuel & BSFC Torque & Speed Total Emissions

Batch

Constant Dilution Ratio Partial Flow Dilute

Varying Dilution Ratio Full Flow Brake- specific Emissions for Field Testing

Emissions Rate Total Work

Raw Gaseous

Default procedures Other specified procedures(f) This part 1065 describes how to test engines in a laboratory-type environment or in the field. (1) This affects test intervals and duty cycles as follows: (i) For laboratory testing, you generally determine brake-specific emissions for duty-cycle testing by using an engine dynamometer in a laboratory or other environment. This typically consists of one or more test intervals, each defined by a duty cycle, which is a sequence of modes, speeds, and/or torques (or powers) that an engine must follow. If the standard-setting part allows it, you may also simulate field testin g with an engine dynamometer in a laboratory or other environment. (ii) Field testing consists of normal in-use engi ne operation while an engine is installed in avehicle, equipment, or vessel rather than following a specific engine duty cycle. The standardsetting part specifies how test intervals are defined for field testing.(2) The type of testing may also affect what test equipment may be used. You may use “labgrade” test equipment for any testing. The term “lab-grade” refers to equipment that fully conforms to the applicable specifications of this part. For some testing you may alternatively used “field-grade” equipment. The term “field-gra de” refers to equipment that fully conforms to the applicable specifications of subpart J of this part, but does not fully conform to other specifications of this part. You may use “field -grade” equipment for field testing. We also specify in this part and in the standard-setting parts certain cases in which you may use “fieldgrade” equipment for testing in a laboratory-type environment. (Note: Although “field-grade” equipment is generally more portable than “lab-grade” test equipment, portability is not relevant to whether equipment is considered to be “field-grade” or “lab-grade”.)

§1065.20 Units of measure and overview of calculations. (a) System of units . The procedures in this part genera lly follow the International System of Units (SI), as detailed in NIST Special Publication 811, which we incorporate by reference in §1065.1010. The following exceptions apply: (1) We designate angular speed, f n , of an engine’s crankshaft in revolutions per minute (r/min), rather than the SI unit of radians per second (rad/s). This is based on the commonplace use of r/min in many engine dynamometer laboratories. (2) We designate brake-specific emissions in grams per kilowatt-hour (g/(kW·hr)), rather than the SI unit of grams per megajoule (g/MJ). In addition, we use the symbol hr to identify hour, rather than the SI convention of using h . This is based on the fact that engines are generally subject to emission standards expressed in g/kW·hr. If we specify engine standards in grams per horsepower

 hour (g/(hp·hr)) in the standa rd-setting part, convert units as specified in paragraph (d) of this section. (3) We designate temperatures in units of degrees Celsius (°C) unless a calculation requires an absolute temperature. In that case, we designa te temperatures in units of Kelvin (K). For conversion purposes throughout this part, 0 °C equals 273.15 K. Always use absolute temperature values for multiplying or dividing by temperature. (b) Concentrations . This part does not rely on amounts expressed in parts per million. Rather, we express such amounts in the following SI units: (1) For ideal gases,  mol/mol, formerly ppm (volume). (2) For all substances, cm 3 /m 3 , formerly ppm (volume). (3) For all substances, mg/kg, formerly ppm (mass). Deleted: or similar units(c) Absolute pressure . Measure absolute pressure direct ly or calculate it as the sum of atmospheric pressure plus a differential pressure that is referenced to atmospheric pressure. Always use absolute pressure values for multiplying or dividing by pressure. (d) Units conversion . Use the following conventions to convert units: (1) Testing. You may record values and perform calculations with other units. For testing with equipment that involves other units, use the conversion factors from NIST Special Publication 811, as described in paragraph (a) of this section. (2) Humidity. In this part, we identify humidi ty levels by specifying dewpoint, which is the temperature at which pure water begins to condense out of air. Use humidity conversions as described in §1065.645. (3) Emission standards. If your standard is in g/(hp·hr) units, convert kW to hp before any rounding by using the conversion factor of 1 hp (550 ft·lbf/s) = 0.7456999 kW. Round the final value for comparison to the applicable standard. (e) Rounding . You are required to round certain final values, such as emission values. You may round intermediate values when transferring data as long as you maintain at least six significant digits (which requires more than six decimal places for values less than 0.1), or all significant digits if fewer than six digits are available. Unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise, do not round other intermediate values. Round values to the number of significant digits necessary to match the number of decimal places of the applicable standard or specification as described in this paragraph (e). Note that speci fications expressed as percentages have infinite precision (as described in paragraph (e)(7) of this section). Use the following rounding convention, which is consistent with ASTM E29 and NIST SP 811: (1) If the first (left-most) digit to be removed is less than five, remove all the appropriate digits without changing the digits that remain. For example, 3.141593 rounded to the second decimal place is 3.14. (2) If the first digit to be removed is greater than five, remove all th e appropriate digits and increase the lowest-value remaining digit by one. For example, 3.141593 rounded to the fourth decimal place is 3.1416. (3) If the first digit to be removed is five with at least one additional non-zero digit following the five, remove all the appropriate digits and increase the lowest-value remaining digit by one. For example, 3.141593 rounded to the third decimal place is 3.142. (4) If the first digit to be removed is five with no additional non-zero digits following the five, remove all the appropriate digits, increase the lowest-value remaining digit by one if it is odd and leave it unchanged if it is even. For example, 1.75 and 1.750 rounded to the first decimal place are 1.8; while 1.85 and 1.850 rounded to the first decimal place are also 1.8. Note that this rounding procedure will always result in an even number for the lowest-value digit. (5) This paragraph (e)(5) applies if the regulation specifies rounding to an increment other than decimal places or powers of ten (to the nearest 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10, 100, etc.). To round numbers for these special cases, divide the quantity by the sp ecified rounding increment. Round the result to the nearest whole number as described in paragraphs (e)(1) through (4) of this section. Multiply the rounded number by the specified rounding increment. This value is the desired result. For example, to round 0.90 to the nearest 0.2, divide 0.90 by 0.2 to get a result of 4.5, which rounds to 4. Multiplying 4 by 0.2 gives 0.8, which is the result of rounding 0.90 to the nearest 0.2. (6) The following tables further illustrate the r ounding procedures specified in this paragraph (e):Quantity Rounding Increment 10 1 0.1 0.01 3.141593 0 3 3.1 3.14 123,456.789 123,460 123,457 123,456.8 123,456.79 5.500 10 6 5.5 5.50 4.500 0 4 4.5 4.50

Quantity Rounding Increment 25 3 0.5 0.02 229.267 225 228 229.5 229.26 62.500 50 63 62.5 62.50 87.500 100 87 87.5 87.50 7.500 0 6 7.5 7.50 (7) This paragraph (e)(7) applies where we specify a limit or tolerance as some percentage of another value (such as ±2 % of a maximum concentration). You may show compliance with such specifications either by applying the percentage to the total value to calculate an absolute limit, or by converting the absolute value to a per centage by dividing it by the total value. (i) Do not round either value (the absolute limit or the calculated percentage), except as specified in paragraph (e)(7)(ii) of this section. For example, assume we specify that an analyzer must have a repeatability of ±1 % of the maximum concentration or better, the maximum concentration is 1059 ppm, and you determine repeatability to be ±6.3 ppm. In this example, you could calculate an absolute limit of ±10.59 ppm (1059 ppm × 0.01) or calculate that the 6.3 ppm repeatability is equivalent to a repeatability of 0.5949008498584 %. (ii) Prior to July 1, 2013, you may treat tolerances (and equivalent specifications) specified in percentages as having fixed rather than infinite precision. For example, 2 % would be equivalent to 1.51 % to 2.50 % and 2.0 % would be equivalent to 1.951 % to 2.050 %. Note that this allowance applies whether or not th e percentage is explicitly specifi ed as a percentage of another value. (8) You may use measurement devices that incorporate internal rounding, consistent with the provisions of this paragraph (e)(8). You may use devices that use any rounding convention if they report six or more significant digits. You may use devices that report fewer than six digits, consistent with good engineering judgment and the accuracy, repeatability, and noise specifications of this part. Note that this prov ision does not necessarily require you to perform engineering analysis or keep records. (f) Interpretation of ranges . Interpret a range as a tolerance unless we explicitly identify it as an accuracy, repeatability, linearity, or noise specifi cation. See §1065.1001 for the definition of tolerance. In this part, we specify two types of ranges: (1) Whenever we specify a range by a single value and corresponding limit values above and below that value, target any associated control point to that single value. Examples of this type of range include “±10 % of maximum pressure”, or “(30 ±10) kPa”. (2) Whenever we specify a range by the interval between two values, you may target any associated control point to any value within that range. An example of this type of range is “(40 to 50) kPa”.(g) Scaling of specifications with respect to an applicable standard . Because this part 1065 is applicable to a wide range of engines and emissi on standards, some of the specifications in this part are scaled with respect to an engine’s appl icable standard or maximum power. This ensures that the specification will be adequate to determine compliance, but not overly burdensome by requiring unnecessarily high-precision equipment. Many of these specifications are given with respect to a “flow-weighted mean” that is expect ed at the standard or during testing. Flowweighted mean is the mean of a quantity after it is weighted proportional to a corresponding flow rate. For example, if a gas concentration is measured continuously from the raw exhaust of an engine, its flow-weighted mean concentration is the sum of the products of each recorded concentration times its respective exhaust flow rate, divided by the sum of the recorded flowrates. As another example, the bag concentration from a CVS system is the same as the flowweighted mean concentration, because the CVS system itself flow-weights the bagconcentration. Refer to §1065.602 for information needed to estimate and calculate flowweighted means. Wherever a specification is scaled to a value based upon an applicable standard, interpret the standard to be the family emission limit if the engine is certified under an emission credit program in the standard-setting part.

§1065.25 Recordkeeping. (a) The procedures in this part include various requirements to record data or other information. Refer to the standard-setting part and §1065.695 regarding specific recordkeeping requirements. (b) You must promptly send us organized, written records in English if we ask for them. We may review them at any time. (c) We may waive specific reporting or recordkeeping requirements we determine to be unnecessary for the purposes of this part and the standard-setting part. Note that while we will generally keep the records required by this part, we are not obligated to keep records we determine to be unnecessary for us to keep. For example, while we require you to keep records for invalid tests so that we may verify that your invalidation was appropriate, it is not necessary for us to keep records for our own invalid tests. Formatted: Underline

Deleted: If the standard-setting part does not specify recordkeeping requirements, store these records in any format and on any mediaand keep them readily available for one year after you send an associated application for certification, or one year after you generate the data if they do not support an application for certification.Subpart B—Equipment Specifications

§1065.101 Overview. (a) This subpart specifies equipment, other than measurement instruments, related to emission testing. The provisions of this subpart apply for all engine dynamometer testing where engine speeds and loads are controlled to follow a prescribed duty cycle. See subpart J of this part to determine which of the provisions of this subpart apply for field testing. This equipment includes three broad categories—dynamometers, engi ne fluid systems (such as fuel and intakeair systems), and emission-sampling hardware. (b) Other related subparts in this part identify measurement instruments (subpart C), describe how to evaluate the performance of these instrume nts (subpart D), and specify engine fluids and analytical gases (subpart H). (c) Subpart J of this part describes additional equipment that is specific to field testing. (d) Figures 1 and 2 of this section illustrate some of the possible configurations of laboratory equipment. These figures are schematics only; we do not require exact conformance to them. Figure 1 of this section illustrates the equipm ent specified in this subpart and gives some references to sections in this subpart. Figure 2 of this section illustrates some of the possible configurations of a full-flow dilution, constant -volume sampling (CVS) system. Not all possible CVS configurations are shown. (e) Dynamometer testing involves engine operation over speeds and loads that are controlled to a prescribed duty cycle. Field testing involves m easuring emissions over normal in-use operation of a vehicle or piece of equipment. Field tes ting does not involve operating an engine over a prescribed duty cycle.

Figure 1 of §1065.101—Engine dynamometer laboratory equipment.

§1065.110 (b) Operator Demand

§1065.120 Fuel

§1065.122 Lubrication, heat rejection,

and engine accessories

§1065.125 Engine Intake Air §1065.130 Raw Engine Exhaust

§1065.145, §1065.150, §1065.170 Raw Exhaust Sampling Continuous and Batch Engine §1065.110 (a) Work Inputs and Outputs

(e.g. Dynamometer)

§1065.140, §1065.145, §1065.150, §1065.170, §1065.195

Partial Flow Dilution Sampling Continuous and Batch §1065.140 Dilution §1065.140 §1065.145 §1065.170 §1065.195 CVS PM Sampling

§1065.145 §1065.170 CVS Batch Sampling §1065.190 PM filter

stabilization and weighing

§1065.145 §1065.150 CVS Continuous Sampling §1065.110 (b) Operator Demand

§1065.120 Fuel

§1065.122 Lubrication, heat rejection,

and engine accessories

§1065.125 Engine Intake Air §1065.130 Raw Engine Exhaust

§1065.145, §1065.150, §1065.170 Raw Exhaust Sampling Continuous and Batch Engine §1065.110 (a) Work Inputs and Outputs

(e.g. Dynamometer)

§1065.140, §1065.145, §1065.150, §1065.170, §1065.195

Partial Flow Dilution Sampling Continuous and Batch §1065.140 Dilution §1065.140 §1065.145 §1065.170 §1065.195 CVS PM Sampling

§1065.145 §1065.170 CVS Batch Sampling §1065.190 PM filter

stabilization and weighing

§1065.145 §1065.150 CVS Continuous SamplingFigure 2 of §1065.101—Examples of some full-flow dilution sampling configurations.

§1065.110 Work inputs and outputs, accessory work, and operator demand. (a) Work . Use good engineering judgment to simulate all engine work inputs and outputs as they typically would operate in use. Account for work inputs and outputs during an emission test by measuring them; or, if they are small, you may show by engineering analysis that disregarding them does not affect your ability to determine th e net work output by more than ±0.5 % of the net expected work output over the test interval . Use equipment to simulate the specific types of work, as follows: (1) Shaft work . Use an engine dynamometer that is able to meet the cycle-validation criteria in §1065.514 over each applicable duty cycle. (i) You may use eddy-current and water-brake dynamometers for any testing that does not involve engine motoring, which is identified by negative torque commands in a reference duty cycle. See the standard setting part for reference duty cycles that are applicable to your engine. (ii) You may use alternating-current or direct-current motoring dynamometers for any type of testing. (iii) You may use one or more dynamometers. (iv) You may use any device that is already installe d on a vehicle, equipment, or vessel to absorb work from the engine’s output shaft(s). Exampl es of these types of devices include a vessel’s propeller and a locomotive’s generator. (2) Electrical work . Use one or more of the following to simulate electrical work: (i) Use storage batteries or capacitors that are of the type and capacity installed in use. (ii) Use motors, generators, and alternators that are of the type and capacity installed in use.(iii) Use a resistor load bank to simulate electrical loads. (3) Pump, compressor, and turbine work . Use pumps, compressors, and turbines that are of the type and capacity installed in use. Use working fluids that are of the same type and thermodynamic state as normal in-use operation. (b) Laboratory work inputs . You may supply any laboratory inputs of work to the engine. For example, you may supply electrical work to the en gine to operate a fuel system, and as another example you may supply compressor work to the engine to actuate pneumatic valves. We may ask you to show by engineering analysis your accounting of laboratory work inputs to meet the criterion in paragraph (a) of this section. (c) Engine accessories . You must either install or account for the work of engine accessories required to fuel, lubricate, or heat the engine , circulate coolant to the engine, or to operate aftertreatment devices. Operate the engine wi th these accessories installed or accounted for during all testing operations, including mapping. If these accessories are not powered by the engine during a test, account for the work required to perform these functions from the total work used in brake-specific emission calculatio ns. For air-cooled engines only, subtract externally powered fan work from total work. We may ask you to show by engineering analysis your accounting of engine accessories to meet the criterion in paragraph (a) of this section. (d) Engine starter . You may install a production-type starter. (e) Operator demand for shaft work . Operator demand is defined in §1065.1001. Command the operator demand and the dynamomete r(s) to follow a prescribed du ty cycle with set points for engine speed and torque as sp ecified in §1065.512. Refer to the standard-setting part to determine the specifications for your duty cycle( s). Use a mechanical or electronic input to control operator demand such that the engine is able to meet the validation criteria in §1065.514 over each applicable duty cycle. Record feedback values for engine speed and torque as specified in §1065.512. Using good engineering judgment, you may improve control of operator demand by altering on-engine speed and torque controls. However, if these changes result in unrepresentative testing, you must notify us and recommend other test procedures under §1065.10(c)(1). (f) Other engine inputs . If your electronic control module requires specific input signals that are not available during dynamometer testing, such as vehicle speed or transmission signals, you may simulate the signals using good engineering judgment. Keep records that describe what signals you simulate and explain why these signals are necessary for representative testing.

§1065.120 Fuel properties and fuel temperature and pressure. (a) Use fuels as specified in the standard-setting part , or as specified in subpart H of this part if fuels are not specified in the standard-setting part. (b) If the engine manufacturer specifies fuel te mperature and pressure tolerances and the location where they are to be measured, then measure the fuel temperature and pressure at the specified location to show that you are within these tolerances throughout testing. (c) If the engine manufacturer does not specify fuel temperature and pressure tolerances, use good engineering judgment to set and control fuel temperature and pressure in a way that represents typical in-use fuel temperatures and pressures.

§1065.122 Engine cooling and lubrication.(a) Engine cooling . Cool the engine during testing so its intake-air, oil, coolant, block, and head temperatures are within their expected ranges for normal operation. You may use auxiliary coolers and fans. (1) For air-cooled engines only, if you use auxiliary fans you must account for work input to the fan(s) according to §1065.110. (2) See §1065.125 for more informatio n related to intake-air cooling. (3) See §1065.127 for more information related to exhaust gas recirculation cooling. (4) Measure temperatures at the manufacturer-specified locations. If the manufacturer does not specify temperature measurement locations, then use good engineering judgment to monitor intake-air, oil, coolant, block, and head temperat ures to ensure that they are in their expected ranges for normal operation. (b) Forced cooldown . You may install a forced cooldown system for an engine and an exhaust aftertreatment device according to §1065.530(a)(1). (c) Lubricating oil . Use lubricating oils specified in § 1065.740. For two-stroke engines that involve a specified mixture of fuel and lubrica ting oil, mix the lubricating oil with the fuel according to the manufacturer’s specifications. (d) Coolant . For liquid-cooled engines, use coolant as specified in §1065.745.

§1065.125 Engine intake air. (a) Use the intake-air system installed on the engine or one that represents a typical in-use configuration. This includes the charge-air cooling and exhaust gas recirculation systems. (b) Measure temperature, humidity, and atmospheric pressure near the entrance of the furthest upstream engine or in-use intake system component. This would generally be near the engine’s air filter, or near the inlet to the in-use air inta ke system for engines that have no air filter. For engines with multiple intakes, make measur ements near the entr ance of each intake. (1) Pressure . You may use a single shared atmospheric pressure meter as long as your laboratory equipment for handling intake air maintains ambient pressure at a ll intakes within ±1 kPa of the shared atmospheric pressure. For engines with multiple intakes with separate atmospheric pressure measurements at each intake, use an average value for verifying compliance to §1065.520(b)(2). (2) Humidity

. You may use a single shared humidity measurement for intake air as long as your equipment for handling intake air maintains dewpoint at a ll intakes to within ±0.5  C of the shared humidity measurement. For engines w ith multiple intakes with separate humidity measurements at each intake, use a flow-weighted average humidity for NO x corrections. If individual flows of each intake are not measured, use good engineering judgment to estimate a flow-weighted average humidity. (3) Temperature . Good engineering judgment may require that you shield the temperature sensors or move them upstream of an elbow in the laboratory intake system to prevent measurement errors due to radiant heating from hot engine surfaces or in-use intake system components. You must limit the distance between the temperature sensor and the entrance to the furthest upstream engine or in-use intake system component to no more than 12 times the outer hydraulic diameter of the entrance to the furthest upstream engine or in-use intake system component. However, you may exceed this limit if you use good engineering judgment to show that the temperature at the furthest upstream engine or in-use intake system component meets the specification in paragraph (c) of this section. For engines with multiple intakes, use a flowweighted average value to verify compliance with the specification in paragraph (c) of thissection. If individual flows of each intake are not measured, you may use good engineering judgment to estimate a flow-weighted average temperature. You may also verify that each individual intake complies with the specifi cation in paragraph (c) of this section. (c) Maintain the temperature of intake ai r to (25 ± 5) °C, except as follows: (1) Follow the standard-setting part if it specifies different temperatures. (2) For engines above 560 kW, you may use 35 °C as the upper bound of the tolerance. However, your system must be capable of controlling the temperature to the 25 °C setpoint for any steady-state operation at > 30% of maximum engine power. (3) You may ask us to allow you to apply a different setpoint for intake air temperature if it is necessary to remain consistent with the provisions of §1065.10(c)(1) for testing during which ambient temperature will be outside this range. (d) Use an intake-air restriction that represents production engines. Make sure the intake-air restriction is between the manufacturer’s sp ecified maximum for a clean filter and the manufacturer’s specified maximum allowed. Meas ure the static differential pressure of the restriction at the location and at the speed and to rque set points specified by the manufacturer. If the manufacturer does not specify a location, measure this pressure upstream of any turbocharger or exhaust gas recirculation system connection to the intake air system. If the manufacturer does not specify speed and torque points, measure this pressure while the engine outputs maximum power. As the manufacturer, you are liable for emission compliance for all values up to the maximum restriction you specify for a particular engine. (e) This paragraph (e) includes provisions for simulating charge-air cooling in the laboratory. This approach is described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. Limits on using this approach are described in paragraphs (e)(2) and (3) of this section. (1) Use a charge-air cooling system with a total intake-air capacity that represents production engines’ in-use installation. Design any laboratory charge-air cooling system to minimize accumulation of condensate. Drain any accumulated condensate. Before starting a duty cycle (or preconditioning for a duty cycle), completely close all drains that would normally be closed during in-use operation. Keep those drains clos ed during the emission test. Maintain coolant conditions as follows: (i) Maintain a coolant temperature of at least 20  C at the inlet to the charge-air cooler throughout testing. We recommend maintaining a coolant temperature of 25  5 oC at the inlet of the charge-air cooler. (ii) At the engine conditions specified by the ma nufacturer, set the coolant flow rate to achieve an air temperature within ±5  C of the value specified by the manufacturer after the charge-air cooler’s outlet. Measure the air-outlet temperatur e at the location specified by the manufacturer. Use this coolant flow rate set point throughout testing. If the engine manufacturer does not specify engine conditions or the corresponding charge -air cooler air outlet temperature, set the coolant flow rate at maximum engine power to ach ieve a charge-air cooler air outlet temperature that represents in-use operation. (iii) If the engine manufacturer specifies pre ssure-drop limits across the charge-air cooling system, ensure that the pressure drop across the ch arge-air cooling system at engine conditions specified by the manufacturer is within the ma nufacturer’s specified limit(s). Measure the pressure drop at the manufacturer’s specified locations. (2) Using a constant flow rate as described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section may result in unrepresentative overcooling of the intake air. The provisions of this paragraph (e)(2) apply instead of the provisions of §1065.10(c)(1) for this simulation. Our allowance to cool intake airas specified in this paragraph (e) does not affect your liability for field testing or for laboratory testing that is done in a way that better represen ts in-use operation. Where we determine that this allowance adversely affects your ability to demo nstrate that your engi nes would comply with emission standards under in-use conditions, we may require you to use more sophisticated setpoints and controls of charge-air pressure drop, coolant temperature, and flow rate to achieve more representative results. (3) This approach does not apply for field testing. You may not correct measured emission levels from field testing to account for any diff erences caused by the simulated cooling in the laboratory.

§1065.127 Exhaust gas recirculation. Use the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system inst alled with the engine or one that represents a typical in-use configuration. This includes any applicable EGR cooling devices.

§1065.130 Engine exhaust. (a) General . Use the exhaust system installed with the engine or one that represents a typical inuse configuration. This includes any applicable aftertreatment devices. We refer to exhaust piping as an exhaust stack; this is equivalent to a tailpipe for vehicle configurations. (b) Aftertreatment configuration . If you do not use the exhaust system installed with the engine, configure any aftertreatment devices as follows: (1) Position any aftertreatment device so its dist ance from the nearest exhaust manifold flange or turbocharger outlet is within the range specified by the engine manufacturer in the application for certification. If this distance is not specified, position aftertreatment devices to represent typical in-use vehicle configurations. (2) You may use exhaust tubing that is not from the in-use exhaust system upstream of any aftertreatment device that is of diameter(s) typical of in-use configurations. If you use exhaust tubing that is not from the in-use exhaust system upstream of any aftertreatment device, position each aftertreatment device according to paragraph (b)(1) of this section. (c) Sampling system connections . Connect an engine’s exhaust system to any raw sampling location or dilution stage, as follows: (1) Minimize laboratory exhaust tubing lengths and use a total length of laboratory tubing of no more than 10 m or 50 outside diameters, whicheve r is greater. The start of laboratory exhaust tubing should be specified as the exit of the exhaust manifold, turboc harger outlet, last aftertreatment device, or the in-use exhaust system, whichever is furthest downstream. The end of laboratory exhaust tubing should be specified as the sample point, or first point of dilution. If laboratory exhaust tubing consists of several different outside tubing diameters, count the number of diameters of length of each individu al diameter, then sum all the diameters to determine the total length of exhaust tubing in diam eters. Use the mean outside diameter of any converging or diverging sections of tubing. Us e outside hydraulic diameters of any noncircular sections. For multiple stack configurations wher e all the exhaust stacks are combined, the start of the laboratory exhaust tubing may be taken at the last joint of where all the stacks are combined. (2) You may install short sections of flexible laboratory exhaust tubing at any location in the engine or laboratory exhaust systems. You may use up to a combined total of 2 m or 10 outside diameters of flexible exhaust tubing. (3) Insulate any laboratory exhaust tubing downstream of the first 25 outside diameters of length.(4) Use laboratory exhaust tubing materials that are smooth-walled, electrically conductive, and not reactive with exhaust constituents. Stainless steel is an acceptable material. (5) We recommend that you use laboratory exhaust tu bing that has either a wall thickness of less than 2 mm or is air gap-insulated to minimize temperature differences between the wall and the exhaust. (6) We recommend that you connec t multiple exhaust stacks from a single engine into one stack upstream of any emission sampling. To ensure mixing of the multiple exhaust streams before emission sampling, we recommend a minimum Reynolds number, Re #, of 4000 for the combined exhaust stream, where Re # is based on the inside diameter of the combined flow at the first sampling point. Y ou may configure the exhaust system with turbulence generators, such as orifice plates or fins, to achieve good mixing ; this may be required for Re# less than 4000

. Re # is defined in §1065.640. (d) In-line instruments . You may insert instruments into th e laboratory exhaust tubing, such as an in-line smoke meter. If you do this, you may leave a length of up to 5 outside diameters of laboratory exhaust tubing uninsulated on each side of each instrument, but you must leave a length of no more than 25 outside diameters of laboratory exhaust tubing uninsulated in total, including any lengths adjacent to in-line instruments. (e) Leaks . Minimize leaks sufficiently to ensure your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards. We recommend performing a chemical balance of fuel, intake air, and exhaust according to §1065.655 to verify exhaust system integrity. (f) Grounding . Electrically ground the entire exhaust system. (g) Forced cooldown . You may install a forced cooldown system for an exhaust aftertreatment device according to §1065.530(a)(1)(i). (h) Exhaust restriction . As the manufacturer, you are liable for emission compliance for all values up to the maximum restriction(s) you spec ify for a particular engine. Measure and set exhaust restriction(s) at the location(s) and at th e engine speed and torque values specified by the manufacturer. Also, for variable-restriction af tertreatment devices, measure and set exhaust restriction(s) at the aftertreatment condition (degreening/aging and regeneration/loading level) specified by the manufacturer. If the manufacturer does not specify a location, measure this pressure downstream of any turbocharger. If the manufacturer does not specify speed and torque points, measure pressure while the engine produ ces maximum power. Use an exhaust-restriction setpoint that represents a typical in-use value, if available. If a typical in-use value for exhaust restriction is not available, set the exhaust rest riction at (80 to 100) % of the maximum exhaust restriction specified by the manufacturer, or if the maximum is 5 kPa or less, the set point must be no less than 1.0 kPa from the maximum. For example, if the maximum back pressure is 4.5 kPa, do not use an exhaust restriction set point that is less than 3.5 kPa. (i) Open crankcase emissions . If the standard-setting part requires measuring open crankcase emissions, you may either measure open crankcase emissions separately using a method that we approve in advance, or route open crankcase emissions directly into the exhaust system for emission measurement. If the engine is not already configured to route open crankcase emissions for emission measurement, route open crankcase emissions as follows: (1) Use laboratory tubing materials that are smooth-walled, electrically conductive, and not reactive with crankcase emissions. Stainless steel is an acceptable material. Minimize tube lengths. We also recommend using heated or thin-walled or air gap-insulated tubing to minimize temperature differences between the wall and the crankcase emission constituents. Deleted: y
Deleted: We recommend a minimum Reynolds number, Re # , of 4000 for the combined exhaust stream, where Re # is based on the inside diameter of the single stack.(2) Minimize the number of bends in the laboratory crankcase tubing and maximize the radius of any unavoidable bend. (3) Use laboratory crankcase exhaust tubing that meets the engine manufacturer’s specifications for crankcase back pressure. (4) Connect the crankcase exhaust tubing into the raw exhaust downstream of any aftertreatment system, downstream of any installed exhaust restriction, and sufficiently upstream of any sample probes to ensure complete mixing with the engine’s exhaust before sampling. Extend the crankcase exhaust tube into the free stream of exhaust to avoid boundary-layer effects and to promote mixing. You may orient the crankcase exha ust tube’s outlet in any direction relative to the raw exhaust flow.

§1065.140 Dilution for gaseous and PM constituents. (a) General . You may dilute exhaust with ambient air, purified air, or nitrogen. References in this part to “dilution air” may include any of these. For gaseous emission measurement

, the dilution air must be at least 15 °C. Note that the composition of the dilution air affects some gaseous emission measurement instruments’ response to emissions. We recommend diluting exhaust at a location as close as possible to the location where ambient air dilution would occur in use. Dilution may occur in a single stage or in mu ltiple stages. For dilution in multiple stages, the first stage is considered primary dilution and later stages are considered secondary dilution. (b) Dilution-air conditions and background concentrations . Before dilution air is mixed with exhaust, you may precondition it by increasing or decreasing its temperature or humidity. You may also remove constituents to reduce thei r background concentrat ions. The following provisions apply to removing constituents or accounting for background concentrations: (1) You may measure constituen t concentrations in the dilution air and compensate for background effects on test results. See §1065.650 for calculations that compensate for background concentrations (40 CFR 1066.620 for vehicle testing)

. (2) M easure these background concentrations the same way you measure diluted exhaust constituents, or measure them in a way that does not affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards. For example, you may use the following simplifications for background sampling: (i) You may disregard any proportional sampling requirements. (ii) You may use unheated gaseous sampling systems. (iii) You may use unheated PM sampling systems. (iv) You may use continuous sampling if you use batch sampling for diluted emissions. (v) You may use batch sampling if you use continuous sampling for diluted emissions. (3) For removing background PM, we recommend that you filter all dilution air, including primary full-flow dilution air, with high-efficie ncy particulate air (HEPA) filters that have an initial minimum collection efficiency specifica tion of 99.97 % (see §1065 .1001 for procedures related to HEPA-filtration efficiencies). Ensure that HEPA f ilters are installed properly so that background PM does not leak past the HEPA filters. If you choose to corr ect for background PM without using HEPA filtration, demonstrat e that the background PM in the dilution air contributes less than 50 % to the net PM collected on the sample filter. You may correct net PM without restriction if you use HEPA filtration. (c) Full-flow dilution; constant-volume sampling (CVS) . You may dilute the full flow of raw exhaust in a dilution tunnel that maintains a no minally constant volume flow rate, molar flow rate or mass flow rate of diluted exhaust, as follows: Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: a diluent

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: Either m(1) Construction . Use a tunnel with inside surfaces of 300 series stainless steel. Electrically ground the entire dilution tunnel. We recommend a thin-walled and insulated dilution tunnel to minimize temperature differences between the wall and the exhaust gases. You may not use any flexible tubing in the dilution tunnel upstream of the PM sample probe. You may use nonconductive flexible tubing downstream of th e PM sample probe and upstream of the CVS flow meter; use good engineering judgment to select a tubing material that is not prone to leaks, and configure the tubing to ensure smooth flow at the CVS flow meter. (2) Pressure control . Maintain static pressure at the location where raw exhaust is introduced into the tunnel within ±1.2 kPa of atmospheric pressure. You may use a booster blower to control this pressure. If you test using more careful pressure control and you show by engineering analysis or by test data that yo u require this level of control to demonstrate compliance at the applicable standards, we will ma intain the same level of static pressure control when we test. (3) Mixing . Introduce raw exhaust into the tunnel by directing it downstream along the centerline of the tunnel. If you dilute directly from the exhaust stack, the end of the exhaust stack is considered to be the start of the dilution tunnel. You may introduce a fraction of dilution air radially from the tunnel’s inner surface to minimize exhaust interaction with the tunnel walls. You may configure the system with turbulence generato rs such as orifice plates or fins to achieve good mixing. We recommend a minimum Reynolds number, Re # , of 4000 for the diluted exhaust stream, where Re # is based on the inside diameter of the dilution tunnel. Re # is defined in §1065.640. (4) Flow measurement preconditioning . You may condition the diluted exhaust before measuring its flow rate, as long as this condit ioning takes place downstream of any heated HC or PM sample probes, as follows: (i) You may use flow straighteners, pulsation dampeners, or both of these. (ii) You may use a filter. (iii) You may use a heat exchanger to control the temperature upstream of any flow meter, but you must take steps to prevent aqueous condensation as described in paragraph (c)(6) of this section. (5) Flow measurement . Section 1065.240 describes measurement instruments for diluted exhaust flow. (6) Aqueous condensation . This paragraph (c)(6) describes how you must address aqueous condensation in the CVS. As described below, you may meet these requirements by preventing or limiting aqueous condensation in the CVS from the exhaust inlet to the last emission sample probe. See that paragraph for provisions related to the CVS between the last emission sample probe and the CVS flow meter. You may heat an d/or insulate the dilution tunnel walls, as well as the bulk stream tubing downstream of the tunnel to prevent or limit aqueous condensation. Where we allow aqueous condensation to occur, use good engineering judgment to ensure that the condensation does not affect your ability to demonstrate that your engines comply with the applicable standards (see §1065.10(a)). (i) Preventing aqueous condensation . To prevent condensation, you must keep the temperature of internal surfaces, excluding any sample probes, above the dew point of the dilute exhaust passing through the CVS tunnel. Use good engineering judgment to monitor temperatures in the CVS. For the purposes of this paragraph (c)(6), assume that aqueous condensation is pure water condensate only, even though the definition of “aqueous condensation” in §1065.1001 includes condensation of any constituents that contain water. No specific verification check is required Deleted: an engine

Deleted: that engine

Comment [CAL1]: Revised to superscript “#” in Re #

.under this paragraph (c)(6)(i), but we may ask you to show how you comply with this requirement. You may use engineering anal ysis, CVS tunnel design, alarm systems, measurements of wall temperatures, and calculation of water dew point to demonstrate compliance with this requirement. For optiona l CVS heat exchangers, you may use the lowest water temperature at the inlet(s) and outlet(s) to determine the minimum internal surface temperature. (ii) Limiting aqueous condensation . This paragraph (c)(6)(ii) specifies limits of allowable condensation and requires you to verify that the amount of condensation that occurs during each test interval does not exceed the specified limits. (A) Use chemical balance equations in §1065.655 to calculate the mole fraction of water in the dilute exhaust continuously during testing. Alternatively, you may continuously measure the mole fraction of water in the dilute exhaust prior to any condensation during testing. Use good engineering judgment to select, calibrate and veri fy water analyzers/detectors. The linearity verification requirements of §1065.307 do not appl y to water analyzers/detectors used to correct for the water content in exhaust samples. (B) Use good engineering judgment to select and monitor locations on the CVS tunnel walls prior to the last emission sample probe. If you are also verify ing limited condensation from the last emission sample probe to the CVS flow meter, use good engineering judgment to select and monitor locations on the CVS tunnel walls, optional CVS heat exchanger, and CVS flow meter. For optional CVS heat exchangers, you may use the lowest water temperature at the inlet(s) and outlet(s) to determine the minimum internal surface temperature. Identify the minimum surface temperature on a continuous basis. (C) Identify the maximum potential mole fraction of dilute exhaust lost on a continuous basis during the entire test interval. This value must be less than or equal to 0.02. Calculate on a continuous basis the mole fraction of water that would be in equilibrium with liquid water at the measured minimum surface temperature. Subtract this mole fraction from the mole fraction of water that would be in the exhaust without condensation (either measured or from the chemical balance), and set any negative values to zero. Th is difference is the potential mole fraction of the dilute exhaust that would be lost due to water condensation on a continuous basis. (D) Integrate the product of the molar flow rate of the dilute exhaust and the potential mole fraction of dilute exhaust lost, and divide by the totalized dilute exhaust mo lar flow over the test interval. This is the potential mole fraction of th e dilute exhaust that would be lost due to water condensation over the entire test in terval. Note that this assumes no re-evaporation. This value must be less than or equal to 0.005. (7) Flow compensation . Maintain nominally constant molar, volumetric or mass flow of diluted exhaust. You may maintain nominally constant flow by either maintaining the temperature and pressure at the flow meter or by directly controlling the flow of diluted exhaust. You may also directly control the flow of proportional samplers to maintain proportional sampling. For an individual test, verify proportional sampling as described in §1065.545. (d) Partial-flow dilution (PFD) . You may dilute a partial flow of raw or previously diluted exhaust before measuring emissions. Section 1065.240 describes PFD-related flow measurement instruments. PFD may consist of constant or varying dilution ratios as described in paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section. An example of a constant dilution ratio PFD is a “secondary dilution PM” measurement system. Deleted: validate(1) Applicability . (i) You may use PFD to extract a proportional raw exhaust sample for any batch or continuous PM emission sampling over any transient duty cycle, any steady-state duty cycle, or any ramped-modal cycle. (ii) You may use PFD to extract a proportional ra w exhaust sample for a ny batch or continuous gaseous emission sampling over any transient duty cycle, any steady-state duty cycle, or any ramped-modal cycle. (iii) You may use PFD to extract a proportional raw exhaust sample for any batch or continuous field-testing. (iv)You may use PFD to extract a proportional di luted exhaust sample fro m a CVS for any batch or continuous emission sampling. (v) You may use PFD to extract a constant raw or diluted exhaust sample for any continuous emission sampling. (vi) You may use PFD to extract a constant raw or diluted exhaust sample for any steady-state emission sampling. (2) Constant dilution-ratio PFD. Do one of the following for constant dilution-ratio PFD: (i) Dilute an already proportional flow. For example, you may do this as a way of performing secondary dilution from a CVS tunnel to achie ve overall dilution ratio for PM sampling. (ii) Continuously measure constituent concentr ations. For example, you might dilute to precondition a sample of raw exhaust to control its temperature, humidity, or constituent concentrations upstream of continuous analyzers. In this case, you must take into account the dilution ratio before multiplying the continuous c oncentration by the sampled exhaust flow rate. (iii) Extract a proportional sample from a separate constant dilution ratio PFD system. For example, you might use a variable-flow pump to proportionally fill a gaseous storage medium such as a bag from a PFD system. In this case, the proportional sampling must meet the same specifications as varying dilution ratio PFD in paragraph (d)(3) of this section. (iv) For each mode of a discrete-mode test (s uch as a locomotive notch setting or a specific setting for speed and torque), use a constant di lution ratio for any PM sampling. You must change the overall PM sampling system dilution ratio between modes so that the dilution ratio on the mode with the highest exhaust flow rate meets §1065.140(e)(2) and the dilution ratios on all other modes is higher than this (minimum) dilution ratio by the ratio of the maximum exhaust flow rate to the exhaust flow rate of the corresponding other mode. This is the same dilution ratio requirement for RMC or field transient testing. You must account for this change in dilution ratio in your emission calculations. (3) Varying dilution-ratio PFD. All the following provisions apply for varying dilution-ratio PFD: (i) Use a control system with sensors and actuato rs that can maintain proportional sampling over intervals as short as 200 ms (i.e., 5 Hz control). (ii) For control input, you may use any sensor output from one or more measurements; for example, intake-air flow, fuel flow, exhaust flow , engine speed, and intake manifold temperature and pressure. (iii) Account for any emission transit time in the PFD system, as necessary. (iv) You may use preprogrammed data if they have been determined for the specific test site, duty cycle, and test engine from which you dilute emissions. (v) We recommend that you run practice cycles to meet the verification criteria in §1065.545. Note that you must verify every emission test by meeting the verification criteria with the data Deleted: validation

Deleted: validate

Deleted: validationfrom that specific test. Data from previously verified practice cycles or other tests may not be used to verify a different emission test. (vi) You may not use a PFD system that requires preparatory tuning or cal ibration with a CVS or with the emission results from a CVS. Rather, yo u must be able to independently calibrate the PFD. (e) Dilution air temperature, dilution ratio, residence time, and temperature control of PM samples . Dilute PM samples at least once upstream of transfer lines. You may dilute PM samples upstream of a transfer line using full-flow dilution, or partial-flow dilution immediately downstream of a PM probe. In the case of partial-flow dilution, you may have up to 26 cm of insulated length between the end of the probe and the dilution stage, but we recommend that the length be as short as practical. The intent of th ese specifications is to minimize heat transfer to or from the emission sample before the final stage of dilution , other than the heat you may need to add to prevent aqueous condensation . This is accomplished by initially cooling the sample through dilution. Configure dilution systems as follows: (1) Set the dilution air temperature to (25 ±5) °C. Use good engineering judgment to select a location to measure this temperature that is as close as practical upstream of the point where dilution air mixes with raw exhaust. (2) For any PM dilution system (i.e., CVS or PFD), add dilution air to the raw exhaust such that the minimum overall ratio of diluted exhaust to raw exhaust is within the range of (5:1 to 7:1) and is at least 2:1 for any primary dilution st age. Base this minimum value on the maximum engine exhaust flow rate for a given test inte rval. Either measure the maximum exhaust flow during a practice run of the test interval or es timate it based on good engineering judgment (for example, you might rely on manu facturer-published literature). (3) Configure any PM dilution system to have an overall residence time of (1 .0 to 5 .5 ) s, as measured from the location of initial dilution air introduction to the location where PM is collected on the sample media. Also configure the system to have a residence time of at least 0.5 0 s, as measured from the location of final dilution air introduction to the location where PM is collected on the sample media. When determining residence times within sampling system volumes, use an assumed flow temperature of 25 °C and pressure of 101.325 kPa. (4) Control sample temperature to a (47 ±5) °C tolerance, as measured anywhere within 20 cm upstream or downstream of the PM storage media (such as a filter). Measure this temperature with a bare-wire junction thermocouple with wires that are (0.500 ±0.025) mm diameter, or with another suitable instrument that has equivalent performance.

§1065.145 Gaseous and PM probes, transfer lines, and sampling system components. (a) Continuous and batch sampling . Determine the total mass of each constituent with continuous or batch sampling. Both types of sampling systems have probes, transfer lines, and other sampling system components that are described in this section. (b) Options for engines with multiple exhaust stacks . Measure emissions from a test engine as described in this paragraph (b) if it has multiple exhaust stacks. You may choose to use different measurement procedures for different pollutants under this paragraph (b) for a given test. For purposes of this part 1065, the test engine includes all the devices related to converting the chemical energy in the fuel to the engine’s mechanical output energy. This may or may not involve vehicle- or equipment-based devices. For example, all of an engine’s cylinders are considered to be part of the test engine even if the exhaust is divided into separate exhaust stacks. As another example, all the cylinders of a diesel-e lectric locomotive are considered to be part of Deleted: validated

Deleted: validate

Deleted: diluent (i.e.,

Deleted: )

Deleted: . We recommend that you measure this temperature

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: dilute

Deleted: with diluent

Deleted:

-

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: diluent

Deleted: , as described in §1065.15(c)(2)the test engine even if they transmit power through separate output shafts, such as might occur with multiple engine-generator sets working in tandem. Use one of the following procedures to measure emissions with multiple exhaust stacks: (1) Route the exhaust flow from the multiple stacks into a single flow as described in §1065.130(c)(6). Sample and measure emissions after the exhaust streams are mixed. Calculate the emissions as a single sample from the entire engine. We recommend this as the preferred option, since it requires only a single measurement and calculation of the exhaust molar flow for the entire engine. (2) Sample and measure emissions from each stack and calculate emissions separately for each stack. Add the mass (or mass rate) emissions from each stack to calculate the emissions from the entire engine. Testing under this paragraph (b)(2) requires measuring or calculating the exhaust molar flow for each stack separately. If the exhaust molar flow in each stack cannot be calculated from combustion air flow(s), fuel flow (s), and measured gaseous emissions, and it is impractical to measure the exhaust molar flows directly, you may alternatively proportion the engine’s calculated total exhaust molar flow rate (where the flow is calculated using combustion air mass flow(s), fuel mass flow(s), and emissi ons concentrations) based on exhaust molar flow measurements in each stack using a less accurate, non-traceable method. For example, you may use a total pressure probe and static pressure measurement in each stack. (3) Sample and measure emissions from one stack and repeat the duty cycle as needed to collect emissions from each stack separately. Calculate the emissions from each stack and add the separate measurements to calculate the mass (or mass rate) emissions from the entire engine. Testing under this paragraph (b)(3) requires measuring or calculating the exhaust molar flow for each stack separately. You may alternatively proportion the engine’s calculated total exhaust molar flow rate based on calculation and measurement limitations as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. Use the average of the engine’s total power or work values from the multiple test runs to calculate brake-specific em issions. Divide the total mass (or mass rate) of each emission by the average power (or work). You may alternatively use the engine power or work associated with the corresponding stack during each test run if these values can be determined for each stack separately. (4) Sample and measure emissions from each stack separately and calculate emissions for the entire engine based on the stack with the highest concentration. Testing under this paragraph (b)(4) requires only a single exhaust flow measurement or calculation for the entire engine. You may determine which stack has the highest con centration by performing multiple test runs, reviewing the results of earlier tests, or using good engineering judgment. Note that the highest concentration of different pollutants may occur in di fferent stacks. Note also that the stack with the highest concentration of a pollutant during a te st interval for field testing may be a different stack than the one you identified based on average concentrations over a duty cycle. (5) Sample emissions from each stack separately and combine the wet sample streams from each stack proportionally to the exhaust molar flows in each stack. Measure the emission concentrations and calculate the emissions for the entire engine based on these weighted concentrations. Testing under this paragraph (b)(5) requires measuring or calculating the exhaust molar flow for each stack separately during the test run to proportion the sample streams from each stack. If it is impractical to measure the exhaust molar flows directly, you may alternatively proportion the wet sample streams based on less accurate, non-traceable flow methods. For example, you may use a total pressure probe and static pressure measurement in each stack. The following restrictions apply for testing under this paragraph (b)(5):(i) You must use an accurate, traceable measurement or calculation of the engine’s total exhaust molar flow rate for calculating the mass of emissions from the entire engine. (ii) You may dry the single, combined, proportion al sample stream; you may not dry the sample streams from each stack separately. (iii) You must measure and proportion the sample flows from each stack with active flow controls. For PM sampling, you must measure and proportion the diluted sample flows from each stack with active flow controls that use onl y smooth walls with no sudden change in crosssectional area. For example, you may control the dilute exhaust PM sample flows using electrically conductive vinyl tubing and a control device that pinches the tube over a long enough transition length so no flow separation occurs. (iv) For PM sampling, the transfer lines from each stack must be joined so the angle of the joining flows is 12.5o or less. Note that the e xhaust manifold must meet the same specifications as the transfer line according to paragraph (d) of this section. (6) Sample emissions from each stack separately and combine the wet sample streams from each stack equally. Measure the emission concentrat ions and calculate the emissions for the entire engine based on these measured concentrations. Testing under this paragraph (b)(6) assumes that the raw-exhaust and sample flows are the same for each stack. The following restrictions apply for testing under this paragraph (b)(6): (i) You must measure and demonstrate that the sample flow from each stack is within 5 % of the value from the stack with the highest sample flow . You may alternatively ensure that the stacks have equal flow rates without measuring sample flows by designing a passive sampling system that meets the following requirements: (A) The probes and transfer line branches must be symmetrical, have equal lengths and diameters, have the same number of bends, and have no filters. (B) If probes are designed such that they are sens itive to stack velocity, th e stack velocity must be similar at each probe. For example, a static pressure probe used for gaseous sampling is not sensitive to stack velocity. (C) The stack static pressure must be the same at each probe. You can meet this requirement by placing probes at the end of stacks that are vented to atmosphere. (D) For PM sampling, the transfer lines from each stack must be joined so the angle of the joining flows is 12.5o or less. Note that the e xhaust manifold must meet the same specifications as the transfer line according to paragraph (d) of this section. (ii) You may use the procedure in this paragraph (b)(6) only if you perform an analysis showing that the resulting error due to imbalanced stack flows and concentrations is either at or below 2 %. You may alternatively show that the resu lting error does not impact your ability to demonstrate compliance with applicable standards. For example, you may use less accurate, non-traceable measurements of emission concentrations and molar flow in each stack and demonstrate that the imbalances in flows and concentrations cause 2 % or less error. (iii) For a two-stack engine, you may use the procedure in this paragraph (b)(6) only if you can show that the stack with the higher flow has the lower average concentration for each pollutant over the duty cycle. (iv) You must use an accurate, traceable measurement or calculation of the engine’s total exhaust molar flow rate for calculating the mass of emissions from the entire engine. (v) You may dry the single, equally combined, sample stream; you may not dry the sample streams from each stack separately.(vi) You may determine your exhaust flow rates with a chemical balance of exhaust gas concentrations and either intake air flow or fuel flow. (c) Gaseous and PM sample probes . A probe is the first fitting in a sampling system. It protrudes into a raw or diluted exhaust stream to extract a sample, such that its inside and outside surfaces are in contact with the exhaust. A sample is transported out of a probe into a transfer line, as described in paragraph (d) of this sect ion. The following provisions apply to sample probes: (1) Probe design and construction . Use sample probes with inside surfaces of 300 series stainless steel or, for raw exhaust sampling, use any nonreactive material capable of withstanding raw exhaust temperatures. Locate sample probes wher e constituents are mixed to their mean sample concentration. Take into account the mixing of any crankcase emissions that may be routed into the raw exhaust. Locate each probe to minimize interference with the flow to other probes. We recommend that all probes remain free from influences of boundary layers, wakes, and eddies— especially near the outlet of a raw-exhaust stack where unintended dilution might occur. Make sure that purging or back-flushing of a probe does not influence another probe during testing. You may use a single probe to extract a sample of more than one constituent as long as the probe meets all the specifications for each constituent. (2) Gaseous sample probes . Use either single-port or mu lti-port probes for sampling gaseous emissions. You may orient these probes in any direction relative to the raw or diluted exhaust flow. For some probes, you must cont rol sample temperatures, as follows: (i) For probes that extract NO x from diluted exhaust, control the probe’s wall temperature to prevent aqueous condensation. (ii) For probes that extract hydrocarbons for TH C or NMHC analysis from the diluted exhaust of compression-ignition engines, two -stroke spark-ignition engines, or four- stroke spark-ignition engines at or below 19 kW, we recommend heating the probe to minimize hydrocarbon contamination consistent with good engineering judgment. If you routinely fail the contamination check in the 1065.520 pretest check, we recommend heating the probe section to approximately 190 °C to minimize contamination. (3) PM sample probes . Use PM probes with a single opening at the end. Orient PM probes to face directly upstream. If you shield a PM probe’s opening with a PM pre-classifier such as a hat, you may not use the preclassifier we specify in paragraph (f)(1) of this section. We recommend sizing the inside diameter of PM pr obes to approximate isokinetic sampling at the expected mean flow rate. (d) Transfer lines . You may use transfer lines to transport an extracted sample from a probe to an analyzer, storage medium, or dilution system, noting certain restrictions for PM sampling in §1065.140(e). Minimize the length of all transfer lines by locating analyzers, storage media, and dilution systems as close to probes as practical. We recommend that you minimize the number of bends in transfer lines and that you maximize the radius of any unavoidable bend. Avoid using 90  elbows, tees, and cross-fittings in transfer lines. Where such connections and fittings are necessary, take steps, using good engineering judgment, to ensure that you meet the temperature tolerances in this paragraph (d). This may involve measuring temperature at various locations within transfer lines and fittings. You may use a single transfer line to transport a sample of more than one constituent, as long as the transfer line meets all the specifications for each constituent. The following construction and temperature tolerances apply to transfer lines: (1) Gaseous samples . Use transfer lines with inside surf aces of 300 series stainless steel, PTFE, Viton TM , or any other material that you demonstrate has better properties for emission sampling. Deleted: tailpipe

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 4-For raw exhaust sampling, use a non-reactive material capable of withstanding raw exhaust temperatures. You may use in-line filters if they do not react with exhaust constituents and if the filter and its housing meet the same temperature re quirements as the transfer lines, as follows: (i) For NO x transfer lines upstream of either an NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the specifications of §1065.378 or a chiller that meets the specifications of §1065.376, maintain a sample temperature that prevents aqueous condensation. (ii) For THC transfer lines for te sting compression-ignition engines, two -stroke spark-ignition engines, or four- stroke spark-ignition engines at or below 19 kW, maintain a wall temperature tolerance throughout the entire line of (191 ±11)  C. If you sample from raw exhaust, you may connect an unheated, insulated transfer line directly to a probe. Design the length and insulation of the transfer line to cool the highest expected raw exhaust temperature to no lower than 191  C, as measured at the transfer line’s outlet. For dilute sampling, you may use a transition zone between the probe and transfer line of up to 92 cm to allow your wall temperature to transition to (191 ±11) °C. (2) PM samples . We recommend heated transfer lines or a heated enclosure to minimize temperature differences between transfer lines and exhaust constituents. Us e transfer lines that are inert with respect to PM and are electrically conductive on the inside surfaces. We recommend using PM transfer lines made of 300 series stainless steel. Electrically ground the inside surface of PM transfer lines. (e) Optional sample-conditioning components for gaseous sampling . You may use the following sample-conditioning components to prepare gaseous samples for analysis, as long as you do not install or use them in a way that adversely affects your ability to show that your engines comply with all applicable gaseous emission standards. (1) NO 2 -to-NO converter . You may use an NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the converter conversion verification specified in §106 5.378 at any point upstream of a NO x analyzer, sample bag, or other storage medium. (2) Sample dryer . You may use either type of sample dryer described in this paragraph (e)(2) to decrease the effects of water on gaseous emission measurements. You may not use a chemical dryer, or use dryers upstream of PM sample filters. (i) Osmotic-membrane . You may use an osmotic-membrane dryer upstream of any gaseous analyzer or storage medium, as long as it meets the temperature specifications in paragraph (d)(1) of this section. Because osmotic-membrane dryers may deteriorate after prolonged exposure to certain exhaust constituents, consult with the membrane manufacturer regarding your application before incorporating an osmotic-membrane dryer. Monitor the dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , downstream of an osmotic-membrane dryer. You may use continuously recorded values of T dew and p total in the amount of water calculations specified in §1065.645. For our testing we may use average temperature and pressure values over the test interval or a nominal pressure value that we estimate as the dryer’s average pressure expected during testing as constant values in the amount of water calculations specified in §1065.645. For your testing, you may use the maximum temperature or minimum pressure values observed during a test interval or duty cycle or the high alarm temperature setpoint or low alarm pressure setpoint as constant values in the calculations specified in §1065.645. For your testing, you may also use a nominal p total , which you may estimate as the dr yer’s lowest absolute pressure expected during testing. (ii) Thermal chiller . You may use a thermal chiller upstream of some gas analyzers and storage media. You may not use a thermal chiller upstream of a THC measurement system for Deleted: 2

Deleted: 4-compression-ignition engines, two -stroke spark-ignition engines, or four- stroke spark-ignition engines at or below 19 kW. If you use a th ermal chiller upstream of an NO 2 -to-NO converter or in a sampling system without an NO 2 -to-NO converter, the chiller must meet the NO 2 lossperformance check specified in §1065.376. Monitor the dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure,
p total , downstream of a thermal chiller. You may use continuously recorded values of T dew and
p total in the amount of water calculations specified in §1065.645. If it is valid to assume the degree of saturation in the ther mal chiller, you may calculate T dew based on the known chiller performance and continuous monitoring of chiller temperature, T chiller . If it is valid to assume a constant temperature offset between T chiller and T dew , due to a known and fixed amount of sample reheat between the chiller outlet and the temperature measurement location, you may factor in this assumed temperature offset value into emission calculations. If we ask for it, you must show by engineering analysis or by data the validity of any assumptions allowed by this paragraph (e)(2)(ii). For our testing we may use average temperature and pressure values over the test interval or a nominal pressure value that we estimate as the dryer’s average pressure expected during testing as constant values in the calculations specified in §1065.645. For your testing you may use the maximum temperature and minimum pressure values observed during a test interval or duty cycle or the high alarm temperature setp oint and the low alarm pressure setpoint as constant values in the amount of water calculations specified in §1065.645. For your testing you may also use a nominal p total , which you may estimate as the dryer’s lowest absolute pressure expected during testing. (3) Sample pumps . You may use sample pumps upstream of an analyzer or storage medium for any gas. Use sample pumps with inside surfaces of 300 series stainless steel, PTFE, or any other material that you demonstrate has better proper ties for emission samplin g. For some sample pumps, you must control temperatures, as follows: (i) If you use a NO x sample pump upstream of either an NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets §1065.378 or a chiller that meets §1065.376, it must be heated to prevent aqueous condensation. (ii) For testing compression-ignition engines, two -stroke spark-ignition engines, or four- stroke spark-ignition engines at or below 19 kW, if you use a THC sample pump upstream of a THC analyzer or storage medium, its inner surfaces must be heated to a tolerance of (191 ±11)  C. (4) Ammonia Scrubber . You may use ammonia scrubbers for any or all gaseous sampling systems to prevent interference with NH 3 , poisoning of the NO 2 -to-NO converter, and deposits in the sampling system or analyzers. Follow the ammonia scrubber manufacturer’s recommendations or use good engineering judgment in applying ammonia scrubbers. (f) Optional sample-conditioning components for PM sampling . You may use the following sample-conditioning components to prepare PM samples for analysis, as long as you do not install or use them in a way that adversely affects your ability to show that your engines comply with the applicable PM emission standards. You may condition PM samples to minimize positive and negative biases to PM results, as follows: (1) PM preclassifier . You may use a PM preclassifier to remove large-diameter particles. The PM preclassifier may be either an inertial impactor or a cyclonic separator. It must be constructed of 300 series stainless steel. The prec lassifier must be rated to remove at least 50 % of PM at an aerodynamic diameter of 10  m and no more than 1 % of PM at an aerodynamic diameter of 1  m over the range of flow rates for which you use it. Follow the preclassifier manufacturer’s instructions for any periodic servicing that may be necessary to prevent a buildup of PM. Install the preclassifier in the dilution system downstream of the last dilution stage. Configure the preclassifier outlet with a means of bypassing any PM sample media so the Deleted: 2

Deleted: 4-

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 4-preclassifier flow may be stabilized before star ting a test. Locate PM sample media within 75 cm downstream of the preclassifier’s exit. You may not use this preclassifier if you use a PM probe that already has a preclassifier. For example, if you use a hat-shaped preclassifier that is located immediately upstream of the probe in such a way that it forces the sample flow to change direction before entering the probe, you may not use any other preclassifier in your PM sampling system. (2) Other components . You may request to use other PM conditioning components upstream of a PM preclassifier, such as components that condition humidity or remove gaseous-phase hydrocarbons from the diluted exhaust stream. You may use such components only if we approve them under §1065.10.

§1065.150 Continuous sampling. You may use continuous sampling techniques for measurements that involve raw or dilute sampling. Make sure continuous sampling systems meet the specifications in §1065.145. Make sure continuous analyzers meet the specifications in subparts C and D of this part.

§1065.170 Batch sampling for gaseous and PM constituents. Batch sampling involves collecting and storing em issions for later analysis. Examples of batch sampling include collecting and storing gaseous em issions in a bag or collecting and storing PM on a filter. You may use batch sampling to store em issions that have been diluted at least once in some way, such as with CVS, PFD, or BMD. You may use batch-sampling to store undiluted emissions. (a) Sampling methods . If you extract from a constant-volume flow rate, sample at a constantvolume flow rate as follows: (1) Verify proportional sampling after an emission test as described in §1065.545. Use good engineering judgment to select storage media that will not significantly change measured emission levels (either up or down). For example, do not use sample bags for storing emissions if the bags are permeable with respect to emissions or if they off gas emissions to the extent that it affects your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable gaseous emission standards. As another example, do not use PM filters that irreversibly absorb or adsorb gases to the extent that it affects your ability to demonstrate comp liance with the applicable PM emission standard. (2) You must follow the requirements in §1065.140(e)(2) related to PM dilution ratios. For each filter, if you expect the net PM mass on the filter to exceed 400 μg, assuming a 38 mm diameter filter stain area, you may take the following actions in sequence: (i) For discrete-mode testing only, you may reduc e sample time as needed to target a filter loading of 400 μ g, but not below the minimum sample time specified in the standard-setting part. (ii) Reduce filter face velocity as needed to target a filter loading of 400 μ g, down to 50 cm/s or less. (iii) Increase overall dilution ratio above the values specified in §1065.140(e)(2) to target a filter loading of 400 μ g. (b) Gaseous sample storage media . Store gas volumes in sufficiently clean containers that minimally off-gas or allow permeation of gases. Use good engineering judgment to determine acceptable thresholds of storage media cleanliness and permeation. To clean a container, you may repeatedly purge and evacuate a container and you may heat it. Use a flexible container (such as a bag) within a temperature-controlled environment, or use a temperature controlled rigid container that is initially evacuated or has a volume that can be displaced, such as a piston Deleted: Validateand cylinder arrangement. Use containers meeting the specifications in the T able 1 of this section

, noting that you may request to use other container materials under §1065.10 . Sample temperatures must stay within the following ranges for each container material: (1) Up to 40 °C for TedlarTM and KynarTM. (2) (191 ±11) °C for TeflonTM and 300 series stai nless steel used with measuring THC or NMHC from compression-ignition engines, two-stroke spark-ignitio n engines, and four-stroke sparkignition engines at or below 19 kW. For all other engines and pollutants, these materials are good for sample temperatures up to 202 °C.

Table 1 of §1065.170– Container Materials for Gaseous Batch Sampling

Emissions Engine type Compression-ignition Two-stroke spark

- ignition Four -stroke spark-ignition at or below 19 kW All other engines

CO, CO 2 , O 2 , CH 4 , C 2 H 6 , C 3 H 8 ,

NO, NO 2 , N 2 O TedlarTM, KynarTM, TeflonTM, or 300 series stainless steel TedlarTM, KynarTM, TeflonTM, or 300 series stainless steel

THC, NMHC TeflonTM or 300 series stainless steel TedlarTM, KynarTM, TeflonTM, or 300 series stainless steel

(c) PM sample media . Apply the following methods for sampling particulate emissions: (1) If you use filter-based sampling media to extract and store PM for measurement, your procedure must meet the following specifications: (i) If you expect that a filter’s total surface con centration of PM will exceed 400 μg, assuming a 38 mm diameter filter stain area, for a given test interval, you may use filter media with a minimum initial collection efficiency of 98 %; otherwise you must use a filter media with a minimum initial collection efficien cy of 99.7 %. Collection effi ciency must be measured as described in ASTM D2986 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010), though you may rely on the sample-media manufacturer’s measurements reflected in their product ratings to show that you meet this requirement. (ii) The filter must be circular, with an overall diameter of 46.50 ±0.6 mm and an exposed diameter of at least 38 mm. See the cassette specifications in paragraph (c)(1)(vii) of this section. (iii) We highly recommend that you use a pure PT FE filter material that does not have any flowthrough support bonded to the back and has an overall thickness of 40 ±20  m. An inert polymer ring may be bonded to the periphery of the filter material for support and for sealing between the filter cassette parts. We consider Polymethylpentene (PMP) and PTFE inert materials for a support ring, but other inert materi als may be used. See the cassette specifications in paragraph (c)(1)(vii) of this section. We allow the use of PTFE-coated glass fiber filter material, as long as this filter media selecti on does not affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards, which we base on a pure PTFE filter material. Note that we will use pure PTFE filter material for compliance testing, and we may require you to use pure PTFE filter material for any compliance testing we require, such as for selective enforcement audits. (iv) You may request to use other filter mate rials or sizes under the provisions of §1065.10. Deleted: following t

Deleted: :

Deleted: Container Materials

Deleted: s

Deleted:

Deleted: 4

Deleted: <

Deleted: 1 Deleted: 2

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 3 Deleted: 2

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 4

Deleted: 4 Deleted: 2

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 1 As long as you prevent aqueous condensation in storage container.¶

2 Up to 40 °C.¶

3 Up to 202 °C.¶

4 At (191 ±11) °C.¶

Deleted: -95a(v) To minimize turbulent deposition and to deposit PM evenly on a filter, use a filter holder with a 12.5° (from center) divergent cone angle to transition from the transfer-line inside diameter to the exposed diameter of the filter face. Use 300 series stainless steel for this transition. (vi) Maintain a filter face velocity near 100 cm/s with less than 5% of the recorded flow values exceeding 100 cm/s, unless you expect the net PM mass on the filter to exceed 400 μg, assuming a 38 mm diameter filter stain area. Measure face velocity as the volumetric flow rate of the sample at the pressure upstream of the filter an d temperature of the filter face as measured in §1065.140(e), divided by the filter’s exposed area. You may use the exhaust stack or CVS tunnel pressure for the upstream pressure if the pressure drop through the PM sampler up to the filter is less than 2 kPa. (vii) Use a clean cassette designed to the specifications of Figure 1 of §1065.170. In auto changer configurations, you may use cassettes of similar design. Cassettes must be made of one of the following materials: DelrinTM, 300 se ries stainless steel, polycarbonate, acrylonitrilebutadiene-styrene (ABS) resin, or conductive polypropylene. We recommend that you keep filter cassettes clean by periodically washing or wi ping them with a comp atible solvent applied using a lint-free cloth. Depending upon your cassette material, ethanol (C 2 H 5 OH) might be an acceptable solvent. Your cleaning frequency will depend on your engine’s PM and HC emissions. (viii) If you keep the cassette in the filter holder after sampling, prevent flow through the filter until either the holder or cassette is removed from the PM sampler. If you remove the cassettes from filter holders after sampling, transfer the casse tte to an individual c ontainer that is covered or sealed to prevent communication of semi-volatile matter from one filter to another. If you remove the filter holder, cap the inlet and outlet. Keep them cove red or sealed until they return to the stabilization or weighing environments. (ix) The filters should not be handled outside of the PM stabilization a nd weighing environments and should be loaded into cassettes, filter holders, or auto changer apparatus before removal from these environments.(2) You may use other PM sample media that we approve under §1065.10, including nonfiltering techniques. For example, you might depo sit PM on an inert subs trate that collects PM using electrostatic, thermophoresis, inertia, diffus ion, or some other deposition mechanism, as approved.Figure 1 of 1065.1700.10-0.80(TYPICAL)0.10-0.80BETWEENCENTERS(TYPICAL)IN ADDITION TO TYPICAL RANGESGIVEN FOR PERFORATIONANDPERFORATION PATTERNS, WERECOMMEND THE FOLLOWING:PERFORATION0.10-0.20PERFORATION SPACING 0.10-0.300.10-0.80(TYPICAL)Comment [CAL2]:Figure updated.§1065.190 PM-stabilization and weighing environments for gravimetric analysis. (a) This section describes the two environmen ts required to stabilize and weigh PM for gravimetric analysis: the PM stabilization environm ent, where filters are stored before weighing; and the weighing environment, where the balance is located. The two environments may share a common space. These volumes may be one or more rooms, or they may be much smaller, such as a glove box or an automated weighing syst em consisting of one or more countertop-sized environments. (b) We recommend that you keep both the stabilization and the weighing environments free of ambient contaminants, such as dust, aerosols, or semi-volatile material that could contaminate PM samples. We recommend that these environments conform with an “as-built” Class Six clean room specification according to ISO 14644-1 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010); however, we also recommend that you deviate fr om ISO 14644-1 as necessary to minimize air motion that might affect weighing. We recommend maximum air-supply and air-return velocities of 0.05 m/s in the weighing environment. (c) Verify the cleanliness of the PM-stabilization environment using reference filters, as described in §1065.390(d). (d) Maintain the following ambient conditions within the two environments during all stabilization and weighing: (1) Ambient temperature and tolerances . Maintain the weighing environment at a tolerance of (22 ±1)  C. If the two environments share a common space, maintain both environments at a tolerance of (22 ±1)  C. If they are separate, maintain the stabilization environment at a tolerance of (22 ±3)  C. (2) Dewpoint . Maintain a dewpoint of 9.5  C in both environments. This dewpoint will control the amount of water associated with sulfuric acid (H 2 SO 4 ) PM, such that 1.2216 grams of water will be associated with each gram of H 2 SO 4
. (3) Dewpoint tolerances . If the expected fraction of sulfuric acid in PM is unknown, we recommend controlling dewpoint at within ±1  C tolerance. This would limit any dewpointrelated change in PM to less than ±2 %, even fo r PM that is 50 % sulfuric acid. If you know your expected fraction of sulfuric acid in PM , we recommend that you select an appropriate dewpoint tolerance for showing compliance with emission standards using the following table as a guide:

Table 1 of §1065.190—Dewpoint tolerance as a function of % PM change and % sulfuric acid PM Expected sulfuric acid fraction of PM ±0.5 % PM mass change ±1 % PM mass change ±2 % PM mass change 5 % ±3  C ±6  C ±12  C 50 % ±0.3  C ±0.6  C ±1.2  C 100 % ±0.15  C ±0.3  C ±0.6  C

(e) Verify the following ambient conditions us ing measurement instruments that meet the specifications in subpart C of this part: (1) Continuously measure dewpoint and ambient temperature. Use these values to determine if the stabilization and weighing environments have remained within the tolerances specified in paragraph (d) of this section for at least 60 min be fore weighing sample media (e.g., filters). We recommend that you use an interlock that automatically prevents the balance from reportingvalues if either of the environments have not been within the applicable tolerances for the past 60 min. (2) Continuously measure atmospheric pressure within the weighing environment. An acceptable alternative is to use a barometer that measures atmospheric pressure outside the weighing environment, as long as you can ensure that atmospheric pressure at the balance is always within ±100 Pa of that outside envi ronment during weighing operations. Record atmospheric pressure as you weig h filters, and use these pressure values to perform the buoyancy correction in §1065.690. (f) We recommend that you install a balance as follows: (1) Install the balance on a vibration-isolation platform to isolate it from external noise and vibration. (2) Shield the balance from convective airflow w ith a static-dissipating draft shield that is electrically grounded. (3) Follow the balance manufacturer’s specifications for all preventive maintenance. (4) Operate the balance manually or as part of an automated weighing system. (g) Minimize static electric charge in the balance environment, as follows: (1) Electrically ground the balance. (2) Use 300 series stainless steel tweezers if PM sample media (e.g., filters) must be handled manually. (3) Ground tweezers with a grounding strap, or provide a grounding strap for the operator such that the grounding strap shares a common ground with the balance. Make sure grounding straps have an appropriate resistor to protect operators from accidental shock. (4) Provide a static-electricity neutralizer th at is electrically grounded in common with the balance to remove static charge from PM sample media (e.g., fi lters), as follows: (i) You may use radioactive neutralizers such as a Polonium ( 210 Po) source. Replace radioactive sources at the intervals recommended by the neutralizer manufacturer. (ii) You may use other neutralizers, such as co rona-discharge ionizers. If you use a coronadischarge ionizer, we recommend that you monitor it for neutral net charge according to the ionizer manufacturer’s recommendations. (5) We recommend that you use a device to monitor the static charge of PM sample media (e.g., filter) surface. (6) We recommend that you neutralize PM samp le media (e.g., filters) to within ±2.0 V of neutral. Measure static voltages as follows: (i) Measure static voltage of PM sample media (e.g., filters) according to the electrostatic voltmeter manufacturer’s instructions. (ii) Measure static voltage of PM sample media (e .g., filters) while the media is at least 15 cm away from any grounded surfaces to avoid mirror image charge interference.

§1065.195 PM-stabilization environment for in-situ analyzers. (a) This section describes the environment required to determine PM in-situ. For in-situ analyzers, such as an inertial balance, this is the environment within a PM sampling system that surrounds the PM sample media (e.g., filters). This is typically a very small volume.(b) Maintain the environment free of ambient contaminants, such as dust, aerosols, or semivolatile material that could cont aminate PM samples. Filter a ll air used for stabilization with HEPA filters. Ensure that HEPA filters are in stalled properly so that background PM does not leak past the HEPA filters.(c) Maintain the following ther modynamic conditions within the environment before measuring PM: (1) Ambient temperature . Select a nominal ambient temperature, T amb , between (42 and 52)  C. Maintain the ambient temperature within ±1.0  C of the selected nominal value. (2) Dewpoint . Select a dewpoint, T dew , that corresponds to T amb such that T dew = (0.95· T amb – 11.40)  C. The resulting dewpoint will control the amount of water associated with sulfuric acid (H 2 SO 4 ) PM, such that 1.1368 grams of water will be associated with each gram of H 2 SO 4 . For example, if you select a nominal ambient temperature of 47  C, set a dewpoint of 33.3  C. (3) Dewpoint tolerance . If the expected fraction of sulfuric acid in PM is unknown, we recommend controlling dewpoint within ±1.0  C. This would limit any dewpoint-related change in PM to less than ±2 %, even for PM that is 50 % sulfuric acid. If you know your expected fraction of sulfuric acid in PM, we recommend that you select an appropriate dewpoint tolerance for showing compliance with emission standa rds using Table 1 of §1065.190 as a guide: (4) Absolute pressure . Use good engineering judgment to maintain a tolerance of absolute pressure if your PM measurement instrument requires it. (d) Continuously measure dewpoint, temperature, and pressure using measurement instruments that meet the PM-stabilization environment specifi cations in subpart C of this part. Use these values to determine if the in-situ stabilization en vironment is within the tolerances specified in paragraph (c) of this section. Do not use any PM quantities that are recorded when any of these parameters exceed the applicable tolerances. (e) If you use an inertial PM balance, we recommend that you install it as follows: (1) Isolate the balance from any external noise and vibration that is within a frequency range that could affect the balance. (2) Follow the balance manufacturer’s specifications. (f) If static electricity affects an inertial balance, you may use a static neutralizer, as follows: (1) You may use a radioactive neutralizer such as a Polonium ( 210 Po) source or a Krypton ( 85 Kr) source. Replace radioactive sources at the intervals recommended by the neutralizer manufacturer.(2) You may use other neutralizers, such as a corona-discharge ionizer. If you use a coronadischarge ionizer, we recommend that you monitor it for neutral net charge according to the ionizer manufacturer’s recommendations.Subpart C—Measurement Instruments

§1065.201 Overview and general provisions. (a) Scope . This subpart specifies measurement instru ments and associated system requirements related to emission testing in a laboratory or similar environment and in the field. This includes laboratory instruments and portable emission measurement systems (PEMS) for measuring engine parameters, ambient conditions, flow-related parameters, and emission concentrations. (b) Instrument types . You may use any of the specified instruments as described in this subpart to perform emission tests. If you want to use one of these instruments in a way that is not specified in this subpart, or if you want to us e a different instrument, you must first get us to approve your alternate procedure under §1065.10. Where we specify more than one instrument for a particular measurement, we may identify which instrument serves as the reference for comparing with an alternate procedure. You may generally use instruments with compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias. (c) Measurement systems . Assemble a system of measurement instruments that allows you to show that your engines comply with the appli cable emission standards, using good engineering judgment. When selecting instruments, consider how conditions such as vibration, temperature, pressure, humidity, viscosity, specific h eat, and exhaust composition (including trace concentrations) may affect instrument compatibility and performance. (d) Redundant systems . For all measurement instruments desc ribed in this subpart, you may use data from multiple instruments to calculate test results for a single test. If you use redundant systems, use good engineering judgment to use mu ltiple measured values in calculations or to disregard individual measurements. Note that you must keep your results from all measurements. This requirement applies whether or not you actually use the measurements in your calculations. (e) Range . You may use an instrument’s response above 100 % of its operating range if this does not affect your ability to s how that your engines comply with the applicable emission standards. Note that we require additional testing and reporting if an analyzer responds above 100 % of its range. Auto-ranging analyzers do not require additional testing or reporting. (f) Related subparts for laboratory testing . Subpart D of this part describes how to evaluate the performance of the measurement instruments in this subpart. In general, if an instrument is specified in a specific section of this subpart, its calibration and verifications are typically specified in a similarly numbered section in subpart D of this part. For example, §1065.290 gives instrument specifications for PM bala nces and §1065.390 describes the corresponding calibrations and verifications. Note that some in struments also have other requirements in other sections of subpart D of this part. Subpart B of this part identifies speci fications for other types of equipment, and subpart H of this part sp ecifies engine fluids and analytical gases. (g) Field testing and testing with PEMS . Subpart J of this part describes how to use these and other measurement instruments for fiel d testing and other PEMS testing. (h) Recommended practices . This subpart identifies a variety of recommended but not required practices for proper measurements. We believe in most cases it is necessary to follow these recommended practices for accurate and repeatable measurements. However, we do not specifically require you to follow these recommende d practices to perform a valid test, as long as you meet the required calibrations and verificatio ns of measurement systems specified in subpart Deleted: , as described in §1065.25

Deleted: See §1065.550.D of this part. Similarly, we are not required to follow all recommended practices, as long as we meet the required calibrations and verifications. Our decision to follow or not follow a given recommendation when we perform a test does not depend on whether you followed it during your testing.

§1065.202 Data updating, recording, and control. Your test system must be able to update data, record data and control systems related to operator demand, the dynamometer, sampling equipment, and measurement instruments. Use data acquisition and control systems that can record at the specified minimum frequencies, as follows:

Table 1 of §1065.202–Data recording and control minimum frequencies Applicable Test Protocol Section Measured Values Minimum Command and Control Frequency a Minimum Recording Frequency b,c

§1065.510 Speed and torque during an engine step-map 1 Hz 1 mean value per step
§1065.510 Speed and torque during an engine sweepmap 5 Hz 1 Hz means
§1065.514 §1065.530 Transient duty cycle reference and feedback speeds and torques 5 Hz 1 Hz means
§1065.514 §1065.530 Steady-state and ramped-modal duty cycle reference and feedback speeds and torques 1 Hz 1 Hz
§1065.520 §1065.530 §1065.550 Continuous concentrations of raw or dilute analyzers N/A 1 Hz

§1065.520 §1065.530 §1065.550 Batch concentrations of raw or dilute analyzers N/A 1 mean value per test interval
§1065.530 §1065.545 Diluted exhaust flow rate from a CVS with a heat exchanger upstream of the flow
measurement N/A 1 Hz

§1065.530 §1065.545 Diluted exhaust flow rate from a CVS without a heat exchanger upstream of the flow measurement 5 Hz 1 Hz means

§1065.530 §1065.545 Intake-air or raw-exhaust flow rate N/A 1 Hz means

§1065.530 §1065.545 Dilution air flow if actively controlled (for example, a partial-flow PM sampling system) d 5 Hz 1 Hz means

§1065.530 §1065.545 Sample flow from a CVS that has a heat exchanger 1 Hz 1 Hz
§1065.530 §1065.545 Sample flow from a CVS that does not have a heat exchanger 5 Hz 1 Hz mean s

a CFVs that are not using active control are exempt from meeting this requirement due to their operating principle. Deleted: testing your engine is not dependent

Deleted: or notb 1 Hz means are data reported from the instrument at a higher frequency, but recorded as a series of 1 s mean values at a rate of 1 Hz.

c For CFVs in a CVS, the minimum recording frequency is 1 Hz. For CFVs used to control sampling from a CFV CVS, the minimum recording frequency is N/A.
d This is not applicable to CVS dilution air.

§1065.205 Performance specifications for measurement instruments. Your test system as a whole must meet all th e calibrations, verifications, and test-validation criteria specified outside of this section for laborato ry testing or field testing, as applicable. We recommend that your instruments meet the specifica tions in Table 1 of this section for all ranges you use for testing. We also recommend that you keep any documentation you receive from instrument manufacturers showing that your inst ruments meet the specifications in Table 1 of this section. Deleted: applicable

Deleted: specified in subparts D and F of this part or subpart J of this part for using PEMS and for performing field testing.Table 1 of §1065.205–Recommended performance specifications for measurement instrumentsMeasurement InstrumentMeasuredquantitysymbolComplete SystemRise time (t10-90) andFall time (t90-10)aRecordingupdate frequencyAccuracybRepeatabilitybNoisebEngine speed transducerfn1 s 1 Hz means2 % of pt. or0.5 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.25 % of max.0.05 % of maxEngine torque transducerT1 s 1 Hz means2 % of pt. or1 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.5 % of max0.05 % of max.Electrical work (active-powermeter)W1 s 1 Hz means2 % of pt. or0.5 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.25 % of max.0.05 % of maxGeneral pressure transducer (not apart of another instrument)p5 s 1 Hz2 % of pt. or1 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.5 % of max.0.1 % of maxAtmospheric pressure meter usedfor PM-stabilization and balanceenvironmentspatmos50 s 5 times per hour 50 Pa 25 Pa 5 PaGeneral purpose atmosphericpressure meterpatmos50 s 5 times per hour 250 Pa 100Pa 50 PaTemperature sensor for PMstabilization and balanceenvironmentsT50 s 0.1 Hz 0.25 K 0.1 K 0.1 KOther temperature sensor (not apart of another instrument)T10 s 0.5 Hz0.4 % of pt. K or0.2 % of max. K0.2 % of pt. K or0.1 % of max. K0.1 % of maxDewpoint sensor for intake air,PM-stabilization and balanceenvironmentsTdew50 s 0.1 Hz 0.25 K 0.1 K 0.02 KOther dewpoint sensorTdew50 s 0.1 Hz 1 K 0.5 K 0.1 KFuel flow meterc(Fuel totalizer)m5 s(N/A)1 Hz(N/A)2 % of pt. or1.5 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.75 % of max.0.5 % of max.Total diluted exhaust meter (CVS)c(With heat exchanger before meter)n1 s(5 s)1 Hz means(1 Hz)2 % of pt. or1.5 % of max.1 % of pt. or0.75 % of max.1 % of max.Dilution air, inlet air, exhaust, andsample flow meterscn1 s1 Hz means of 5 Hzsamples2.5 % of pt. or1.5 % of max.1.25 % of pt. or0.75 % of max.1 % of max.Continuous gas analyzerx5 s 1 Hz2 % of pt. or2 % of meas.1 % of pt. or1 % of meas.1 % of max.Batch gas analyzerxN/A N/A2 % of pt. or2 % of meas.1 % of pt. or1 % of meas.1 % of max.Gravimetric PM balancemPMN/A N/A See §1065.7900.5gN/AInertial PM balancemPM5 s 1 Hz2 % of pt. or2 % of meas.1 % of pt. or1 % of meas.0.2 % of max.aThe performance specifications identified in the table apply separately for rise time and fall time.bAccuracy, repeatability, and noise are all determined with the same collected data, as described in §1065.305, and based on absolute values. “pt.” refers to the overall flowweighted mean value expected at the standard; “max.” refers tothe peak value expected at the standard over any test interval,not the maximum of the instrument’s range; “meas”refers to the actual flow-weighted mean measured over any test interval.cThe procedure for accuracy, repeatability and noise measurement described in §1065.305 may be modified for flow meters to allow noise to be measured at the lowest calibratedvalue instead of zero flow rate.MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE PARAMETERS AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS

§1065.210 Work input and output sensors. (a) Application . Use instruments as specified in this s ection to measure work inputs and outputs during engine operation. We recommend that you use sensors, transducers, and meters that meet the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your overall systems for measuring work inputs and outputs must meet the linearity verifications in §1065.307. We recommend that you measure work inputs and outputs where they cross the system boundary as shown in Figure 1 of §1065.210. The system boundary is different for air-cooled engines than for liquid-cooled engines. If you choose to measure work before or after a work conversion, relative to the system boundary, use good engineering judgment to estimate any work-conversion losses in a way that avoids overestimation of total work. For example, if it is impractical to instrument the shaft of an exhaust turbine generating electrical work, you may decide to measure its converted electrical work. As another example, you may decide to me asure the tractive (i.e., electrical output) power of a locomotive, rather than the brake power of the locomotive engine. In these cases, divide the electrical work by accurate values of electrical generator efficiency (  <1), or assume an efficiency of 1 (  =1), which would over-estimate brake-sp ecific emissions. For the example of using locomotive tractive power with a generator efficiency of 1 (  =1), this means using the tractive power as the brake power in emissi on calculations. Do not underestimate any work conversion efficiencies for any components outside the system boundary that do not return work into the system boundary. And do not overestimate any work conversion efficiencies for components outside the system boundary that do return work into the system boundary. In all cases, ensure that you are able to accurately demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards.Figure 1065.210-1: Work inputs, outputs, and system boundaries

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Liquid Cooled Engine
Crankshaft Liquid Coolant

+Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G

M +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work M

HX

+ - Batt. T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T G M

C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger C System Boundary

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Liquid Cooled Engine
Crankshaft Liquid Coolant

+Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G

M +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work M

HX

+ - Batt. T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T G M

C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger C System Boundary

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Liquid Cooled Engine
Crankshaft Liquid Coolant

+Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G

M +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work M

HX

+ - Batt. T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T G M

C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger C System Boundary

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Air Cooled Engine
Crankshaft +Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work + - Batt. M

HX T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T

G M

C C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger System Boundary

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Air Cooled Engine
Crankshaft +Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work + - Batt. M

HX T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T

G M

C C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger System Boundary

Fuel Intake Air Exhaust

+Shaft Work Air Cooled Engine
Crankshaft +Shaft Work

-Electrical Work +Electrical WorkThermoelectric G +Electrical Work

Net (+/-) Electrical Work + - Batt. M

HX T T

C

Net (+/-) Pump/ Compressor Work Acc. C T

G M

C C=Compressor T=Turbine G=Generator M=Motor HX=Heat Exchanger System Boundary(b) Shaft work . Use speed and torque transducer outputs to calculate total work according to §1065.650. (1) Speed. Use a magnetic or optical shaft-position detector with a resolution of at least 60 counts per revolution, in combination with a frequency counter that rejects common-mode noise. (2) Torque. You may use a variety of methods to determine engine torque. As needed, and based on good engineering judgment, compensate for torque induced by the inertia of accelerating and decelerating components connected to the flywheel, such as the drive shaft and dynamometer rotor. Use any of the following methods to determine engine torque: (i) Measure torque by mounting a strain gage or similar instrument in-line between the engine and dynamometer. (ii) Measure torque by mounting a strain gage or similar instrument on a lever arm connected to the dynamometer housing. (iii) Calculate torque from intern al dynamometer signals, such as armature current, as long as you calibrate this measurement as described in §1065.310. (c) Electrical work . Use a watt-hour meter output to calculate total work according to §1065.650. Use a watt-hour meter that outputs active power. Watt-hour meters typically combine a Wheatstone bridge voltmeter and a Hall-effect clamp-on ammeter into a single microprocessor-based instrument that analyzes and outputs several parameters, such as alternating or direct current voltage, current, power factor, apparent power, reactive power, and active power. (d) Pump, compressor or turbine work . Use pressure transducer and flow-meter outputs to calculate total work according to §1065.650. For flow meters, see §1065.220 through §1065.248.

§1065.215 Pressure transducers, temperature sensors, and dewpoint sensors. (a) Application . Use instruments as specified in this section to measure pressure, temperature, and dewpoint. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use pressure transducers, temperature sensors, and dewpoint sensors that meet the sp ecifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your overall systems for measuring pressure, temperature, and dewpoint must meet the calibration and verifications in §1065.315. (c) Temperature . For PM-balance environments or other precision temperature measurements over a narrow temperature range, we recommend thermistors. For other applications we recommend thermocouples that are not grounded to the thermocouple sheath. You may use other temperature sensors, such as resistive temperature detectors (RTDs). (d) Pressure . Pressure transducers must be located in a temperature-controlled environment, or they must compensate for temperature changes over their expected operating range. Transducer materials must be compatible with the fluid being measured. For atmospheric pressure or other precision pressure measurements, we recommend either capacitance-type, quartz crystal, or laser-interferometer transducers. For other applications, we recommend either strain gage or capacitance-type pressure transducers. You may use other pressure-measurement instruments, such as manometers, where appropriate. (e) Dewpoint . For PM-stabilization environments, we recommend chilled-surface hygrometers, which include chilled mirror detectors and chille d surface acoustic wave (SAW) detectors. For Deleted: (kW)

Deleted: (V)

Deleted: (A)

Deleted: (pf)

Deleted: (VA)

Deleted: (VAR)

Deleted: (W)other applications, we recommend thin-film capac itance sensors. You may use other dewpoint sensors, such as a wet-bulb/dry-bul b psychrometer, where appropriate.

FLOW-RELATED MEASUREMENTS

§1065.220 Fuel flow meter. (a) Application . You may use fuel flow in combination with a chemical balance of fuel, inlet air, and raw exhaust to calculate raw exhaust flow as described in §1065.655(e), as follows: (1) Use the actual value of calculated raw e xhaust flow rate in the following cases: (i) For multiplying raw exhaust flow rate with continuously sampled concentrations. (ii) For multiplying total raw exhaust fl ow with batch-sampled concentrations. (iii) For calculating the dilution air flow for background correction as described in §1065.667. (2) In the following cases, you may use a fuel flow meter signal that does not give the actual value of raw exhaust, as long as it is linearly proportional to the exhaust molar flow rate’s actual calculated value: (i) For feedback control of a proportional sampling system, such as a partial-flow dilution system. (ii) For multiplying with continuously sampled gas c oncentrations, if the same signal is used in a chemical-balance calculation to determine work from brake-specific fuel consumption and fuel consumed. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a fuel flow meter that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. We recommend a fuel flow meter that measures mass directly, such as one that relies on gravimetric or inertial measurement principles. This may involve using a meter with one or more scales for weighing fuel or using a Coriolis meter. Note that your overall system for measuring fuel flow must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307 and the calibration and verifications in §1065.320. (c) Recirculating fuel . In any fuel-flow measurement, account for any fuel that bypasses the engine or returns from the engine to the fuel storage tank. (d) Flow conditioning . For any type of fuel flow meter, condition the flow as needed to prevent wakes, eddies, circulating flows, or flow pulsations from affecting the accuracy or repeatability of the meter. You may accomplish this by using a sufficient length of straight tubing (such as a length equal to at least 10 pipe diameters) or by using specially designed tubing bends, straightening fins, or pneumatic pulsation dampeners to establish a steady and predictable velocity profile upstream of the meter. Condition the flow as needed to prevent any gas bubbles in the fuel from affecting the fuel meter.

§1065.225 Intake-air flow meter. (a) Application . You may use an intake-air flow meter in combination with a chemical balance of fuel, inlet air, and exhaust to calculate raw exhaust flow as described in §1065. 655(e) and (f)

, as follows: (1) Use the actual value of calculated raw exhaust in the following cases: (i) For multiplying raw exhaust flow rate with continuously sampled concentrations. (ii) For multiplying total raw exhaust fl ow with batch-sampled concentrations. (iii) For verifying minimum dilution ratio for PM batch sampling as described in §1065.546. Deleted: raw

Deleted: 650(iv) For calculating the dilution air flow for background correction as described in §1065.667. (2) In the following cases, you may use an intake-air flow meter signal that does not give the actual value of raw exhaust, as long as it is linearly proportional to the exhaust flow rate’s actual calculated value: (i) For feedback control of a proportional sampling system, such as a partial-flow dilution system. (ii) For multiplying with continuously sampled gas c oncentrations, if the same signal is used in a chemical-balance calculation to determine work from brake-specific fuel consumption and fuel consumed. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use an intake-air flow meter that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. This may include a laminar flow element, an ultrasonic flow meter, a subsonic venturi, a thermal-mass meter, an averaging Pitot tube, or a hot-wire anemometer. Note that your overall system for measuring intake-air flow must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307 and the calibration in §1065.325. (c) Flow conditioning . For any type of intake-air flow me ter, condition the flow as needed to prevent wakes, eddies, circulating flows, or flow pulsations from affecting the accuracy or repeatability of the meter. You may accomplish th is by using a sufficient length of straight tubing (such as a length equal to at least 10 pipe diameters) or by using specially designed tubing bends, orifice plates or straightening fins to es tablish a predictable velocity profile upstream of the meter.

§1065.230 Raw exhaust flow meter. (a) Application . You may use measured raw exhaust flow, as follows: (1) Use the actual value of calculated raw exhaust in the following cases: (i) Multiply raw exhaust flow rate with continuously sampled concentrations. (ii) Multiply total raw exhaust wi th batch sampled concentrations. (2) In the following cases, you may use a raw exhaust flow meter signal that does not give the actual value of raw exhaust, as long as it is linearly proportional to the exhaust flow rate’s actual calculated value: (i) For feedback control of a proportional sampling system, such as a partial-flow dilution system. (ii) For multiplying with continuously sampled gas c oncentrations, if the same signal is used in a chemical-balance calculation to determine work from brake-specific fuel consumption and fuel consumed. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a raw-exhaust flow meter that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. This may involve using an ultrasonic flow meter, a subsonic venturi, an averaging Pitot tube, a hot-wire anemometer, or other measurement principle. This would generally not involve a la minar flow element or a thermal-mass meter. Note that your overall system for measuring raw exhaust flow must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307 and the calibration and verifications in §1065.330. Any raw-exhaust meter must be designed to appropriately compensate for changes in the raw exhaust’s thermodynamic, fluid, and compositional states. (c) Flow conditioning . For any type of raw exhaust flow meter, condition the flow as needed to prevent wakes, eddies, circulating flows, or flow pulsations from affecting the accuracy or Deleted: (iii) For validating minimum dilution ratio for PM batch sampling as described in §1065.546.¶ (iv) For calculating the dilution air flow for background correction as described in §1065.667.¶repeatability of the meter. You may accomplish th is by using a sufficient length of straight tubing (such as a length equal to at least 10 pipe diameters) or by using specially designed tubing bends, orifice plates or straightening fins to es tablish a predictable velocity profile upstream of the meter. (d) Exhaust cooling . You may cool raw exhaust upstream of a raw-exhaust flow meter, as long as you observe all the following provisions: (1) Do not sample PM downstream of the cooling. (2) If cooling causes exhaust temperatures above 202 °C to decrease to below 180 °C, do not sample NMHC downstream of the cooling for compression-ignition engines, two -stroke sparkignition engines, or four -stroke spark- ignition engines at or below 19 kW. (3) The cooling must not cause aqueous condensation.

§1065.240 Dilution air and diluted exhaust flow meters. (a) Application . Use a diluted exhaust flow meter to determine instantaneous diluted exhaust flow rates or total diluted exhaust flow over a test interval. You may use the difference between a diluted exhaust flow meter and a dilution air mete r to calculate raw exhaust flow rates or total raw exhaust flow over a test interval. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a diluted exhaust flow meter that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your overall system for measuring diluted exhaust flow must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307 and the calibration and verifications in §1065.340 and §1065.341. You may use the following meters: (1) For constant-volume sampling (CVS) of the total flow of diluted exhaust, you may use a critical-flow venturi (CFV) or multiple critical -flow venturis arranged in parallel, a positivedisplacement pump (PDP), a subsonic venturi (SSV), or an ultrasonic flow meter (UFM). Combined with an upstream heat exchanger, either a CFV or a PDP will also function as a passive flow controller in a CVS system. However, you may also combine any flow meter with any active flow control system to maintain proportional sampling of exhaust constituents. You may control the total flow of diluted exhaust, or one or more sample flows, or a combination of these flow controls to maintain proportional sampling. (2) For any other dilution system, you may use a laminar flow element, an ultrasonic flow meter, a subsonic venturi, a critical-flow venturi or multi ple critical-flow venturis arranged in parallel, a positive-displacement meter, a thermal-mass mete r, an averaging Pitot tube, or a hot-wire
anemometer. (c) Flow conditioning . For any type of diluted exhaust flow meter, condition the flow as needed to prevent wakes, eddies, circulating flows, or flow pulsations from affecting the accuracy or repeatability of the meter. For some meters , you may accomplish this by using a sufficient length of straight tubing (such as a length equa l to at least 10 pipe diameters) or by using specially designed tubing bends, orifice plates or straightening fins to establish a predictable velocity profile upstream of the meter. (d) Exhaust cooling . You may cool diluted exhaust upstream of a dilute-exhaust flow meter, as long as you observe all the following provisions: (1) Do not sample PM downstream of the cooling. Deleted: 2

Deleted: and

Deleted: 4

Deleted: spark

Deleted: If

Deleted: causes

Deleted: , do not sample NO x downstream of the cooling unless the cooler meets the performance verification in §1065.376

Deleted: ¶ (4) If cooling causes aqueous condensation before the flow reaches a flow meter, measure dewpoint, T dew

and pressure, p total at the flow meter inlet. Use these values in emission calculations according to §1065.650.(2) If cooling causes exhaust temperatures above 202 °C to decrease to below 180 °C, do not sample NMHC downstream of the cooling for compression-ignition engines, two -stroke sparkignition engines, or four- stroke spark- ignition engines at or below 19 kW. (3) The cooling must not cause aqueous condensation as described in §1065.140(c)(6)

. §1065.245 Sample flow meter for batch sampling. (a) Application . Use a sample flow meter to determine sample flow rates or total flow sampled into a batch sampling system over a test interval. You may use the difference between a diluted exhaust sample flow meter and a dilution air meter to calculate raw exhaust flow rates or total raw exhaust flow over a test interval. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a sample flow meter that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. This may involve a laminar flow element, an ultrasonic flow meter, a subsonic venturi, a critical-flow venturi or multiple criti cal-flow venturis arranged in parallel, a positive-displacement meter, a ther mal-mass meter, an averaging Pitot tube, or a hot-wire anemometer. Note that your overall syst em for measuring sample flow must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. For the special case where CFVs are used for both the diluted exhaust and sample-flow measurements and their upstream pressures and temperatures remain similar during testing, you do not have to quantify the flow rate of the sample-flow CFV. In this special case, the sample-flow CFV inhere ntly flow-weights the batch sample relative to the diluted exhaust CFV. (c) Flow conditioning . For any type of sample flow meter, condition the flow as needed to prevent wakes, eddies, circulating flows, or flow pulsations from affecting the accuracy or repeatability of the meter. For some meters , you may accomplish this by using a sufficient length of straight tubing (such as a length equa l to at least 10 pipe diameters) or by using specially designed tubing bends, orifice plates or straightening fins to establish a predictable velocity profile upstream of the meter.

§1065.248 Gas divider. (a) Application . You may use a gas divider to blend calibration gases. (b) Component requirements . Use a gas divider that blends gases to the specifications of §1065.750 and to the flow-weighted concentrations expected during testing. You may use critical-flow gas dividers, capillary-tube gas divide rs, or thermal-mass-meter gas dividers. Note that your overall gas-divider system must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307.

CO AND CO 2 MEASUREMENTS

§1065.250 Nondispersive infrared analyzer. (a) Application . Use a nondispersive infrared (NDIR) analyzer to measure CO and CO 2 concentrations in raw or diluted exhaust for either batch or continuous sampling. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use an NDIR analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your NDIR-based system must meet the calibration and verifications in §§1065.350 and 1065.355 and it must also meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. Deleted: 2

Deleted: and 4-

Deleted: spark

Deleted: If

Deleted: causes
Deleted: , do not sample NO
x downstream of the cooling unless the cooler meets the performance verification in §1065.376

Deleted: ¶ (4) If cooling causes aqueous condensation before the flow reaches a flow meter, measure dewpoint, T dew

and pressure, p total at the flow meter inlet. Use these values in emission calculations according to §1065.650.

Deleted: You may use an NDIR analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.HYDROCARBON MEASUREMENTS

§1065.260 Flame-ionization detector. (a) Application . Use a flame-ionization detector (FID) analyzer to measure hydrocarbon concentrations in raw or diluted exhaust for either batch or continuous sampling. Determine hydrocarbon concentrations on a carbon number basis of one, C 1 . For measuring THC or THCE you must use a FID analyzer. For measuring CH 4 you must meet the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section. See subpart I of this part for special provisions that apply to measuring hydrocarbons when testing with oxygenated fuels. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a FID analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your FID-based system for measuring THC, THCE, or CH 4 must meet all the verifications for hydrocarbon measurement in subpart D of this part, and it must also meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. (c) Heated FID analyzers . For measuring THC or THCE from compression-ignition engines, two-stroke spark-ignition engines, and four-stroke spark-ignition engines at or below 19 kW, you must use heated FID analyzers that maintain all surfaces that are exposed to emissions at a temperature of (191 ±11) °C. (d) FID fuel and burner air . Use FID fuel and burner air that meet the specifications of §1065.750. Do not allow the FID fuel and burner air to mix before entering the FID analyzer to ensure that the FID analyzer operates with a diffusion flame and not a premixed flame. (e) NMHC and NMOG . For demonstrating compliance with NMHC standards, you may either measure THC and CH 4 and determine NMHC as described in §1065.660(b)(2) or (3), or you may measure THC and determine NMHC mass as described in §1065.660(b)(1). See 40 CFR 1066.665 for methods to demonstrate compliance with NMOG standards for vehicle testing. (f) CH 4 . For reporting CH 4 or for demonstrating compliance with CH 4 standards, you may use a FID analyzer with a nonmethane cutter as described in §1065.265 or you may use a GC-FID as described in §1065.267. Determine CH 4 as described in §1065.660(c).

§1065.265 Nonmethane cutter. (a) Application . You may use a nonmethane cutter to measure CH 4 with a FID analyzer. A nonmethane cutter oxidizes all nonmethane hydrocarbons to CO 2 and H 2 O. You may use a nonmethane cutter for raw or diluted exhaust for batch or continuous sampling. (b) System performance . Determine nonmethane-cutter performance as described in §1065.365 and use the results to calculate CH 4 or NMHC emissions in §1065.660. (c) Configuration . Configure the nonmethane cutter with a bypass line if it is needed for the verification described in §1065.365. (d) Optimization . You may optimize a nonmethane cutter to maximize the penetration of CH 4 and the oxidation of all other hydrocarbons. You may humidify a sample and you may dilute a sample with purified air or oxygen (O 2 ) upstream of the nonmethane cutter to optimize its performance. You must account for any sample humidification and dilution in emission calculations.

§1065.267 Gas chromatograph with a flame ionization detector. Deleted: You may use a FID analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.(a) Application . You may use a gas chromatograph with a flame ionization detector (GC-FID) to measure CH 4 concentrations of diluted exhaust for batch sampling. While you may also use a nonmethane cutter to measure CH 4 , as described in §1065.265, use a reference procedure based on a gas chromatograph for comparison with any proposed alternate measurement procedure under §1065.10. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a GC-FID that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205 and that the measurement be done according to SAE J1151 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). The GC-FID must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307.

§1065.269 Photoacoustic analyzer for ethanol and methanol. (a) Application. You may use a photoacoustic an alyzer to measure ethanol and/or methanol concentrations in diluted exhaust for batch sampling. (b) Component requirements. We recommend that you use a photoacoustic analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your photoacoustic system must meet the calibration and verifications in §1065.369 and it must also meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. Use an optical wheel configuration that gives analytical priority to measurement of the least stable components in the sample. Select a sample integration time of at least 5 seconds. Take into account sample chamber and sample line volumes when determining flush times for your instrument.

NO x AND N 2 O MEASUREMENTS

§1065.270 Chemiluminescent detector. (a) Application . You may use a chemiluminescent detector (CLD) to measure NO x concentration in raw or diluted exhaust for batch or continuous sampling. We generally accept a CLD for NO x measurement, even though it measures only NO and NO 2 , when coupled with an NO 2 -to-NO converter, since conventional engine s and aftertreatment systems do not emit significant amounts of NO x species other than NO and NO 2 . Measure other NO x species if required by the standard-setting part. While you may also use other instruments to measure NO x , as described in §1065.272, use a reference procedure based on a chemiluminescent detector for comparison with any proposed alternate measurement procedure under §1065.10. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a CLD that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your CLD-based system must meet the quench verification in §1065.370 and it must also meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. You may use a heated or unheated CLD, and you may use a CLD that operates at atmospheric pressure or under a

vacuum. (c) NO 2 -to-NO converter . Place upstream of the CLD an internal or external NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the verification in §1065.378. Configure the converter with a bypass line if it is needed to facilitate this verification. (d) Humidity effects . You must maintain all CLD te mperatures to prevent aqueous condensation. If you remove humidity from a sample upstream of a CLD, use one of the following configurations: Deleted:

, Deleted: it

Deleted: also

Deleted: You may use a CLD that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.(1) Connect a CLD downstream of any dryer or chiller that is downstream of an NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the verification in §1065.378. (2) Connect a CLD downstream of any dryer or thermal chiller that meets the verification in §1065.376. (e) Response time . You may use a heated CLD to improve CLD response time.

§1065.272 Nondispersive ultraviolet analyzer. (a) Application . You may use a nondispersive ultraviolet (NDUV) analyzer to measure NO x concentration in raw or diluted exhaust for batch or continuous sampling. We generally accept an NDUV for NO x measurement, even though it measures only NO and NO 2 , since conventional engines and aftertreatment systems do not emit significant amounts of other NO x species. Measure other NO x species if required by the standard-se tting part. Note that good engineering judgment may preclude you from using an NDUV analyzer if sampled exhaust from test engines contains oil (or other contaminants) in sufficient ly high concentrations to interfere with proper operation. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use an NDUV analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your NDUV-based system must meet the verifications in §1065.372 and it must also meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. (c) NO 2 -to-NO converter . If your NDUV analyzer measures only NO, place upstream of the NDUV analyzer an internal or external NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the verification in §1065.378. Configure the co nverter with a bypass to facilitate this verification. (d) Humidity effects . You must maintain NDUV temperature to prevent aqueous condensation, unless you use one of the following configurations: (1) Connect an NDUV downstream of any dryer or chiller that is downstream of an NO 2 -to-NO converter that meets the verification in §1065.378. (2) Connect an NDUV downstream of any dryer or thermal chiller that meets the verification in §1065.376.

§1065.275 N 2 O measurement devices. (a) General component requirements . We recommend that you use an analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your system must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. (b) Instrument types . You may use any of the following analyzers to measure N 2 O: (1) Nondispersive infrared (NDIR) analyzer. (2) Fourier transform infrared (FTIR) analyzer . Use appropriate analytical procedures for interpretation of infrared spectra. For example, EPA Test Method 320 is considered a valid method for spectral interpretation (see http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc/methods/method320.html).(3) Laser infrared analyzer. Examples of laser infrared analyzers are pulsed-mode highresolution narrow band mid-infrared analyzers, and modulated continuous wave high-resolution narrow band mid-infrared analyzers. (4) Photoacoustic analyzer. Use an optical wheel configuration that gives analytical priority to measurement of the least stable components in the sample. Select a sample integration time of at least 5 seconds. Take into account sample chamber and sample line volumes when determining flush times for your instrument. Deleted: You may use a NDUV analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.

Deleted: You may use an NDIR analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.

Deleted: You may use an FTIR analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.

Deleted: You may use a laser infrared analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.

Deleted: You may use a photoacoustic analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.(5) Gas chromatograph analyzer. You may use a gas chromatograph with an electron-capture detector (GC-ECD) to measure N 2 O concentrations of diluted exhaust for batch sampling. (i)You may use a packed or porous layer open tubular (PLOT) column phase of suitable polarity and length to achieve adequate resolution of the N 2 O peak for analysis. Examples of acceptable columns are a PLOT column consisting of bonded polystyrene-divinylbenzene or a Porapack Q packed column. Take the column temperature profile and carrier gas selection into consideration when setting up your method to achieve adequate N 2 O peak resolution. (ii) Use good engineering judgment to zero your instrument and correct for drift. You do not need to follow the specific procedures in §§1065.530 and 1065.550(b) that would otherwise apply. For example, you may perform a span gas measurement before and after sample analysis without zeroing and use the average area counts of the pre-span and post-span measurements to generate a response factor (area counts/span gas concentration), which you then multiply by the area counts from your sample to generate the sample concentration. (c) Interference verification . Perform interference verification for NDIR, FTIR, laser infrared analyzers, and photoacoustic analyzers using the procedures of §1065.375. Interference verification is not required for GC-ECD. Certain interference gases can positively interfere with NDIR, FTIR, and photoacoustic analyzers by causing a response similar to N 2 O. When running the interference verification for these analyzers, use interference gases as follows: (1) The interference gases for NDIR analyzers are CO, CO 2 , H 2 O, CH 4 , and SO 2 . Note that interference species, with the exception of H 2 O, are dependent on the N 2 O infrared absorption band chosen by the instrument manufacturer. For each analyzer determine the N 2 O infrared absorption band. For each N 2 O infrared absorption band, use good engineering judgment to determine which interference gase s to use in the verification. (2) Use good engineering judgment to determine interference gases for FTIR, and laser infrared analyzers. Note that interference species, with the exception of H 2 O, are dependent on the N 2 O infrared absorption band chosen by the instrument manufacturer. For each analyzer determine the N 2 O infrared absorption band. For each N 2 O infrared absorption band, use good engineering judgment to determine interference ga ses to use in the verification. (3) The interference gases for photoacoustic analyzers are CO, CO 2 , and H 2 O.

O 2 MEASUREMENTS

§1065.280 Paramagnetic and magnetopneumatic O 2 detection analyzers. (a) Application . You may use a paramagnetic detection (PMD) or magnetopneumatic detection (MPD) analyzer to measure O 2 concentration in raw or diluted exhaust for batch or continuous sampling. You may use O 2 measurements with intake air or fuel flow measurements to calculate exhaust flow rate according to §1065.650. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a PMD or MPD analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that it must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307.

AIR-TO-FUEL RATIO MEASUREMENTS

§1065.284 Zirconia (ZrO 2 ) analyzer. Deleted: You may use a PMD or MPD that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.(a) Application . You may use a zirconia (ZrO 2 ) analyzer to measure air-to-fuel ratio in raw exhaust for continuous sampling. You may use O 2 measurements with intake air or fuel flow measurements to calculate exhaust flow rate according to §1065.650. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a ZrO 2 analyzer that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your ZrO 2 -based system must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307.

PM MEASUREMENTS

§1065.290 PM gravimetric balance. (a) Application . Use a balance to weigh net PM on a sa mple medium for la boratory testing. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a balance that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your balance-based system must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. If the balan ce uses internal calibration weights for routine spanning and the weights do not meet the specifications in §1065.790, the weights must be verified independently with external calibration weights meeting the requirements of §1065.790. While you may also use an inertial balance to measure PM, as described in §1065.295, use a reference procedure based on a gravimetric balance for comparison with any proposed alternate measurement procedure under §1065.10. (c) Pan design . We recommend that you use a balance pan designed to minimize corner loading of the balance, as follows: (1) Use a pan that centers the PM sample media (such as a filter) on the weighing pan. For example, use a pan in the shape of a cross that has upswept tips that center the PM sample media on the pan. (2) Use a pan that positions the PM sample as low as possible. (d) Balance configuration . Configure the balance for optimum settling time and stability at your location.

§1065.295 PM inertial balance for field-testing analysis. (a) Application . You may use an inertial balance to qu antify net PM on a sample medium for field testing. (b) Component requirements . We recommend that you use a balance that meets the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. Note that your balance-based system must meet the linearity verification in §1065.307. If the balance us es an internal calibration process for routine spanning and linearity verifications, the process must be NIST-traceable. (c) Loss correction . You may use PM loss corrections to account for PM loss in the inertial balance, including the sample handling system. (d) Deposition . You may use electrostatic deposition to collect PM, as long as its collection efficiency is at least 95%. Deleted: You may use a Zirconia analyzer that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.

Deleted: You may use an inertial PM balance that has compensation algorithms that are functions of other gaseous measurements and the engine’s known or assumed fuel properties. The target value for any compensation algorithm is 0 % (that is, no bias high and no bias low), regardless of the uncompensated signal’s bias.Subpart D—Calibrations and Verifications

§1065.301 Overview and general provisions. (a) This subpart describes required and recommended calibrations and verifications of measurement systems. See subpart C of this part for specifications that apply to individual instruments. (b) You must generally use complete measurement systems when performing calibrations or verifications in this subpart. For example, th is would generally involve evaluating instruments based on values recorded with the complete system you use for recording test data, including analog-to-digital converters. For some calibrati ons and verifications, we may specify that you disconnect part of the measurement system to introduce a simulated signal. (c) If we do not specify a calibration or verification for a portion of a measurement system, calibrate that portion of your system and verify its performance at a frequency consistent with any recommendations from the measurement-system manufacturer, consistent with good engineering judgment. (d) Use NIST-traceable standards to the tolerances we specify for calibrations and verifications. Where we specify the need to use NIST-traceable standards, you may alternatively ask for our approval to use international standards that are not NIST-traceable.

§1065.303 Summary of required calibration and verifications. The following table summarizes the required and recommended calibrations and verifications described in this subpart and indicates when these have to be performed:Table 1 of §1065.303–Summary of required calibration and verifications. Type of calibration or verification Minimum frequency 1

§1065.305: Accuracy, repeatability and noise Accuracy: Not required, but recommended for initial installation. Repeatability: Not required, but recommended for initial installation. Noise: Not required, but recommended for initial installation.

§1065.307: Linearity verification Speed: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. Torque: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. Electrical power , current, and voltage : Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. 2 Fuel flow rate: Upon initial instal lation, within 370 days before testing, and after major maintenance. Intake-air, dilution air, diluted exhaust, and batch sampler flow rates: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance, unless flow is verified by propane check or by carbon or oxygen balance. Raw exhaust flow rate: Upon initia l installation, within 185 days before testing and after major mainte nance, unless flow is verified by propane check or by carbon or oxygen balance. Gas dividers: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing, and after major maintenance. Gas analyzers (unless otherwise not ed): Upon initial installation, within 35 days before testing and after major maintenance. FTIR and photoacoustic analyzers: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. GC-ECD: Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. PM balance: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. Pressure, temperature, and dewpoint: Upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing and after major maintenance. §1065.308: Continuous gas analyzer system response and updating-recording verification—for gas analyzers not continuously compensated for other gas species Upon initial installation or after system modification that would affect
response. §1065.309: Continuous gas analyzer system-response and updating-recording verification—for gas analyzers continuously compensated for other gas species Upon initial installation or after system modification that would affect
response. §1065.310: Torque Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.315: Pressure, temperature, dewpoint Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.320: Fuel flow Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.325: Intake flow Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.330: Exhaust flow Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.340: Diluted exhaust flow (CVS) Upon initial installation and after major maintenance.
§1065.341: CVS and batch sampler verification 3 Upon initial installation, within 35 days before testing, and after major maintenance.

§1065.342 Sample dryer verification For thermal chillers: upon installation and after major maintenance. For osmotic membranes; upon installation, within 35 days of testing, and after major maintenance.

§1065.345: Vacuum leak For laboratory testing: upon initial installation of the sampling system, within 8 hours before the start of the first test interval of each duty-cycle sequence, and after maintenance such as pre-filter changes. For field testing: after each installation of the sampling system on the vehicle, prior to the start of the field test, and after maintenance such as pre-filter changes. §1065.350: CO 2 NDIR H 2 O interference Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.355: CO NDIR CO 2 and H 2 O interference Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.360: FID calibration Calibrate all FID analy zers: upon initial installation and after major Deleted: frequency a

Deleted: verification bTHC FID optimization, and THC FID verification maintenance. Optimize and determine CH 4 response for THC FID analyzers: upon initial installation and after major maintenance. Verify CH 4 response for THC FID analyzer s: upon initial installation, within 185 days before testing, and after major maintenance.

§1065.362: Raw exhaust FID O 2 interference For all FID analyzers: upon initial installation, and after major maintenance. For THC FID analyzers: upon ini tial installation, after major maintenance, and after FID optimization according to §1065.360.
§1065.365: Nonmethane cutter penetration Upon initial installation, within 185 days before testing, and after major maintenance. §1065.369: H 2 O, CO, and CO 2 interference verification for ethanol photoacoustic analyzers Upon initial installation and after major maintenance.
§1065.370: CLD CO 2 and H 2 O quench Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.372: NDUV HC and H 2 O interference Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.375: N 2 O analyzer interference Upon initial installation and after major maintenance. §1065.376: Chiller NO 2 penetration Upon initial installation and after major maintenance.
§1065.378: NO 2 -to-NO converter conversion Upon initial installation, within 35 days before testing, and after major maintenance.

§1065.390: PM balance and weighing Independent verification: upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing, and after major maintenance. Zero, span, and reference sample verifications: within 12 hours of weighing, and after major maintenance.

§1065.395: Inertial PM balance and weighing Independent verification: upon initial installation, within 370 days before testing, and after major maintenance. Other verifications: upon initial installation and after major maintenance.
1 Perform calibrations and verifications more frequently than we specify , according to measurement system manufacturer instructions and good engineering judgment.
2 Perform linearity verification either for electrical power or for current and voltage.
3 The CVS verification described in §1065.341 is not required for systems that agree within ±2 % based on a chemical balance of carbon or oxygen of the intake air, fuel, and diluted exhaust.

§1065.305 Verifications for accuracy, repeatability, and noise. (a) This section describes how to determine the accuracy, repeatabilit y, and noise of an instrument. Table 1 of §1065.205 specifies recommended values for individual instruments. (b) We do not require you to verify instrument accuracy, repeatability, or noise. However, it may be useful to consider these verifications to define a specification fo r a new instrument, to verify the performance of a new instrument upon delivery, or to troubleshoot an existing instrument. (c) In this section we use the letter “y” to denote a generic measured quantity, the superscript over-bar to denote an arithmetic mean (such as 

### y ), and the subscript “ ref ” to denote the reference quantity being measured. (d) Conduct these verifications as follows: (1) Prepare an instrument so it operates at its specified temperatures, pressures, and flows. Perform any instrument linearization or calibration procedures prescribed by the instrument manufacturer. (2) Zero the instrument as you would before an emission test by introducing a zero signal. Depending on the instrument, this may be a zero-concentration gas, a reference signal, a set of reference thermodynamic conditions, or some combination of these. For gas analyzers, use a zero gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750. Deleted: a Perform

Deleted: b(3) Span the instrument as you would before an emission test by introducing a span signal. Depending on the instrument, this may be a span-concentration gas, a reference signal, a set of reference thermodynamic conditions, or some combination of these. For gas analyzers, use a span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750. (4) Use the instrument to quantify a NIST-traceable reference quantity, y ref . For gas analyzers the reference gas must meet the specifications of §1065.750. Select a reference quantity near the mean value expected during testing. For all gas analyzers, use a quantity near the flow-weighted mean concentration expected at the standard or expected during testing, whichever is greater. For noise verification, use the same zero gas from paragraph (d)(2) of this section as the reference quantity. In all cases, allow time for the instrument to stabilize while it measures the reference quantity. Stabilization time may includ e time to purge an instrument and time to account for its response. (5) Sample and record values for 30 seconds (you may select a longer sampling period if the recording update frequency is less than 0.5 Hz), record the arithmetic mean, i y and record the standard deviation, i  of the recorded values. Refer to §1065.602 for an example of calculating
arithmetic mean and standard deviation. (6) Also, if the reference quantity is not absolu tely constant, which might be the case with a reference flow, sample and record values of y refi for 30 seconds and record the arithmetic mean of the values, ref y . Refer to §1065.602 for an example of calculating arithmetic mean. (7) Subtract the reference value, y ref (or refi y ), from the arithmetic mean, i y . Record this value as the error,  i
. (8) Repeat the steps specified in paragraphs (d)(2) through (7) of this section until you have ten arithmetic means ( 1 y , 2 y , i y ,... 10 y ), ten standard deviations, (  1 ,  2 ,  i ,...  10 ), and ten errors ( 

1 ,  2 ,  i ,...  10 ). (9) Use the following values to quantify your measurements: (i) Accuracy . Instrument accuracy is the absolute difference between the reference quantity, y ref (or ref y ), and the arithmetic mean of the ten i y values, 

### y . Refer to the example of an accuracy calculation in §1065.602. We recommend that instrument accuracy be within the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. (ii) Repeatability . Repeatability is two times the standard deviation of the ten errors (that is, repeatability = 2   ). Refer to the example of a standard-deviation calculation in §1065.602. We recommend that instrument repeatability be with in the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. (iii) Noise . Noise is two times the root-mean-square of the ten standard deviations (that is, noise = 2· rms  ) when the reference signal is a zero-quantity signal. Refer to the example of a rootmean-square calculation in §1065.602. We recommend that instrument noise be within the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205. (10) You may use a measurement instrument that does not meet the accuracy, repeatability, or noise specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205, as long as you meet the following criteria: (i) Your measurement systems meet all the other required calibration, verification, and validation specifications that apply as specified in the regulations

. Deleted: in subparts D, F, and J of this part(ii) The measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards.

§1065.307 Linearity verification. (a) Scope and frequency . Perform linearity verification on each measurement system listed in Table 1 of this section at least as frequently as in dicated in Table 1 of §1065.303, consistent with measurement system manufacturer ’s recommendations and good engineering judgment. The intent of linearity verification is to determine that a measurement system responds accurately and proportionally over the measurement range of interest. L inearity verification generally consists of introducing a series of at least 10 reference values to a measurement system. The measurement system quantifies each reference value. The measured values are then collectively compared to the reference values by using a least

- squares linear regression and the linearity criteria specified in Table 1 of this section. (b) Performance requirements . If a measurement system does not meet the applicable linearity criteria referenced in Table 1 of this section, correct the deficiency by re-ca librating, servicing, or replacing components as needed. Repeat the linearity verification after correcting the deficiency to ensure that the measurement system meets the linearity criteria. Before you may use a measurement system that does not meet linearity criteria, you must demonstrate to us that the deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards. (c) Procedure . Use the following linearity verification protocol, or use good engineering judgment to develop a different protocol that satisfies the intent of this section, as described in paragraph (a) of this section: (1) In this paragraph (c), the letter “y” denote s a generic measured quantity, the superscript overbar denote s an arithmetic mean (such as 

### y ), and the subscript “ ref ” denote s the known or reference quantity being measured. (2) Use good engineering judgment to operate a measurement system at normal operating conditions . This may include any specified adjustment or periodic calibration of the measurement system. (3) If applicable, z ero the instrument as you would before an emission test by introducing a zero signal. Depending on the instrument, this may be a zero-concentration gas, a reference signal, a set of reference thermodynamic conditions, or some combination of these. For gas analyzers, use a zero gas that meets the specifications of §106 5.750 and introduce it directly at the analyzer port. (4) If applicable, s pan the instrument as you would before an emission test by introducing a span signal. Depending on the instrument, this may be a span-concentration gas, a reference signal, a set of reference thermodynamic conditions, or some combination of these. For gas analyzers, use a span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750 and introduce it directly at the analyzer port. (5) If applicable, a fter spanning the instrument, check zero with the same signal you used in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. Based on the zero reading, use good engineering judgment to determine whether or not to rezero and or re-span the instrument before continuing

. (6) For all measured quantities, use the instrument manufacturer ’s recommendations and good engineering judgment to select reference values, y refi , that cover a range of values that you expect Deleted: a

Deleted: Note that this linearity verification may replace requirements we previously referred to as “calibrations”.

Deleted: a
Deleted: A l

Deleted:

Deleted: we use
Deleted: to

Deleted: to

Deleted: to

Deleted: Operate

Deleted: its specified

Deleted: temperatures, pressures, and flows

Deleted: Z

Deleted: S

Deleted: A

Deleted: proceeding to the next stepwould prevent extrapolation beyond these values during emission testing. We recommend selecting a zero reference signal as one of the reference values for the linearity verification. For pressure, temperature, dewpoint, power, current, voltage, photoacoustic analyzers, and GC-ECD linearity verifications, we recommend at least three reference values. For all other linearity verifications select at least ten reference values. (7) Use the instrument manufacturer ’s recommendations and good engineering judgment to select the order in which you will introduce the series of reference values. For example

, you may select the reference values randomly to avoid correlation with previous measurements and to avoid hysteresis; you may select reference values in ascending or descending order to avoid long settling times of reference signals ; or you may select values to ascend and then descend to incorporate the effects of any instrument hysteresis into the linearity verification. (8) Generate reference quantities as described in paragraph (d) of this section. For gas analyzers, use gas concentrations known to be within the specifications of §1065.750 and introduce them directly at the analyzer port. (9) Introduce a reference signal to the measurement instrument. (10) Allow time for the instrument to stabilize while it measures the value at the reference condition . Stabilization time may include time to purge an instrument and time to account for its
response. (11) At a recording frequency of at least f Hz, specified in Table 1 of §1065.205, measure the value at the reference condition for 30 seconds (you may select a longer sampling period if the recording update frequency is less than 0.5 Hz) and record the arithmetic mean of the recorded values, i y . Refer to §1065.602 for an example of calculating an arithmetic mean. (12) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (c)(9) though (11) of this section until measurements are complete at each of the reference conditions

. (13) Use the arithmetic means, i y , and reference values, y refi , to calculate least-squares linear regression parameters and statistical values to compare to the minimum performance criteria specified in Table 1 of this section. Use th e calculations described in §1065.602. Using good engineering judgment, you may weight the results of individual data pairs (i.e. ( y refi , i y )), in the linear regression calculations. (d) Reference signals . This paragraph (d) describes recommended methods for generating reference values for the linearity-verification protocol in paragraph (c) of this section. Use reference values that simulate actual values, or introduce an actual value and measure it with a reference-measurement system. In the latter case, the reference value is the value reported by the reference-measurement system. Reference values and reference-measurement systems must be NIST-traceable. We recommend using calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty, if not specified elsewhere in this part 1065. Use the following recommended methods to generate reference values or use good engineering judgment to select a different reference: (1) Speed . Run the engine or dynamometer at a series of steady-state speeds and use a strobe, photo tachometer, or laser tachometer to record reference speeds. (2) Torque . Use a series of calibration weights and a calibration lever arm to simulate engine torque. You may instead use the engine or dynamo meter itself to generate a nominal torque that is measured by a reference load cell or provi ng ring in series with the torque-measurement Deleted: of

Deleted:

, Deleted:

, Deleted: as another example

Deleted: which might

Deleted: reference

Deleted: reference

Deleted: all

Deleted: quantities are measured

Deleted: otherwise in other sections of

Deleted: a

Deleted: asystem. In this case

, use the reference load cell measurement as the reference value. Refer to §1065.310 for a torque-calibration procedure similar to the linearity verification in this section. (3) Electrical power , current, and voltage

. You must perform linearity verification for either electrical power, or for current and voltage. Perform linearity verifications using a reference meter and controlled sources of current and voltage. We recommend using a complete calibration system that is suitable for th e electrical power distribution industry. (4) Fuel rate . Operate the engine at a series of constant fuel-flow rates or re-circulate fuel back to a tank through the fuel flow meter at different flow rates. Use a gravimetric reference measurement (such as a scale, balance, or mass comparator) at the inlet to the fuel-measurement system. Use a stopwatch or timer to measure the time intervals over which reference masses of fuel are introduced to the fuel measurement system. The reference fuel mass divided by the time interval is the reference fuel flow rate. (5) Flow rates—inlet air, dilution air, dilu ted exhaust, raw exhaust, or sample flow . Use a reference flow meter with a blower or pump to si mulate flow rates. Use a restrictor, diverter valve, a variable-speed blower or a variable-speed pump to control the range of flow rates. Use the reference meter’s response as the reference values. (i) Reference flow meters . Because the flow range requirements for these various flows arelarge, we allow a variety of reference meters. For example, for diluted exhaust flow for a fullflow dilution system, we recommend a reference subsonic venturi flow meter with a restrictor valve and a blower to simulate flow rates. For in let air, dilution air, diluted exhaust for partialflow dilution, raw exhaust, or sample flow, we allow reference meters such as critical flow orifices, critical flow venturis, laminar flow el ements, master mass flow standards, or Roots meters. Make sure the reference meter is calibrated and its calibration is NIST-traceable. If you use the difference of two flow measurements to determine a net flow rate, you may use one of the measurements as a reference for the other. (ii) Reference flow values . Because the reference flow is not absolutely constant, sample and record values of refi n  for 30 seconds and use the arithmetic mean of the values, ref n  , as the reference value. Refer to §1065.602 for an example of calculating arithmetic mean. (6) Gas division . Use one of the two reference signals: (i) At the outlet of the gas-division system, co nnect a gas analyzer that meets the linearity verification described in this section and has not been linearized with the gas divider being verified. For example, verify the linearity of an analyzer using a series of reference analytical gases directly from compressed gas cylinders th at meet the specifications of §1065.750. We recommend using a FID analyzer or a PMD or MPD O 2 analyzer because of their inherent linearity. Operate this analyzer consistent wi th how you would operate it during an emission test. Connect a span gas to the gas-divider inlet. Use the gas-division system to divide the span gas with purified air or nitrogen. Select gas divi sions that you typically use. Use a selected gas division as the measured value. Use the analyzer response divided by the span gas concentration as the reference gas-division value. Because the instrument response is not absolutely constant, sample and record values of x refi for 30 seconds and use the arithmetic mean of the values, ref x , as the reference value. Refer to §1065.602 for an example of calculating arithmetic mean. (ii) Using good engineering judgment and the gas divider manufacturer ’s recommendations, use one or more reference flow meters to measure the flow rates of the gas divider and verify the gas-division value. Deleted: Use a controlled source of current and a watt-hour standard reference meter. Complete calibration systems that contain a current source and a reference watt-hour meter are commonly used in the electrical power distribution industry and are therefore commercially available.

Deleted: by the flow-meter manufacturer(7) Continuous constituent concentration . For reference values, use a series of gas cylinders of known gas concentration or use a gas-division system that is known to be linear with a span gas. Gas cylinders, gas-division systems, and span gase s that you use for reference values must meet the specifications of §1065.750. (8) Temperature. You may perform the linearity verification for temperature measurement systems with thermocouples, RTDs, and thermistor s by removing the sensor from the system and using a simulator in its place. Use a NIST-traceable simulator that is independently calibrated and, as appropriate, cold-junction

- compensated. The simulator uncertainty scaled to absolute temperature must be less than 0.5 % of T max . If you use this option, you must use sensors that the supplier states are accurate to better than 0.5 % of T max compared with their standard calibration

curve. (9) Mass . For linearity verification for gravimetric PM balances, use external calibration weights that that meet the requirements in §1065.790. (e) Measurement systems that require linearity verification . Table 1 of this section indicates measurement systems that require linearity veri fication, subject to the following provisions: (1) Perform linearity verificatio n more frequently based on th e instrument manufacturer’s recommendation or good engineering judgment. (2) The expression “ x min ” refers to the reference value used during linearity verification that is closest to zero. This is the value used to calculate the first tolerance in Table 1 of this section using the intercept, a 0 . Note that this value may be zero, positive, or negative depending on the reference values. For example, if the reference values chosen to validate a pressure transducer vary from -10 to -1 kPa, x min is -1 kPa. If the reference values used to validate a temperature device vary from 290 to 390 K, x min is 290 K. (3) The expression “max” generally refers to the absolute value of the reference value used during linearity verification that is furthest from zero. This is the value used to scale the first and third tolerances in Table 1 of this section using a 0 and SEE . For example, if the reference values chosen to validate a pressure transducer vary from -10 to -1 kPa, then p max is +10 kPa. If the reference values used to validate a temperature device vary from 290 to 390 K, then T max is 390 K. For gas dividers where “max” is expressed as, x max / x span ; x max is the maximum gas concentration used during the verification, x span is the undivided, undiluted, span gas concentration, and the resulting ratio is the maximum divider point reference value used during the verification (typically 1). The following are special cases where “max” refers to a different value: (i) For linearity verification with a PM balance, m max refers to the typical mass of a PM filter. (ii) For linearity verification of torque on the engine’s primary output shaft, T max refers to the manufacturer’s specified engine torque peak valu e of the lowest torque engine to be tested. (4) The specified ranges are inclusive. For example, a specified range of 0.98-1.02 for a 1 means 0.98  a 1  1.02. (5) L inearity verification is optional for systems that pass the flow-rate verification for diluted exhaust as described in §1065.341 (the propane check) or for systems that agree within ±2 % based on a chemical balance of carbon or oxygen of the intake air, fuel, and exhaust. (6) You must meet the a 1 criteria for these quantities only if the absolute value of the quantity is required, as opposed to a signal that is only linearly proportional to the actual value. (7) Linearity verification is required for the following temperature measurements: Deleted:

Deleted: s
Deleted: a

Deleted: the

Deleted: the

Deleted: These l

Deleted: s are

Deleted: checks are(i) The following temperature measurements always require linearity verification : (A) Air intake. (B) Aftertreatment bed(s), for engines tested with aftertreatment devices subject to cold-start testing. (C) Dilution air for gaseous and PM sampling, including CVS, double-dilution, and partial-flow systems. (D) PM sample. (E) Chiller sample, for gaseous sampling systems th at use thermal chillers to dry samples and use chiller temperature to calculate the dewpoint at th e outlet of the chiller. For your testing, if you choose to use a high alarm temperature setpoint fo r the chiller temperature as a constant value in determining the amount of water removed from the emission sample, you may use good engineering judgment to verify the accuracy of the high alarm temperature setpoint instead of linearity verification on the chiller temperature. To verify that the alarm trip point value is no less than 2.0 °C below the refere nce value at the trip point, w e recommend that you input a reference simulated temperature si gnal below the alarm trip point and increase this signal until the high alarm trips

. (ii) Linearity verification is required for the following temperature measurements if these temperature measurements are specified by the engine manufacturer: (A) Fuel inlet. (B) Air outlet to the test cell’s charge air cooler air outlet, for engines tested with a laboratory heat exchanger that simulates an installed charge air cooler. (C) Coolant inlet to the test cell’s charge air cooler, for engines tested with a laboratory heat exchanger that simulates an installed charge air cooler. (D) Oil in the sump/pan. (E) Coolant before the thermostat, for liquid-cooled engines. (8) Linearity verification is required for the following pressure measurements: (i) The following pressure measurements always require linearity verification : (A) Air intake restriction. (B) Exhaust back pressure as required in §1065.130(h)

. (C) Barometer. (D) CVS inlet gage pressure where the raw exhaust enters into the tunnel

. (E) Sample dryer, for gaseous sampling systems that use either osmotic-membrane or thermal chillers to dry samples. For your testing, if you choose to use a low alarm pressure setpoint for the sample dryer pressure as a constant value in determining the amount of water removed from the emission sample, you may use good engineering judgment to verify the accuracy of the low alarm pressure setpoint instead of linearity verification on the sample dryer pressure. To verify that the trip point value is no more than 4.0 kPa above the reference value at the trip point, we recommend that you input a reference pressure signal above the alarm trip point and decrease this signal until the low alarm trips. (ii) Linearity verification is required for the following pressure measurements if these pressure measurements are specified by the engine manufacturer: (A) The test cell’s charge air cooler and interconnecting pipe pressure drop, for turbo-charged engines tested with a laboratory heat exchanger that simulates an installed charge air cooler. (B) Fuel outlet. Deleted: checks

Deleted: , if applicable

Deleted: calculations in §1065.645,

Deleted: in lieu

Deleted: the

Deleted: W

Deleted:

, Deleted: , and verify that the alarm trip point value is no less than 2.0 °C below the reference value at the trip point.

Deleted: checks are

Deleted: checks are

Deleted: checks

Deleted: calculations in §1065.645,

Deleted: in lieu

Deleted: the

Deleted: We

Deleted:

, Deleted: , and verify that the trip point value is no more than 4.0 kPa above the reference value at the trip point

Deleted: checks areTable 1 of §1065.307–Measurement systems that require linearity verification.

Measurement system Quantity Linearity criteria | x min ( a 1 -1)+ a 0 | a 1 SEE r 2
Speed f n ≤ 0.05 % · f nmax 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · nmax f ≥ 0.990 Torque T ≤ 1 % · max T 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max T ≥ 0.990 Electrical power P ≤ 1 % · max P 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max P ≥ 0.990

Current I ≤ 1 % · max I 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max I ≥ 0.990 Voltage U ≤ 1 % · max U 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max U ≥ 0.990
Fuel flow rate m  ≤ 1 % · max m  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max m  ≥ 0.990
Intake-air flow rate 1 n  ≤ 1 % · max n  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max n  ≥ 0.990

Dilution air flow rate 1 n  ≤ 1 % · max n  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max n  ≥ 0.990

Diluted exhaust flow rate 1 n  ≤ 1 % · max n  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max n  ≥ 0.990

Raw exhaust flow rate 1 n  ≤ 1 % · max n  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max n  ≥ 0.990

Batch sampler flow rates 1 n  ≤ 1 % · max n  0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · max n  ≥ 0.990

Gas dividers x/x s p an ≤ 0.5 % · x max /x span 0.98-1.02 ≤ 2 % · x max /x span ≥ 0.990 Gas analyzers for laboratory testing x ≤ 0.5 % · max x 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · max x ≥ 0.998

Gas analyzers for field testing x ≤ 1 % · max x 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · max x ≥ 0.998

PM balance m ≤ 1 % · max m 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · max m ≥ 0.998

Pressures p ≤ 1 % · max p 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · max p ≥ 0.998 Dewpoint for intake air, PM-stabilization and balance environments T dew ≤ 0.5 % · dewmax T 0.99-1.01 ≤ 0.5 % · dewmax T ≥ 0.998

Other dewpoint
measurements T dew ≤ 1 % · dewmax T 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · dewmax T ≥ 0.998

Analog-to-digital conversion of temperature signals T ≤ 1 % · max T 0.99-1.01 ≤ 1 % · max T ≥ 0.998

1 For flow meters that determine volumetric flow rate, std V  , you may substitute std V  for n  as the quantity and substitute stdmax V 

for max n 

.
§1065.308 Continuous gas analyzer system-res ponse and updating-recording verification— for gas analyzers not continuously compensated for other gas species. (a) Scope and frequency . This section describes a verification procedure for system response and updating-recording frequency for continuous gas analyzers that output a gas species mole fraction (i.e., concentration) using a single gas detector, i.e., gas analyzers not continuously compensated for other gas species measured w ith multiple gas detector s. See §1065.309 for verification procedures that apply to continuous gas analyzers that are continuously compensated for other gas species measured with multiple gas detectors. Perform this verification to determine the system response of the continuous gas analyzer and its sampling system. This Deleted: sverification is required for continuous gas analyzer s used for transient or ramped-modal testing. You need not perform this verification for batch gas analyzer systems or for continuous gas analyzer systems that are used only for discrete-mode testing. Perform this verification after initial installation (i.e., test cell commissioning) a nd after any modifications to the system that would change system response. For example, perform this verification if you add a significant volume to the transfer lines by increasing their length or adding a filter; or if you reduce the frequency at which the gas analyzer updates its output or the frequency at which you sample and record gas-analyzer concentrations. (b) Measurement principles . This test verifies that the updating and recording frequencies match the overall system response to a rapid change in the value of concentrations at the sample probe. Gas analyzers and their sampling systems must be optimized such that their overall response to a rapid change in concentration is updated and recorded at an appropriate frequency to prevent loss of information. This test also verifies that the measurement system meets a minimum response time. You may use the results of this test to determine transformation time, t 50 , for the purposes of time alignment of continuous data in accordance with §1065.650(c)(2)(i). You may also use an alternate procedure to determine t 50 in accordance with good engineering judgment. Note that any such procedure for determining t 50 must account for both transport delay and analyzer response time. (c) System requirements . Demonstrate that each continuous analyzer has adequate update and recording frequencies and has a minimum rise time and a minimum fall time during a rapid change in gas concentration. You must meet one of the following criteria: (1) The product of the mean rise time, t 10-90 , and the frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5, and the product of the mean fall time, t 90-10 , and the frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5. If the recording frequency is different than the analyzer’s output update frequency, you must use the lower of these two frequencies for this verifi cation, which is referred to as the updatingrecording frequency. This verification ap plies to the nominal updating and recording frequencies. This criterion makes no assumption regarding the frequency content of changes in emission concentrations during emission testing; th erefore, it is valid for any testing. Also, the mean rise time must be at or below 10 seconds and the mean fall time must be at or below 10 seconds. (2) The frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5 Hz. This criterion assumes that the frequency content of significant changes in emission concentrations during emission testing do not ex ceed 1 Hz. Also, the mean rise time must be at or below 10 seconds and the mean fall time must be at or below 10 seconds. (3) You may use other criteria if we approve the criteria in advance. (4) You may meet the overall PEMS verification in §1065.920 instead of the verification in this section for field testing with PEMS. (d) Procedure . Use the following procedure to verify the response of each continuous gas analyzer: (1) Instrument setup . Follow the analyzer manufacturer’s start-up and operating instructions. Adjust the measurement system as needed to optimize performance. Run this verification with the analyzer operating in the same manner you w ill use for emission testing. If the analyzer shares its sampling system with other analyzers, and if gas flow to the other analyzers will affectthe system response time, then start up and operate the other analyzers while running this verification test. You may run this verification test on multiple analyzers sharing the same sampling system at the same time. If you us e any analog or real-tim e digital filters during emission testing, you must operate those filters in the same manner during this verification. (2) Equipment setup . We recommend using minimal lengths of gas transfer lines between all connections and fast-acting three- way valves (2 inlets, 1 outlet) to control the flow of zero and blended span gases to the sample system’s probe inlet or a tee near the outlet of the probe. If you inject the gas at a tee near the outlet of the probe, you may correct the transformation time, t 50 , for an estimate of the transport time from the probe inlet to the tee. Normally the gas flow rate is higher than the sample flow rate and the excess is overflowed out the inlet of the probe. If the gas flow rate is lower than the sample flow rate, the gas concentrations must be adjusted to account for the dilution from ambient air drawn into the probe. We recommend you use the final, stabilized analyzer reading as the final gas concentration. Select span gases for the species being measured. You may use binary or multi-gas span gases. You may use a gas blending or mixing device to blend span gases. A gas blending or mixing device is recommended when blending span gases diluted in N 2 with span gases diluted in air. You may use a multi-gas span gas, such as NO-CO-CO 2 -C 3 H 8 -CH 4 , to verify multiple analyzers at the same time. If you use standard binary span gases, you must run separate response tests for each analyzer. In designing your experimental setup, avoid pressure pulsat ions due to stopping the flow through the gasblending device. The change in gas concentration must be at least 20 % of the analyzer’s range. (3) Data collection . (i) Start the flow of zero gas. (ii) Allow for stabilization, accounting for tran sport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full
response. (iii) Start recording data. For th is verification you must record data at a frequency greater than or equal to that of the updating-recording frequency used during emission testing. You may not use interpolation or filtering to alter the recorded values. (iv) Switch the flow to allow the blended span gases to flow to the analyzer. If you intend to use the data from this test to determine t 50 for time alignment, record this time as t 0
. (v) Allow for transport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full response. (vi) Switch the flow to allow zero gas to flow to the analyzer. If you intend to use the data from this test to determine t 50 for time alignment, record this time as t 100
. (vii) Allow for transport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full response. (viii) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (d)(3)(iv) th rough (vii) of this section to record seven full cycles, ending with zero gas flowing to the analyzers. (ix) Stop recording. (e) Performance evaluation . (1) If you choose to demonstrate compliance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, use the data from paragraph (d)(3) of this section to calcu late the mean rise time,
t 10-90 , and mean fall time, t 90-10 , for each of the analyzers being verified. You may use interpolation between recorded values to de termine rise and fall times. If the recording frequency used during emission testing is different from the analyzer’s output update frequency, you must use the lower of these two frequencies for this verification. Multiply these times (in seconds) by their respective up dating-recording frequencies in He rtz (1/second). The resulting product must be at least 5 for both rise time and fall time. If either value is less than 5, increase the updating-recording frequency, or adjust the flows or design of the sampling system to Deleted: probe

Deleted: probeincrease the rise time and fall time as needed. You may also configure analog or digital filters before recording to increase rise and fall times. In no case may the mean rise time or mean fall time be greater than 10 seconds. (2) If a measurement system fails the criterion in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, ensure that signals from the system are updated and recorded at a frequency of at least 5 Hz. In no case may the mean rise time or mean fall time be greater than 10 seconds. (3) If a measurement system fails the criteria in paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section, you may use the measurement system only if the deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable standards. (f) Transformation time, t 50 , determination . If you choose to determine t 50 for purposes of time alignment using data generated in paragraph (d)(3) of this section, calculate the mean t 0-50 and the mean t 100-50 from the recorded data. Average these two values to determine the final t 50 for the purposes of time alignment in accordance with §1065.650(c)(2)(i). (g) Optional procedure. Instead of using a three-way valve to switch between zero and span gases, you may use a fast-acting two-way valve to switch sampling between ambient air and span gas at the probe inlet. For this alternate procedure, the following provisions apply: (1) If your probe is sampling from a continuou sly flowing gas stream (e.g. a CVS tunnel), you may adjust the span gas flow rate to be different than the sample flow rate. (2) If your probe is sampling from a gas stream that is not continuously flowing (e.g. a raw exhaust stack), you must adjust the span gas flow rate to be less than the sample flow rate so ambient air is always being drawn into the probe inlet. This avoids errors associated with overflowing span gas out of the probe inlet an d drawing it back in wh en sampling ambient air. (3) When sampling ambient air or ambient air mixed with span gas, all of the analyzer readings must be stable within ±0.5 % of the target gas concentration step size. If any analyzer reading is outside the specified range, you must resolve the problem and verify that all the analyzer readings meet this specification. (4) For oxygen analyzers, you may use purified N 2 as the zero gas and ambient air (plus purified N 2 if needed) as the reference gas. Perform the verification with seven repeat measurements that each consist of stabilizing with purified N 2 , switching to ambient air and observing the analyzer’s rise and stabilized reading, followed by switching back to purified N 2 and observing the analyzer’s fall and stabilized reading.

§1065.309 Continuous gas analyzer system-res ponse and updating-recording verification— for gas analyzers continuously compensated for other gas species. (a) Scope and frequency . This section describes a verification procedure for system response and updating-recording frequency for continuous gas analyzers that output a single gas species mole fraction (i.e., concentration) based on a c ontinuous combination of multiple gas species measured with multiple detectors (i.e., gas analyzers continuously compensated for other gas species). See §1065.308 for verification procedur es that apply to continuous gas analyzers that are not continuously compensated for other gas speci es or that use only one detector for gaseous species. Perform this verification to determine the system response of the continuous gas analyzer and its sampling system. This verificati on is required for continuous gas analyzers used for transient or ramped-modal testing. You need not perform this verification for batch gas analyzers or for continuous gas analyzers that are used only for discrete-mode testing. For thischeck we consider water vapor a gaseous constituent. This verification does not apply to any processing of individual analyzer signals that are time- aligned to their t 50 times and were verified according to §1065.308. For example, this veri fication does not apply to correction for water removed from the sample done in post-processing according to §1065.659 (40 CFR 1066.640 for vehicle testing) and it does not apply to NMHC determination from THC and CH 4 according to §1065.660. Perform this verification after init ial installation (i.e., test cell commissioning) and after any modifications to the system that would change the system response. (b) Measurement principles . This procedure verifies that the updating and recording frequencies match the overall system response to a rapid change in the value of concentrations at the sample probe. It indirectly verifies the time-alignment and uniform response of all the continuous gas detectors used to generate a continuously combined/compensated concentration measurement signal. Gas analyzer systems must be optimized such that their overall response to rapid change in concentration is updated and recorded at an appropriate frequency to prevent loss of information. This test also verifies that the measurement system meets a minimum response time. For this procedure, ensure that all compensation algorithms and humidity corrections are turned on. You may use the results of this test to determine transformation time, t 50 , for the purposes of time alignment of continuous data in accordance with §1065.650(c)(2)(i). You may also use an alternate procedure to determine t 50 consistent with good engineering judgment. Note that any such procedure for determining t 50 must account for both transport delay and analyzer response time. (c) System requirements . Demonstrate that each continuously combined/compensated concentration measurement has adequate updating and recording frequencies and has a minimum rise time and a minimum fall time during a system response to a rapid change in multiple gas concentrations, including H 2 O concentration if H 2 O compensation is applied. You must meet one of the following criteria: (1) The product of the mean rise time, t 10-90 , and the frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5, and the product of the mean fall time, t 90-10 , and the frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5. If the recording frequency is different than the update frequency of the continuously combined/compensated signal, you must use th e lower of these two frequencies for this verification. This criterion makes no assumption regarding the frequency content of changes in emission concentrations during emission testing; th erefore, it is valid for any testing. Also, the mean rise time must be at or below 10 seconds and the mean fall time must be at or below 10 seconds. (2) The frequency at which the system records an updated concentration must be at least 5 Hz. This criterion assumes that the frequency content of significant changes in emission concentrations during emission testing do not ex ceed 1 Hz. Also, the mean rise time must be at or below 10 seconds and the mean fall time must be at or below 10 seconds. (3) You may use other criteria if we approve them in advance. (4) You may meet the overall PEMS verification in §1065.920 instead of the verification in this section for field testing with PEMS. (d) Procedure . Use the following procedure to verify the response of each continuously compensated analyzer (verify the combined signal, not each individual continuously combined concentration signal): Deleted: time

Deleted:(1) Instrument setup . Follow the analyzer manufacturer’s start-up and operating instructions. Adjust the measurement system as needed to optimize performance. Run this verification with the analyzer operating in the same manner you w ill use for emission testing. If the analyzer shares its sampling system with other analyzers, and if gas flow to the other analyzers will affect the system response time, then start up and operate the other analyzers while running this verification test. You may run this verification test on multiple analyzers sharing the same sampling system at the same time. If you us e any analog or real-tim e digital filters during emission testing, you must operate those filters in the same manner during this verification. (2) Equipment setup . We recommend using minimal lengths of gas transfer lines between all connections and fast-acting three-way valves (2 in lets, 1 outlet) to control the flow of zero and blended span gases to the sample system’s probe inlet or a tee near the outlet of the probe. If you inject the gas at a tee near the outlet of the probe, you may correct the transformation time, t 50 , for an estimate of the transport tim e from the probe inlet to the tee. Normally the gas flow rate is higher than the sample flow rate and the excess is overflowed out the inlet of the probe. If the gas flow rate is lower than the sample flow rate, the gas concentrations must be adjusted to account for the dilution from ambient air drawn into the probe. We recommend you use the final, stabilized analyzer reading as the final gas concentration. Select span gases for the species being continuously combined, other than H 2 O. Select concentrations of compensating species that will yield concentrations of these species at the analyzer inlet that covers the range of concentrations expected during testing. You may use binary or multi-gas span gases. You may use a gas blending or mixing device to blend sp an gases. A gas blending or mixing device is recommended when blending span gases diluted in N 2 with span gases diluted in air. You may use a multi-gas span gas, such as NO-CO-CO 2 -C 3 H 8 -CH 4 , to verify multiple analyzers at the same time. In designing your experimental setu p, avoid pressure pulsations due to stopping the flow through the gas blending device. The change in gas concentration must be at least 20 % of the analyzer’s range. If H 2 O correction is applicable, then span gases must be humidified before entering the analyzer; however, you may not humidify NO 2 span gas by passing it through a sealed humidification vessel that contains water. You must humidify NO 2 span gas with another moist gas stream. We recommend humidifying your NO-CO-CO 2 -C 3 H 8 -CH 4 , balance N 2 blended gas by flowing the gas mixture through a sealed vessel that humidifies the gas by bubbling it through distilled water a nd then mixing the gas with dry NO 2 gas, balance purified air. If your system does not use a sample dryer to remove water from the sample gas, you must humidify your span gas to the highest sample H 2 O content that you estimate during emission sampling. If your system uses a sample dryer during testing, it must pass the sample dryer verification check in §1065.342, and you must humidify your span gas to an H 2 O content greater than or equal to the level determined in §1065.145(e)(2). If you are humidifying span gases without NO 2 , use good engineering judgment to ensure that the wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fittings, and valves from the humidifying system to the probe are above the dewpoint required for the target H 2 O content. If you are humidifying span gases with NO 2 , use good engineering judgment to ensure that there is no condensation in the transfer lines, fittings, or valves from the point where humidified gas is mixed with NO 2 span gas to the probe. We recommend that you design your setup so that th e wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fittings, and valves from the humidifying system to the probe are at least 5 oC above the local sample gas dewpoint. Operate the measurement and sample handling system as you do for emission testing. Deleted: probe

Deleted: probe

Deleted: syntheticMake no modifications to the sample handling system to reduce the risk of condensation. Flow humidified gas through the sampling system befo re this check to allow stabilization of the measurement system’s sampling handling system to occur, as it would for an emission test. (3) Data collection . (i) Start the flow of zero gas. (ii) Allow for stabilization, accounting for tran sport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full
response. (iii) Start recording data. For this verification you must record data at a frequency greater than or equal to that of the updating-recording frequency used during emission testing. You may not use interpolation or filtering to alter the recorded values. (iv) Switch the flow to allow the blended span gases to flow to the analyzer. If you intend to use the data from this test to determine t 50 for time alignment, record this time as t 0
. (v) Allow for transport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full response. (vi) Switch the flow to allow zero gas to flow to the analyzer. If you intend to use the data from this test to determine t 50 for time alignment, record this time as t 100
. (vii) Allow for transport delays and the slowest analyzer’s full response. (viii) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (d)(3)(iv) th rough (vii) of this section to record seven full cycles, ending with zero gas flowing to the analyzers. (ix) Stop recording. (e) Performance evaluations . (1) If you choose to demonstrate compliance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, use the data from paragraph (d)(3) of this section to calcu late the mean rise time,
t 10-90 , and mean fall time, t 90-10 , for the continuously combined signal from each analyzer being verified. You may use interpolation between recorded values to determine rise and fall times. If the recording frequency used during emission testing is different from the analyzer’s output update frequency, you must use th e lower of these two frequencies for this verification. Multiply these times (in seconds) by their respective updating-recording frequencies in Hz (1/second). The resulting product must be at least 5 for both rise time and fall time. If either value is less than 5, increase the updating-recording frequency or adjust the flows or design of the sampling system to increase the rise time and fall time as needed. You may also configure analog or digital filters before recording to increase rise and fall times. In no case may the mean rise time or mean fall time be greater than 10 seconds. (2) If a measurement system fails the criterion in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, ensure that signals from the system are updated and recorded at a frequency of at least 5 Hz. In no case may the mean rise time or mean fall time be greater than 10 seconds. (3) If a measurement system fails the criteria in paragraphs (e)(1) and (2) of this section, you may use the measurement system only if the deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable standards. (f) Transformation time, t 50 , determination . If you choose to determine t 50 for purposes of time alignment using data generated in paragraph (d )(3) of this section, calculate the mean t 0-50 and the mean t 100-50 from the recorded data. Average these two values to determine the final t 50 for the purposes of time alignment in accordance with §1065.650(c)(2)(i). (g) Optional procedure. Follow the optional procedures in §1065.308(g), noting that you may use compensating gases mixed with ambient air for oxygen analyzers. (h) Analyzers with H 2 O compensation sampling downstream of a sample dryer. You may omit humidifying the span gas as described in this paragraph (h). If an analyzer compensates only forH 2 O, you may apply the requirements of §1065.308 instead of the requirements of this section. You may omit humidifying the span gas if you meet the following conditions: (1) The analyzer is located downstream of a sample dryer. (2) The maximum value for H 2 O mole fraction downstream of the dryer must be less than or equal to 0.010. Verify this during each sample dryer verification according to §1065.342.

MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE PARAMETERS AND AMBIENT CONDITIONS

§1065.310 Torque calibration. (a) Scope and frequency . Calibrate all torque-measureme nt systems including dynamometer torque measurement transducers and systems upon initial installation and after major maintenance. Use good engineering judgment to repeat the calibration. Follow the torque transducer manufacturer’s instructions for lin earizing your torque sensor’s output. We recommend that you calibrate the torque-measurement system with a reference force and a lever

arm. ( b ) Recommended procedure to quantify l ever-arm length . Quantify the lever- arm length, NISTtraceable within  0.5 % uncertainty. The lever arm’s length must be measured from the centerline of the dynamome ter to the point at which the reference force is measured. The lever arm must be perpendicular to gravity (i.e., horizontal), and it must be perpendicular to the dynamometer’s rotational axis. Balance the lever arm’s torque or quantify its net hanging torque, NIST-traceable within  1 % uncertainty, and account for it as part of the reference torque. (c) Recommended procedure to quantify reference force. We recommend dead-weight calibration, but you may use either of the following procedures to quantify the reference force, NIST-traceable within  0.5 % uncertainty. ( 1 ) Dead-weight calibration . This technique applies a known force by hanging known weights at a known distance along a lever arm. Make sure the weights’ lever arm is perpendicular to gravity (i.e., horizontal) and perpendicular to the dynamometer’s rotational axis. Apply at least six calibration-weight combinations for each ap plicable torque-measuring range, spacing the weight quantities about equally over the range. Oscillate or rotate the dynamometer during calibration to reduce frictional static hysteresis. Determine each weight’s reference force by multiplying its NIST-traceable mass by the local acceleration of Earth’s gravity , as described in §1065.630. C alculate the reference torque as the weights’ reference force multiplied by the lever arm reference length. ( 2 ) Strain gage , load transducer, or proving ring calibration . This technique applies force either by hanging weights on a lever arm (these weights and their lever arm length are not used as part of the reference torque determination) or by operating the dynamometer at different torques. Apply at least six force combinations for each applicable torque-measuring range, spacing the force quantities about equally over the range. Oscillate or rotate the dynamometer during calibration to reduce frictional static hysteresis. In this case, the reference torque is determined by multiplying the force output from the reference meter (such as a strain gage , load transducer, or proving ring) by its effective lever-arm le ngth, which you measure from the point where the force measurement is made to the dynamometer’s rotational axis. Make sure you measure this Deleted: (b) Recommended procedure . (1) Reference force quantification . Use either a set of dead-weights or a reference meter such as strain gage or a proving ring to quantify the reference force, NIST-traceable within  0.5 % uncertainty.¶

Deleted: 2

Deleted: L

Deleted: quantification

Deleted: lever

Deleted: c

Deleted: (using this equation: force = mass · acceleration). The local acceleration of gravity, a g , at your latitude, longitude, and elevation may be determined by entering position and elevation data into the U.S. National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration’s surface gravityprediction website at http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgibin/grav_pdx.prl. If this website is unavailable, you may use the equation in §1065.630, which returns the local acceleration of gravity based on a given latitude. In this case, c

Deleted: (using this equation: torque = force · lever arm length)

Deleted: dlength perpendicular to the reference meter’s measurement axis and perpendicular to the dynamometer’s rotational axis.

§1065.315 Pressure, temperature, and dewpoint calibration. (a) Calibrate instruments for measuring pressure, temperature, and dewpoint upon initial installation. Follow the instrument manufact urer’s instructions and use good engineering judgment to repeat the calibration, as follows: (1) Pressure . We recommend temperature-compensated, digital-pneumatic, or deadweight pressure calibrators, with data-logging capabiliti es to minimize transcription errors. We recommend using calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (2) Temperature . We recommend digital dry-block or sti rred-liquid temperature calibrators, with data logging capabilities to minimize transcrip tion errors. We recommend using calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. You may perform linearity verification for temperature measurement systems with thermocouples, RTDs, and thermistors by removing the sensor from the system and using a simulator in its place. Use a NIST-traceable simulator that is independently calibrated and, as appropriate, cold-junction compensated. The simulato r uncertainty scaled to absolute temperature must be less than 0.5 % of T max . If you use this option, you must use sensors that the supplier states are accurate to better than 0.5 % of T max compared with their standard calibration curve. (3) Dewpoint . We recommend a minimum of three di fferent temperature-equilibrated and temperature-monitored calibration salt solutions in containers that seal completely around the dewpoint sensor. We recommend using calibra tion reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (b) You may remove system components for off-site calibration. We recommend specifying calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty.

FLOW-RELATED MEASUREMENTS

§1065.320 Fuel-flow calibration. (a) Calibrate fuel-flow meters upon initial installa tion. Follow the instrument manufacturer’s instructions and use good engineering judgment to repeat the calibration. (b) You may also develop a procedure based on a chemical balance of carbon or oxygen in engine exhaust. (c) You may remove system components for off-site calibration. When installing a flow meter with an off-site calibration, we recommend that you consider the effects of the tubing configuration upstream and downstream of the flow meter. We recommend specifying calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty.

§1065.325 Intake-flow calibration. (a) Calibrate intake-air flow meters upon in itial installation. Follow the instrument manufacturer’s instructions and use good engineer ing judgment to repeat the calibration. We recommend using a calibration subsonic venturi, ultrasonic flow meter or laminar flow element. Deleted: theWe recommend using calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (b) You may remove system components for off-site calibration. When installing a flow meter with an off-site calibration, we recommend that you consider the effects of the tubing configuration upstream and downstream of the flow meter. We recommend specifying calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (c) If you use a subsonic venturi or ultrasonic flow meter for intake flow measurement, we recommend that you calibrate it as described in §1065.340.

§1065.330 Exhaust-flow calibration. (a) Calibrate exhaust-flow meters upon initial installation. Follow the instrument manufacturer’s instructions and use good engineering judgment to repeat the calibration. We recommend that you use a calibration subsonic venturi or ultrasonic flow meter and simulate exhaust temperatures by incorporating a heat exchange r between the calibration meter and the exhaustflow meter. If you can demonstrate that the flow meter to be calibrated is insensitive to exhaust temperatures, you may use other reference meters such as laminar flow elements, which are not commonly designed to withstand typical raw exhaust temperatures. We recommend using calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (b) You may remove system components for off-site calibration. When installing a flow meter with an off-site calibration, we recommend that you consider the effects of the tubing configuration upstream and downstream of the flow meter. We recommend specifying calibration reference quantities that are NIST-traceable within 0.5 % uncertainty. (c) If you use a subsonic venturi or ultrasonic flow meter for raw exhaust flow measurement, we recommend that you calibrate it as described in §1065.340.

§1065.340 Diluted exhaust flow (CVS) calibration. (a) Overview . This section describes how to calibrate flow meters fo r diluted exhaust constantvolume sampling (CVS) systems. (b) Scope and frequency . Perform this calibration while th e flow meter is installed in its permanent position, except as allowed in paragraph (c) of this section. Perform this calibration after you change any part of the flow configuration upstream or downstream of the flow meter that may affect the flow-meter calibration. Perfo rm this calibration upon initial CVS installation and whenever corrective action does not resolve a failure to meet the diluted exhaust flow verification (i.e., propane check) in §1065.341. (c) Ex-situ CFV and SSV calibration . You may remove a CFV or SSV from its permanent position for calibration as long as it meets the follo wing requirements when installed in the CVS: (1) Upon installation of the CFV or SSV into the CVS, use good engineering judgment to verify that you have not introduced any leaks between the CVS inlet and the venturi. (2) After ex-situ venturi calibration, you must veri fy all venturi flow combinations for CFVs or at minimum of 10 flow points for an SSV using the propane check as described in §1065.341. Your propane check result for each venturi flow point may not exceed the tolerance in §1065.341(f)(5).(3) To verify your ex-situ calibration for a CV S with more than a single CFV, perform the following check to verify that there are no flow meter entrance effects that can prevent you from passing this verification. (i) Use a constant flow device like a CFO kit to deliver a constant flow of propane to the dilution tunnel. (ii) Measure hydrocarbon concentrations at a minimum of 10 separate flow rates for an SSV flow meter, or at all possible flow combinations fo r a CFV flow meter, while keeping the flow of propane constant. We recommend selecting CVS flow rates in a random order. (iii) Measure the concentration of hydrocarbon background in the dilution air at the beginning and end of this test. Subtract the average background concentration from each measurement at each flow point before performing the regression an alysis in paragraph (c)(3)(iv) of this section. (iv) Perform a power regression using all the paired values of flow rate and corrected concentration to obtain a relationship in the form of y = a · x b . Use concentration as the independent variable and flow rate as the depend ent variable. For each data point, calculate the difference between the measured flow rate and the value represented by the curve fit. The difference at each point must be less than ±1 % of the appropriate regression value. The value of b must be between –1.005 and –0.995. If your results do not meet these limits, take corrective action consistent with §1065.341(a). (v) If your results do not meet the limits set in paragraph (iv) of this section, determine the source of error, which are described in §1065.341(a), and take corrective action as necessary. (d) Reference flow meter . Calibrate a CVS flow meter using a reference flow meter such as a subsonic venturi flow meter, a long-radius ASME /NIST flow nozzle, a smooth approach orifice, a laminar flow element, a set of critical flow venturis, or an ultrasonic flow meter. Use a reference flow meter that reports quantities that are NIST-traceable within ±1 % uncertainty. Use this reference flow meter’s response to flow as the reference value for CVS flow-meter calibration. (e) Configuration . Do not use an upstream screen or other restriction that could affect the flow ahead of the reference flow meter, unless the flow meter has been calibrated with such a restriction. (f) PDP calibration . Calibrate a positive-displacement pump (PDP) to determine a flow-versusPDP speed equation that accounts for flow leakage across sealing surfaces in the PDP as a function of PDP inlet pressure. Determine unique equation coefficients for each speed at which you operate the PDP. Calibrate a PDP flow meter as follows: (1) Connect the system as shown in Figure 1 of this section. (2) Leaks between the calibration flow meter and the PDP must be less than 0.3 % of the total flow at the lowest calibrated flow point; for example, at the highest restriction and lowest PDPspeed point. (3) While the PDP operates, maintain a constant temperature at the PDP inlet within ±2 % of the mean absolute inlet temperature, in T

. (4) Set the PDP speed to the first speed point at which you intend to calibrate. (5) Set the variable restrictor to its wide-open position. (6) Operate the PDP for at least 3 min to stabilize the system. Continue operating the PDP and record the mean values of at least 30 seconds of sampled data of each of the following quantities:(i) The mean flow rate of the reference flow meter, ref n  . This may include several measurements of different quantities, such as reference meter pressures and temperatures, for calculating ref n 

. (ii) The mean temperature at the PDP inlet, in T

. (iii) The mean static absolute pressure at the PDP inlet, in p

. (iv) The mean static absolute pressure at the PDP outlet, out p

. (v) The mean PDP speed, nPDP f

. (7) Incrementally close the restrictor valve to decrease the absolute pressure at the inlet to the PDP, in p

. (8) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (e)(6) and (7) of this section to record data at a minimum of six restrictor positions ranging from the wide op en restrictor position to the minimum expected pressure at the PDP inlet. (9) Calibrate the PDP by using the collected data and the equations in §1065.640. (10) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (e)(6) through (9) of this section for each speed at which you operate the PDP. (11) Use the equations in §1065.642 to determine the PDP flow equation for emission testing. (12) Verify the calibration by performing a CVS verification (i.e., propane check) as described in §1065.341. (13) Do not use the PDP below the lowest inlet pressure tested during calibration. (g) CFV calibration . Calibrate a critical-flow venturi (CFV ) to verify its discharge coefficient, C

d , at the lowest expected static differential pre ssure between the CFV inlet and outlet. Calibrate a CFV flow meter as follows: (1) Connect the system as shown in Figure 1 of this section. (2) Verify that any leaks between the calibration flow meter and the CFV are less than 0.3 % of the total flow at the highest restriction. (3) Start the blower downstream of the CFV. (4) While the CFV operates, maintain a constant te mperature at the CFV inlet within ±2 % of the mean absolute inlet temperature, in T

. (5) Set the variable restrictor to its wide-open position. Instead of a variable restrictor, you may alternately vary the pressure downstream of the CFV by varying blower speed or by introducing a controlled leak. Note that some blowers have limitations on nonloaded conditions. (6) Operate the CFV for at least 3 min to stabiliz e the system. Continue operating the CFV and record the mean values of at least 30 seconds of sampled data of each of the following quantities: (i) The mean flow rate of the reference flow meter, ref n  . This may include several measurements of different quantities, such as reference meter pressures and temperatures, for calculating ref n 

. (ii) The mean dewpoint of the calibration air, dew T . See §1065.640 for permissible assumptions during emission measurements. (iii) The mean temperature at the venturi inlet, in T

. (iv) The mean static absolute pressure at the venturi inlet, in p

. (v) The mean static differential pressure between the CFV inlet and the CFV outlet, CFV p 

.(7) Incrementally close the restrictor valve or decrease the downstream pressure to decrease the differential pressure across the CFV, CFV p 

. (8) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (f)(6) and (7) of this section to record mean data at a minimum of ten restrictor positions, such that you test the fullest practical range of CFV p  expected during testing. We do not require that you remove calibration components or CVS components to calibrate at the lowest possible restrictions. (9) Determine C d and the lowest allowable pressure ratio, r , according to §1065.640. (10) Use C d to determine CFV flow during an emission test. Do not use the CFV below the lowest allowed r , as determined in §1065.640. (11) Verify the calibration by performing a CVS verification (i.e., propane check) as described in §1065.341. (12) If your CVS is configured to operate more th an one CFV at a time in parallel, calibrate your CVS by one of the following: (i) Calibrate every combination of CFVs according to this section and §1065.640. Refer to §1065.642 for instructions on calculating flow rates for this option. (ii) Calibrate each CFV according to this section and §1065.640. Refer to §1065.642 for instructions on calculating fl ow rates for this option. (h) SSV calibration . Calibrate a subsonic venturi (SSV) to determine its calibration coefficient, C

d , for the expected range of inlet pressures. Calibrate an SSV flow meter as follows: (1) Connect the system as shown in Figure 1 of this section. (2) Verify that any leaks between the calibration flow meter and the SSV are less than 0.3 % of the total flow at the highest restriction. (3) Start the blower downstream of the SSV. (4) While the SSV operates, maintain a constant temperature at the SSV inlet within ±2 % of the mean absolute inlet temperature, in T

. (5) Set the variable restrictor or variable-speed blower to a flow rate greater than the greatest flow rate expected during testing. You may no t extrapolate flow rates beyond calibrated values, so we recommend that you make sure the Reynolds number, Re # , at the SSV throat at the greatest calibrated flow rate is greater than the maximum Re # expected during testing. (6) Operate the SSV for at least 3 min to stabilize the system. Continue operating the SSV and record the mean of at least 30 seconds of sampled data of each of the following quantities: (i) The mean flow rate of the reference flow meter ref n  . This may include several measurements of different quantities, such as reference meter pressures and temperatures, for calculating ref n 

. (ii) Optionally, the mean dewpoint of the calibration air, dew T . See §1065.640 for permissible assumptions. (iii) The mean temperature at the venturi inlet, in T

. (iv) The mean static absolute pressure at the venturi inlet, in p

. (v) Static differential pressure between the static pressure at the venturi inlet and the static pressure at the venturi throat, SSV p 

. (7) Incrementally close the restrictor valve or decrease the blower speed to decrease the flow
rate.(8) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (g)(6) and (7) of this section to record data at a minimum of ten flow rates. (9) Determine a functional form of C d versus Re # by using the collected data and the equations in §1065.640. (10) Verify the calibration by performing a CVS verification (i.e., propane check) as described in §1065.341 using the new C d versus Re # equation. (11) Use the SSV only between the minimum and maximum calibrated flow rates. (12) Use the equations in §1065.642 to determine SSV flow during a test. (i) Ultrasonic flow meter calibration . [Reserved]Figure 1 of 1065.340—CVS calibration configurations.

reference flow meter PDP variable restrictor

12

6

ref 

## n  atmos 

### p

in 

## p out 

# p in 

## T PDP 

## f 

# t

reference flow meter PDP variable restrictor

12

6

ref 

## n  atmos 

### p

in 

## p out 

# p in 

## T PDP 

## f 

# t

reference flow meter PDP variable restrictor

12

6

ref 

## n  atmos 

### p

in 

## p out 

# p in 

## T PDP 

## f 

# t

CFV reference flow meter variable restrictor ref 

## n 

in 

# p in 

# T atmos 

### p dew 

### T

blower downstream

pressure control

CFV reference flow meter variable restrictor ref 

## n 

in 

# p in 

# T atmos 

### p dew 

### T

blower downstream

pressure control

SSV reference flow meter ref 

## n  atmos 

### p

in 

## p in 

## T dew 

## T



## p 

variable speed blower SSV reference flow meter ref 

## n  atmos 

### p

in 

## p in 

## T dew 

## T



## p 

variable speed blower§1065.341 CVS , PFD, and batch sampler verification (propane check). (a) A propane check serves as a CVS verification to determine if there is a discrepancy in measured values of diluted exhaust flow. You may use the same procedure to verify PFDs and batch samplers. For purposes of PFD and batch sampler verification, read the term CVS to mean PFD or batch sampler as appropriate. A propane check also serves as a batch-sampler verification to determine if there is a discrepancy in a batch sampling system that extracts a sample from a CVS, as described in paragraph (g) of this section. Using good engineering judgment and safe practices, this check may be performed using a gas other than propane, such as CO 2 or CO. A failed propane check might indicate one or more problems that may require corrective action, as follows: (1) Incorrect analyzer calibration . Re-calibrate, repair, or replace the FID analyzer. (2) Leaks . Inspect CVS tunnel, connections, fasteners, and HC sampling system, and repair or replace components. (3) Poor mixing . Perform the verification as describe d in this section while traversing a sampling probe across the tunnel’s diameter, vertically and horizontally. If the analyzer response indicates any deviation exceeding  2 % of the mean measured concentration, consider operating the CVS at a higher flow rate or installing a mixing plate or orifice to improve mixing. (4) Hydrocarbon contamina tion in the sample system . Perform the hydrocarbon-contamination verification as described in §1065.520. (5) Change in CVS calibration . Perform a calibration of the CVS flow meter as described in §1065.340. (6) Flow meter entrance effects . Inspect the CVS tunnel to determine whether the entrance effects from the piping configuration upstream of the flow meter adversely affect the flow
measurement. (7) Other problems with the CVS or sampling verification hardware or software . Inspect the CVS system, CVS verification hardware , and software for discrepancies. (b) A propane check uses either a reference mass or a reference flow rate of C 3 H 8 as a tracer gas in a CVS. Note that if you use a reference flow rate, account for any non-ideal gas behavior of C 3 H 8 in the reference flow meter. Refer to §1065.640 and §1065.642, which describe how to calibrate and use certain flow meters. Do not use any ideal gas assumptions in §1065.640 and §1065.642. The propane check compares the calculated mass of injected C 3 H 8 using HC measurements and CVS flow rate measurements with the reference value. (c) Prepare for the propane check as follows: (1) If you use a reference mass of C 3 H 8 instead of a reference flow rate, obtain a cylinder charged with C 3 H 8 . Determine the reference cylinder’s mass of C 3 H 8 within  0.5 % of the amount of C 3 H 8 that you expect to use. (2) Select appropriate flow rates for the CVS and C 3 H 8
. (3) Select a C 3 H 8 injection port in the CVS. Select the port location to be as close as practical to the location where you introduce engine exhaust into the CVS. Connect the C 3 H 8 cylinder to the injection system. (4) Operate and stabilize the CVS. (5) Preheat or pre-cool any heat exchangers in the sampling system. (6) Allow heated and cooled components such as sample lines, filters, chillers, and pumps to stabilize at operating temperature. (7) You may purge the HC sampling system during stabilization.(8) If applicable, perform a vacuum side leak verification of the HC sampling system as described in §1065.345. (9) You may also conduct any other calibrations or verifications on equipment or analyzers. (d) If you performed the vacuum-side leak verification of the HC sampling system as described in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you may use the HC contamination procedure in §1065.520( f ) to verify HC contamination. Otherwise, zero, sp an, and verify contamination of the HC sampling system, as follows: (1) Select the lowest HC analyzer range that can measure the C 3 H 8 concentration expected for the CVS and C 3 H 8 flow rates. (2) Zero the HC analyzer using zero air introduced at the analyzer port. (3) Span the HC analyzer using C 3 H 8 span gas introduced at the analyzer port. (4) Overflow zero air at the HC probe inlet or into a tee near the outlet of the probe. (5) Measure the stable HC concentration of the HC sampling system as overflow zero air flows. For batch HC measurement, fill the batch container (such as a bag) and measure the HC overflow concentration. (6) If the overflow HC concentration exceeds 2  mol/mol, do not proceed until contamination is eliminated. Determine the source of the contamination and take corrective action, such as cleaning the system or replacing contaminated portions. (7) When the overflow HC concentration does not exceed 2  mol/mol, record this value as

x THCinit and use it to correct for HC contamination as described in §1065.660. (e) Perform the propane check as follows: (1) For batch HC sampling, connect clean storage media, such as evacuated bags. (2) Operate HC measurement instruments according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions. (3) If you will correct for dilution air background concentrations of HC, measure and record background HC in the dilution air. (4) Zero any integrating devices. (5) Begin sampling, and start any flow integrators. (6) Release the contents of the C 3 H 8 reference cylinder at the rate you selected. If you use a reference flow rate of C 3 H 8 , start integrating this flow rate. (7) Continue to release the cylinder’s contents until at least enough C 3 H 8 has been released to ensure accurate quantification of the reference C 3 H 8 and the measured C 3 H 8
. (8) Shut off the C 3 H 8 reference cylinder and continue sampling until you have accounted for time delays due to sample transport and analyzer response. (9) Stop sampling and stop any integrators. (f) Perform post-test procedure as follows: (1) If you used batch sampling, analyze batch samples as soon as practical. (2) After analyzing HC, correct for contamination and background. (3) Calculate total C 3 H 8 mass based on your CVS and HC data as described in §1065.650 (40 CFR 1066.610 for vehicle testing) and §1065.660, using the molar mass of C 3 H 8 , M C3H8 , instead the effective molar mass of HC, M HC
. (4) If you use a reference mass, determine the cylinder’s propane mass within  0.5 % and determine the C 3 H 8 reference mass by subtracting the empty cylinder propane mass from the full cylinder propane mass. Deleted: g(5) Subtract the reference C 3 H 8 mass from the calculated mass. If this difference is within  2 % of the reference mass, the CVS passes this verification. If not, take corrective action as described in paragraph (a) of this section. (g) You may repeat the propane check to verify a batch sampler, such as a PM secondary dilution system. (1) Configure the HC sampling system to extract a sample near the location of the batch sampler’s storage media (such as a PM filter). If the absolute pressure at this location is too low to extract an HC sample, you may sample HC from the batch sampler pump’s exhaust. Use caution when sampling from pump exhaust because an otherwise acceptable pump leak downstream of a batch sampler flow meter will cause a false failure of the propane check. (2) Repeat the propane check described in this section, but sample HC from the batch sampler. (3) Calculate C 3 H 8 mass, taking into account any secondary dilution from the batch sampler. (4) Subtract the reference C 3 H 8 mass from the calculated mass. If this difference is within  5 % of the reference mass, the batch sampler passes this verification. If not, take corrective action as described in paragraph (a) of this section.

§1065.342 Sample dryer verification. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use a sample dryer as allowed in §1065.145(e)(2) to remove water from the sample gas, verify the performance upon installation, after major maintenance, for thermal chiller. For osmotic membrane dryers, verify the performance upon installation, after major maintenance, and with in 35 days of testing. (b) Measurement principles . Water can inhibit an analyzer ’s ability to properly measure the exhaust component of interest and thus is sometimes removed before the sample gas reaches the analyzer. For example water can negatively interfere with a CLD’s NO x response through collisional quenching and can positively interfere with an NDIR analyzer by causing a response similar to CO. (c) System requirements . The sample dryer must meet the specifications as determined in §1065.145(e)(2) for dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , downstream of the osmoticmembrane dryer or thermal chiller. (d) Sample dryer verification procedure . Use the following method to determine sample dryer performance. Run this verification with the dr yer and associated sampling system operating in the same manner you will use for emission testing (including operation of sample pumps). You may run this verification test on multiple sample dryers sharing the same sampling system at the same time. You may run this verification on the sample dryer alone, but you must use the maximum gas flow rate expected during testing. You may use good engineering judgment to develop a different protocol. (1) Use PTFE or stainless steel t ubing to make necessary connections. (2) Humidify room air, N 2 , or purified air by bubbling it through distilled water in a sealed vessel that humidifies the gas to the highest sample water content that you estimate during emission sampling. (3) Introduce the humidified gas upstream of the sample dryer. You may disconnect the transfer line from the probe and introduce the humidified gas at the inlet of the transfer line of the sample system used during testing. You may use the sa mple pumps in the sample system to draw gas through the vessel. (4) Maintain the sample lines, fittings, and valves from the location where the humidified gas water content is measured to the inlet of the samp ling system at a temperature at least 5 oC abovethe local humidified gas dewpoint. For dryers used in NO x sample systems, verify the sample system components used in this verification prevent aqueous condensation as required in §1065.145(d)(1)(i). We recommend that the sample system components be maintained at least 5 oC above the local humidified gas dewpoint to prevent aqueous condensation. (5) Measure the humidified gas dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , as close as possible to the inlet of the sample dryer or inlet of the sample system to ve rify the water content is at least as high as the highest value that you estimated during emission sampling. You may verify the water content based on any humidity parameter (e.g. mole fraction water, local dewpoint, or absolute humidity). (6) Measure the humidified gas dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , as close as possible to the outlet of the sample dryer. Note that th e dewpoint changes with absolute pressure. If the dewpoint at the sample dryer outlet is measured at a different pressure, then this reading must be corrected to the dewpoint at the sample dryer absolute pressure, p total
. (7) The sample dryer meets the verification if the dewpoint at the sample dryer pressure as measured in paragraph (d)(6) of this section is less than the dewpoint corresponding to the sample dryer specifications as determined in §1065.145(e)(2) plus 2 °C or if the mole fraction of water as measured in (d)(6) is less than the corresponding sample dryer specifications plus 0.002 mol/mol. (e) Alternate sample dryer verification procedure . The following method may be used in place of the sample dryer verification procedure in (d) of this section. If you use a humidity sensor for continuous monitoring of dewpoint at the sample dryer outlet you may skip the performance check in §1065.342(d), but you must make sure that the dryer outlet humidity is at or below the minimum value used for quench, interference, and compensation checks.

§1065.345 Vacuum-side leak verification. (a) Scope and frequency . Verify that there are no significant vacuum-side leaks using one of the leak tests described in this section. For la boratory testing, perform the vacuum-side leak verification upon initial sampling system insta llation, within 8 hours before the start of the first test interval of each duty-cycle sequence, and after maintenance such as pre-filter changes. For field testing, perform the vacuum-side leak verification after each installation of the sampling system on the vehicle, prior to the start of the field test, and after mainte nance such as pre-filter changes. This verification does not apply to any full-flow portion of a CVS dilution system. (b) Measurement principles . A leak may be detected either by measuring a small amount of flow when there should be zero flow, or by detecting the dilution of a known concentration of span gas when it flows through the vacuum side of a sampling system. (c) Low-flow leak test . Test a sampling system for low-flow leaks as follows: (1) Seal the probe end of the system by taking one of the following steps: (i) Cap or plug the end of the sample probe. (ii) Disconnect the transfer line at the probe and cap or plug the transfer line. (iii) Close a leak-tight valve located in the sample transfer line within 92 cm of the probe. (2) Operate all vacuum pumps. After stabilizing, verify that the flow through the vacuum-side of the sampling system is less than 0.5 % of the system’s normal in-use flow rate. You may estimate typical analyzer and bypass flows as an approximation of the system’s normal in-use flow rate. (d) Dilution-of-span-gas leak test . You may use any gas analyzer for this test. If you use a FID for this test, correct for any HC contamination in the sampling system according to §1065.660.To avoid misleading results from this test, we recommend using only analyzers that have a repeatability of 0.5% or better at the span gas concentration used for this test. Perform a vacuum-side leak test as follows: (1) Prepare a gas analyzer as you would for emission testing. (2) Supply span gas to the analyzer port and verify that it measures the span gas concentration within its expected measurement accuracy and repeatability. (3) Route overflow span gas to the inlet of the sample pr obe or at a tee fitting in the transfer line near the exit of the probe. You may use a valve upstream of the overflow fitting to prevent overflow of span gas out of the inlet of the probe, but you must then provide an overflow vent in the overflow supply line. (4) Verify that the measured overflow span gas concentration is within ±0.5% of the span gas concentration. A measured value lower than exp ected indicates a leak, but a value higher than expected may indicate a problem with the span gas or the analyzer itself. A measured value higher than expected does not indicate a leak. (e) Vacuum-decay leak test . To perform this test you must apply a vacuum to the vacuum-side volume of your sampling system and then observe the leak rate of your system as a decay in the applied vacuum. To perform this test you must know the vacuum-side volume of your sampling system to within ±10% of its true volume. For this test you must also use measurement instruments that meet the specifications of subpart C of this part and of this subpart D. Perform a vacuum-decay leak test as follows: (1) Seal the probe end of the system as close to the probe opening as possible by taking one of the following steps: (i) Cap or plug the end of the sample probe. (ii) Disconnect the transfer line at the probe and cap or plug the transfer line. (iii) Close a leak-tight valve located in the sample transfer line within 92 cm of the probe. (2) Operate all vacuum pumps. Draw a vacuum that is representative of normal operating conditions. In the case of sample bags, we reco mmend that you repeat y our normal sample bag pump-down procedure twice to minimize any trapped volumes. (3) Turn off the sample pumps and seal the system. Measure and record the absolute pressure of the trapped gas and optionally the system absolute temperature. Wait long enough for any transients to settle and long eno ugh for a leak at 0.5% to have caused a pressure change of at least 10 times the resolution of the pressure transducer, then again record the pressure and optionally temperature. (4) Calculate the leak flow rate based on an assumed value of zero for pumped-down bag volumes and based on known values for the sample system volume, the initial and final pressures, optional temperatures, and elapsed time. Using the calculations specified in 1065.644, verify that the vacuum-decay leak flow rate is less than 0.5 % of the system’s normal in-use flow
rate.

CO AND CO 2 MEASUREMENTS

§1065.350 H 2 O interference verification for CO 2 NDIR analyzers. (a) Scope and frequency . If you measure CO 2 using an NDIR analyzer, verify the amount of H 2 O interference after initial analyzer inst allation and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . H 2 O can interfere with an NDIR analyzer’s response to CO 2 . If the NDIR analyzer uses compensation algorithms that utilize measurements of other gases to meetthis interference verification, simultaneously conduct these other measurements to test the compensation algorithms during the analyzer interference verification. (c) System requirements . A CO 2 NDIR analyzer must have an H 2 O interference that is within (0.0 ±0.4) mmol/mol, though we strongly recommend a lower interference that is within (0.0 ±0.2) mmol/mol. (d) Procedure . Perform the interference verification as follows: (1) Start, operate, zero, and span the CO 2 NDIR analyzer as you would before an emission test. If the sample is passed through a dryer during emission testing, you may run this verification test with the dryer if it meets the requirements of §1065.342. Operate the dryer at the same conditions as you will for an emission test. You may also run this verifi cation test without the sample dryer. (2) Create a humidified test gas by bubbling zero gas that meets the specifications in §1065.750 through distilled H 2 O in a sealed vessel. If the sample is not passed through a dryer during emission testing, control the vesse l temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the maximum expected during emission testing. If the sample is passed through a dryer during emission testing, control the vesse l temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the level determined in §1065.145(e)(2) for that dryer. (3) Introduce the humidified test gas into the sa mple system. You may introduce it downstream of any sample dryer, if one is used during testing. (4) If the sample is not passed through a dryer during this verification test, measure the H 2 O mole fraction, x H2O , of the humidified test gas, as close as possible to the inlet of the analyzer. For example, measure dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , to calculate x H2O . Verify that the H 2 O content meets the requirement in paragraph (d )(2) of this section. If the sample is passed through a dryer during this verification test, you must verify that the H 2 O content of the humidified test gas downstream of the vessel meets the requirement in paragraph (d)(2) of this section based on either direct measurement of the H 2 O content (e.g., dewpoint and pressure) or an estimate based on the vessel pressure and temperature. Use good engineering judgment to estimate the H 2 O content. For example, you may use previous direct measurements of H 2 O content to verify the vesse l’s level of saturation. (5) If a sample dryer is not used in this verification test, use good engineering judgment to prevent condensation in the transfer lines, fittings, or valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer. We recommend that you design your system so the wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fittings, and valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer are at least 5 oC above the local sample gas dewpoint. (6) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response. (7) While the analyzer measures the sample’s concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of this data. The analyzer meets the interference verification if this value is within (0.0 ±0.4) mmol/mol. (e) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your CO 2 sampling system and your emission-calculation procedures, the H 2 O interference for your CO 2 NDIR analyzer always affects your br ake-specific emission results within  0.5 % of each of the applicable standards. This specification also applies for vehicle testing, except that it relates to emission results in g/mile or g/kilometer. Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water(2) You may use a CO 2 NDIR analyzer that you determine does not meet this verification, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply with all applicable emission standards.

§1065.355 H 2 O and CO 2 interference verification for CO NDIR analyzers. (a) Scope and frequency . If you measure CO using an NDIR analyzer, verify the amount of H 2 O and CO 2 interference after initial analyzer in stallation and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . H 2 O and CO 2 can positively interfere with an NDIR analyzer by causing a response similar to CO. If the NDIR analyzer uses compensation algorithms that utilize measurements of other gases to meet this interference verification, simultaneously conduct these other measurements to test the compensation algorithms during the analyzer interference verification. (c) System requirements . A CO NDIR analyzer must have combined H 2 O and CO 2 interference that is within  2 % of the flow-weighted mean concentration of CO expected at the standard, though we strongly recommend a lower interference that is within  1 %. (d) Procedure . Perform the interference verification as follows: (1) Start, operate, zero, and span the CO NDIR analyzer as you would before an emission test. If the sample is passed through a dryer during emis sion testing, you may run this verification test with the dryer if it meets the requirements of §1065.342. Operate the dryer at the same conditions as you will for an emission test. You may also run this verifi cation test without the sample dryer. (2) Create a humidified CO 2 test gas by bubbling a CO 2 span gas that meets the specifications in §1065.750 through distilled H 2 O in a sealed vessel. If the sample is not passed through a dryer during emission testing, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the maximum expected during emission testing. If the sample is passed through a dryer during emission testing, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the level determined in §1065.145(e)(2) for that dryer. Use a CO 2 span gas concentration at least as high as the maximum expected during testing. (3) Introduce the humidified CO 2 test gas into the sample system. You may introduce it downstream of any sample dryer, if one is used during testing. (4) If the sample is not passed through a dryer during this verification test, measure the H 2 O mole fraction, x H2O , of the humidified CO 2 test gas as close as possible to the inlet of the analyzer. For example, measure dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , to calculate x H2O
. Verify that the H 2 O content meets the requirement in paragra ph (d)(2) of this section. If the sample is passed through a dryer during this verification test, you must verify that the H 2 O content of the humidified test gas downstream of the vessel meets the requirement in paragraph (d)(2) of this section based on either direct measurement of the H 2 O content (e.g., dewpoint and pressure) or an estimate based on the vessel pressure and temperature. Use good engineering judgment to estimate the H 2 O content. For example, you may use previous direct measurements of H 2 O content to verify the vesse l’s level of saturation. (5) If a sample dryer is not used in this verification test, use good engineering judgment to prevent condensation in the transfer lines, fittings, or valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer. We recommend that you design your system so that the wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fitt ings, and valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer are at least 5 oC above the local sample gas dewpoint. Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water(6) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response. (7) While the analyzer measures the sample’s concentration, record its output for 30 seconds. Calculate the arithmetic mean of this data. (8) The analyzer meets the interference verification if the result of paragraph (d)(7) of this section meets the tolerance in pa ragraph (c) of this section. (9) You may also run interference procedures for CO 2 and H 2 O separately. If the CO 2 and H 2 O levels used are higher than the maximum levels expected during testing, you may scale down each observed interference value by multiplying the observed interference by the ratio of the maximum expected concentration value to the actual value used during this procedure. You may run separate interference concentrations of H 2 O (down to 0.025 mol/mol H 2 O content) that are lower than the maximum levels expected during testing, but you must scale up the observed H 2 O interference by multiplying the observed interference by the ratio of the maximum expected H 2 O concentration value to the actual value used during this procedure. The sum of the two scaled interference values must meet the tolerance in paragraph (c) of this section. (e) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your CO sampling system and your emission-calculation procedures, the combined CO 2 and H 2 O interference for your CO NDIR analyzer always affects your brake-specific CO emission results within  0.5 % of the applicable CO standard. (2)You may use a CO NDIR analyzer that you determine does not meet this verification, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply wi th all applicable emission standards.

HYDROCARBON MEASUREMENTS

§1065.360 FID optimization and verification. (a) Scope and frequency . For all FID analyzers, calibrate the FID upon initial installation. Repeat the calibration as needed using good engineering judgment. For a FID that measures THC, perform the following steps: (1) Optimize the response to various hydrocarbons after initial analyzer installation and after major maintenance as described in paragraph (c) of this section. (2) Determine the methane (CH 4 ) response factor after initial analyzer installation and after major maintenance as described in paragraph (d) of this section. (3) Verify the CH 4 response within 185 days before testing as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (b) Calibration . Use good engineering judgment to develop a calibration procedure, such as one based on the FID-analyzer manufacturer’s instructions and recommended frequency for calibrating the FID. Alternately, you may remove system components for off-site calibration. For a FID that measures THC, calibrate using C 3 H 8 calibration gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. For a FID that measures CH 4 , calibrate using CH 4 calibration gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. We recommend FID analyzer zero and span gases that contain approximately the flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 expected during testing. If you use a FID to measure CH 4 downstream of a nonmethane cutter, you may calibrate that FID using CH 4 calibration gases with the cutter. Regardless of the calibration gas composition, calibrate on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200 Deleted: methane (

Deleted: )

Deleted: methane (

Deleted: ) mol/mol, span the FID to re spond with a value of 600  mol/mol. As another example, if you use a CH 4 span gas with a concentration of 200  mol/mol, span the FID to respond with a value of 200  mol/mol. (c) THC FID response optimization . This procedure is only for FID analyzers that measure THC. Use good engineering judgment for initia l instrument start-up and basic operating adjustment using FID fuel and zero air. Heated FIDs must be within th eir required operating temperature ranges. Optimize FID response at the most common analyzer range expected during emission testing. Optimization involves adjusting flows and pressures of FID fuel, burner air, and sample to minimize response variations to various hydrocarbon species in the exhaust. Use good engineering judgment to trade off peak FID response to propane calibration gases to achieve minimal response variations to different hydrocarbon species. For an example of trading off response to propane for relative responses to other hydrocarbon species, see SAE 770141 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). Determine the optimum flow rates and/or pressures for FID fuel, burner air, and sample and record them for future reference. (d) THC FID CH 4 response factor determination . This procedure is only for FID analyzers that measure THC. Since FID analyzers generally have a different response to CH 4 versus C 3 H 8 , determine each THC- FID analyzer’s CH 4 response factor, RF CH4[THC-FID] , after FID optimization. Use the most recent RF CH4[THC-FID] measured according to this section in the calculations for HC determination described in §1065.660 to compensate for CH 4 response. Determine RFCH4[THCFID] as follows, noting that you do not determine RF CH4[THC-FID] for FIDs that are calibrated and spanned using CH 4 with a nonmethane cutter: (1) Select a C 3 H 8 span gas concentration that you use to span your analyzers before emission testing. Use only span gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. Record the C 3 H 8 concentration of the gas. (2) Select a CH 4 span gas concentration that you use to span your analyzers before emission testing. Use only span gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. Record the CH 4 concentration of the gas. (3) Start and operate the FID analyzer according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (4) Confirm that the FID analyzer has been calibrated using C 3 H 8 . Calibrate on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span the FID to respond with a value of 600  mol/mol. (5) Zero the FID with a zero gas th at you use for emission testing. (6) Span the FID with the C 3 H 8 span gas that you selected under paragraph (d)(1) of this section. (7) Introduce at the sample port of the FID analyzer, the CH 4 span gas that you selected under paragraph (d)(2) of this section. (8) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the analyzer and to account for its response. (9) While the analyzer measures the CH 4 concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these values. (10) For analyzers with multiple ranges, you need to perform the procedure in this paragraph (d) only on a single range. ( 11 ) Divide the mean measured concentration by the recorded span concentration of the CH 4 calibration gas. The result is the FID analyzer’s response factor for CH 4 , RF CH4[THC-FID]
. (e) THC FID CH 4 response verification . This procedure is only for FID analyzers that measure THC. Verify RF CH4[THC-FID] as follows: Deleted: THC

Deleted: 10

Deleted: methane (

Deleted: )(1) Perform a CH 4 response factor determination as descri bed in paragraph (d) of this section. If the resulting value of RF CH4[THC-FID] is within  5 % of its most recent previously determined value, the THC FID passes the CH 4 response verification. For example, if the most recent previous value for RF CH4[THC-FID] was 1.05 and it changed by  0.05 to become 1.10 or it changed by –0.05 to become 1.00, either case would be acceptable because  4.8 % is less than  5 %. ( 2 ) If RF CH4[THC-FID] is not within the tolerance specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section, use good engineering judgment to verify that the flow rates and/or pressures of FID fuel, burner air, and sample are at their most recent previously recorded values, as determined in paragraph (c) of this section. You may adjust these flow rates as necessary. Then determine the RF CH4[THC-FID] as described in paragraph (d) of this section and verify that it is within the tolerance specified in this paragraph (e). ( 3 ) If RF CH4[THC-FID] is not within the tolerance specified in this paragraph (e), re-optimize the FID response as described in paragraph (c) of this section. ( 4 ) Determine a new RF CH4[THC-FID] as described in paragraph (d) of this section. Use this new value of RF CH4[THC-FID] in the calculations for HC determination, as described in §1065.660. ( 5 ) For analyzers with multiple ranges, you need to perform the procedure in this paragraph (e) only on a single range.

§1065.362 Non-stoichiometric raw exhaust FID O 2 interference verification. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use FID analyzers for raw exhaust measurements from engines that operate in a non-stoichiometric mode of combustion (e.g., compression-ignition, lean-burn), verify the amount of FID O 2 interference upon initial installati on and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . Changes in O 2 concentration in raw exhaust can affect FID response by changing FID flame temperature. Optimize FID fuel, burner air, and sample flow to meet this verification. Verify FID performance with the compensation algorithms for FID O 2 interference that you have active during an emission test. (c) System requirements . Any FID analyzer used during testing must meet the FID O 2 interference verification according to the procedure in this section. (d) Procedure . Determine FID O 2 interference as follows, noting that you may use one or more gas dividers to create the reference gas concentrations that are required to perform this verification: (1) Select three span reference gases that contain a C 3 H 8 concentration that you use to span your analyzers before emission testing. Use only span gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. You may use CH 4 span reference gases for FIDs calibrated on CH 4 with a nonmethane cutter. Select the three balance gas concentrations such that the concentrations of O 2 and N 2 represent the minimum, maximum, and average O 2 concentrations expected during testing. The requirement for using the average O 2 concentration can be removed if you choose to calibrate the FID with span gas balanced with the average expected oxygen concentration. (2) Confirm that the FID analyzer meets all the specifications of §1065.360. (3) Start and operate the FID analyzer as you would before an emission test. Regardless of the FID burner’s air source during testing, use zer o air as the FID burner’s air source for this verification. (4) Zero the FID analyzer using the zero gas used during emission testing. (5) Span the FID analyzer using a span gas that you use during emission testing. (6) Check the zero response of the FID analyzer using the zero gas used during emission testing. If the mean zero response of 30 seconds of sampled data is within  0.5 % of the span reference Deleted:

Deleted: from paragraph (d) of this section

Deleted: methane

Deleted: Verify RF CH4 [ THC-FID ] as follows:¶

Deleted: 1

Deleted: First

Deleted: each within  0.5 % of

Deleted: described

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 3

Deleted: 4value used in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, then proceed to the next step; otherwise restart the procedure at paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (7) Check the analyzer response using the span gas that has the minimum concentration of O 2 expected during testing. Record the mean response of 30 seconds of stabilized sample data as

x O2minHC
. (8) Check the zero response of the FID analyzer using the zero gas used during emission testing. If the mean zero response of 30 seconds of stabilized sample data is within  0.5 % of the span reference value used in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, then proceed to the next step; otherwise restart the procedure at paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (9) Check the analyzer response using the span gas that has the average concentration of O 2 expected during testing. Record the mean response of 30 s econds of stabilized sample data as

x O2avgHC
. (10) Check the zero response of the FID analyzer using the zero gas used during emission testing. If the mean zero response of 30 seconds of stabilized sample data is within ±0.5 % of the span reference value used in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, proceed to the next step; otherwise restart the procedure at paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (11) Check the analyzer response using the span gas that has the maximum concentration of O 2 expected during testing. Record the mean response of 30 seconds of stabilized sample data as

x O2maxHC
. (12) Check the zero response of the FID anal yzer using the zero gas used during emission testing. If the mean zero response of 30 seconds of stabilized sample data is within  0.5 % of the span reference value used in paragraph (d)(5) of this section, then proceed to the next step; otherwise restart the procedure at paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (13) Calculate the percent difference between x O2maxHC and its reference gas concentration. Calculate the percent difference between x O2avgHC and its reference gas concentration. Calculate the percent difference between x O2minHC and its reference gas concentration. Determine the maximum percent difference of the three. This is the O 2 interference. (14) If the O 2 interference is within  2 %, the FID passes the O 2 interference verification; otherwise perform one or more of the following to address the deficiency: (i) Repeat the verification to determine if a mistake was made during the procedure. (ii) Select zero and span gases for emissi on testing that contain higher or lower O 2 concentrations and repeat the verification. (iii) Adjust FID burner air, fuel, and sample flow rates. Note that if you adjust these flow rates on a THC FID to meet the O 2 interference verification, you have reset RF CH4 for the next RF CH4 verification according to §1065.360. Repeat the O 2 interference verification after adjustment and determine RF CH4
. (iv) Repair or replace the FID and repeat the O 2 interference verification. (v) Demonstrate that the defici ency does not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable emission standards. (15) For analyzers with multiple ranges, you need to perform the procedure in this paragraph (d) only on a single range.

§1065.365 Nonmethane cutter penetration fractions. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use a FID analyzer and a nonmethane cutter (NMC) to measure methane (CH 4 ), determine the nonmethane cutter’s penetration fractions of CH 4 , PF CH4 , and ethane, PF C2H6 . As detailed in this section, these pene tration fractions may be determined as a Deleted: methanecombination of NMC penetration fractions and FID analyzer response factors, depending on your particular NMC and FID analyzer configurat ion. Perform this verification after installing the nonmethane cutter. Repeat this verification within 185 days of testing to verify that the catalytic activity of the cutter has not deteriorated. Note that because nonmethane cutters can deteriorate rapidly and without warning if they are operated outside of certain ranges of gas concentrations and outside of certain temperat ure ranges, good engineering judgment may dictate that you determine a nonmethane cutter’s penetration fractions more frequently. (b) Measurement principles . A nonmethane cutter is a heated catalyst that removes nonmethane hydrocarbons from an exhaust sample stream before the FID analyzer measures the remaining hydrocarbon concentration. An ideal nonmethane cutter would have a CH 4 penetration fraction, PF CH4 , of 1.000, and the penetration fraction for all other nonmethane hydrocarbons would be 0.000, as represented by PF C2H6 . The emission calculations in §1065.660 use the measured values from this verification to account for less than ideal NMC performance. (c) System requirements . We do not limit NMC penetration fractions to a certain range. However, we recommend that you optimize a nonmethane cutter by adjusting its temperature to achieve a PF CH4 >0.85 and a PF C2H6 <0.02, as determined by paragraphs (d), (e), or (f) of this section, as applicable. If we use a nonmethane cutter for testing, it will meet this recommendation. If adjusting NMC temperature does not result in achieving both of these specifications simultaneously, we recommend that you replace the catalyst material. Use the most recently determined penetration values from this section to calculate HC emissions according to §1065.660 and §1065.665 as applicable. (d) Procedure for a FID calibrated with the NMC . The method described in this paragraph (d) is recommended over the procedures specified in paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section. If your FID arrangement is such that a FID is always calibrated to measure CH 4 with the NMC, then span that FID with the NMC using a CH 4 span gas, set the product of that FID’s CH 4 response factor and CH 4 penetration fraction, RFPF CH4[NMC-FID] , equal to 1.0 for all emission calculations, and determine its combined ethane (C 2 H 6 ) response factor and penetration fraction, RFPFC2H6[NMCFID] as follows: (1) Select CH 4 and C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixtures and ensure that both mixtures meet the specifications of §1065.750. Select a CH 4 concentration that you would use for spanning the FID during emission testing and select a C 2 H 6 concentration that is typical of the peak NMHC concentration expected at the hydrocarbon standard or equal to the THC analyzer’s span value. For CH 4 analyzers with multiple ranges, perform this procedure on the highest range used for emission testing. (2) Start, operate, and optimize the nonmethane cutter according to the manufacturer’s instructions, including any temperature optimization. (3) Confirm that the FID analyzer meets all the specifications of §1065.360. (4) Start and operate the FID analyzer according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (5) Zero and span the FID with the nonmethane cutter as you would during emission testing. Span the FID through the cutter by using CH 4 span gas. (6) Introduce the C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixture upstream of the nonmethane cutter. Use good engineering judgment to address the effect of hydrocarbon contamination if your point of introduction is vastly different from the point of zero/span gas introduction. (7) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the nonmethane cutter and to account for the analyzer’s response. Deleted: methane(8) While the analyzer measures a stable concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these data points. (9) Divide the mean C 2 H 6 concentration by the reference concentration of C 2 H 6 , converted to a C 1 basis. The result is the C 2 H 6 combined response factor and penetration fraction, RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] . Use this combined response factor and penetration fraction and the product of the CH 4 response factor and CH 4 penetration fraction, RFPF CH4[NMC-FID] , set to 1.0 in emission calculations according to §1065.660(b)(2)(i), §1065. 660(c)(1)(i), or §1065.665, as applicable. (e) Procedure for a FID calibrated with propane, bypassing the NMC . If you use a single FID for THC and CH 4 determination with an NMC that is calibrated with propane, C 3 H 8 , by bypassing the NMC, determine its penetration fractions, PF C2H6[NMC-FID] and PF CH4[NMC-FID] , as follows: (1) Select CH 4 and C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixtures and ensure that both mixtures meet the specifications of §1065.750. Select a CH 4 concentration that you would use for spanning the FID during emission testing and select a C 2 H 6 concentration that is typical of the peak NMHC concentration expected at the hydrocarbon standard and the C 2 H 6 concentration typical of the peak total hydrocarbon (THC) concentration expected at the hydrocarbon standard or equal to the THC analyzer’s span value. For CH 4 analyzers with multiple ranges, perform this procedure on the highest range used for emission testing. (2) Start and operate the nonmethane cutter according to the manufacturer’s instructions, including any temperature optimization. (3) Confirm that the FID analyzer meets all the specifications of §1065.360. (4) Start and operate the FID analyzer according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (5) Zero and span the FID as you would during em ission testing. Span the FID by bypassing the cutter and by using C 3 H 8 span gas. Note that you must span the FID on a C 1 basis. For example, if your span gas has a propane reference value of 100  mol/mol, the correct FID response to that span gas is 300  mol/mol because there are three carbon atoms per C 3 H 8 molecule. (6) Introduce the C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixture upstream of the nonmethane cutter. Use good engineering judgment to address the effect of hydrocarbon contamination if your point of introduction is vastly different from the point of zero/span gas introduction. (7) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the nonmethane cutter and to account for the analyzer’s response. (8) While the analyzer measures a stable concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these data points. (9) Reroute the flow path to bypass the nonmethane cutter, introduce the C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixture, and repeat the steps in paragraphs (e)(7) through (8) of this section. (10) Divide the mean C 2 H 6 concentration measured through the nonmethane cutter by the mean C 2 H 6 concentration measured after bypassing the nonmethane cutter. The result is the C 2 H 6 penetration fraction, PF C2H6[NMC-FID] . Use this penetration fraction according to §1065.660(b)(2)(ii), §1065.660(c)(1)(ii), or §1065.665, as applicable. (11) Repeat the steps in paragraphs (e)(6) th rough (10) of this section, but with the CH 4 analytical gas mixture instead of C 2 H 6 . The result will be the CH 4 penetration fraction, PF CH4[NMC-FID] . Use this penetration fraction according to §1065.660(b)(2)(ii) or §1065.665, as applicable. (f) Procedure for a FID calibrated with CH 4 , bypassing the NMC . If you use a FID with an NMC that is calibrated with CH 4 , by bypassing the NMC, determine its combined ethane (C 2 H 6 ) response factor and penetration fraction, RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] , as well as its CH 4 penetration fraction, PF CH4[NMC-FID ], as follows: Deleted: methane

Deleted: methane,(1) Select CH 4 and C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixtures and ensure that both mixtures meet the specifications of §1065.750. Select a CH 4 concentration that you would use for spanning the FID during emission testing and select a C 2 H 6 concentration that is typical of the peak NMHC concentration expected at the hydrocarbon standard or equal to the THC analyzer’s span value. For CH 4 analyzers with multiple ranges, perform this procedure on the highest range used for emission testing. (2) Start and operate the nonmethane cutter according to the manufacturer’s instructions, including any temperature optimization. (3) Confirm that the FID analyzer meets all the specifications of §1065.360. (4) Start and operate the FID analyzer according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (5) Zero and span the FID as you would during em ission testing. Span the FID by bypassing the cutter and by using CH 4 span gas. (6) Introduce the C 2 H 6 analytical gas mixture upstream of the nonmethane cutter. Use good engineering judgment to address the effect of hydrocarbon contamination if your point of introduction is vastly different from the point of zero/span gas introduction. (7) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the nonmethane cutter and to account for the analyzer’s response. (8) While the analyzer measures a stable concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these data points. (9) Divide the mean C 2 H 6 concentration by the reference concentration of C 2 H 6 , converted to a C 1 basis. The result is the C 2 H 6 combined response factor and penetration fraction, RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] . Use this combined response factor and penetration fraction according to §1065.660(b)(2)(iii), §1065.660(c)(1)(iii), or §1065.665, as applicable. (10) Introduce the CH 4 analytical gas mixture upstream of the nonmethane cutter. Use good engineering judgment to address the effect of hydrocarbon contamination if your point of introduction is vastly different from the point of zero/span gas introduction. (11) Allow time for the analyzer response to stabilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the nonmethane cutter and to account for the analyzer’s response. (12) While the analyzer measures a stable concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these data points. (13) Reroute the flow path to bypass the nonmethane cutter, introduce the CH 4 analytical gas mixture, and repeat the steps in paragraphs (e)(11) and (12) of this section. (14) Divide the mean CH 4 concentration measured through the nonmethane cutter by the mean CH 4 concentration measured after bypassing the nonmethane cutter. The result is the CH 4 penetration fraction, PF CH4[NMC-FID] . Use this penetration fraction according to §1065.660(b)(2)(iii), §1065.660(c)(1)(iii), or §1065.665, as applicable.

§1065.369 H 2 O, CO, and CO 2 interference verification for photoacoustic alcohol analyzers. (a) Scope and frequency. If you measure ethanol or methanol using a photoacoustic analyzer, verify the amount of H 2 O, CO, and CO 2 interference after initial analyzer installation and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles. H 2 O, CO, and CO 2 can positively interfere with a photoacoustic analyzer by causing a response similar to ethanol or methanol. If the photoacoustic analyzer uses compensation algorithms that utilize measuremen ts of other gases to meet this interference verification, simultaneously conduct these other measurements to test the compensation algorithms during the analyzer interference verification.(c) System requirements. Photoacoustic analyzers must have combined interference that is within (0.0 ± 0.5) μmol/mol. We strongly reco mmend a lower interference th at is within (0.0 ± 0.25) μmol/mol. (d) Procedure. Perform the interference verification by following the procedure in §1065.375(d), comparing the results to para graph (c) of this section.

NO x AND N 2 O MEASUREMENTS

§1065.370 CLD CO 2 and H 2 O quench verification. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use a CLD analyzer to measure NO x , verify the amount of H 2 O and CO 2 quench after installing the CLD anal yzer and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . H 2 O and CO 2 can negatively interfere with a CLD’s NO x response by collisional quenching, which inhibits the ch emiluminescent reaction that a CLD utilizes to detect NO x . This procedure and the calculations in §1065.675 determine quench and scale the quench results to the maximum mole fraction of H 2 O and the maximum CO 2 concentration expected during emission testing. If the CL D analyzer uses quench compensation algorithms that utilize H 2 O and/or CO 2 measurement instruments, evaluate quench with these instruments active and evaluate quench with the compensation algorithms applied. (c) System requirements . A CLD analyzer must have a combined H 2 O and CO 2 quench of  2 % or less, though we strongly recommend a quench of  1 % or less. Combined quench is the sum of the CO 2 quench determined as described in paragraph (d) of this section, plus the H 2 O quench determined in paragraph (e) of this section. (d) CO 2 quench verification procedure . Use the following method to determine CO 2 quench by using a gas divider that blends binary span gases with zero gas as the diluent and meets the specifications in §1065.248, or use good engineer ing judgment to develop a different protocol: (1) Use PTFE or stainless steel t ubing to make necessary connections. (2) Configure the gas divider such that nearly equal amounts of the span and diluent gases are blended with each other. (3) If the CLD analyzer has an operating mode in which it detects NO-only, as opposed to total NO x , operate the CLD analyzer in the NO-only operating mode. (4) Use a CO 2 span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750 and a concentration that is approximately twice the maximum CO 2 concentration expected during emission testing. (5) Use an NO span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750 and a concentration that is approximately twice the maximum NO concentration expected during emission testing. (6) Zero and span the CLD analyzer. Span the CLD analyzer with the NO span gas from paragraph (d)(5) of this section through the gas divider. Connect the NO span gas to the span port of the gas divider; connect a zero gas to the diluent port of the gas divider; use the same nominal blend ratio selected in paragraph (d)(2) of this section; and use the gas divider’s output concentration of NO to span the CLD analyzer. Apply gas property corrections as necessary to ensure accurate gas division. (7) Connect the CO 2 span gas to the span port of the gas divider. (8) Connect the NO span gas to the diluent port of the gas divider. (9) While flowing NO and CO 2 through the gas divider, stabilize the output of the gas divider. Determine the CO 2 concentration from the gas divider output, applying gas property correction as necessary to ensure accurate gas division , or measure it using an NDIR . Record this concentration, x CO2act , and use it in the quench verification calculations in §1065.675.Alternatively, you may use a simple gas blending device and use an NDIR to determine this CO 2 concentration. If you use an NDIR, it must meet the requirements of this part for laboratory testing and you must span it with the CO 2 span gas from paragraph (d)(4) of this section. (10) Measure the NO concentration downstream of the gas divider with the CLD analyzer. Allow time for the analyzer response to stabilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response. While the analyzer measures the sample’s concentration, record the analyzer’s output for 30 seconds. Calculate the arithmetic mean concentration from these data, x NOmeas . Record x NOmeas , and use it in the quench verification calculations in §1065.675. (11) Calculate the actual NO concentration at the gas divider’s outlet, x NOact , based on the span gas concentrations and x CO2act according to Equation 1065.675-2. Use the calculated value in the quench verification calculations in Equation 1065.675-1. (12) Use the values recorded according to this paragraph (d) and paragraph (e) of this section to calculate quench as described in §1065.675. (e) H 2 O quench verification procedure . Use the following method to determine H 2 O quench, or use good engineering judgment to develop a different protocol: (1) Use PTFE or stainless steel t ubing to make necessary connections. (2) If the CLD analyzer has an operating mode in which it detects NO-only, as opposed to total NO x , operate the CLD analyzer in the NO-only operating mode. (3) Use an NO span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750 and a concentration that is near the maximum concentration expected during emission testing. (4) Zero and span the CLD analyzer. Span the CLD analyzer with the NO span gas from paragraph (e)(3) of this section, record the span gas concentration as x NOdry , and use it in the quench verification calculations in §1065.675. (5) Humidify the NO span gas by bubbling it through distilled H 2 O in a sealed vessel. If the humidified NO span gas sample does not pass through a sample dryer for this verification test, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level approximately equal to the maximum mole fraction of H 2 O expected during emission testing. If the humidified NO span gas sample does not pass through a sample dryer, the quench verification calculations in §1065.675 scale the measured H 2 O quench to the highest mole fraction of H 2 O expected during emission testing. If the humidified NO span gas sample passes through a dryer for this verification test, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the level determined in §1065.145(e)(2). For this case, the quench verification calculations in §1065.675 do not scale the measured H 2 O quench. (6) Introduce the humidified NO test gas into the sample system. You may introduce it upstream or downstream of any sample dryer that is used during emission testing. Note that the sample dryer must meet the sample dryer verification check in §1065.342. (7) Measure the mole fraction of H 2 O in the humidified NO span gas downstream of the sample dryer, x H2Omeas . We recommend that you measure x H2Omeas as close as possible to the CLD analyzer inlet. You may calculate x H2Omeas from measurements of dewpoint, T dew , and absolute
pressure, p total
. (8) Use good engineering judgment to prevent condensation in the transfer lines, fittings, or valves from the point where x H2Omeas is measured to the analyzer. We recommend that you design your system so the wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fittings, and valves from the point where x H2Omeas is measured to the analyzer are at least 5 oC above the local sample gas dewpoint. Deleted: water(9) Measure the humidified NO span gas concentration with the CLD analyzer. Allow time for the analyzer response to stabilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response. While the analyzer measures the sample’s concentration, record the analyzer’s output for 30 seconds. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these data, x NOwet
. Record x NOwet and use it in the quench verification calculations in §1065.675. (f) Corrective action . If the sum of the H 2 O quench plus the CO 2 quench is less than -2 % or greater than +2 %, take corrective action by repairing or replacing the analyzer. Before running emission tests, verify that the corrective acti on successfully restored the analyzer to proper functioning. (g) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your NO x sampling system and your emission calculation procedures, the combined CO 2 and H 2 O interference for your NO x CLD analyzer always affects your brake-specific NO x emission results within no more than  1 % of the applicable NO x standard. If you certify to a combined emission standard (such as a NO x + NMHC standard), scale your NO x results to the combined standard based on the measured results (after incorporating deterioration factors, if applicable). For example, if your final NO x + NMHC value is half of the emission standard, double the NO x result to estimate the level of NO x emissions corresponding to the applicable standard. (2)You may use a NO x CLD analyzer that you determine does not meet this verification, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply wi th all applicable emission standards.

§1065.372 NDUV analyzer HC and H 2 O interference verification. (a) Scope and frequency . If you measure NO x using an NDUV analyzer, verify the amount of H 2 O and hydrocarbon interference after initial anal yzer installation and af ter major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . Hydrocarbons and H 2 O can positively interfere with an NDUV analyzer by causing a response similar to NO x . If the NDUV analyzer uses compensation algorithms that utilize measurements of other gases to meet this interference verification, simultaneously conduct such measurements to test the algorithms during the analyzer interference verification. (c) System requirements . A NO x NDUV analyzer must have combined H 2 O and HC interference within  2 % of the flow-weighted mean concentration of NO x expected at the standard, though we strongly recommend k eeping interference within  1 %. (d) Procedure . Perform the interference verification as follows: (1) Start, operate, zero, and span the NO x NDUV analyzer according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions. (2) We recommend that you extract engine exhaust to perform this verification. Use a CLD that meets the specifications of subpart C of this part to quantify NO x in the exhaust. Use the CLD response as the reference value. Also measure HC in the exhaust with a FID analyzer that meets the specifications of subpart C of this part. Use the FID response as the reference hydrocarbon value. (3) Upstream of any sample dryer, if one is used during testing, introduce the engine exhaust to the NDUV analyzer. (4) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response.(5) While all analyzers measure the sample’s concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data, and calculate the arithmetic means for the three analyzers. (6) Subtract the CLD mean from the NDUV mean. (7) Multiply this difference by the ratio of the flow-weighted mean HC concentration expected at the standard to the HC concentration measured during the verification. The analyzer meets the interference verification of this se ction if this result is within  2 % of the NO x concentration expected at the standard. (e) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your NO x sampling system and your emission calculation procedures, the combined HC and H 2 O interference for your NO x NDUV analyzer always affects your brake-specific NO x emission results by less than 0.5 % of the applicable NO x standard. (2)You may use a NO x NDUV analyzer that you determine does not meet this verification, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply with all applicable emission standards.

§1065.375 Interference verification for N 2 O analyzers. (a) Scope and frequency . See §1065.275 to determine whether you need to verify the amount of interference after initial analyzer insta llation and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . Interference gasses can positively interfere with certain analyzers by causing a response similar to N 2 O. If the analyzer uses compensation algorithms that utilize measurements of other gases to meet this interference verification, simultaneously conduct these other measurements to test the compensation algorithms during the analyzer interference verification. (c) System requirements . Analyzers must have combined inte rference that is within (0.0 ± 1.0) μmol/mol. We strongly recommend a lower interference that is within (0.0 ± 0.5) μmol/mol. (d) Procedure . Perform the interference verification as follows: (1) Start, operate, zero, and span the N 2 O analyzer as you would before an emission test. If the sample is passed through a dryer during emission testing, you may run this verification test with the dryer if it meets the requirements of §1065.34 2. Operate the dryer at the same conditions as you will for an emission test. You may also run th is verification test w ithout the sample dryer. (2) Create a humidified test gas by bubbling a multi component span gas that incorporates the target interference species and meets the specifications in §1065.750 through distilled H 2 O in a sealed vessel. If the sample is not passed thro ugh a dryer during emission testing, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the maximum expected during emission testing. If the sample is passed thro ugh a dryer during emission testing, control the vessel temperature to generate an H 2 O level at least as high as the level determined in §1065.145(e)(2) for that dryer. Use interference span gas concentrations that are at least as high as the maximum expected during testing. (3) Introduce the humidified interference test gas into the sample system. You may introduce it downstream of any sample dryer, if one is used during testing. (4) If the sample is not passed through a dryer during this verification test, measure the H 2 O mole fraction, x H2O , of the humidified interference test gas as close as possible to the inlet of the analyzer. For example, measure dewpoint, T dew , and absolute pressure, p total , to calculate x H2O
. Verify that the H 2 O content meets the requirement in paragr aph (d)(2) of this section. If the sample is passed through a dryer during this verification test, you must verify that the H 2 O Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: watercontent of the humidified test gas downstream of the vessel meets the requirement in paragraph (d)(2) of this section based on either direct measurement of the H 2 O content (e.g., dewpoint and pressure) or an estimate based on the vessel pressure and temperature. Use good engineering judgment to estimate the H 2 O content. For example, you may use previous direct measurements of H 2 O content to verify the ve ssel’s level of saturation. (5) If a sample dryer is not used in this verification test, use good engineering judgment to prevent condensation in the transfer lines, fittings, or valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer. We recommend that you design your system so that the wall temperatures in the transfer lines, fitt ings, and valves from the point where x H2O is measured to the analyzer are at least 5 oC above the local sample gas dewpoint. (6) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the transfer line and to account for analyzer response. (7) While the analyzer measures the sample’s concentration, record its output for 30 seconds. Calculate the arithmetic mean of this data. When performed with all the gases simultaneously, this is the combined interference. (8) The analyzer meets the interference verification if the result of paragraph (d)(7) of this section meets the tolerance in pa ragraph (c) of this section. (9) You may also run interference procedures separately for individual interference gases. If the interference gas levels used are higher than the maximum levels expected during testing, you may scale down each observed interference value (the arithmetic mean of 30 second data described in paragraph (d)(7) of this section) by multiplying the obser ved interference by the ratio of the maximum expected concentration value to the actual value used during this procedure. You may run separate interference concentrations of H 2 O (down to 0.025 mol/mol H 2 O content) that are lower than the maximum levels expected during testing, but you must scale up the observed H 2 O interference by multiplyi ng the observed interferenc e by the ratio of the maximum expected H 2 O concentration value to the actual value used during this procedure. The sum of the scaled interference values must meet the tolerance for combined interference as specified in paragraph (c) of this section.

§1065.376 Chiller NO 2 penetration. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use a chiller to dry a sample upstream of a NO x measurement instrument, but you don’t use an NO 2 -to-NO converter upstream of the chiller, you must perform this verification for chiller NO 2 penetration. Perform this verifi cation after initial installation and after major maintenance. (b) Measurement principles . A chiller removes H 2 O , which can otherwise interfere with a NO x measurement. However, liquid H 2 O remaining in an improperly designed chiller can remove NO 2 from the sample. If a chiller is used without an NO 2 -to-NO converter upstream, it could remove NO 2 from the sample prior NO x measurement. (c) System requirements . A chiller must allow for measuring at least 95 % of the total NO 2 at the maximum expected concentration of NO 2
. (d) Procedure . Use the following procedure to verify chiller performance: (1) Instrument setup . Follow the analyzer and chiller ma nufacturers’ start-up and operating instructions. Adjust the analyzer and chiller as needed to optimize performance. (2) Equipment setup and data collection . (i) Zero and span the total NO x gas analyzer(s) as you would before emission testing. Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water

Deleted: water(ii) Select an NO 2 calibration gas, balance gas of dry air, that has an NO 2 concentration within ±5 % of the maximum NO 2 concentration expected during testing. (iii) Overflow this calibration gas at the gas samp ling system’s probe or overflow fitting. Allow for stabilization of the total NO x response, accounting only for transport delays and instrument
response. (iv) Calculate the mean of 30 seconds of recorded total NO x data and record this value as x NOxref
. (v) Stop flowing the NO 2 calibration gas. (vi) Next saturate the sampling system by overflowing a dewpoint generator’s output, set at a dewpoint of 50  C, to the gas sampling system’s probe or overflow fitting. Sample the dewpoint generator’s output through the sampling system and chiller for at least 10 minutes until the chiller is expected to be removing a constant rate of H 2 O

. (vii) Immediately switch back to overflowing the NO 2 calibration gas used to establish x NOxref
. Allow for stabilization of the total NO x response, accounting only for transport delays and instrument response. Calculate the mean of 30 seconds of recorded total NO x data and record this value as x NOxmeas
. (viii) Correct x NOxmeas to x NOxdry based upon the residual H 2 O vapor that passed through the chiller at the chiller’s outlet temperature and pressure. (3) Performance evaluation . If x NOxdry is less than 95 % of x NOxref , repair or replace the chiller. (e) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your NO x sampling system and your emission calculations procedures, the chiller always affects your brake-specific NO x emission results by less than 0.5 % of the applicable NO x standard. (2)You may use a chiller that you de termine does not meet this verifi cation, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement deficiency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply with a ll applicable emission standards.

§1065.378 NO 2 -to-NO converter conversion verification. (a) Scope and frequency . If you use an analyzer that measures only NO to determine NO x , you must use an NO 2 -to-NO converter upstream of the analyzer. Perform this verification after installing the converter, after major maintenance and within 35 days before an emission test. This verification must be repeated at this frequency to verify that the catalytic activity of the NO 2 -toNO converter has not deteriorated. (b) Measurement principles . An NO 2 -to-NO converter allows an analyzer that measures only NO to determine total NO x by converting the NO 2 in exhaust to NO. (c) System requirements . An NO 2 -to-NO converter must allow for measuring at least 95 % of the total NO 2 at the maximum expected concentration of NO 2
. (d) Procedure . Use the following procedure to verify the performance of a NO 2 -to-NO
converter: (1) Instrument setup . Follow the analyzer and NO 2 -to-NO converter manufacturers’ start-up and operating instructions. Adjust the analyzer and converter as needed to optimize performance. (2) Equipment setup . Connect an ozonator’s inlet to a zero-air or oxygen source and connect its outlet to one port of a three-way tee fitting. Connect an NO span gas to another port, and connect the NO 2 -to-NO converter inlet to the last port. (3) Adjustments and data collection . Perform this check as follows: (i) Set ozonator air off, turn ozonator power off, and set the analyzer to NO mode. Allow for stabilization, accounting only for transport delays and instrument response. Deleted: water

Deleted: water(ii) Use an NO concentration that is representative of the peak total NO x concentration expected during testing. The NO 2 content of the gas mixture shall be less than 5 % of the NO concentration. Record the concentration of NO by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NOref
. (iii) Turn on the ozonator O 2 supply and adjust the O 2 flow rate so the NO indicated by the analyzer is about 10 percent less than x NOref . Record the concentration of NO by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NO+O2mix

. (iv) Switch the ozonator on and adjust the ozone generation rate so the NO measured by the analyzer is 20 percent of x NOref or a value which would simulate the maximum concentration of NO 2 expected during testing, while maintaining at least 10 percent unreacted NO. This ensures that the ozonator is generating NO 2 at the maximum concentration expected during testing. Record the concentration of NO by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NOmeas
. (v) Switch the NO x analyzer to NO x mode and measure total NO x . Record the concentration of NO x by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NOxmeas
. (vi) Switch off the ozonator but maintain gas flow through the system. The NO x analyzer will indicate the NO x in the NO + O 2 mixture. Record the concentration of NO x by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NOx+O2mix
. (vii) Turn off the ozonator O 2 supply. The NO x analyzer will indicate the NO x in the original NO-in-N 2 mixture. Record the concentration of NO x by calculating the mean of 30 seconds of sampled data from the analyzer and record this value as x NOxref . This value should be no more than 5 percent above the x NOref value. (4) Performance evaluation . Calculate the efficiency of the NO x converter by substituting the concentrations obtained in to the following equation:

NOxmeas NOx+O2mix

NO+O2mix NOmeas 1 100 % x x efficiency

x x  

  

 

   (5) If the result is less than 95 %, repair or replace the NO2-to-NO converter. (e) Exceptions . The following exceptions apply: (1) You may omit this verification if you can show by engineering analysis that for your NO x sampling system and your emission calculations procedures, the converter always affects your brake-specific NO x emission results by less than 0.5 % of the applicable NO x standard. (2)You may use a converter that you determine does not meet this verification, as long as you try to correct the problem and the measurement defici ency does not adversely affect your ability to show that engines comply with a ll applicable emission standards.

PM MEASUREMENTS

§1065.390 PM balance verifications and weighing process verification. (a) Scope and frequency . This section describes three verifications. (1) Independent verification of PM balance performance within 370 days before weighing any filter. (2) Zero and span the balance within 12 h before weighing any filter.(3) Verify that the mass determination of refere nce filters before and after a filter weighing session are less than a specified tolerance. (b) Independent verification . Have the balance manufacturer (or a representative approved by the balance manufacturer) verify the balance performance within 370 days of testing. (c) Zeroing and spanning . You must verify balance performance by zeroing and spanning it with at least one calibration weight, and any weights you use must that meet the specifications in §1065.790 to perform this verification. (1) Use a manual procedure in which you zero the balance and span the balance with at least one calibration weight. If you normally use mean values by repeating the weighing process to improve the accuracy and precision of PM measurements, use the same process to verify balance performance. (2) You may use an automated procedure to verify balance performance. For example many balances have internal calibration weights that are used automatically to verify balance performance. (d) Reference sample weighing . Verify all mass readings during a weighing session by weighing reference PM sample media (e.g. filters) before and after a weighing session. A weighing sessionmay be as short as desired, but no longer than 80 hours, and may include both pre-test and posttest mass readings. We recommend that weighing sessions be eight hours or less. Successive mass determinations of each reference PM sample media (e.g., filter) must return the same value within  10  g or  10 % of the net PM mass expected at the standard (if known), whichever is higher. If successive reference PM sample media (e.g. filter) weighing events fail this criterion, invalidate all individual test media (e.g., filte r) mass readings occurring between the successive reference media (e.g., filter) mass determinations . You may reweigh these media (e.g. filter) in another weighing session. If you invalidate a pre-te st media (e.g. filter) mass determination, that test interval is void. Perfor m this verification as follows: (1) Keep at least two samples of unused PM sa mple media (e.g., filters) in the PM-stabilization environment. Use these as references. If you coll ect PM with filters, select unused filters of the same material and size for use as references. You may periodically replace references, using good engineering judgment. (2) Stabilize references in the PM stabilization e nvironment. Consider references stabilized ifthey have been in the PM-stabilization environment for a minimum of 30 min, and the PMstabilization environment has been within the specifications of §1065.190(d) for at least the preceding 60 min. (3) Exercise the balance several times with a reference sample. We recommend weighing ten samples without recording the values. (4) Zero and span the balance. Using good engineering judgment, place a test mass such as a calibration weight on the balance, then remove it. After spanning, confirm that the balance returns to a zero read ing within the normal stabilization time. (5) Weigh each of the reference media (e.g. filters) and record their masses. We recommend using substitution weighing as described in §1065.590(j). If you normally use mean values by repeating the weighing process to improve the accuracy and precision of the reference media (e.g. filter) mass, you must use mean valu es of sample media (e.g. filter) masses. (6) Record the balance environment dewpoint, ambient temperature, and atmospheric pressure. (7) Use the recorded ambient conditions to correct results for buoyancy as described in §1065.690. Record the buoyancy-corrected mass of each of the references.(8) Subtract each reference media’s (e.g. filter’ s) buoyancy-corrected reference mass from its previously measured and recorded buoyancy-corrected mass. (9) If any of the reference filters’ observed mass changes by more than that allowed under this paragraph, you must invalidate all PM mass determinations made since the last successful reference media (e.g. filter) mass validation. Y ou may discard reference PM media (e.g. filters) if only one of the filter’s mass changes by more than the allowable amount and you can positively identify a special cause for that filter’s mass change th at would not have affected other in-process filters. Thus, the validation can be considered a success. In this case, you do not have to include the contaminated reference media when determining compliance with paragraph (d)(10) of this section, but th e affected reference filter must be immediately discarded and replaced prior to the next weighing session. (10) If any of the reference masses change by more than that allowed under this paragraph (d), invalidate all PM results that were determined between the two times that the reference masses were determined. If you discarded reference PM sample media according to paragraph (d)(9) of this section, you must still have at least one refe rence mass difference that meets the criteria in this paragraph (d). Otherwise, you must invalida te all PM results that were determined between the two times that the reference media (e.g. filters) masses were determined.

§1065.395 Inertial PM balance verifications. This section describes how to verify the performance of an inertial PM balance. (a) Independent verification . Have the balance manufacturer (or a representative approved by the balance manufacturer) verify the inertial balance performance within 370 days before testing. (b) Other verifications . Perform other verifications using good engineering judgment and instrument manufacturer recommendations.Subpart E—Engine Selection, Preparation, and Maintenance

§1065.401 Test engine selection. While all engine configurations within a certified engine family must comply with the applicable standards in the standard-setting part, you need not test each configuration for certification. (a) Select an engine configuration within th e engine family for testing, as follows: (1) Test the engine that we specify, whether we issue general guidance or give you specific instructions. (2) If we do not tell you which engine to test, foll ow any instructions in the standard-setting part. (3) If we do not tell you which engine to test and the standard-setting part does not include specifications for selecting test engines, use good engineering judgment to select the engine configuration within the engine family that is most likely to exceed an emission standard. (b) In the absence of other information, the foll owing characteristics are appropriate to consider when selecting the engine to test: (1) Maximum fueling rates. (2) Maximum loads. (3) Maximum in-use speeds. (4) Highest sales volume. (c) For our testing, we may select any engine configuration within the engine family.

§1065.405 Test engine preparation and maintenance. This part 1065 describes how to test engines for a variety of purposes, including certification testing, production-line testing, and in-use testing. Depending on which type of testing is being conducted, different preparation and maintenance requirements apply for the test engine. (a) If you are testing an emission -data engine for certification, make sure it is built to represent production engines , consistent with paragraph (f) of this section . This includes governors that you normally install on production engines. Produc tion engines should also be tested with their installed governors. If your installed governor has multiple user selectable governor types and if the governor does not manipulate the emissions-contro l system (i.e. the governor only modulates an "operator demand" signal such as commanded fuel rate, torque, or power), then choose the governor type that allows the test cell to more accurately follow the duty cycle. If the governor manipulates the emissions-control system, treat it as an adjustable parameter. See paragraph (b) of this section for guidance on setting adjustable parameters. If you do not install governors on production engines, simulate a gov ernor that is representative of a governor that others will install on your production engines. In certain circumstances, you may incorporate test cell components to simulate an in-use configuration, consistent with good engineering judgment. For example, §§1065.122 and 1065.125 allow the use of test cell components to represent engine cooling and intake air systems. The provisions in §1065.110(e) also apply to emission-data engines for certification. (b) We may set adjustable parameters to any value in their valid range and you are liable for emissions for the full valid range. For each adjustable parameter, if the standard setting part has no unique requirements and if we have not specified a value, use good engineering judgment to select the most common setting. If information on the most common setting is not available, select the initial setting used by the engine ma nufacturer when the engi ne was produced. If information on the most common and initial setti ngs are not available, set the adjustable parameter in the middle of the valid range.(c) Testing generally occurs only after the test engine has undergone a stabilization step (or inuse operation). If the engine has not already been stabilized, run the test engine, with all emission control systems operating, long enough to stabilize emission levels. Note that you must generally use the same stabilization procedures for emission-data engines for which you applythe same deterioration factors so low-hour emission-data engines are consistent with the lowhour engine used to develop the deterioration factor. (1) Unless otherwise specified in the standard-setting part, you may consider emission levels stable without measurement after 50 h of oper ation. If the engine needs less operation to stabilize emission levels, record your reasons an d the methods for doing this, and give us these records if we ask for them. If the engine will be tested for certification as a low-hour engine, see the standard-setting part for limits on testing engines to establish low-hour emission levels. (2) You may stabilize emissions from a catalytic ex haust aftertreatment device by operating it on a different engine, consistent with good engineering judgment. Note that good engineering judgment requires that you consid er both the purpose of the te st and how your stabilization method will affect the development and application of deterioration factors. For example, this method of stabilization is generally not appropria te for production engines. We may also allow you to stabilize emissions from a catalytic exha ust aftertreatment device by operating it on an engine-exhaust simulator. ( d ) Record any maintenance, modifications, parts changes, diagnostic or emissions testing and document the need for each event. You must provide this information if we request it. ( e ) For accumulating operating hours on your test engi nes, select engine operation that represents normal in-use operation for the engine family. ( f

) If your engine will be used in a vehicle equipped with a canister for storing evaporative hydrocarbons for eventual combustion in the engine and the test sequence involves a cold-start or hot-start duty cycle, attach a canister to the engine before running an emission test. You may omit using an evaporative canister for any hot-sta bilized duty cycles. You may request to omit using an evaporative canister during testing if you can show that it would not affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable emission standards. You may operate the engine without an installed canister for service accumulation. Prior to an emission test, use the following steps to precondition a canister and attach it to your engine: (1) Use a canister and plumbing arrangement that represents the in-use configuration of the largest capacity canister in all expected applications. (2) Precondition the canister as described in 40 CFR 86.132(j). (3) Connect the canister’s purge port to the engine. (4) Plug the canister port that is normally connected to the fuel tank. ( g ) This paragraph ( g ) defines the components that are considered to be part of the engine for laboratory testing. See §1065.110 for provisions related to system boundaries with respect to work inputs and outputs. (1) This paragraph ( g )(1) describes certain criteria for considering a component to be part of the test engine. The criteria are intended to apply broadly, such that a component would generally be considered part of the engine in cases of uncertainty. An engine-related component meeting all the following criteria is considered to be part of the test engine for purposes of testing and for stabilizing emission levels, preconditi oning, and measuring emission levels: (i) The component directly affects the functioning of the engine, is related to the control of emissions, or transmits engine power. This would include engine cooling systems, engine controls, and transmissions. Deleted: c

Deleted: d

Deleted: e

Deleted: a canister

Deleted: Use a canister that is fully loaded with fuel vapors.

Deleted: f

Deleted: f

Deleted: f(ii) The component is covered by the applicable certificate of conformity. For example, this criterion would typically exclude radiators not described in an application for certification. (iii) The component is not part of the laboratory setup, or it is used for other engines. (2) Although components meeting the criteria specified in paragraphs ( g )(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, but not the criterion specified in paragraph ( g )(1)(iii) of this section, are not considered to be part of the test engine, you must precondition these components along with the test engine.

§1065.410 Maintenance limits fo r stabilized test engines. (a) After you stabilize the test engine’s emissi on levels, you may do maintenance as allowed by the standard-setting part. However, you may not do any maintenance based on emission measurements from the test engine (i.e., unscheduled maintenance). (b) For any critical emission-related maintenance– other than what we spec ifically allow in the standard-setting part–you must completely test an engine for emissions before and after doing any maintenance that might affect emissions, unless we waive this requirement. (c) Keep a record of the inspection and update your application to document any changes as a result of the inspection. You may use equipment, instruments, or engineering grade tools to identify bad engine components. Any equipment, instruments, or tools used for scheduled maintenance on emission data engines must be representative of what is planned to be available to dealerships and other service outlets. (d) If we determine that a part failure, system malfunction, or associated repairs have made the engine’s emission controls unrepresentative of production engines, you may no longer use it as an emission-data engine. Also, if your test engine has a major mechanical failure that requires you to take it apart, you may no longer use it as an emission-data engine.

§1065.415 Durability demonstration. If the standard-setting part requires durability testing, you must accumulate service in a way that represents how you expect the engine to oper ate in use. You may accumulate service hours using an accelerated schedule, such as through continuous operation or by using duty cycles that are more aggressive than in-use operation, subject to any pre-approval requirements established in the applicable standard-setting part. (a) Maintenance . The following limits apply to the mainte nance that we allow you to do on an emission-data engine: (1) You may perform scheduled maintenance that you recommend to operators, but only if it is consistent with the standard-setting part’s restrictions. (2) You may perform additional maintenance only as specified in §1065.410 or allowed by the standard-setting part. (b) Emission measurements . Perform emission tests following the provisions of the standard setting part and this part, as app licable. Perform emission tests to determine deterioration factors consistent with good engineering judgment. Evenly space any tests between the first and last test points throughout the durability period, unless we approve otherwise. Deleted: f

Deleted: fSubpart F—Performing an Emission Test Over Specified Duty Cycles

§1065.501 Overview. (a) Use the procedures detailed in this subpart to measure engine emissions over a specified duty cycle. Refer to subpart J of this part for field test procedures that describe how to measure emissions during in-use engine operation. This section describes how to: (1) Map your engine, if applicable, by recording specified speed and torque data, as measured from the engine’s primary output shaft. (2) Transform normalized duty cycles into reference duty cycles for your engine by using an engine map. (3) Prepare your engine, equipment, and measurement instruments for an emission test. (4) Perform pre-test procedures to verify proper operation of certain equipment and analyzers. (5) Record pre-test data. (6) Start or restart the engine and sampling systems. (7) Sample emissions throughout the duty cycle. (8) Record post-test data. (9) Perform post-test procedures to verify proper operation of certain equipment and analyzers. (10) Weigh PM samples. (b) Unless we specify otherwise, you may control the regeneration timing of infrequently regenerated aftertreatment devices such as di esel particulate filters using good engineering judgment. You may control the regeneration timing using a sequence of engine operating conditions or you may initiate regeneration w ith an external regene ration switch or other command. This provision also allow s you to ensure that a regeneration event does not occur during an emission test. ( c ) An emission test generally consists of measuring emissions and other parameters while an engine follows one or more duty cycles that are specified in the standard-setting part. There are two general types of duty cycles: (1) Transient cycles . Transient duty cycles are typically specified in the standard-setting part as a second-by-second sequence of speed commands and normalized torque (or power) commands. Operate an engine over a transient cycle such that the speed and torque of the engine’s primary output shaft follows the target values. Proportionally sample emissions and other parameters and use the calculations in subpart G of this part to calculate emissions. Start a transient test according to the standard-setting part, as follows: (i) A cold-start transient cycle where you start to measure emissions just before starting an engine that has not been warmed up. (ii) A hot-start transient cycle where you star t to measure emissions just before starting a warmed-up engine. (iii) A hot running transient cycle where you start to measure emissions after an engine is started, warmed up, and running. (2) Steady-state cycles . Steady-state duty cycles are typically specified in the standard-setting part as a list of discrete operating points (modes or notches), where each operating point has one value of a normalized speed command and one value of a normalized torque (or power) command. Ramped-modal cycles for steady-state testing also list test times for each mode and transition times between modes where speed and torque are linearly ramped between modes, even for cycles with % power. Start a steady-state cycle as a hot running test, where you start to Deleted: would

Deleted: bmeasure emissions after an engine is started, warmed up and running. R un a steady-state duty cycle as a discrete-mode cycle or a ramped-modal cycle, as follows: (i) Discrete-mode cycles . Before emission sampling, stabilize an engine at the first discrete mode of the duty cycle specified in the standard-setting part . Sample emissions and other parameters for that mode in the same manner as a transient cycle, with the exception that reference speed and torque values are constant. Record data for that mode, transition to the next mode, and then stabilize the engine at the next mode. Continue to sample each mode discretely as a separate test interval and calculate composite brake-specific emission results according to §1065.650(g)(2)

. (A) Use good engineering judgment to determine the length of time required to stabilize the engine. You may make this determination before the start of the test based on prior experience, or you may make this determination in real time based an automated stability criteria. If needed, you may continue to operate the engine after reaching stability to get emissions equipment ready for sampling. (B) Collect PM on separate PM sample media for each mode. (C) The minimum sample time is 60 seconds. We recommend that you sample both gaseous and PM emissions over the same test interval. If you sample gaseous and PM emissions over different test intervals, there must be no change in engine operation between the two test intervals. These two test intervals may co mpletely or partially overlap, they may run consecutively, or they ma y be separated in time. (ii) Ramped-modal cycles . Perform ramped-modal cycles similar to the way you would perform transient cycles, except that ramped-modal cycles involve mostly steady-state engine operation. Generate a ramped-modal duty cycle as a sequence of second-by-second (1 Hz) reference speed and torque points. Run the ramped-modal duty cycle in the same manner as a transient cycle and use the 1 Hz reference speed and torque values to validate the cycle, even for cycles with % power. Proportionally sample emissions and ot her parameters during the cycle and use the calculations in subpart G of this part to calculate emissions. ( d ) Other subparts in this part identify how to select and prepare an engine for testing (subpart E), how to perform the required engine service accumulation (subpart E), and how to calculate emission results (subpart G). ( e ) Subpart J of this part describes how to perform field testing.

§1065.510 Engine mapping. (a) Applicability, scope, and frequency . An engine map is a data set that consists of a series of paired data points that represent the maximum brake torque versus engine speed, measured at the engine’s primary output shaft. Map your engine if the standard-setting part requires engine mapping to generate a duty cycle for your engine configuration. Map your engine while it is connected to a dynamometer or other device that can absorb work output from the engine’s primary output shaft according to §1065.110. To establish speed and torque values for mapping, we generally recommend that you stabilize an engine for at least 15 seconds at each setpoint and record the mean feedback speed a nd torque of the last (4 to 6) seconds. Configure any auxiliary work inputs and outputs such as hybrid, turbo-compounding, or thermoelectric systems to represent their in-use configurations, and use the same configuration for emission testing. See Figure 1 of §1065.210. This may in volve configuring initial states of charge and rates and times of auxiliary-work inputs and outputs. We recommend that you contact the Designated Compliance Officer before testing to determin e how you should confi gure any auxiliary-work inputs and outputs. Use the most recent engine map to transform a normalized duty cycle from Deleted: You may r

Deleted: mean values

Deleted: s

Deleted: weighted

Deleted: the standard-setting part

Deleted: c

Deleted: dthe standard-setting part to a reference duty cycl e specific to your engine. Normalized duty cycles are specified in the stan dard-setting part. You may update an engine map at any time by repeating the engine-mapping procedure. You must map or re-map an engine before a test if any of the following apply: (1) If you have not performed an initial engine map. (2) If the atmospheric pressure near the engine’s air inlet is not within ±5 kPa of the atmospheric pressure recorded at the time of the last engine map. (3) If the engine or emission-control system has undergone changes that might affect maximum torque performance. This includes changing the configuration of auxiliary work inputs and outputs. (4) If you capture an incomplete map on your fi rst attempt or you do not complete a map within the specified time tolerance. You may repeat mapping as often as necessary to capture a complete map within the specified time. (b) Mapping variable-speed engines . Map variable-speed engines as follows: (1) Record the atmospheric pressure. (2) Warm up the engine by operating it. We recommend operating the engine at any speed and at approximately 75 % of its expected maximum po wer. Continue the warm-up until the engine coolant, block, or head absolute temperature is within ±2 % of its mean value for at least 2 min or until the engine thermostat controls engine temperature. (3) Operate the engine at its warm idle speed as follows: (i) For engines with a low-speed governor, set the operator demand to minimum, use the dynamometer or other loading device to target a torque of zero on the engine’s primary output shaft, and allow the engine to govern the speed. Measure this warm idle speed; we recommend recording at least 30 values of speed and using the mean of those values. (ii) For engines without a low-speed governor, operate the engine at warm idle speed and zero torque on the engine’s primary output shaft. You may use the dynamometer to target a torque of zero on the engine’s primary output shaft, and manipulate the operator demand to control the speed to target the manufacturer-declared valu e for the lowest engine speed possible with minimum load (also known as manufacturer-declared warm idle speed). You may alternatively use the dynamometer to target the manufacturer-declared warm idle speed and manipulate the operator demand to control the torque on the engine’s primary output shaft to zero. (iii) For variable-speed engines with or without a low-speed governor, if a nonzero idle torque is representative of in-use operation, you may use the dynamometer or operator demand to target the manufacturer-declared idle torque instead of targeting zero torque as specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section. Control speed as specified in paragraph (b)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable. If you use this option for engines with a low-speed governor to measure the warm idle speed with the manufacturer-declared torque at this step, you may use this as the warm-idle speed for cycle generation as specified in paragraph (b)(6) of this section. However, if you identify multiple warm id le torques under paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, measure the warm idle speed at only one torque level for this paragraph (b)(3). (4) Set operator demand to maximum and control engine speed at (95 ±1) % of its warm idle speed determined above for at least 15 seconds. For engines with reference duty cycles whose lowest speed is greater than warm idle speed, you may start the map at (95 ±1) % of the lowest reference speed. (5) Perform one of the following:(i) For any engine subject only to steady-state duty cycles, you may perform an engine map by using discrete speeds. Select at least 20 evenly spaced setpoints from 95% of warm idle speed to the highest speed above maximum power at which 50 % of maximum power occurs. We refer to this 50 % speed as the check point speed as described in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this section. At each setpoint, stabilize speed and allow torque to stabilize. Record the mean speed and torque at each setpoint. Use linear interpolation to determine intermediate speeds and torques. Use this series of speeds and torques to generate the power map as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (ii) For any variable-speed engine, you may perform an engine map by using a continuous sweep of speed by continuing to record the mean feedback speed and torque at 1 Hz or more frequently and increasing speed at a constant rate such that it takes (4 to 6) min to sweep from 95 % of warm idle speed to the check point speed as descri bed in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this section. Use good engineering judgment to determine when to stop recording data to ensure that the sweep is complete. In most cases, this means th at you can stop the sweep at any point after the power falls to 50 % of the maximum value. From the series of mean speed and maximum torque values, use linear interpolation to determine intermediate values. Use this series of speeds and torques to generate the power map as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (iii) The check point speed of the map is the highest speed above maximum power at which 50 % of maximum power occurs. If this speed is unsafe or unachievable (e.g., for ungoverned engines or engines that do not operate at that point) , use good engineering judgment to map up to the maximum safe speed or maximum achievable speed. For discrete mapping, if the engine cannot be mapped to the check point speed, make sure the map includes at least 20 points from 95% of warm idle to the maximum mapped speed. For continuous mapping, if the engine cannot be mapped to the check point speed, verify that the sweep time from 95 % of warm idle to the maximum mapped speed is (4 to 6) min. (iv) Note that under §1065.10(c)(1) we may allow you to disregard portions of the map when selecting maximum test speed if the specified procedure would result in a duty cycle that does not represent in-use operation.(6) Use one of the following methods to determine warm high-idle speed for engines with a highspeed governor if they are subject to transient te sting with a duty cycle that includes reference speed values above 100 %: (i) You may use a manufacturer-declared warm high- idle speed if the engine is electronically governed. For engines with a high-speed governor that shuts off torque output at a manufacturer-specified speed and reactivates at a lower manufacturer-specified speed (such as engines that use ignition cut-off for governing), declare the middle of the specified speed range as the warm high-idle speed. (ii) Measure the warm high-idle speed using the following procedure: (A) Set operator demand to maximum and use the dynamometer to target zero torque on the engine’s primary output shaft. If the mean feedback torque is within ±1 % of T max mapped , you may use the observed mean feedback speed at that point as the measured warm high-idle speed. (B) If the engine is unstable as a result of in-use production components (such as engines that use ignition cut-off for governing, as opposed to unstable dynamometer operation), you must use the mean feedback speed from paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(A) of this section as the measured warm highidle speed. The engine is considered unstable if any of the 1 Hz speed feedback values are not within ±2 % of the calculated mean feedback speed. We recommend that you determine themean as the value representing the midpoint between the observed maximum and minimum recorded feedback speed. (C) If your dynamometer is not capable of achieving a mean feedback torque within ±1 % of T

max mapped , operate the engine at a second point with operator demand set to maximum with the dynamometer set to target a torque equal to the recorded mean feedback torque on the previous point plus 20 % of T max mapped . Use this data point and the data point from paragraph (b)(6)(ii)(A) of this section to extrapolate the engine speed where torque is equal to zero. (D) You may use a manufacturer-declared T max instead of the measured T max mapped . If you do this, or if you are able to determine mean feedb ack speed as described in paragraphs (b)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, you may measure the warm high-idle speed before running the speed sweep specified in paragraph (b)(5) of this section. (7) For engines with a low-speed governor, if a nonzero idle torque is representative of in-use operation, operate the engine at warm idle with the manufacturer-declared idle torque. Set the operator demand to minimum, use the dynamometer to target the declared idle torque, and allow the engine to govern the speed. Measure this speed and use it as the warm idle speed for cycle generation in §1065.512. We recommend recording at least 30 values of speed and using the mean of those values. If you identify multiple wa rm idle torques under paragraph (f)(4)(i) of this section, measure the warm idle speed at each torque. You may map the idle governor at multiple load levels and use this map to determine the measured warm idle speed at the declared idle torque(s). (c) Negative torque mapping . If your engine is subject to a reference duty cycle that specifies negative torque values (i.e., engine motoring), generate a motoring map by any of the following procedures: (1) Multiply the positive torques from your map by –40 %. Use linear interpolation to determine intermediate values. (2) Map the amount of negative torque required to motor the engine by repeating paragraph (b) of this section with minimum operator demand. You may start the negative torque map at either the minimum or maximum speed from paragraph (b) of this section. (3) Determine the amount of negative torque required to motor the engine at the following two points near the ends of the engine’s speed range . Operate the engine at these two points at minimum operator demand. Use linear interpol ation to determine intermediate values. (i) Low speed point. For engines without a low-speed governor, determine the amount of negative torque at warm idle speed. For engine s with a low-speed governor, motor the engine above warm idle speed so the governor is inactive and determine the amount of negative torque at that speed. (ii) High speed point. For engines without a high-speed governor, determine the amount of negative torque at the maximum safe speed or the maximum representative speed. For engines with a high-speed governor, determine the amount of negative torque at a speed at or above n hi per §1065.610(c)(2). (d) Mapping constant-speed engines . For constant-speed engines, generate a map as follows: (1) Record the atmospheric pressure. (2) Warm up the engine by operating it. We recommend operating the engine at approximately 75 % of the engine’s expected maximum power. Continue the warm-up until the engine coolant, block, or head absolute temperat ure is within ±2 % of its mean value for at least 2 min or until the engine thermostat controls engine temperature.(3) You may operate the engine with a production constant-speed governor or simulate a constant-speed governor by controlling engine speed with an operator demand control system described in §1065.110. Use either isochronous or speed-droop governor operation, as appropriate. (4) With the governor or simulated governor co ntrolling speed using operator demand, operate the engine at no-load governed speed (at high speed, not low idle) for at least 15 seconds. (5) Perform one of the following: (i) For constant-speed engines subject only to steady-state testing, you may perform an engine map by using a series of discrete torques. Select at least five evenly spaced torque setpoints from no-load to 80 % of the manufacturer-declared test torque or to a torque derived from your published maximum power level if the declared test torque is unavailable. Starting at the 80 % torque point, select setpoints in 2.5 % intervals, stopping at the endpoint torque. The endpoint torque is defined as the first discrete mapped torque value greater than the torque at maximum observed power where the engine outputs 90 % of the maximum observed power; or the torque when engine stall has been determined using good engineering judgment (i.e. sudden deceleration of engine speed while adding torque). You may continue mapping at higher torque setpoints. At each setpoint, allow torque and speed to stabilize. Record the mean feedback speed and torque at each setpoint. From this series of mean feedback speed and torque values, use linear interpolation to determine intermediate values. Use this series of mean feedback speeds and torques to generate the power map as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (ii) For any constant-speed engine, you may perform an engine map with a continuous torque sweep by continuing to record the mean feedback speed and torque at 1 Hz or more frequently. Use the dynamometer to increase torque. Increase the reference torque at a constant rate from no-load to the endpoint torque as defined in paragraph (d)(5)(i) of this section. You may continue mapping at higher torque setpoints. Unless the st andard-setting part specifies otherwise, target a torque sweep rate equal to the manufacturer-declared test torque (or a torque derived from your published power level if the declared te st torque is not known) divided by 180 seconds . Stop recording after you complete the sweep. Verify that the average torque sweep rate over the entire map is within ±7 % of the target torque sweep rate. Use linear interpolation to determine intermediate values from this se ries of mean feedback speed and torque values. Use this series of mean feedback speeds and torques to generate the power map as described in paragraph (e) of this section. (iii) For electric power generation applications in which normal engine operation is limited to a specific speed range, map the engine with two points as described in this paragraph (d)(5)(iii). After stabilizing at the no-load governed speed in paragraph (d)(4) of this section, record the mean feedback speed and torque. Continue to operate the engine with the governor or simulated governor controlling engine speed using operator demand, and control the dynamometer to target a speed of 97.5 % of the recorded mean no-load governed speed. If the in-use performance class of the electric power generation application is known, you may use those values in place of 97.5 % (e.g., for ISO 8528-5 G3 Performance Class, the steady-state frequency band is less than or equal to 0.5 %, so use 99.75 % instead of 97.5 %). Allow speed and torque to stabilize. Record the mean feedback speed and torque. Record the target speed. The absolute value of the speed error (the mean feedback speed minus the target speed) must be no greater than 20 % of the difference between the recorded mean no-load governed speed and the target speed. From this series of two mean feedback speed and torque values, use linear interpolation to determine intermediate values. Use this series of two m ean feedback speeds and torques to generate a Deleted: spower map as described in paragraph (e) of this section. Note that the measured maximum test torque determined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section will be the mean feedback torque recorded on the second point. (e) Power mapping . For all engines, create a power-versus-speed map by transforming torque and speed values to corresponding power values. Use the mean values from the recorded map data. Do not use any interpolated values. Multiply each torque by its corresponding speed and apply the appropriate conversion factors to ar rive at units of power (kW). Interpolate intermediate power values between these power values, which were calculated from the recorded map data. (f) Measured and declared test speeds and torques . You must select test speeds and torques for cycle generation as required in this paragraph (f). “Measured” values are either directly measured during the engine mapping process or they are determined from the engine map. “Declared” values are specified by the manufactur er. When both measured and declared values are available, you may use declared test speeds and torques instead of measured speeds and torques if they meet the criteria in this paragraph (f). Otherwise, you must use measured speeds and torques derived from the engine map. (1) Measured speeds and torques . Determine the applicable speeds and torques for the duty cycles you will run: (i) Measured maximum test speed for variable-speed engines according to §1065.610. (ii) Measured maximum test torque for constant-speed engines according to §1065.610. (iii) Measured “A”, “B”, and “C” speeds for variable-speed engines according to §1065.610. (iv) Measured intermediate speed for variable-speed engines according to §1065.610. (v) For variable-speed engines with a low-speed governor, measure warm idle speed according to§1065.510(b) and use this speed for cycle generation in §1065.512. For engines with no lowspeed governor, instead use the manufacturer-declared warm idle speed. (2) Required declared speeds . You must declare the lowest engine speed possible with minimum load (i.e., manufacturer-declared warm idle speed). This is applicable only to variable-speed engines with no low-speed governor. For engines with no low-speed governor, the declared warm idle speed is used for cycle generation in §1065.512. Declare this speed in a way that is representative of in-use operation. For example, if your engine is typically connected to an automatic transmission or a hydrostatic transmissi on, declare this speed at the idle speed at which your engine operates when the transmission is engaged. (3) Optional declared speeds . You may use declared speeds instead of measured speeds as follows: (i) You may use a declared value for maximum test speed for variable-speed engines if it is within (97.5 to 102.5) % of the corresponding measured value. You may use a higher declared speed if the length of the “vector” at the declared speed is within 2 % of the length of the “vector” at the measured value. The term vector refers to the square root of the sum of normalized engine speed squared and the normali zed full-load power (at that speed) squared, consistent with the calculations in §1065.610. (ii) You may use a declared value for intermediate, “A”, “B”, or “C” speeds for steady-state tests if the declared value is within (97.5 to 102.5) % of the corresponding measured value. (iii) For electronically governed engines, you may use a declared warm high-idle speed for calculating the alternate maximum test speed as specified in §1065.610. (4) Required declared torques. If a nonzero idle or minimum torque is representative of in-use operation, you must declare the appropriate torque as follows:(i) For variable-speed engines, declare a warm idle torque that is representative of in-use operation. For example, if your engine is typically connected to an automatic transmission or a hydrostatic transmission, declare the torque that occurs at the idle speed at which your engine operates when the transmission is engaged. Use this value for cycle generation. You may use multiple warm idle torques and associated id le speeds in cycle generation for representative testing. For example, for cycles that start the engine and begin with idle, you may start a cycle in idle with the transmission in neutral with zero to rque and later switch to a different idle with the transmission in drive with the Curb-Idle Tran smission Torque (CITT). For variable-speed engines intended primarily for propulsion of a vehi cle with an automatic transmission where that engine is subject to a transient duty cycle with idle operation, you must declare a CITT. You must specify a CITT based on typical applications at the mean of the range of idle speeds you specify at stabilized temperature conditions. (ii) For constant-speed engines, declare a warm minimum torque that is representative of in-use operation. For example, if your engine is typically connected to a machine that does not operate below a certain minimum torque, declare this torque and use it for cycle generation. (5) Optional declared torques . (i) For variable-speed engines you may declare a maximum torque over the engine operating range. You may use the declared value for measuring warm high-idle speed as specified in this section. (ii) For constant-speed engines you may declare a maximum test torque. You may use the declared value for cycle generation if it is w ithin (95 to 100) % of the measured value. (g) Mapping variable-speed engines with an electric hybrid system . Map variable-speed engines that include electric hybrid systems as described in this paragraph (g). You may ask to apply these provisions to other types of hybrid engines, consistent with good engineering judgment. However, do not use this procedure for engines used in hybrid vehicles where the hybrid systemis certified as part of the vehicle rather than the engine. Follow the steps for mapping a variablespeed engine as given in paragraph (b)(5) of this section except as noted in this paragraph (g). You must generate one engine map with the hybrid system inactive as described in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, and a separate map with the hybrid system active as described in paragraph (g)(2) of this section. See the standard-setting part to determine how to use these maps. The map with the system inactive is typically used to generate steady-state duty cycles, but may also be used to generate transient cycles, such as those that do not involve engine motoring. This hybrid-inactive map is also used for generating the hybrid-active map. The hybrid-active map is typically used to generate transient duty cycles that involve engine motoring. (1) Prepare the engine for mapping by either deactivating the hybrid system or by operating the engine as specified in paragraph (b)(4) of this section and remaining at this condition until the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) is depleted. Once the hybrid has been disabled or the RESS is depleted, perform an engine map as specified in paragraph (b)(5) of this section. If the RESS was depleted instead of deactivated, ensure that instantaneous power from the RESS remains less than 2 % of the instantaneous meas ured power from the engine (or engine-hybrid system) at all engine speeds. (2) The purpose of the mapping procedure in this paragraph (g) is to determine the maximum torque available at each speed, such as what might occur during transient operation with a fully charged RESS. Use one of the following methods to generate a hybrid-active map: (i) Perform an engine map by using a series of continuous sweeps to cover the engine’s full range of operating speeds. Prepare the engine for hybrid-active mapping by ensuring that the RESS state of charge is representative of normal operation. Perform the sweep as specified inparagraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section, but stop the sweep to charge the RESS when the power measured from the RESS drops below the expected maximum power from the RESS by more than 2 % of total system power (including engine and RESS power). Unless good engineering judgment indicates otherwise, assume that the expected maximum power from the RESS is equal to the measured RESS power at the start of the sweep segment. For example, if the 3-second rolling average of total engine-RESS power is 200 kW and the power from the RESS at the beginning of the sweep segment is 50 kW, once the power from the RESS reaches 46 kW, stop the sweep to charge the RESS. Note that this assumption is not valid where the hybrid motor is torque-limited. Calculate total system power as a 3-second rolling average of instantaneous total system power. After each charging event, stab ilize the engine for 15 seconds at the speed at which you ended the previous segment with operator demand set to maximum before continuing the sweep from that speed. Repeat the cycle of charging, mapping, and recharging until you have completed the engine map. You may shut down the system or include other operation between segments to be consistent with the intent of this paragr aph (g)(2)(i). For example, for systems in which continuous charging and discharging can overheat batteries to an extent that affects performance, you may operate the engine at zero power from the RESS for enough time after the system is recharged to allow the batteries to cool. Use good engineering judgment to smooth the torque curve to eliminate discontinuities between map intervals. (ii) Perform an engine map by using discrete speeds. Select map setpoints at intervals defined by the ranges of engine speed being mapped. From 95 % of warm idle speed to 90 % of the expected maximum test speed, select setpoints that result in a minimum of 13 equally spaced speed setpoints. From 90 % to 110 % of expected maximum test speed, select setpoints in equally spaced intervals that are nominally 2 % of expected maximum test speed. Above 110 % of expected maximum test speed, select setpoints based on the same speed intervals used for mapping from 95 % warm idle speed to 90 % maximum test speed. You may stop mapping at the highest speed above maximum power at which 50 % of maximum power occurs. We refer to the speed at 50 % power as the check point speed as described in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this section. Stabilize engine speed at each setpoint, targeting a torque value at 70 % of peak torque at that speed without hybrid-assist. Make sure the engine is fully warmed up and the RESS state of charge is within the normal operating range. Snap the operator demand to maximum, operate the engine there for at least 10 seconds, and record the 3-second rolling average feedback speed and torque at 1 Hz or higher. Record the peak 3-second average torque and 3-second average speed at that point. Use linear interpolation to determine intermediate speeds and torques. Follow §1065.610(a) to calculate the maximum test speed. Verify that the measured maximum test speed falls in the range from 92 to 108 % of the estimated maximum test speed. If the measured maximum test speed does not fall in this range, rerun the map using the measured value of maximum test speed. (h) Other mapping procedures . You may use other mapping procedures if you believe the procedures specified in this section are unsafe or unrepresentative for your engine. Any alternate techniques you use must satisfy the intent of the specified mapping procedures, which is to determine the maximum available torque at all engine speeds that occur during a duty cycle. Identify any deviations from this section’s ma pping procedures when you submit data to us.

§1065.512 Duty cycle generation. (a) Generate duty cycles according to this secti on if the standard-setting part requires engine mapping to generate a duty cycle for your engi ne configuration. Th e standard-setting partgenerally defines applicable duty cycles in a normalized format. A normalized duty cycle generally consists of a sequence of paired values for speed and torque or for speed and power. (b) Transform normalized values of speed, torque, and power using the following conventions: (1) Engine speed for variable-speed engines. For variable-speed engines, normalized speed may be expressed as a percentage between warm idle speed, f nidle , and maximum test speed, f ntest , or speed may be expressed by referring to a defined speed by name, such as “warm idle,” “intermediate speed,” or “A,” “B,” or “C” spee d. Section 1065.610 describes how to transform these normalized values into a sequence of reference speeds, f nref . Running duty cycles with negative or small normalized speed values near warm idle speed may cause low-speed idle governors to activate and the engine torque to exceed the reference torque even though the operator demand is at a minimum. In such cases, we recommend controlling the dynamometer so it gives priority to follow the reference torque instead of the reference speed and let the engine govern the speed. Note that the cycle-validation criteria in §1065.514 allow an engine to govern itself. This allowance permits you to test engines with enhanced-idle devices and to simulate the effects of transmissions such as automatic transm issions. For example, an enhanced-idle device might be an idle speed value that is normally commanded only under cold-start conditions to quickly warm up the engine and aftertreatment devices. In this case, negative and very low normalized speeds will generate reference speeds be low this higher enhanced idle speed and we recommend controlling the dynamometer so it gi ves priority to follow the reference torque, controlling the operator demand so it gives priority to follow reference speed and let the engine govern the speed when the operator demand is at minimum. (2) Engine torque for variable-speed engines. For variable-speed engines, normalized torque is expressed as a percentage of the mapped torque at the corresponding reference speed. Section 1065.610 describes how to transform normalized torques into a sequence of reference torques, T

ref . Section 1065.610 also describes special requir ements for modifying transient duty cycles for variable-speed engines intended primarily for propulsion of a vehicle with an automatic transmission. Section 1065.610 also describes under what conditions you may command T ref greater than the reference torque you calculated from a normalized duty cycle. This provision permits you to command T ref

values that are limited by a declared minimum torque. For any negative torque commands, command minimum operator demand and use the dynamometer to control engine speed to the reference speed, but if reference speed is so low that the idle governor activates, we recommend using the dynamometer to control torque to zero, CITT, or a declared minimum torque as appropriate. No te that you may omit power and torque points during motoring from the cycle-validation criteria in §1065.514. Also, use the maximum mapped torque at the minimum mapped speed as the maximum torque for any reference speed at or below the minimum mapped speed. (3) Engine torque for constant-speed engines. For constant-speed engines, normalized torque is expressed as a percentage of maximum test torque, T test . Section 1065.610 describes how to transform normalized torques into a sequence of reference torques, T ref . Section 1065.610 also describes under what conditions you may command T ref

greater than the reference torque you calculated from the normalized duty cycle. This provision permits you to command T ref

values that are limited by a declared minimum torque. (4) Engine power. For all engines, normalized power is expressed as a percentage of mapped power at maximum test speed, f ntest , unless otherwise specified by the standard-setting part. Section 1065.610 describes how to transform these normalized values into a sequence of reference powers, P ref . Convert these reference powers to corresponding torques for operatordemand and dynamometer control. Use the reference speed associated with each reference power point for this conversion. As with cycles specified with % torque, issue torque commands more frequently and linearly interpolate between these reference torque values generated from cycles with % power. (5) Ramped-modal cycles. For ramped- modal cycles, generate reference speed and torque values at 1 Hz and use this sequence of points to run the cycle and validate it in the same manner as with a transient cycle. During the transition between modes, linearly ramp the denormalized reference speed and torque values between modes to generate reference points at 1 Hz. Do not linearly ramp the normalized reference torque values between modes and then denormalize them. Do not linearly ramp normalized or denormalized reference power points. These cases will produce nonlinear torque ramps in the denormalized reference torques. If the speed and torque ramp runs through a point above the engine’s torque curve, continue to command the reference torques and allow the operator demand to go to maximum. Note that you may omit power and either torque or speed points from the cycl e-validation criteria under these conditions as specified in §1065.514. (c) For variable-speed engines, command reference speeds and torques sequentially to perform a duty cycle. Issue speed and torque commands at a frequency of at least 5 Hz for transient cycles and at least 1 Hz for steady-state cycles (i.e., discrete-mode and ramped-modal). Linearly interpolate between the 1 Hz reference values specified in the standard-setting part to determine more frequently issued reference speeds and torques. During an emission test, record the feedback speeds and torques at a frequency of at least 5 Hz for transient cycles and at least 1 Hz for steady-state cycles. For transient cycles, y ou may record the feedback speeds and torques at lower frequencies (as low as 1 Hz) if you record the average value over the time interval between recorded values. Calculate the average values based on feedback values updated at a frequency of at least 5 Hz. Use these recorded values to cal culate cycle-validation statistics and total work. (d) For constant-speed engines, operate the engine with the same production governor you used to map the engine in §1065.510 or simulate the in-use operation of a governor the same way you simulated it to map the engine in §1065.510. Command reference torque values sequentially to perform a duty cycle. Issue torque commands at a frequency of at least 5 Hz for transient cycles and at least 1 Hz for steady-state cycles (i .e., discrete-mode, ramped-modal). Linearly interpolate between the 1 Hz reference values specified in the standard-setting part to determine more frequently issued reference torque values. During an emission test, record the feedback speeds and torques at a frequency of at least 5 Hz for transient cycles and at least 1 Hz for steady-state cycles. For transient cycles, you may record the feedback speeds and torques at lower frequencies (as low as 1 Hz) if you record the average value over the time interval between recorded values. Calculate the average values based on feedback values updated at a frequency of at least 5 Hz. Use these recorded values to cal culate cycle-validation statistics and total work. (e) You may perform practice duty cycles with the test engine to optimize operator demand and dynamometer controls to meet the cycle-validation criteria specified in §1065.514.

§1065.514 Cycle-validation criteria for operation over specified duty cycles. Validate the execution of your duty cycle according to this section unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise. This section descri bes how to determine if the engine’s operation during the test adequately matched the reference duty cycle. This section applies only to speed, torque, and power from the engine’s primary output shaft. Other work inputs and outputs are not subject to cycle-validation criteria. You must co mpare the original reference duty cycle points Deleted: rampedgenerated as described in §1065.512 to the corresponding feedback values recorded during the test. You may compare reference duty cycle points recorded during the test to the corresponding feedback values recorded during the test as long as the recorded reference values match the original points generated in §1065.512. The number of points in the validation regression are based on the number of points in the original reference duty cycle generated in §1065.512. For example if the original cycle has 1199 reference poi nts at 1 Hz, then the regression will have up to 1199 pairs of reference and feedback values at the corresponding moments in the test. The feedback speed and torque signals may be filtered – either in real -time while the test is run or afterward in the analysis program. Any filtering that is used on the feedback signals used for cycle validation must also be used for calculating work. Feedback signals for control loops may use different filtering. (a) Testing performed by EPA . Our tests must meet the specifications of paragraph (f) of this section, unless we determine that failing to meet the specifications is related to engine performance rather than to shortcomings of the dynamometer or other laboratory equipment. (b) Testing performed by manufacturers . Emission tests that meet the specifications of paragraph (f) of this section satisfy the standard-s etting part’s requirements for duty cycles. You may ask to use a dynamometer or other laboratory equipment that cannot meet those specifications. We will approve your request as long as using the alternate equipment does not adversely affect your ability to show compliance with the applicable emission standards. (c) Time-alignment . Because time lag between feedback values and the reference values may bias cycle-validation results, you may advance or delay the entire sequence of feedback engine speed and torque pairs to synchronize them with the reference sequence. If you advance or delay feedback signals for cycle validation, you must make the same adjustment for calculating work. You may use linear interpolation between successive recorded feedback signals to time shift an amount that is a fraction of the recording period. (d) Omitting additional points . Besides engine cranking, you may omit additional points from cycle-validation statistics as desc ribed in the following table:

Table 1 of §1065.514— Permissible criteria for omitting points from duty-cycle regression statistics For reference duty cycles that are specified in terms of speed and torque ( f

nre f , T

ref

) When operator demand is at its... you may omit... if...

minimum power and torque T ref < 0 % (motoring)
minimum power and speed f nref = 0 % (idle speed) and T ref

= 0 % (idle torque) and T

ref
– (2 % · T max ma pp ed ) < T < T ref + (2 %

 T max ma pp ed )

minimum power and either torque or speed f n > f nref or T > T ref

but not if f n > ( f

nref  102%) and T

> T ref + (2 %  T max ma pp ed )

maximum power and either torque or speed f n < f nref or T < T ref

but not if f n < ( f

nref  98 %) and T

< T ref

– (2 %  T max ma pp ed ) For reference duty cycles that are specified in terms of speed and power ( f

nre f , P ref

) When operator demand is at its... you may omit... if...
minimum power and torque P ref < 0 % (motoring) minimum power and speed f nref = 0 % (idle speed) and P ref

= 0 % (idle power) andP ref

– (2 %

 P max ma pp e d ) < P < P ref

+ (2 %

 P max ma pp ed )

minimum power and either torque or speed f n > f nref or P > P ref

but not if f n > ( f

nref  102 %) and P

> P ref

+ (2 %

 P max ma pp e d )

maximum power and either torque or speed f n < f nref or P < P ref

but not if f n < ( f

nref  98 %) and P < P

ref
– (2 %

 P max ma pp e d )

(e) Statistical parameters . Use the remaining points to calcula te regression statistics described in §1065.602. Round calculated regression statistics to the same number of significant digits as the criteria to which they are compared. Refer to Table 2 of §1065.514 for the default criteria and refer to the standard-setting part to determine if there are other criteria for your engine. Calculate the following regression statistics: (1) Slopes for feedback speed, a 1fn , feedback torque, a 1T , and feedback power a 1P
. (2) Intercepts for feedback speed, a 0fn , feedback torque, a 0T , and feedback power a 0P
. (3) Standard estimates of error for feedback speed, SEE fn , feedback torque, SEE T , and feedback
power SEE P
. (4) Coefficients of determination for feedback speed, 2 fn r , feedback torque, 2 T r , and feedback

power 2 P r

. (f) Cycle-validation criteria . Unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise, use the following criteria to validate a duty cycle: (1) For variable-speed engines, apply all the st atistical criteria in Table 2 of this section. (2) For constant-speed engines, apply only the statistical criteria for torque in Table 2 of this section. (3) For discrete-mode steady-state testing, apply cycle-validation criteria by treating the sampling periods from the series of test modes as a continuous sampling period, analogous to ramped-modal testing and apply statistical criter ia as described in paragraph (f)(1) or (f)(2) of this section. Note that if the gaseous and partic ulate test intervals are different periods of time, separate validations are required for the gaseous and particulate test intervals. Table 2 follows:

Table 2 of §1065.514—Default statistical criteria for validating duty cycles Parameter Speed Torque Power Slope, a 1 0.950 ≤ a 1 ≤ 1.030 0.830 ≤ a 1 ≤ 1.030 0.830 ≤ a 1 ≤ 1.030 Absolute value of intercept, | a 0 | ≤ 10 % of warm idle ≤ 2 % of maximum mapped torque ≤ 2 % of maximum mapped power Standard error of estimate, SEE ≤ 5 % of maximum test speed ≤ 10 % of maximum mapped torque ≤ 10 % of maximum mapped power Coefficient of determination, r 2 ≥ 0.970 ≥ 0.850 ≥ 0.910

§1065.516 Sample system decontamination and preconditioning. This section describes how to manage the impact of sampling system contamination on emission measurements. Use good engineering judgement to determine if you should decontaminate and precondition your sampling system. Contamination occurs when a regulated pollutant accumulates in the sample system in a high enough concentration to cause release during emission tests. Hydrocarbons and PM are generally the only regulated pollutants that contaminate sample systems. A sampling system is considered decontaminated if thecontaminants are in equilibrium with measured exhaust emissions. Note that although this section focuses on avoiding excessive contamination of sample systems, you must also use good engineering judgment to avoid loss of sample to a sample system that is too clean. The goal of decontamination is not to perfectly clean the sample system, but rather to achieve equilibrium between the sample system and the exhaust so emission components are neither lost to nor entrained from the sample system. (a) You may perform contamination checks as fo llows to determine if decontamination is needed: (1) For dilute exhaust sampling systems, measure hydrocarbon and PM emissions by sampling with the CVS dilution air turned on, without an engine connected to it. (2) For raw analyzers and systems that collect PM samples from raw exhaust, measure hydrocarbon and PM emissions by sampling purified air or nitrogen. (3) When calculating zero emission levels, apply all applicable correcti ons, including initial THC contamination and diluted (CVS) exhaust background corrections. (4) Sampling systems are considered contaminated if either of the following conditions applies: (i) The hydrocarbon emission level exceeds 2 % of the flow-weighted mean wet, net concentration expected at the HC standard. (ii) The PM emission level exceeds 5 % of the level expected at the standard and exceeds 20 μ g on a 47 mm PTFE membrane filter. (b) To precondition/decontaminate sampling systems, use the following recommended procedure or use good engineering judgment to select a different procedure: (1) Start the engine and use good engineering judgment to operate it at a condition that generates high exhaust temperatures at the sample probe inlet. (2) Operate any dilution systems at their expected flow rates. Prevent aqueous condensation in the dilution systems. (3) Operate any PM sampling systems at their expected flow rates. (4) Sample PM for at least 10 min using any sample media. You may change sample media at any time during this process and you may discard them without weighing them. (5) You may purge any gaseous sampling systems that do not require decontamination during this procedure. (6) You may conduct calibrations or verifications on any idle equipment or analyzers during this procedure. (c) If your sampling system is still contaminated following the procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, you may use more aggressive procedures to decontaminate the sampling system, as long as the decontamination does not cause the sampling system to be cleaner than an equilibrium condition such that artificial ly low emission measurements may result.

§1065.518 Engine preconditioning. (a) This section applies for engines where measured emissions are affected by prior operation, such as with a diesel engine that relies on urea-based selective catalytic reduction. Note that §1065.520(e) allows you to run practice duty cycles before the emission test; this sectionrecommends how to do this for the purpose of preconditioning the engine. Follow the standardsetting part if it specifies a differe nt engine precond itioning procedure. (b) The intent of engine preconditioning is to manage the representativeness of emissions and emission controls over the duty cycle and to reduce bias

. Deleted: We may test your engine after completing only the minimum amount of preconditioning recommended in this section. For subsequent testing, such as steady-state testing following transient testing, we may consider the previous test cycle as preconditioning.

Deleted: , as described in §1065.10(c)(1), by conditioning the engine to a state where its emissions are representative of in-use operation(c) This paragraph (c) specifies the engine preconditioning procedures for different types of duty cycles. You may measure emissions during prec onditioning cycles, as long as you perform a predefined number of preconditioning cycles. You must identify the amount of preconditioning before starting to precondition . You may not abort an emission test sequence based on emissions measured during preconditioning. For confirmatory testing, you may ask us to run more preconditioning cycles than we specify in this paragraph (c); we will agree to this only if you show that the catalyst state at the start of testing is otherwise not representative of in-use operation due to the effect of DPF regeneration on NH 3 storage in the SCR catalyst. Perform preconditioning as follows, noting that the specifi c cycles for preconditioning are the same ones that apply for emission testing: (1) Cold-start transient cycle. Precondition the engine by running at least one hot-start transient cycle. We will precondition your engine by running two hot-start transient cycles. Immediately after completing each preconditioning cycle, shut down the engine and complete the engine-off soak period. Immediately after completing the last preconditioning cycle, shut down the engine and begin the cold soak as described in §1065.530(a)(1). (2) Hot-start transient cycle. Preconditi on the engine by running at least one hot-start transient cycle. We will precondition your engine by running two hot-start transient cycles. Immediately after completing each preconditioning cycle, shut down the engine, then start the next cycle (including the emission test) as soon as practical. Start the next preconditioning cycle within 60 seconds after completing the last preconditioning cycle (this is optional for manufacturer testing). (3) Hot-running transient cycle. Precondit ion the engine by running at least one hot-running transient cycle. We will precondition your engine by ru nning two hot-running transient cycles. Do not shut down the engine between cy cles. Immediately after completing each preconditioning cycle, start the next cycle (including the emission test) as soon as practical. Start the next preconditioning cycle within 60 seconds after completing the last preconditioning cycle (this is optional for manufacturer testing). S ee §1065.530(a)(1)(iii) for additional instructions about where the cycle begins and ends under different operating conditions. (4) Discrete-mode cycle for steady-state testing. Precondition the engine at the same operating condition as the next test mode, unles s the standard-setting part specifies different time limits. We will precondition your engine by running it for at least five minutes before sampling. (5) Ramped-modal cycle for steady-state testing. Precondition the engine by running at least the second half of the ramped-modal cycle, based on the number of test modes. For example, for the five-mode cycle specified in 40 CFR 1039.505(b)(1), the second half of the cycle consists ofmodes three through five. We will precondition your engine by running one complete rampedmodal cycle. Do not shut down the engine between cycles. Start the next ramped-modal cycle, including the emission test, as soon as practical after comple ting the last preconditioning cycle. (d) You may conduct calibrations or verifications on any idle equipment or analyzers during engine preconditioning.

§1065.520 Pre-test verification proce dures and pre-test data collection. (a) For tests in which you measure PM emissions , follow the procedures for PM sample preconditioning and tare weighing according to §1065.590. (b) Unless the standard-setting part specifies differe nt tolerances, verify at some point before the test that ambient conditions are within the tole rances specified in this paragraph (b). For Deleted: each duty cycle whether it is apreconditioning cycle or an emission test

Deleted: hot-start transient cycle. Shut down the engine after completing the last preconditioning cycle and start the hot-start transient test

Deleted: Start the official hot-running transient cycle

Deleted: after completing the last preconditioning cycle

Deleted: sampling

Deleted: If you run the ramped-modal cycle after a transient test, additional preconditioning is allowed, but not required. If you perform additional preconditioning, we recommend running the first non-idle mode of the ramped-modal cycle or a mode approximating 50 % power.

Deleted: If your engine must comply with a PM standardpurposes of this paragraph (b), “before the test” means any time from a point just prior to engine starting (excluding engine restarts) to th e point at which emission sampling begins. (1) Ambient temperature of (20 to 30) °C. See §1065.530(j) for circumstances under which ambient temperatures must remain w ithin this range during the test. (2) Atmospheric pressure of (80.000 to 103.325) kPa and within ±5 kPa of the value recorded at the time of the last engine map. You are not required to verify atmospheric pressure prior to a hot start test interval for testing that also includes a cold start. (3) Dilution air conditions as specified in §1065.140, except in cases where you preheat your CVS before a cold start test. We recommend veri fying dilution air conditions just prior to the start of each test interval. (c) You may test engines at any intake-air humidity, and we may test engines at any intake-air humidity. (d) Verify that auxiliary-work inputs and outpu ts are configured as they were during engine mapping, as described in§1065.510(a). (e) You may perform a final calib ration of the speed, torque, and proportional-flow control systems, which may include performing practice duty cycles (or portions of duty cycles)

. This may be done in conjunction with the preconditioning in §1065.518. ( f

) Verify the amount of nonmethane hydrocarbon contamination in the exhaust and background HC sampling systems within 8 hours before the start of the first test interval of each duty-cycle sequence for laboratory tests. You may verify the contamination of a background HC sampling system by reading the last bag fill and purge using zero gas. For any NMHC measurement system that involves separately measuring CH 4 and subtracting it from a THC measurement or for any CH 4 measurement system that uses an NMC, verify the amount of THC contamination using only the THC analyzer response. There is no need to operate any separate CH 4 analyzer for this verification; however, you may measure and correct for THC contamination in the CH 4 sample train for the cases where NMHC is determined by subtracting CH 4 from THC or, where CH 4 is determined, using an NMC as configured in §1065.365(d), (e), and (f); and using the calculations in §1065.660(b)(2). Perform this verification as follows: (1) Select the HC analyzer range for measuring the flow-weighted mean concentration expected at the HC standard. (2) Zero the HC analyzer at the analyzer zero or sample port. Note that FID zero and span balance gases may be any combination of purified air or purified nitrogen that meets the specifications of §1065.750. We recommend FID analyzer zero and span gases that contain approximately the flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 expected during testing. (3) Span the HC analyzer using span gas introduced at the analyzer span or sample port. Span on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span the FID to respond with a value of 600  mol/mol. (4) Overflow zero gas at the HC probe inle t or into a tee near the probe outlet. (5) Measure the THC concentration in the sampling and background systems as follows: (i) For continuous sampling, record the mean THC concentration as overflow zero gas flows. (ii) For batch sampling, fill the sample medium (e.g., bag) and record its mean THC concentration. (iii) For the background system, record the mean THC concentration of the last fill and purge. (6) Record this value as the initial THC concentration, x THC[THC-FID]init , and use it to correct measured values as described in §1065.660. (7) You may correct the measured initial THC concentration for drift as follows: Deleted: (f) You may perform the following recommended procedure to precondition sampling systems:¶ (1) Start the engine and use good engineering judgment to bring it to one of the following:¶ (i) 100 % torque at any speed above its peak-torque speed.¶ (ii) 100% operator demand.¶ (2) Operate any dilution systems at their expected flow rates. Prevent aqueous condensation in the dilution systems. ¶ (3) Operate any PM sampling systems at their expected flow rates.¶ (4) Sample PM for at least 10 min using any sample media. You may change sample media during preconditioning. You may discard preconditioning samples without weighing them.¶ (5) You may purge any gaseous sampling systems during preconditioning.¶ (6) You may conduct calibrations or verifications on any idle equipment or analyzers during preconditioning.¶ (7) Proceed with the test sequence described in §1065.530(a)(1).¶

Deleted: g

Deleted: methane

Deleted: methane(i) For batch and continuous HC analyzers, after determining the initial THC concentration, flow zero gas to the analyzer zero or sample port. When the analyzer reading is stable, record the mean analyzer value. (ii) Flow span gas to the analyzer span or sample port. When the analyzer reading is stable, record the mean analyzer value. (iii) Use mean analyzer values from paragraphs ( f )(2), (f) (3), (f) (7)(i), and (f) (7)(ii) of this section to correct the initial THC con centration recorded in paragraph ( f )(6) of this section for drift, as described in §1065.550. (8) If any of the xTHC[THC-FID]init values exceed the greatest of the following values, determine the source of the contamination and take corrective action, such as purging the system during an additional preconditioning cycle or replacing contaminated portions: (i) 2 % of the flow-weighted mean wet, net con centration expected at the HC (THC or NMHC) standard. (ii) 2 % of the flow-weighted mean wet, net concentration of HC (THC or NMHC) measured during testing. (iii) 2  mol/mol. (9) If corrective action does not resolve the deficiency, you may request to use the contaminated system as an alternate procedure under §1065.10.

§1065.525 Engine starting, restarting, and shutdown. (a) For test intervals that require emission samp ling during engine starting, start the engine using one of the following methods: (1) Start the engine as recommended in the owne rs manual using a production starter motor or air-start system and either an adequately charged battery, a suitable power supply, or a suitable compressed air source. (2) Use the dynamometer to start the engine. To do this, motor the engine within ±25 % of its typical in-use cranking speed. Stop cranki ng within 1 second of starting the engine. (3) In the case of hybrid engine s, activate the system such that the engine will start when its control algorithms determine that the engine shoul d provide power instead of or in addition to power from the RESS. Unless we specify othe rwise, engine starting throughout this part generally refers to this step of activating the system on hybrid engines, whether or not that causes the engine to start running. (b) If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, stop cranking and determine why the engine failed to start, unless the owners manual or the service-repair manual describes the longer cranking time as normal. (c) Respond to engine stalling with the following steps: (1) If the engine stalls during warm-up before emission sampling begins, restart the engine and continue warm-up. (2) If the engine stalls during preconditioning before emission sampling begins, restart the engine and restart the preconditioning sequence. (3) Void the entire test if the engine stalls at any time after emission sampling begins, except as described in §1065.526. If you do not void the entire test, you must void the individual test mode or test interval in which the engine stalls. (d) Shut down the engine according to the manufacturer’s specifications.

§1065.526 Repeating of void modes or test intervals. Deleted: g
Deleted: g(a) Test modes and test intervals can be voided because of instrument malfunction, engine stalling, emissions exceeding instrument ranges , and other unexpected deviations from the specified procedures . This section specifies circumstances for which a test mode or test interval can be repeated without repeating the entire test. (b) This section is intended to result in replicate test modes and test intervals that are identical to what would have occurred if the cause of the voiding had not occurred. It does not allow you to repeat test modes or test intervals in any circ umstances that would be inconsistent with good engineering judgment. For example, the procedures specified here for repeating a mode or interval may not apply for certain engines that in clude hybrid energy storage features or emission controls that involve physical or chemical st orage of pollutants. This section applies for circumstances in which emission concentrations exceed the analyzer range only if it is due to operator error or analyzer malfunction. It does not apply for circumstances in which the emission concentrations exceed the range because they were higher than expected. (c) If one of the modes of a discrete-mode duty cycle is voided while running the duty cycle as provided in this section, you may void the resu lts for that individual mode and continue the duty cycle as follows: (1) If the engine has stalled or been shut down, restart the engine. (2) Use good engineering judgment to restart the duty cycle using the appropriate steps in §1065.530(b). (3) Stabilize the engine by operating it at the mode at which the duty cycle was interrupted and continue with the duty cycle as specified in the standard-setting part. (d) If an individual mode of a discrete-mode duty cycle sequence is voided after running the full duty cycle, you may void results for that mode and repeat testing for that mode as follows: (1) Use good engineering judgment to restart the test sequence using the appropriate steps in §1065.530(b). (2) Stabilize the engine by operating it at that mode. (3) Sample emissions over an appropriate test interval. (4) If you sampled gaseous and PM emissions over separate test intervals for a voided mode, you must void both test intervals and repeat sampling of both gaseous and PM emissions for that mode. (e) If a transient or ramped-modal cycle test interv al is voided as provided in this section, you may repeat the test interval as follows: (1) Use good engineering judgment to restart (a s applicable) and precond ition the engine to the same condition as would apply for normal testing. This may require you to complete the voided test interval. For example, you may generally repeat a hot-start test of a heavy-duty highway engine after completing the voided hot-start test a nd allowing the engine to soak for 20 minutes. (2) Complete the remainder of the test according to the provisions in this subpart. ( f

) Keep records from the voided test mode or test interval in the same manner as required for unvoided tests.

§1065.530 Emission test sequence. (a) Time the start of testing as follows: (1) Perform one of the following if you precondition the engine as described in §1065.5 18 : (i) For cold-start duty cycles, shut down the e ngine. Unless the standard-setting part specifies that you may only perform a natural engine cooldown, you may perform a forced engine cooldown. Use good engineering judgment to set up systems to send cooling air across the Deleted: s
Deleted: or

Deleted: test

Deleted:

Deleted: test

Deleted: test

Deleted: sequence

Deleted: Precondition

Deleted: previous mode for approximately the same amount of time it operated at that mode for the previous emission measurement.¶ (4) Advance to the

Deleted: test

Deleted: and emission sampling system

Deleted: e

Deleted: sampling systems

Deleted: 20(f)engine, to send cool oil through the engine lubrication system, to remove heat from coolant through the engine cooling system, and to remove heat from any exhaust aftertreatment systems. In the case of a forced aftertreatment cooldown, good engineering judgment would indicate that you not start flowing cooling air until the aftertr eatment system has cooled below its catalytic activation temperature. For platinum-group metal catalysts, this temperature is about 200 °C. Once the aftertreatment system has naturally cooled below its catalytic activation temperature, good engineering judgment would indicate that you use clean air with a temperature of at least 15 °C, and direct the air through the aftertreatment system in the normal direction of exhaust flow. Do not use any cooling procedure that results in unrepresentative emissions (see §1065.10(c)(1)). You may start a cold-start duty cycle when the temperatures of an engine’s lubricant, coolant, and aftertreatment systems are all between (20 and 30) °C. (ii) For hot-start emission measurements, shut down the engine immediately after completing the last preconditioning cycle

. Start the hot-start transient emission test within 60 seconds after completing the last preconditioning cycle , (this is optional for manufacturers)

. (iii) For testing that involves hot-stabilized emission measurements, such as any steady-state testing with a ramped-modal cycle

, start the hot-stabilized emission test within 60 seconds after completing the last preconditioning cycle (this is optional for manufacturers) . If the hotstabilized cycle begins and ends with different operating condition s , add a linear transition period of 20 seconds between hot-stabilized cycles where you linearly ramp the (denormalized) reference speed and torque values over the transition period. See §1065.501(c)(2)(i) for discretemode cycles. (2) If you do not precondition the engine as described in §1065.518 , perform one of the following: (i) For cold-start emission tests , prepare the engine according to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section. (ii) For hot-start emission tests , first operate the engine at any speed above peak-torque speed and at (65 to 85) % of maximum mapped power until either the engine coolant, block, or head absolute temperature is within ±2 % of its m ean value for at least 2 min or until the engine thermostat controls engine temperature. Shut down the engine. Start the duty cycle within 20 min of engine shutdown. (iii) For testing that involves hot-stabilized em ission measurements, bring the engine either to warm idle or the first operating point of the duty cy cle. Start the test within 10 min of achieving temperature stability. Determine temperature st ability either as the point at which the engine coolant, block, or head absolute temperature is within ±2 % of its mean value for at least 2 min, or as the point at which the engine thermostat controls engine temperature. (b) Take the following steps before emission sampling begins: (1) For batch sampling, connect clean storage media, such as evacuated bags or tare-weighed filters. (2) Start all measurement instruments according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions and using good engineering judgment. (3) Start dilution systems, sample pumps, co oling fans, and the data-collection system. (4) Pre-heat or pre-cool heat exchangers in the sampling system to within their operating temperature tolerances for a test. (5) Allow heated or cooled components such as sample lines, filters, chillers, and pumps to stabilize at their operating temperatures. (6) Verify that there are no significant vacuum-side leaks according to §1065.345. Deleted: , shut down the engine and as soon as practical start the official hot-start transient cycle

Deleted: We will start the official

Deleted: cycle

Deleted: 1 minute

Deleted: of the conclusion of the

Deleted: where applicable

Deleted: Start the hot-start duty cycle as specified in the standard-setting part if it is different from this procedure.

Deleted: as soon as practical after completing the discrete-mode preconditioning time or the last preconditioning cycle, without shutting down the engine, start the official hot-stabilized cycle. We will

Deleted: official

Deleted: cycle

Deleted: 1 minute

Deleted: of the conclusion of the

Deleted: where applicable

Deleted: last preconditioning

Deleted: a

Deleted: than the first mode of the hot-stabilized cycle

Deleted: s

Deleted: you may continue to operate the engine at maximum test speed and 100 % torque if that is the first operating point. Otherwise, operate the engine at warm idle or the first operating point of the duty cycle. In any case, start the emission test within 10 min after you complete the preconditioning procedure.

Deleted: sampling systems

Deleted: duty cycles

Deleted: measurements(7) Adjust the sample flow rates to desired levels, using bypass flow, if desired. (8) Zero or re-zero any electronic integrating devices, before the start of any test interval. (9) Select gas analyzer ranges. You may automatically or manually switch gas analyzer ranges during a test only if switching is performed by changing the span over which the digital resolution of the instrument is applied. Du ring a test you may not switch the gains of an analyzer’s analog operational amplifier(s). (10) Zero and span all continuous analyzers using NIST-traceable gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. Span FID analyzers on a carbon number basis of one (1), C 1 . For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span the FID to respond with a value of 600  mol/mol. Span FID analyzers consiste nt with the determination of their respective response factors, RF , and penetration fractions, PF , according to §1065.365. (11) We recommend that you verify gas analyzer responses after zeroing and spanning by sampling a calibration gas that has a concentration near one-half of the span gas concentration. Based on the results and good engineering judgment, you may decide whether or not to re-zero, re-span, or re-calibrate a gas analyzer before starting a test. (1 2 ) Drain any accumulated condensate from the intake air system before starting a duty cycle, as described in §1065.125(e)(1). If engine and aftertreatment preconditioning cycles are run before the duty cycle, treat the preconditioning cy cles and any associated soak period as part of the duty cycle for the purpose of opening drains and draining condensate. Note that you must close any intake air condensate drains that are no t representative of those normally open during in-use operation. (c) Start and run each test interval as described in this paragraph (c). The procedure varies depending on whether the test interval is part of a discrete-mode cycle, and whether the test interval includes engine starting. Note that the standard-setting part may apply different requirements for running test intervals. For ex ample, 40 CFR part 1033 specifies a different way to perform discrete-mode testing. ( 1 ) For s teady-state discrete-mode cycles , start the test with the engine warmed-up and runningas described in §1065.501(c)(2)(i). Run each mode in the sequence specified in the standardsetting part. This will require controlling engine spee d, engine load, or other operator demand settings, as specified in the standard-setting part. Simultaneously start any electronic integrating devices, continuous data recordin g, and batch sampling. We recommend that you stabilize the engine for at least 5 minutes for each mode. Once sampling begins, sample continuously for at least 1 minute. Note that longer sample times may be needed for accurately measuring very low emission levels. (2) For transient and steady-state ramped-modal cycles that do not include engine starting, start the test interval with the engine running as soon as practical after completing engine preconditioning. Simultaneously start any elect ronic integrating devices, continuous data recording, batch sampling, and execution of the duty cycle. ( 3 ) If engine starting is part of the duty cycle, simultaneously start any electronic integrating devices, continuous data recording, and batch sampling before attempting to start the engine. Initiate the duty cycle when the engine starts. ( 4 ) For batch sampling systems

, you may advance or delay the start and end of sampling at the beginning and end of the test interval to improve the accuracy of the batch sample , consistent with good engineering judgment

. (d) At the end of each test interval, continue to operate all sampling and dilution systems to allow the sampling system’s response time to elapse. Then stop all sampling and recording, including Deleted: (12) If you correct for dilution air background concentrations of engine exhaust constituents, startmeasuring and recording background concentrations.¶

Deleted: 3

Deleted: testing as follows:

Deleted: (1) If an engine is already running and warmed up, and starting is not part of the duty cycle, perform the following for the various duty cycles:¶ (i) Transient and steady-state ramped-modal cycles

. Simultaneously start recording continuous data, any electronic integrating devices, batch sampling, and execution of running the duty cycle, sampling exhaust gases, recording data, and integrating measured values.¶

Deleted: ii

Deleted: S

Deleted: . Control the engine operation to match the first mode in the test cycle.

Deleted: and load

Deleted: Follow the instructions in the standardsetting part to determine how long to stabilize engine operation at each mode, how long to sample emissions at each mode, and how to transition between modes. For each mode, s

Deleted: 2

Deleted: initiate data logging, sampling of exhaust gases, and integrating measured values

Deleted: use good engineering judgment to

Deleted: stop

Deleted: with respect tothe recording of background samples. Finally, stop any integrating devices and indicate the end of the duty cycle in the recorded data. (e) Shut down the engine if you have completed testing or if it is part of the duty cycle. (f) If testing involves another duty cycle after a soak period with the engine off, start a timer when the engine shuts down, and repeat the steps in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section as needed. (g) Take the following steps after emission sampling is complete: (1) For any proportional batch sample, such as a bag sample or PM sample, verify that proportional sampling was maintained according to §1065.545. Void any samples that did not maintain proportional sampling according to §1065.545. (2) Place any used PM samples into covered or s ealed containers and return them to the PMstabilization environment. Follow the PM sa mple post-conditioning and total weighing procedures in §1065.595. (3) As soon as practical after the duty cycle is complete, or during the soak period if practical, perform the following: (i) Zero and span all batch gas analyzers no later than 30 minutes after the duty cycle is complete, or during the soak period if practical. (ii) Analyze any conventional gaseous batch samples no later than 30 minutes after the duty cycle is complete, or during the soak period if practical. (iii) Analyze background samples no later than 60 minutes after the duty cycle is complete. (iv) Analyze non-conventional gaseous batch samples, such as ethanol (NMHCE) as soon as practical using good engineering judgment. (4) After quantifying exhaust gases, verify drift as follows: (i) For batch and continuous gas analyzers, reco rd the mean analyzer value after stabilizing a zero gas to the analyzer. Stabilization may include time to purge the analyzer of any sample gas, plus any additional time to account for analyzer response. (ii) Record the mean analyzer value after stabilizing the span ga s to the analyzer. Stabilization may include time to purge the analyzer of any sample gas, plus any additional time to account for analyzer response. (iii) Use these data to validate and correct for drift as described in §1065.550. (h) Unless the standard-setting part specifies othe rwise, determine whether or not the test meets the cycle-validation criteria in §1065.514. (1) If the criteria void the test, you may retest using the same denormalized duty cycle, or you may re-map the engine, denormalize the reference duty cycle based on the new map and retest the engine using the new denormalized duty cycle. (2) If the criteria void the test for a constant-speed engine only during commands of maximum test torque, you may do the following: (i) Determine the first and last feedback speeds at which maximum test torque was commanded. (ii) If the last speed is greater than or equal to 90 % of the first speed, the test is void. You may retest using the same denormalized duty cycle, or you may re-map the engine, denormalize the reference duty cycle based on the new map and retest the engine using the new denormalized duty cycle. (iii) If the last speed is less than 90 % of the first speed, reduce maximum test torque by 5 %, and proceed as follows: (A) Denormalize the entire duty cycle based on the reduced maximum test torque according to §1065.512.(B) Retest the engine using the denormalized test cycle that is based on the reduced maximum test torque. (C) If your engine still fails the cycle criteria, re duce the maximum test torque by another 5 % of the original maxi mum test torque. (D) If your engine fails after repeating this procedure four times, such that your engine still fails after you have reduced the maximum test torque by 20 % of the original maximum test torque, notify us and we will consider specifying a more appropriate duty cycle for your engine under the provisions of §1065.10(c). (i) [Reserved] (j) Measure and record ambient temperature, pressure, and humidity, as appropriate. For testing the following engines, you must record ambient temperature continuously to verify that it remains within the pre-test temperature range as specified in §1065.520(b): (1) Air-cooled engines. (2) Engines equipped with auxiliary emission cont rol devices that sense and respond to ambient temperature. (3) Any other engine for which good engineering judgment indicates this is necessary to remain consistent with §1065.10(c)(1).

§1065.545 Verification of proportional flow control for batch sampling. For any proportional batch sample such as a bag or PM filter, demonstrate that proportional sampling was maintained using one of the following, noting that you may omit up to 5 % of the total number of data points as outliers: (a) For any pair of flow rates , use recorded sample and total flow rates, where total flow rate means the raw exhaust flow rate for raw exhaust sampling and the dilute exhaust flow rate for CVS sampling, or their 1 Hz means with the statistical calculations in §1065.602. Determine the standard error of the estimate, SEE , of the sample flow rate versus the total flow rate. For each test interval, demonstrate that SEE was less than or equal to 3.5 % of the mean sample flow rate. (b) For any pair of flow rates , use recorded sample and total flow rates, where total flow rate means the raw exhaust flow rate for raw exhaust sampling and the dilute exhaust flow rate for CVS sampling, or their 1 Hz means to demonstrate that each flow rate was constant within ±2.5 % of its respective mean or target flow rate. You may use the following options instead of recording the respective flow rate of each type of meter: (1) Critical-flow venturi option . For critical-flow venturis, you may use recorded venturi-inlet conditions or their 1 Hz means. Demonstrate th at the flow density at the venturi inlet was constant within ±2.5 % of the mean or target de nsity over each test interval. For a CVS criticalflow venturi, you may demonstrate this by showing that the absolute temperature at the venturi inlet was constant within ±4 % of the mean or targ et absolute temperature over each test interval. (2) Positive-displacement pump option . You may use recorded pump-inlet conditions or their 1 Hz means. Demonstrate that the flow density at the pump inlet was constant within ±2.5 % of the mean or target density over each test interval. For a CVS pump, you may demonstrate this by showing that the absolute temperature at th e pump inlet was constant within ±2 % of the mean or target absolute temperature over each test interval. (c) Using good engineering judgment, demonstrate with an engineering analysis that the proportional-flow control system inherently ensures proportional sampling under all circumstances expected during testing. For exam ple, you might use CFVs for both sample flow Deleted: Validation

Deleted: meters

Deleted: metersand total dilute exhaust (CVS) flow and demonstrate that they always have the same inlet pressures and temperatures and that they always operate under critical-flow conditions.

§1065.546 Verification of minimum dilution ratio for PM batch sampling. Use continuous flows and/or tracer gas concentrations for transient and ramped- modal cycles to verify the minimum dilution ratios for PM batch sampling as specified in §1065.140(e)(2) over the test interval. You may use mode-average values instead of continuous measurements for discrete mode steady-state duty cycles. Dete rmine the minimum primary and minimum overall dilution ratios using one of the following methods (you may use a different method for each stage of dilution): (a) Determine minimum dilution ra tio based on molar flow data. This involves determination of at least two of the following three quantities: raw exhaust flow (or previously diluted flow), dilution air flow, and dilute exhaust flow. You may determine the raw exhaust flow rate based on the measured intake air or fuel flow rate a nd the raw exhaust chemical balance terms as given in §1065.655(e). You may determine the raw exhaust flow rate based on the measured intake air and dilute exhaust molar flow rates and the dilu te exhaust chemical balance terms as given in §1065.655(f). You may alternatively estimate th e molar raw exhaust flow rate based on intake air, fuel rate measurements, and fuel properti es, consistent with good engineering judgment. (b) Determine minimum dilution ratio based on tracer gas (e.g., CO 2 ) concentrations in the raw (or previously diluted) and dilute exhaust corrected for any removed water. (c) Use good engineering judgment to develop your own method of determining dilution ratios.

§1065.550 Gas analyzer range verification and drift verification

. (a) Range verification . If an analyzer operated above 100 % of its range at any time during the test, perform the following steps: (1) For batch sampling, re-analyze the sample using the lowest analyzer range that results in a maximum instrument response below 100 %. Report the result from the lowest range from which the analyzer operates below 100 % of its range. (2) For continuous sampling, repeat the entire test using the next higher analyzer range. If the analyzer again operates above 100 % of its range, repeat the test using the next higher range. Continue to repeat the test until the analyzer always operates at less than 100 % of its range. (b) Drift verification . Gas analyzer drift verification is required for all gaseous exhaust constituents for which an emission standard applies. It is also required for CO 2 even if there is no CO 2 emission standard. It is not required for other gaseous exhaust constituents for which only a reporting requirement applies (such as CH 4 and N 2 O). (1) Verify drift using one of the following methods: (i) For regulated exhaust constituents determined from the mass of a single component, perform drift verification based on the regulated constituent. For example, when NO x mass is determined with a dry sample measured with a CLD and the removed water is corrected based on measured CO 2 , CO, THC, and NO x concentrations, you must verify the calculated NO x value. (ii) For regulated exhaust constituents determined from the masses of multiple subcomponents, perform the drift verification based on either the regulated constituent or all the mass subcomponents. For example, when NO x is measured with separate NO and NO 2 analyzers, you
must verify either the NO x value or both the NO and NO 2 values. (iii) For regulated exhaust constituents determin ed from the concentrations of multiple gaseous emission subcomponents prior to performing mass calculations, perform drift verification on the Deleted: Validation

Deleted: ramped

Deleted: validate

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: Validate

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validate

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validate

Deleted: validationregulated constituent. You may not verify the concentration subcomponents (e.g., THC and CH 4 for NMHC) separately. For example, for NMHC measurements, perform drift verification on NMHC; do not verify THC and CH 4 separately. (2) Drift verification requires two sets of emission calculations. For each set of calculations, include all the constituents in the drift verification . Calculate one set using the data before drift correction and calculate the other set after correcting all the data for drift according to §1065.672. Note that for purposes of drift verification , you must leave unaltered any negative emission results over a given test interval (i.e., do not set them to zero). These unaltered results are used when verifying either test interval results or composite brake-specific emissions over the entire duty cycle for drift. For each constituent to be verified , both sets of calculations must include the following: (i) Calculated mass (or mass rate) emission values over each test interval. (ii) If you are verifying each test interval based on brake-specific values, calculate brake-specific emission values over each test interval. (iii) If you are verifying over the entire duty cycle, calculate composite brake-specific emission values. (3) The duty cycle is verified for drift if you satisfy the following criteria: (i) For each regulated gaseous exhaust constituent, you must satisfy one of the following: (A) For each test interval of the duty cycle, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected brake-specific emission values of the re gulated constituent must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value or the applicable emissions sta ndard, whichever is greater. Alternatively, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected emission mass (or mass rate) values of the regulated constituent must be within  4 % of the uncorrected value or the composite work (or power) multiplied by the applicable emissions standard, whichever is greater. For purposes of verifying each test interval, you may use either the reference or actual composite work (or power). (B) For each test interval of the duty cycle and for each mass subcomponent of the regulated constituent, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected brake-specific emission values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value. Alternatively, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected emissions mass (or mass rate) values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value. (C) For the entire duty cycle, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected composite brake-specific emission values of the regulated constituent must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value or applicable emission standard, whichever is greater. (D) For the entire duty cycle and for each s ubcomponent of the regulated constituent, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected composite brake-specific emission values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value. (ii) Where no emission standard applies for CO 2 , you must satisfy one of the following: (A) For each test interval of the duty cycle, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected brake-specific CO 2 values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value; or the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected CO 2 mass (or mass rate) values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value. (B) For the entire duty cycle, the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected composite brake-specific CO 2 values must be within ±4 % of the uncorrected value. (4) If the test is not verified for drift as described in paragrap h (b)(1) of this section, you may consider the test results for the duty cycle to be valid only if, using good engineering judgment, Deleted: validate

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validate

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validation

Deleted: validating

Deleted: validated

Deleted: validating

Deleted: validating

Deleted: validated

Deleted: validating

Deleted: validatedthe observed drift does not affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable emission standards. For example, if the drift-corr ected value is less than the standard by at least two times the absolute difference between the uncorrected and corrected values, you may consider the data to be verified for demonstrating compliance with the applicable standard.

§1065.590 PM sampling media (e.g., filters) preconditioning and tare weighing. Before an emission test, take the following step s to prepare PM sampling media (e.g., filters) and equipment for PM measurements: (a) Make sure the balance and PM-stabilization en vironments meet the periodic verifications in §1065.390. (b) Visually inspect unused sample media (e.g., filt ers) for defects and discard defective media. (c) To handle PM sampling media (e.g., filters), use electrically grounded tweezers or a grounding strap, as described in §1065.190. (d) Place unused sample media (e.g., filters) in on e or more containers that are open to the PMstabilization environment. If you are using filters, you may place them in the bottom half of a filter cassette. (e) Stabilize sample media (e.g., filters) in th e PM-stabilization environment. Consider an unused sample medium stabilized as long as it has been in the PM-stabilization environment for a minimum of 30 min, during which the PM-stabilization environment has been within the specifications of §1065.190. (f) Weigh the sample media (e.g., filters) automatically or manually, as follows: (1) For automatic weighing, follow the automation system manufacturer’s instructions to prepare samples for weighing. This may include placing the samples in a special container. (2) For manual weighing, use good engineering judgment to determine if substitution weighing is necessary to show that an engine meets the applicable standard. You may follow the substitution weighing procedure in paragraph (j) of this section, or you may develop your own procedure. (g) Correct the measured mass of each sample medium (e.g., filter) for buoyancy as described in §1065.690. These buoyancy-corrected values are subsequently subtracted from the post-test mass of the corresponding sample media (e.g., filters) and collected PM to determine the mass of PM emitted during the test. (h) You may repeat measurements to determine the mean mass of each sample medium (e.g., filter). Use good engineering judgment to excl ude outliers from the calculation of mean mass values. (i) If you use filters as sample media, load unuse d filters that have been tare-weighed into clean filter cassettes and place the loaded cassettes in a clean, covered or sealed container before removing them from the stabilization environment fo r transport to the test site for sampling. We recommend that you keep filter cassettes clean by periodically washing or wiping them with a compatible solvent applied using a lint-free cloth. Depending upon your cassette material, ethanol (C 2 H 5 OH) might be an acceptable solvent. Yo ur cleaning frequency will depend on your engine’s level of PM and HC emissions. (j) Substitution weighing involves measurement of a reference weight before and after each weighing of PM sampling media (e.g., filters). While substitution weighing requires more measurements, it corrects for a balance’s zero-drift and it relies on balance linearity only over a small range. This is most advantageous when quantifying net PM masses that are less than 0.1 % of the sample medium’s mass. However, it may not be advantageous when net PM masses exceed 1 % of the sample medium’s mass. If you utilize substitution weighing, it must be used Deleted: validfor both pre-test and post-test weighing. The same substitution weight must be used for both pre-test and post-test weighing. Correct the mass of the substitution weight for buoyancy if the density of the substitution weight is less than 2.0 g/cm 3 . The following steps are an example of substitution weighing: (1) Use electrically grounded tweezers or a grounding strap, as described in §1065.190. (2) Use a static neutralizer as described in §10 65.190 to minimize static electric charge on any object before it is placed on the balance pan. (3) Select a substitution weight that meets the requirements for calibration weights found in §1065.790. The substitution weight must also have the same density as the weight you use to span the microbalance, and be similar in mass to an unused sample medium (e.g., filter). A 47 mm PTFE membrane filter will typically ha ve a mass in the range of 80 to 100 mg. (4) Record the stable balance reading, then remove the calibration weight. (5) Weigh an unused sample medium (e.g., a new filter), record the stable balance reading and record the balance environment’s dewpoint, ambient temperature, and atmospheric pressure. (6) Reweigh the calibration weight and record the stable balance reading. (7) Calculate the arithmetic mean of the two calibration-weight readings that you recorded immediately before and after weighing the unused sample. Subtract that mean value from the unused sample reading, then add the true mass of the calibration weight as stated on the calibration-weight certificate. Record this result . This is the unused sample’s tare weight without correcting for buoyancy. (8) Repeat these substitution-weighing steps for the remainder of your unused sample media. (9) Once weighing is completed, follow the instructions given in paragraphs (g) through (i) of this section.

§1065.595 PM sample post-conditioning and total weighing. After testing is complete, retu rn the sample media (e.g., filters) to the weighing and PMstabilization environments. (a) Make sure the weighing and PM-stabilization environments meet the ambient condition specifications in §1065.190(e)(1). If those speci fications are not met, leave the test sample media (e.g., filters) covered until prop er conditions have been met. (b) In the PM-stabilization environment, remove PM samples from sealed containers. If you use filters, you may remove them from their cassettes before or after stabilization. We recommend always removing the top portion of the cassette before stabilization. When you remove a filter from a cassette, separate the top half of th e cassette from the bottom half using a cassette separator designed for this purpose. (c) To handle PM samples, use electrically grounded tweezers or a grounding strap, as described in §1065.190. (d) Visually inspect the sampling media (e.g., filters) and collected particulate. If either the sample media (e.g. filters) or particulate sample appear to have been compromised, or the particulate matter contacts any surface other than the filter, the sample may not be used to determine particulate emissions. In the case of contact with another surface, clean the affected surface before continuing.(e) To stabilize PM samples, place them in one or more containers that are open to the PMstabilization environment, as described in §1065.190. If you expect that a sample medium’s (e.g., filter’s) total surface concentration of PM will be less than 400 μg, assuming a 38 mm diameter filter stain area, expose the filter to a PM-stabilization environment meeting thespecifications of §1065.190 for at least 30 minutes before weighing. If you expect a higher PM concentration or do not know what PM concen tration to expect, expose the filter to the stabilization environment for at least 60 minutes before weighing. Note that 400 μg on sample media (e.g., filters) is an approximate net mass of 0.07 g/kW·hr for a hot-start test with compression-ignition engines tested according to 40 CFR part 86, subpart N, or 50 mg/mile for light-duty vehicles tested according to 40 CFR part 86, subpart B. (f) Repeat the procedures in §1065.590(f) through (i) to determine post-test mass of the sample media (e.g., filters). (g) Subtract each buoyancy-corrected tare mass of the sample medium (e.g., filter) from its respective buoyancy-corrected mass. The result is the net PM mass, m PM . Use m PM in emission calculations in §1065.650.Subpart G—Calculations and Data Requirements

§1065.601 Overview. (a) This subpart describes how to– (1) Use the signals recorded before, during, and after an emission test to calculate brake-specific emissions of each regulated pollutant. (2) Perform calculations for calibrations and performance checks. (3) Determine statistical values. (b) You may use data from multiple systems to ca lculate test results for a single emission test, consistent with good engineering judgment. You may also make multiple measurements from a single batch sample, such as multiple weighings of a PM filter or multiple readings from a bag sample. Although you may use an average of multiple measurements from a single test, y ou may not use test results from multiple em ission tests to report emissions. (1) We allow weighted means where appropriate. (2) You may discard statistical outliers, but you must report all results. (3) For emission measurements re lated to durability testing, we may allow you to exclude certain test points other than statistical outliers re lative to compliance with emission standards, consistent with good engineering judgment and normal measurement variability; however, you must include these results when calculating the de terioration factor. This would allow you to use durability data from an engine that has an in termediate test result above the standard that cannot be discarded as a statistical outlier, as lo ng as good engineering judgment indicates that the test result does not represent the engine’s act ual emission level. Note that good engineering judgment would preclude you from excluding endpoints. Also, if normal measurement variability causes emission results below zero, include the negative result in calculating the deterioration factor to avoid an upward bias. These provisions related to durability testing are intended to address very stringent standards wher e measurement variability is large relative to the emission standard. (c) You may use any of the following calculations instead of the calculations specified in this subpart G: (1) Mass-based emission calculations prescrib ed by the Internatio nal Organization for Standardization (ISO), according to ISO 8178, except the following: (i) ISO 8178-1 Section 14.4, NO x Correction for Humidity and Temperature. See §1065.670 for approved methods for humidity corrections. (ii) ISO 8178-1 Section 15.1, Particulate Correction Factor for Humidity. (2) Other calculations that you show are equivalent to within ±0.1 % of the brake-specific emission results determined using the cal culations specified in this subpart G.

§1065.602 Statistics. (a) Overview . This section contains equations and exam ple calculations for statistics that are specified in this part. In this section we use the letter "y" to denote a generic measured quantity, the superscript over-bar “ – ” to denote an arithmetic mean, and the subscript " ref " to denote the reference quantity being measured. (b) Arithmetic mean . Calculate an arithmetic mean, 

### y , as follows:

i i 1 N y
y N   

##  Deleted: YEq. 1065.602-1 Example: N

= 3
y 1 = 10.60
y 2 = 11.91
y

N = y 3 = 11.09 10.60 11.91 11.09
3 y  





### y = 11.20 (c) Standard deviation . Calculate the standard deviation for a non-biased (e.g., N–1) sample, ,
as follows: 

##     2
i i 1
y 1 N y y

N   



 

## 

Eq. 1065.602-2 Example: N

= 3
y 1 = 10.60
y 2 = 11.91
y

N = y 3 = 11.09



### y = 11.20 

##     22 2

y 10.60 11.2 11.91 11.2 11.09 11.2
2  





y = 0.6619 (d) Root mean square . Calculate a root mean square, rms y , as follows:

2 y i i 1 1 N rms y N

  

# 

Eq. 1065.602-3 Example: N

= 3
y 1 = 10.60
y 2 = 11.91
y

N = y 3 = 11.09

222

y 10.60 11.91 11.09
3 rms  



rms y = 11.21 (e) Accuracy . Determine accuracy as described in this paragraph (e).. Make multiple measurements of a standard quantity to create a set of observed values, y i , and compare each observed value to the known value of the standard quantity. The standard quantity may have a single known value, such as a gas standard, or a set of known values of negligible range, such as a known applied pressure produced by a calibration device during repeated applications. The known value of the standard quantity is represented by

i ref y . If you use a standard quantity with a single value,

i ref y would be constant. Calculate an accuracy value as follows: 

#  

i i ref i 1 1 N accuracy y y N

   

# 

Eq. 1065.602-4 Example:
y ref = 1800.0 N

= 3

1 y = 1806.4

2 y = 1803.1

3 y = 1798.9



### ( )( )( ) 

## ( ) 1 1806.4 1800.0 1803.1 1800.0 1798.9 1800.0 3 accuracy = -+-+-


### ( )( )( ) 

## ( ) 1 6.4 3.1 1.1 3 accuracy = + +-

accuracy = 2.8 (f) t -test . Determine if your data passes a t -test by using the following equations and tables: (1) For an unpaired t -test, calculate the t statistic and its number of degrees of freedom, ,
as follows:

ref

2 2 y ref

ref y y t

N N   





Eq. 1065.602-5

2 2 2 y ref

ref

2

2 2 2 y ref

ref

ref 1 1

N N

v

N N
N N  

   

    

  

          

  Eq. 1065.602-6 Example:

ref y = 1205.3



### y = 1123.8



ref

= 9.399



y = 10.583 N

ref

= 11 N

= 7 

Comment [CAL3]: Equation updated.2 2 1205.3 1123.8

9.399 10.583

11 7 t 





t = 16.63



ref

= 9.399



y = 10.583 N

ref

= 11 N

= 7

2 2 2

2 2 2 2 9.399 10.583

11 7

9.399 10.583

11 7
11 1 7 1 v  
    

   

      

 



### v = 11.76 (2) For a paired t -test, calculate the t statistic and its number of degrees of freedom, , as follows, noting that the i  are the errors (e.g., differences) between each pair of y refi and y i :

ε N t 

 


Eq. 1065.602-7 Example:



###  = –0.12580 N = 16

ε  = 0.04837

0.12580 16

0.04837 t  



t = 10.403



### v = N – 1 Example: N

= 16



### v = 16 – 1



### v = 15 (3) Use Table 1 of this section to compare t to the t crit values tabulated versus the number of degrees of freedom. If t is less than t crit , then t passes the t -test. The Microsoft Excel software has a TINV function that returns results equivalent results and may be used in place of Table 1, which follows:  Comment [CAL4]: Example problem updated.

Comment [CAL5]: Not italic.
Comment [CAL6]: Not italic.Table 1 of §1065.602– Critical t values versus number of degrees of freedom,  1

 Confidence

90% 95%

1 6.314 12.706

2 2.920 4.303

3 2.353 3.182

4 2.132 2.776

5 2.015 2.571

6 1.943 2.447

7 1.895 2.365

8 1.860 2.306

9 1.833 2.262

10 1.812 2.228

11 1.796 2.201

12 1.782 2.179

13 1.771 2.160

14 1.761 2.145

15 1.753 2.131

16 1.746 2.120

18 1.734 2.101

20 1.725 2.086

22 1.717 2.074

24 1.711 2.064

26 1.706 2.056

28 1.701 2.048

30 1.697 2.042

35 1.690 2.030

40 1.684 2.021

50 1.676 2.009

70 1.667 1.994

100 1.660 1.984

1000+ 1.645 1.960

1 Use linear interpolation to establish values not shown here.

(g) F -test . Calculate the F statistic as follows:

2
y y 2 ref F 

 
Eq. 1065.602-8 Example:

##     2
i i 1
y 10.583 1 N y y

N   

 

 

## 

    ref 2
refi ref i 1 ref ref 9.399 1 N y y

N   

 

 

## 

2

2 10.583
9.399 F 

F

= 1.268 (1) For a 90 % confidence F -test, use Table 2 of this section to compare F to the F crit90 values tabulated versus ( N

–1) and ( N

ref –1). If F is less than F crit90 , then F passes the F -test at 90 % confidence. (2) For a 95 % confidence F -test, use Table 3 of this section to compare F to the F crit95 values tabulated versus ( N

–1) and ( N

ref –1). If F is less than F crit95 , then F passes the F -test at 95 % confidence.Table 2 of §1065.602–CriticalFvalues,Fcrit90, versusN–1 andNref–1 at 90 % confidenceN–1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 24 30 40 60 120 1000+Nref–11 39.86 49.50 53.59 55.83 57.24 58.20 58.90 59.43 59.85 60.19 60.70 61.22 61.74 62.00 62.26 62.52 62.79 63.06 63.322 8.526 9.000 9.162 9.243 9.293 9.326 9.349 9.367 9.381 9.392 9.408 9.425 9.441 9.450 9.458 9.466 9.475 9.483 9.4913 5.538 5.462 5.391 5.343 5.309 5.285 5.266 5.252 5.240 5.230 5.216 5.200 5.184 5.176 5.168 5.160 5.151 5.143 5.1344 4.545 4.325 4.191 4.107 4.051 4.010 3.979 3.955 3.936 3.920 3.896 3.870 3.844 3.831 3.817 3.804 3.790 3.775 3.7615 4.060 3.780 3.619 3.520 3.453 3.405 3.368 3.339 3.316 3.297 3.268 3.238 3.207 3.191 3.174 3.157 3.140 3.123 3.1056 3.776 3.463 3.289 3.181 3.108 3.055 3.014 2.983 2.958 2.937 2.905 2.871 2.836 2.818 2.800 2.781 2.762 2.742 2.7227 3.589 3.257 3.074 2.961 2.883 2.827 2.785 2.752 2.725 2.703 2.668 2.632 2.595 2.575 2.555 2.535 2.514 2.493 2.4718 3.458 3.113 2.924 2.806 2.726 2.668 2.624 2.589 2.561 2.538 2.502 2.464 2.425 2.404 2.383 2.361 2.339 2.316 2.2939 3.360 3.006 2.813 2.693 2.611 2.551 2.505 2.469 2.440 2.416 2.379 2.340 2.298 2.277 2.255 2.232 2.208 2.184 2.15910 3.285 2.924 2.728 2.605 2.522 2.461 2.414 2.377 2.347 2.323 2.284 2.244 2.201 2.178 2.155 2.132 2.107 2.082 2.05511 3.225 2.860 2.660 2.536 2.451 2.389 2.342 2.304 2.274 2.248 2.209 2.167 2.123 2.100 2.076 2.052 2.026 2.000 1.97212 3.177 2.807 2.606 2.480 2.394 2.331 2.283 2.245 2.214 2.188 2.147 2.105 2.060 2.036 2.011 1.986 1.960 1.932 1.90413 3.136 2.763 2.560 2.434 2.347 2.283 2.234 2.195 2.164 2.138 2.097 2.053 2.007 1.983 1.958 1.931 1.904 1.876 1.84614 3.102 2.726 2.522 2.395 2.307 2.243 2.193 2.154 2.122 2.095 2.054 2.010 1.962 1.938 1.912 1.885 1.857 1.828 1.79715 3.073 2.695 2.490 2.361 2.273 2.208 2.158 2.119 2.086 2.059 2.017 1.972 1.924 1.899 1.873 1.845 1.817 1.787 1.75516 3.048 2.668 2.462 2.333 2.244 2.178 2.128 2.088 2.055 2.028 1.985 1.940 1.891 1.866 1.839 1.811 1.782 1.751 1.71817 3.026 2.645 2.437 2.308 2.218 2.152 2.102 2.061 2.028 2.001 1.958 1.912 1.862 1.836 1.809 1.781 1.751 1.719 1.68618 3.007 2.624 2.416 2.286 2.196 2.130 2.079 2.038 2.005 1.977 1.933 1.887 1.837 1.810 1.783 1.754 1.723 1.691 1.65719 2.990 2.606 2.397 2.266 2.176 2.109 2.058 2.017 1.984 1.956 1.912 1.865 1.814 1.787 1.759 1.730 1.699 1.666 1.63120 2.975 2.589 2.380 2.249 2.158 2.091 2.040 1.999 1.965 1.937 1.892 1.845 1.794 1.767 1.738 1.708 1.677 1.643 1.60721 2.961 2.575 2.365 2.233 2.142 2.075 2.023 1.982 1.948 1.920 1.875 1.827 1.776 1.748 1.719 1.689 1.657 1.623 1.58620 2.949 2.561 2.351 2.219 2.128 2.061 2.008 1.967 1.933 1.904 1.859 1.811 1.759 1.731 1.702 1.671 1.639 1.604 1.56723 2.937 2.549 2.339 2.207 2.115 2.047 1.995 1.953 1.919 1.890 1.845 1.796 1.744 1.716 1.686 1.655 1.622 1.587 1.54924 2.927 2.538 2.327 2.195 2.103 2.035 1.983 1.941 1.906 1.877 1.832 1.783 1.730 1.702 1.672 1.641 1.607 1.571 1.53325 2.918 2.528 2.317 2.184 2.092 2.024 1.971 1.929 1.895 1.866 1.820 1.771 1.718 1.689 1.659 1.627 1.593 1.557 1.51826 2.909 2.519 2.307 2.174 2.082 2.014 1.961 1.919 1.884 1.855 1.809 1.760 1.706 1.677 1.647 1.615 1.581 1.544 1.50427 2.901 2.511 2.299 2.165 2.073 2.005 1.952 1.909 1.874 1.845 1.799 1.749 1.695 1.666 1.636 1.603 1.569 1.531 1.49128 2.894 2.503 2.291 2.157 2.064 1.996 1.943 1.900 1.865 1.836 1.790 1.740 1.685 1.656 1.625 1.593 1.558 1.520 1.47829 2.887 2.495 2.283 2.149 2.057 1.988 1.935 1.892 1.857 1.827 1.781 1.731 1.676 1.647 1.616 1.583 1.547 1.509 1.46730 2.881 2.489 2.276 2.142 2.049 1.980 1.927 1.884 1.849 1.819 1.773 1.722 1.667 1.638 1.606 1.573 1.538 1.499 1.45640 2.835 2.440 2.226 2.091 1.997 1.927 1.873 1.829 1.793 1.763 1.715 1.662 1.605 1.574 1.541 1.506 1.467 1.425 1.37760 2.791 2.393 2.177 2.041 1.946 1.875 1.819 1.775 1.738 1.707 1.657 1.603 1.543 1.511 1.476 1.437 1.395 1.348 1.291120 2.748 2.347 2.130 1.992 1.896 1.824 1.767 1.722 1.684 1.652 1.601 1.545 1.482 1.447 1.409 1.368 1.320 1.265 1.1931000+ 2.706 2.303 2.084 1.945 1.847 1.774 1.717 1.670 1.632 1.599 1.546 1.487 1.421 1.383 1.342 1.295 1.240 1.169 1.000Table 3 of §1065.602–CriticalFvalues,Fcrit95, versusN–1 andNref–1 at 95 % confidenceN–1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 24 30 40 60 120 1000+Nref–11 161.4 199.5 215.7 224.5 230.1 233.9 236.7 238.8 240.5 241.8 243.9 245.9 248.0 249.0 250.1 251.1 252.2 253.2 254.32 18.51 19.00 19.16 19.24 19.29 19.33 19.35 19.37 19.38 19.39 19.41 19.42 19.44 19.45 19.46 19.47 19.47 19.48 19.493 10.12 9.552 9.277 9.117 9.014 8.941 8.887 8.845 8.812 8.786 8.745 8.703 8.660 8.639 8.617 8.594 8.572 8.549 8.5264 7.709 6.944 6.591 6.388 6.256 6.163 6.094 6.041 5.999 5.964 5.912 5.858 5.803 5.774 5.746 5.717 5.688 5.658 5.6285 6.608 5.786 5.410 5.192 5.050 4.950 4.876 4.818 4.773 4.735 4.678 4.619 4.558 4.527 4.496 4.464 4.431 4.399 4.3656 5.987 5.143 4.757 4.534 4.387 4.284 4.207 4.147 4.099 4.060 4.000 3.938 3.874 3.842 3.808 3.774 3.740 3.705 3.6697 5.591 4.737 4.347 4.120 3.972 3.866 3.787 3.726 3.677 3.637 3.575 3.511 3.445 3.411 3.376 3.340 3.304 3.267 3.2308 5.318 4.459 4.066 3.838 3.688 3.581 3.501 3.438 3.388 3.347 3.284 3.218 3.150 3.115 3.079 3.043 3.005 2.967 2.9289 5.117 4.257 3.863 3.633 3.482 3.374 3.293 3.230 3.179 3.137 3.073 3.006 2.937 2.901 2.864 2.826 2.787 2.748 2.70710 4.965 4.103 3.708 3.478 3.326 3.217 3.136 3.072 3.020 2.978 2.913 2.845 2.774 2.737 2.700 2.661 2.621 2.580 2.53811 4.844 3.982 3.587 3.357 3.204 3.095 3.012 2.948 2.896 2.854 2.788 2.719 2.646 2.609 2.571 2.531 2.490 2.448 2.40512 4.747 3.885 3.490 3.259 3.106 2.996 2.913 2.849 2.796 2.753 2.687 2.617 2.544 2.506 2.466 2.426 2.384 2.341 2.29613 4.667 3.806 3.411 3.179 3.025 2.915 2.832 2.767 2.714 2.671 2.604 2.533 2.459 2.420 2.380 2.339 2.297 2.252 2.20614 4.600 3.739 3.344 3.112 2.958 2.848 2.764 2.699 2.646 2.602 2.534 2.463 2.388 2.349 2.308 2.266 2.223 2.178 2.13115 4.543 3.682 3.287 3.056 2.901 2.791 2.707 2.641 2.588 2.544 2.475 2.403 2.328 2.288 2.247 2.204 2.160 2.114 2.06616 4.494 3.634 3.239 3.007 2.852 2.741 2.657 2.591 2.538 2.494 2.425 2.352 2.276 2.235 2.194 2.151 2.106 2.059 2.01017 4.451 3.592 3.197 2.965 2.810 2.699 2.614 2.548 2.494 2.450 2.381 2.308 2.230 2.190 2.148 2.104 2.058 2.011 1.96018 4.414 3.555 3.160 2.928 2.773 2.661 2.577 2.510 2.456 2.412 2.342 2.269 2.191 2.150 2.107 2.063 2.017 1.968 1.91719 4.381 3.522 3.127 2.895 2.740 2.628 2.544 2.477 2.423 2.378 2.308 2.234 2.156 2.114 2.071 2.026 1.980 1.930 1.87820 4.351 3.493 3.098 2.866 2.711 2.599 2.514 2.447 2.393 2.348 2.278 2.203 2.124 2.083 2.039 1.994 1.946 1.896 1.84321 4.325 3.467 3.073 2.840 2.685 2.573 2.488 2.421 2.366 2.321 2.250 2.176 2.096 2.054 2.010 1.965 1.917 1.866 1.81222 4.301 3.443 3.049 2.817 2.661 2.549 2.464 2.397 2.342 2.297 2.226 2.151 2.071 2.028 1.984 1.938 1.889 1.838 1.78323 4.279 3.422 3.028 2.796 2.640 2.528 2.442 2.375 2.320 2.275 2.204 2.128 2.048 2.005 1.961 1.914 1.865 1.813 1.75724 4.260 3.403 3.009 2.776 2.621 2.508 2.423 2.355 2.300 2.255 2.183 2.108 2.027 1.984 1.939 1.892 1.842 1.790 1.73325 4.242 3.385 2.991 2.759 2.603 2.490 2.405 2.337 2.282 2.237 2.165 2.089 2.008 1.964 1.919 1.872 1.822 1.768 1.71126 4.225 3.369 2.975 2.743 2.587 2.474 2.388 2.321 2.266 2.220 2.148 2.072 1.990 1.946 1.901 1.853 1.803 1.749 1.69127 4.210 3.354 2.960 2.728 2.572 2.459 2.373 2.305 2.250 2.204 2.132 2.056 1.974 1.930 1.884 1.836 1.785 1.731 1.67228 4.196 3.340 2.947 2.714 2.558 2.445 2.359 2.291 2.236 2.190 2.118 2.041 1.959 1.915 1.869 1.820 1.769 1.714 1.65429 4.183 3.328 2.934 2.701 2.545 2.432 2.346 2.278 2.223 2.177 2.105 2.028 1.945 1.901 1.854 1.806 1.754 1.698 1.63830 4.171 3.316 2.922 2.690 2.534 2.421 2.334 2.266 2.211 2.165 2.092 2.015 1.932 1.887 1.841 1.792 1.740 1.684 1.62240 4.085 3.232 2.839 2.606 2.450 2.336 2.249 2.180 2.124 2.077 2.004 1.925 1.839 1.793 1.744 1.693 1.637 1.577 1.50960 4.001 3.150 2.758 2.525 2.368 2.254 2.167 2.097 2.040 1.993 1.917 1.836 1.748 1.700 1.649 1.594 1.534 1.467 1.389120 3.920 3.072 2.680 2.447 2.290 2.175 2.087 2.016 1.959 1.911 1.834 1.751 1.659 1.608 1.554 1.495 1.429 1.352 1.2541000+ 3.842 2.996 2.605 2.372 2.214 2.099 2.010 1.938 1.880 1.831 1.752 1.666 1.571 1.517 1.459 1.394 1.318 1.221 1.000(h) Slope . Calculate a least-squares regression slope, a 1y , as follows:

##   i refi ref i 1 1y 2 refi ref i 1 ( )

( ) N

N yy y y

a
y y 

  







# 


Eq. 1065.602-9 Example: N

= 6000
y 1 = 2045.8



### y = 1050.1

y ref 1 = 2045.0

ref y = 1055.3 

##            6000 ref6000 1y 2 2
ref6000 2045.8 1050.1 2045.0 1055.3 ... 1050.1 1055.3

2045.0 1055.3 ... 1055.3 y y a y       

   

a 1y = 1.0110 (i) Intercept . Calculate a least-squares regression intercept, a 0y , as follows: 

#   0y 1y ref a yay   Eq. 1065.602-10 Example:



### y = 1050.1

a 1y = 1.0110

ref y = 1055.3

a 0y = 1050.1 – (1.0110 · 1055.3)

a 0y = –16.8083 (j) Standard estimate of error . Calculate a standard estimate of error, SEE , as follows:

2 i 0y 1y refi i 1
y ( )

2 N ya ay SEE N   

   



 

## 

Eq. 1065.602-11 Example: N

= 6000
y 1 = 2045.8

a 0y = –16.8083

a 1y = 1.0110
y ref1 = 2045.0 

##   2 2
6000 ref 6000

y 2045.8 ( 16.8083) (1.0110 2045.0) ... ( 16.8083) (1.0110 )

6000 2 y y SEE           



 SEE y = 5.348 (k) Coefficient of determination . Calculate a coefficient of determination, 2
y r , as follows: Comment [CAL7]: Not italic.
Comment [CAL8]: Updated.

##   2 i 0y 1y refi 2 i 1
y 2
i i 1 ( )
1 N

N ya ay

r
y y 



 

   

 

 

# 


Eq. 1065.602-12 Example: N

= 6000
y 1 = 2045.8

a 0y = –16.8083

a 1y = 1.0110
y ref1 = 2045.0


### y = 1480.5 

##     2 2
6000 ref6000 2
y 2 2
6000 2045.8 ( 16.8083) (1.0110 2045.0) ... ( 16.8083) (1.0110 ) 1 2045.8 1480.5 ... 1480.5 y y r y           

       

2
y r = 0.9859 (l) Flow-weighted mean concentration . In some sections of this part, you may need to calculate a flow-weighted mean concentration to determine th e applicability of certain provisions. A flowweighted mean is the mean of a quantity after it is weighted proportional to a corresponding flow rate. For example, if a gas concentration is measured continuously from the raw exhaust of an engine, its flow-weighted mean concentration is the sum of the products of each recorded concentration times its respective exhaust molar flow rate, divided by the sum of the recorded flow rate values. As another example, the bag concentration from a CVS system is the same as the flow-weighted mean concentration because the CVS system itself flow-weights the bag concentration. You might already expect a cer tain flow-weighted mean concentration of an emission at its standard based on previous testin g with similar engines or testing with similar equipment and instruments. If you need to estimate your expected flow-weighted mean concentration of an emission at its standard, we recommend using the following examples as a guide for how to estimate the flow-weighted mean concentration expected at the standard. Note that these examples are not exact and that they contain assumptions that are not always valid. Use good engineering judgment to determine if you can use similar assumptions. (1) To estimate the flow-weighted mean raw exhaust NO x concentration from a turbocharged heavy-duty compression-ignition engine at a NO x standard of 2.5 g/(kW·hr), you may do the following: (i) Based on your engine design, approximate a map of maximum torque versus speed and use it with the applicable normalized duty cycle in the standard-setting part to generate a reference duty cycle as described in §1065.610. Calculate the total reference work, W ref

, as described in §1065.650. Divide the reference work by the duty cycle’s time interval,  t dutycycle , to determine mean reference power, ref P

. (ii) Based on your engine design, estimate maximum power, P max , the design speed at maximum
power, f nmax , the design maximum intake manifold boost pressure, p inmax , and temperature, T inmax
. Also, estimate a mean fraction of power th at is lost due to friction and pumping, frict P . Use this information along with the engine displacement volume, V disp , an approximate volumetric Comment [CAL9]: Not italic.efficiency,  V, and the number of engine strokes per power stroke ( two -stroke or four- stroke), N

stroke , to estimate the maximum ra w exhaust molar flow rate, exhmax n 

. (iii) Use your estimated values as descri bed in the following example calculation: 

##   std ref exp ref frict max exhmax duty cycle

max e W x P PP Mn t P 

            

Eq. 1065.602-13

max disp nmax V stroke exhmax

max 2 pV f N n R T    



 

Eq. 1065.602-14 Example:

e NOx = 2.5 g/(kW·hr) W

ref

= 11.883 kW·hr M

NOx = 46.0055 g/mol = 46.0055·10 -6 g/  mol  t

dutycycle = 20 min = 1200 s

ref P = 35.65 kW

frict P = 15 %
P

max = 125 kW

p max = 300 kPa = 300000 Pa V

disp = 3.0 l = 0.0030 m 3 /r f

nmax = 2800 r/min = 46.67 r/s N

stroke = 4


V = 0.9 R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) T

max = 348.15 K

exhmax 2 300000 0.0030 46.67 0.9 4 8.314472 348.15 n   



 

exhmax n  = 6.53 mol/s



##   exp 6 2.5 11.883
35.65 0.15 125 46.0055 10 6.53 1200 125 x

 

    

     

exp x = 189.4 μmol/mol (2) To estimate the flow-weighted mean NMHC concentration in a CVS from a naturally aspirated nonroad spark-ignition engine at an NMHC standard of 0.5 g/(kW

· hr), you may do the following: (i) Based on your engine design, approximate a map of maximum torque versus speed and use it with the applicable normalized duty cycle in the standard-setting part to generate a reference Deleted: 2

Deleted: 4-duty cycle as described in §1065.610. Calculate the total reference work, W ref

, as described in §1065.650. (ii) Multiply your CVS total molar flow rate by the time interval of the duty cycle,  t dutycycle . The result is the total diluted exhaust flow of the n dexh

. (iii) Use your estimated values as descri bed in the following example calculation:

std ref NMHC dexh duty cycle e W x Mn t 

    Eq. 1065.602-15 Example:

e NMHC = 1.5 g/(kW·hr) W

ref

= 5.389 kW·hr M

NMHC = 13.875389 g/mol = 13.875389·10 -6 g/  mol

dexh n  = 6.021 mol/s
 t dutycycle = 30 min = 1800 s

NMHC -6 

### 1.5 5.389
13.875389 10 6.021 1800 x 



 

NMHC x = 53.8 μmol/mol

§1065.610 Duty cycle generation. This section describes how to generate duty cycles that are specific to your engine, based on the normalized duty cycles in the standard-setting pa rt. During an emission test, use a duty cycle that is specific to your engine to command engine speed, torque, and power, as applicable, using an engine dynamometer and an engine operator de mand. Paragraph (a) of this section describes how to “normalize” your engine’s map to determine the maximum test speed and torque for your engine. The rest of this section describes how to use these values to “denormalize” the duty cycles in the standard-setting parts, which are all published on a normalized basis. Thus, the term "normalized" in paragraph (a) of this section refers to different values than it does in the rest of the section. (a) Maximum test speed, f ntest . This section generally applies to duty cycles for variable-speed engines. For constant-speed engines subject to duty cycles that specify normalized speed commands, use the no-load governed speed as the measured f ntest . This is the highest engine speed where an engine outputs zero torque. For variable-speed engines, determine the measured f

ntest from the power-versus-speed map, generated according to §1065.510, as follows: (1) Based on the map, determine maximum power, P max , and the speed at which maximum power occurred, f nPmax . If maximum power occurs at multiple speeds, take f nPmax as the lowest of these speeds. Divide every recorded power by P max and divide every recorded speed by f nPmax
. The result is a normalized power-versus-speed map. Your measured f ntest is the speed at which the sum of the squares of normalized speed and power is maximum. Note that if multiple maximum values are found, f ntest should be taken as the lowest speed of all points with the same maximum sum of squares. Determine f ntest as follows: 

#   2 2 ntest ni nnormi normi at the maximum of ff f P   Eq. 1065.610-1 Where: f

ntest = maximum test speed.i = an indexing variable that represents one recorded value of an engine map. f

nnormi = an engine speed normalized by dividing it by f nPmax
. P

normi = an engine power normalized by dividing it by P max . Example: ( f

nnorm1 = 1.002, P norm1 = 0.978, f n1 = 2359.71) ( f

nnorm2 = 1.004, P norm2 = 0.977, f n2 = 2364.42) ( f

nnorm3 = 1.006, P norm3 = 0.974, f n3 = 2369.13) ( f

nnorm1 2 + P norm1 2 ) = (1.002 2 + 0.978 2 ) = 1.960 ( f

nnorm2 2 + P norm2 2 ) = (1.004 2 + 0.977 2 ) = 1.963 ( f

nnorm3 2 + P norm3 2 ) = (1.006 2 + 0.974 2 ) = 1.961 maximum = 1.963 at i = 2 f

ntest = 2364.42 r/min (2) For engines with a high-speed governor that will be subject to a reference duty cycle that specifies normalized speeds greater than 100 %, calculate an alternate maximum test speed, f ntest,alt , as specified in this paragraph (a)(2). If f ntest,alt is less than the measured maximum test speed, f ntest , determined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, replace f ntest with f ntest,alt . In this case, f ntest,alt becomes the “maximum test speed” for that engine. Note that §1065.510 allows you to apply an optional declared maximum test speed to the final measured maximum test speed determined as an outcome of the comparison between f ntest , and f ntest,alt in this paragraph (a)(2). Determine f ntest,alt as follows:

f

ntest,alt = ( f

nhi,idle – f nidle )/ % speed max + f nidle Eq. 1065.610-2

Where: f

ntest,alt = alternate maximum test speed f

nhi,idle = warm high-idle speed f

nidle = warm idle speed % speed max = maximum normalized speed from duty cycle

Example: f

nhi,idle = 2200 r/min f

nidle = 800 r/min % speed max = 105 % (Nonroad CI Transient Cycle) f

ntest,alt = (2200 – 800)/105 % + 800 f

ntest,alt = 2133 r/min (3) For variable-speed engines, transform norm alized speeds to reference speeds according to paragraph (c) of this section by using the measured maximum test speed determined according to paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section—or use your declared maximum test speed, as allowed in §1065.510. (4) For constant-speed engines, transform normalized speeds to reference speeds according to paragraph (c) of this section by using the measured no-load governed speed—or use your declared maximum test speed, as allowed in §1065.510 (b) Maximum test torque, T test . For constant-speed engines, determine the measured T test

from the power-versus-speed map, generated according to §1065.510, as follows:(1) Based on the map, determine maximum power, P max , and the speed at which maximum
power occurs, f nPmax . If maximum power occurs at multiple speeds, take f nPmax as the lowest of these speeds. Divide every recorded power by P max and divide every recorded speed by f nPmax
. The result is a normalized power-versus-speed map. Your measured T test

is the torque at which the sum of the squares of normalized speed and power is maximum. Note that that if multiple maximum values are found, T test

should be taken as the highest torque of all points with the same maximum sum of squares. Determine T test

as follows: 

#   2 2 test i nnormi normi at the maximum of TT f P   Eq. 1065.610-3 Where: T

test

= maximum test torque.

Example: ( f

nnorm1 = 1.002, P norm1 = 0.978, T 1 = 722.62 N·m) ( f

nnorm2 = 1.004, P norm2 = 0.977, T 2 = 720.44 N·m) ( f

nnorm3 = 1.006, P norm3 = 0.974, T 3 = 716.80 N·m) ( f

nnorm1 2 + P norm1 2 ) = (1.002 2 + 0.978 2 ) = 1.960 ( f

nnorm1 2 + P norm1 2 ) = (1.004 2 + 0.977 2 ) = 1.963 ( f

nnorm1 2 + P norm1 2 ) = (1.006 2 + 0.974 2 ) = 1.961 maximum = 1.963 at i = 2 T

test = 720.44 N·m (2) Transform normalized torques to reference torques according to paragraph (d) of this section by using the measured maximum test torque dete rmined according to paragraph (b)(1) of this section—or use your declared maximum test torque, as allowed in §1065.510. (c) Generating reference speed values from normalized duty cycle speeds . Transform normalized speed values to reference values as follows: (1) % speed . If your normalized duty cycle specifies % speed values, use your warm idle speed and your maximum test speed to transform the duty cycle, as follows: f

nref = % speed · ( f

ntest – f nidle ) + f nidle Eq. 1065.610-4 Example: % speed = 85 % f

ntest = 2364 r/min f

nidle = 650 r/min f

nref = 85 % · (2364 – 650 ) + 650 f

nref = 2107 r/min (2) A, B, and C speeds . If your normalized duty cycle specifies speeds as A, B, or C values, use your power-versus-speed curve to determine the lowest speed below maximum power at which 50 % of maximum power occurs. Denote this value as n lo . Take n lo to be warm idle speed if all power points at speeds below the maximum power speed are higher than 50 % of maximum power. Also determine the highest speed above maximum power at which 70 % of maximum power occurs. Denote this value as n hi . If all power points at speeds above the maximum power speed are higher than 70% of maximum power, take n hi to be the declared maximum safe engine speed or the declared maximum representative engine speed, whichever is lower. Use n hi and n loto calculate reference values for A, B, or C speeds as follows: f

nrefA = 0.25 · ( n hi – n lo ) + n lo Eq. 1065.610-5 f

nrefB = 0.50 · ( n hi – n lo ) + n lo Eq. 1065.610-6 f

nrefC = 0.75 · ( n hi – n lo ) + n lo Eq. 1065.610-7 Example:

n lo = 1005 r/min

n hi = 2385 r/min f

nrefA = 0.25 · (2385 – 1005) + 1005 f

nrefB = 0.50 · (2385 – 1005) + 1005 f

nrefC = 0.75 · (2385 – 1005) + 1005 f

nrefA = 1350 r/min f

nrefB = 1695 r/min f

nrefC = 2040 r/min (3) Intermediate speed . If your normalized duty cycle specifies a speed as “intermediate speed,” use your torque-versus-speed curve to determine the speed at which maximum torque occurs. This is peak torque speed. If maximum torque occurs in a flat region of the torque-versus-speed curve, your peak torque speed is the midpoint between the lowest and highest speeds at which the trace reaches the flat region. For purposes of this paragraph (c)(3), a flat region is one in which measured torque values are within 2 % of the maximum recorded value. Identify your reference intermediate speed as one of the following values: (i) Peak torque speed if it is between (60 and 75) % of maximum test speed. (ii) 60 % of maximum test speed if peak torque speed is less than 60 % of maximum test speed. (iii) 75 % of maximum test speed if peak torque speed is greater than 75 % of maximum test speed. (d) Generating reference torques fro m normalized duty-cycle torques . Transform normalized torques to reference torques using your map of maximum torque versus speed. (1) Reference torque for variable-speed engines . For a given speed point, multiply the corresponding % torque by the maximum torque at that speed, according to your map. If your engine is subject to a reference duty cycle that specifies negative torque values (i.e., engine motoring), use negative torque for those motoring points (i.e., the motoring torque). If you map negative torque as allowed under §1065.510(c)(2) and the low-speed governor activates, resulting in positive torque s, you may replace those positive motoring mapped torques with negative values between zero and the largest negative motoring torque. For both maximum and motoring torque maps, linearly interpolate mapped torque values to determine torque between mapped speeds. If the reference speed is belo w the minimum mapped speed (i.e., 95% of idle speed or 95% of lowest required speed, whichever is higher), use the mapped torque at the minimum mapped speed as the reference torque. The result is the reference torque for each speed point. (2) Reference torque for constant-speed engines . Multiply a % torque value by your maximum test torque. The result is the reference torque for each point. (3) Required deviations. We require the fo llowing deviations for variable-speed engines intended primarily for propulsion of a vehicle with an automatic transmission where that engine is subject to a transient duty cycle with idle ope ration. These deviations are intended to producea more representative transient duty cycle for thes e applications. For stead y-state duty cycles or transient duty cycles with no idle operation, th ese requirements do not apply. Idle points for steady state duty cycles of such engines are to be run at conditions simulating neutral or park on the transmission. (i) Zero-percent speed is the warm idle speed measured according to §1065.510(b)(6) with CITT applied, i.e., measured warm idle speed in drive. (ii) If the cycle begins with a set of contiguou s idle points (zero-percent speed, and zero-percent torque), leave the reference torques set to zero for th is initial contiguous idle segment. This is to represent free idle operation with the transmission in neutral or park at the start of the transient duty cycle, after the engine is started. If the initial idle segment is longer than 24 seconds

, change the reference torques for the remaining idle points in th e initial contiguous idle segment to CITT (i.e., change idle points corresponding to 25 seconds to the end of the initial idle segment to CITT). This is to repres ent shifting the transmission to drive. (iii) For all other idle points, change the refere nce torque to CITT. This is to represent the transmission operating in drive. (iv) If the engine is intended primarily for automatic transmissions with a Neutral-WhenStationary feature that automatically shifts the tr ansmission to neutral after the vehicle is stopped for a designated time and automatically shifts b ack to drive when the operator increases demand (i.e., pushes the accelerator pedal), change the reference torque back to zero for idle points in drive after the designated time. (v) For all points with normalized speed at or below zero percent and reference torque from zero to CITT, set the reference torque to CITT. This is to provide sm oother torque re ferences below idle speed. (vi) For motoring points, make no changes. (vii) For consecutive points w ith reference torques from zero to CITT that immediately follow idle points, change their reference torques to CITT. This is to provide smooth torque transition out of idle operation. This does not apply if the Neutral-When-Stationary feature is used and the transmission has shifted to neutral. (viii) For consecutive points with reference torque from zero to CITT that immediately precede idle points, change their reference torques to CITT. This is to provide smooth torque transition into idle operation. (4) Permissible deviations for any engine . If your engine does not operate below a certain minimum torque under normal in-use conditions, yo u may use a declared minimum torque as the reference value instead of any value denormalized to be less than the declared value. For example, if your engine is connected to a hydr ostatic transmission and it has a minimum torque even when all the driven hydraulic actuators and motors are stationary and the engine is at idle, then you may use this declared minimum torque as a reference torque value instead of any reference torque value generated under paragraph (d)(1) or (2) of this section that is between zero and this declared minimum torque. (e) Generating reference power values from normalized duty cycle powers . Transform normalized power values to reference speed and power values using your map of maximum power versus speed. (1) First transform normalized speed values into reference speed values. For a given speed point, multiply the corresponding % power by the mapped power at maximum test speed, f ntest , unless specified otherwise by the standard-setting part. The result is the reference power for each speed point, P ref . Convert these reference powers to corresponding torques for operator demand and Deleted: s

Deleted: sdynamometer control and for duty cycle validation per 1065.514. Use the reference speed associated with each reference power point for this conversion. As with cycles specified with % torque, linearly interpolate between these reference torque values generated from cycles with %
power. (2) Permissible deviations for any engine. If yo ur engine does not operate below a certain power under normal in-use conditions, you may use a declared minimum power as the reference value instead of any value denormalized to be less than the declared value. For example, if your engine is directly connected to a propeller, it may have a minimum power called idle power. In this case, you may use this declared minimum power as a reference power value instead of any reference power value generated per paragraph (e)(1) of this section that is from zero to this declared minimum power.

§1065.630 Local acceleration of gravity. (a) The acceleration of Earth’s gravity, a g , varies depending on the test location. Determine a g at your location by entering latitude, longitude, and elevation data into the U.S. National Oceanographic and Atmospheric Administration’ s surface gravity prediction Web site at http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/cgi-bin/grav_pdx.prl. (b) If the Web site specified in paragraph (a) of this section is unavailable, you may calculate a g for your latitude as follows:

a g = 9.7803267715 · [1 + 5.2790414 · 10 -3 ·sin 2 (  ) + 2.32718 · 10 -5 ·sin 4 (  ) + 1.262 · 10 -7 ·sin 6 (  ) + 7 · 10 -10 ·sin 8 (  )] Eq. 1065.630-1 Where: 

= Degrees north or south latitude. Example:  = 45 °

a g = 9.7803267715 · (1 + 5.2790414 · 10 -3 ·sin 2 (45) + 2.32718 · 10 -5 ·sin 4 (45) + 1.262 · 10 -7 ·sin 6 (45) + 7 · 10 -10 ·sin 8 (45)

a g = 9.8061992026 m/s 2

§1065.640 Flow meter calibration calculations. This section describes the calculations for calibra ting various flow meters. After you calibrate a flow meter using these calculations, use the calcula tions described in §1065.642 to calculate flow during an emission test. Paragraph (a) of this section first describes how to convert reference flow meter outputs for use in the calibration equa tions, which are presented on a molar basis. The remaining paragraphs describe the calibration calculations that are specific to certain types of flow meters. (a) Reference meter conversions . The calibration equations in th is section use molar flow rate,

ref n  , as a reference quantity. If your reference meter outputs a flow rate in a different quantity, such as standard volume rate, stdref V  , actual volume rate, actref V  , or mass rate, ref m  , convert your reference meter output to a molar flow rate using the foll owing equations, noting that while values for volume rate, mass ra te, pressure, temperature, and molar mass may change during an emission test, you should ensure that they are as constant as practical for each individual set point during a flow meter calibration: Deleted: 1980 international

Deleted: formula

Deleted: The acceleration of Earth's gravity, a g , varies depending on your location. Calculate a g at

Deleted:

,

Deleted: 9.8178291229stdref std actref act ref ref std act mix 

### V pV p m n TR TR M  



   




Eq. 1065.640-1 Where:

ref n  = reference molar flow rate.

stdref V  = reference volume flow rate, corrected to a standard pressure and a standard temperature.

actref V  = reference volume flow rate at the actual pressure and temperature of the flow rate.

ref m  = reference mass flow.

p std = standard pressure.
p act = actual pressure of the flow rate. T

std

= standard temperature. T

act

= actual temperature of the flow rate. R = molar gas constant. M

mix = molar mass of the flow rate.

Example 1:

stdref V  = 1000.00 ft 3 /min = 0.471948 m 3 /s

p std = 29.9213 in Hg @ 32 °F = 101.325 kPa = 101325 Pa = 101325 kg/(m·s 2 ) T

std

= 68.0 °F = 293.15 K R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K)

ref 

### 0.471948 101325
293.15 8.314472 n 



 

ref n  = 19.619 mol/s

Example 2:

ref m  = 17.2683 kg/min = 287.805 g/s
M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol

ref 

### 287.805
28.7805 n  

ref n  = 10.0000 mol/s (b) PDP calibration calculations . For each restrictor position, calc ulate the following values from the mean values determined in §1065.340, as follows: (1) PDP volume pumped per revolution, V rev (m 3 /r):

ref in

rev in nPDP n RT V p f  



 

Eq. 1065.640-2 Example:

ref n  = 25.096 mol/s
R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K)

in T = 299.5 K

in p = 98.290 kPa = 98290 Pa = 98290 kg/(m·s 2 ) Comment [CAL10]: Corrected typo in equation.

Deleted: P std
Deleted: P act

Deleted: P

Comment [CAL11]: Corrected typo in equation.

Comment [CAL12]: Corrected typo.nPDP f = 1205.1 r/min = 20.085 r/s



### 25.096 8.314472 299.5
98290 20.085 rev 

### V  



 V

rev = 0.03166 m 3 /r

(2) PDP slip correction factor, K s (s/r):

out in

s nPDP out 1 p p K f p 

 
Eq. 1065.640-3 Example:

nPDP f = 1205.1 r/min = 20.085 r/s

out p = 100.103 kPa

in p = 98.290 kPa

s 1 100.103 98.290
20.085 100.103 K 

 

K

s = 0.006700 s/r (3) Perform a least-squares regression of PDP volume pumped per revolution, V rev , versus PDP slip correction factor, K s , by calculating slope, a 1 , and intercept, a 0 , as described in §1065.602. (4) Repeat the procedure in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) of this section for every speed that you run your PDP. (5) The following example illustrates these calculations: Table 1 of §1065.640– Example of PDP calibration data

nPDP f (r/ s ) a 1 (m 3 / s ) a 0 (m 3 /r)

12.6 0.841 0.056

16.5 0.831 -0.013

20.9 0.809 0.028

23.4 .788 -0.061

(6) For each speed at which you operate the PDP, use the corresponding slope, a 1 , and intercept,

a 0 , to calculate flow rate during emission testing as described in §1065.642. (c) Venturi governing equations and permissible assumptions . This section describes the governing equations and permissible assumptions for calibrating a venturi and calculating flow using a venturi. Because a subsonic venturi (SSV) and a critical-flow venturi (CFV) both operate similarly, their governing equations are nearly the same, except for the equation describing their pressure ratio, r (i.e., r SSV versus r CFV ). These governing equations assume onedimensional isentropic inviscid compressible flow of an ideal gas. In paragraph (c)(4) of this section, we describe other assumptions that you may make, depending upon how you conduct your emission tests. If we do not allow you to assume that the measured flow is an ideal gas, the governing equations include a first-order correctio n for the behavior of a real gas; namely, the compressibility factor, Z . If good engineering judgment dictates using a value other than Z =1, you may either use an appropriate equation of state to determine values of Z as a function of Comment [CAL13]: Corrected typo.

Comment [CAL14]: Corrected typo.

Comment [CAL15]: Not italic.

Deleted: min Deleted: min

Deleted: 755.0

Deleted: 50.43

Deleted: 987.6

Deleted: 49.86

Deleted: 1254.5

Deleted: 48.54

Deleted: 1401.3

Deleted: 47.30measured pressures and temperatures, or you may develop your own calibration equations based on good engineering judgment. Note that the equation for the flow coefficient, C f , is based on the ideal gas assumption that the isentropic exponent,  , is equal to the ratio of specific heats, C

p / C v . If good engineering judgment dictates using a real gas isentropic exponent, you may either use an appropriate equation of state to determine values of  as a function of measured pressures and temperatures, or you may develop your own calibration equations based on good engineering judgment. Calculate molar flow rate, , as follows:

t in d f
mix in 

### A p n CC Z M RT 

 

  

Eq. 1065.640-4 Where: C

d = discharge coefficient, as determined in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. C

f = flow coefficient, as determined in pa ragraph (c)(2) of this section. A t

= venturi throat cross-sectional area.
p in = venturi inlet absolute static pressure. Z

= compressibility factor. M

mix = molar mass of gas mixture. R = molar gas constant. T

in = venturi inlet absolute temperature.

(1) Using the data collected in §1065.340, calculate C d using the following equation:

mix in d ref f t in Z M RT C n C Ap  

 

 



Eq. 1065.640-5 Where:

ref n  = a reference molar flow rate. (2) Determine C f using one of the following methods: (i) For CFV flow meters only, determine C fCFV from the following table based on your values for 

and  , using linear interpolation to find intermediate values: n 

Deleted: Discharge

Deleted: Flow

Deleted: Venturi

Deleted: Venturi

Deleted: Compressibility

Deleted: Molar

Deleted: Molar

Deleted: Venturi

Deleted: ATable 2 of §1065.640– C

fCFV versus  and  for CFV flow meters

C f CFV

  exh = 1.385  dexh =  air = 1.399

0.000 0.6822 0.6846

0.400 0.6857 0.6881

0.500 0.6910 0.6934

0.550 0.6953 0.6977

0.600 0.7011 0.7036

0.625 0.7047 0.7072

0.650 0.7089 0.7114

0.675 0.7137 0.7163

0.700 0.7193 0.7219

0.720 0.7245 0.7271

0.740 0.7303 0.7329

0.760 0.7368 0.7395

0.770 0.7404 0.7431

0.780 0.7442 0.7470

0.790 0.7483 0.7511

0.800 0.7527 0.7555

0.810 0.7573 0.7602

0.820 0.7624 0.7652

0.830 0.7677 0.7707

0.840 0.7735 0.7765

0.850 0.7798 0.7828

(ii) For any CFV or SSV flow meter, you may use the following equation to calculate C f : 

#  
  

#   1

2 1
2

f 4 2 1

1 r C

r  

 
  

  

   



 

  Eq. 1065.640-6 Where:


= isentropic exponent. For an ideal gas, this is the ratio of specific heats of the gas mixture, C

p / C v . r = pressure ratio, as determined in paragraph (c)(3) of this section. 

= ratio of venturi throat to inlet diameters. (3) Calculate r as follows: (i) For SSV systems only, calculate r SSV using the following equation: Deleted: Pressure

Deleted: RatioSSV SSV in 1 p r p 

 
Eq. 1065.640-7 Where: Δ

p SSV = Differential static pressure; ve nturi inlet minus venturi throat. (ii) For CFV systems only, calculate r CFV iteratively using the following equation:

1 2 4 CFV CFV 1 1
2 2 r r              

    Eq. 1065.640-8 (4)You may make any of the following simplifying assumptions of the governing equations, or you may use good engineering judgment to develop more appropriate values for your testing: (i) For emission testing over the full ranges of raw exhaust, diluted exhaust and dilution air, you may assume that the gas mixture behaves as an ideal gas: Z =1. (ii) For the full range of raw exhaust you may assume a constant ratio of specific heats of
 =1.385. (iii) For the full range of diluted exhaust and ai r (e.g., calibration air or dilution air), you may assume a constant ratio of specific heats of  =1.399. (iv) For the full range of diluted exhaust and air, you may assume the molar mass of the mixture is a function only of the amount of wa ter in the dilution air or calibration air, x H2O , determined as described in §1065.645, as follows: M

mix = M air

· (1 – x H2O ) + M H2O · x H2O Eq. 1065.640-9 Example: M

air

= 28.96559 g/mol

x H2O = 0.0169 mol/mol M

H2O = 18.01528 g/mol M

mix = 28.96559 · (1– 0.0169) + 18.01528 · 0.0169 M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol (v) For the full range of diluted exhaust and air, you may assume a constant molar mass of the mixture, M mix , for all calibration and all testing as l ong as your assumed molar mass differs no more than ±1 % from the estimated minimum and maximum molar mass during calibration and testing. You may assume this, using good engin eering judgment, if you sufficiently control the amount of water in calibration air and in dilution air or if you remove sufficient water from both calibration air and dilution air. The following table gives examples of permissible ranges of dilution air dewpoint versus calibration air dewpoint:Table 3 of §1065.640– Examples of dilution air and calibration air dewpoints at which you may assume a constant M mix

. If calibration T dew

(  C) is... assume the following
constant M mix (g/mol)... for the following ranges of T dew (  C) during emission tests a
dry 28.96559 dry to 18 0 28.89263 dry to 21 5 28.86148 dry to 22 10 28.81911 dry to 24 15 28.76224 dry to 26

20 28.68685 -8 to 28

25 28.58806 12 to 31

30 28.46005 23 to 34

a Range valid for all calibration and em ission testing over the atmospheric pressure range (80.000 to 103.325) kPa.

(5) The following example illustrates the use of the governing equatio ns to calculate the discharge coefficient, C d of an SSV flow meter at one reference flow meter value. Note that calculating C d for a CFV flow meter would be similar, except that C f would be determined from Table 2 of this section or calcu lated iteratively using values of  and  as described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section.

Example:

ref n  = 57.625 mol/s
Z

= 1 M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol = 0.0287805 kg/mol R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K) T

in = 298.15 K A t

= 0.01824 m 2

p in = 99.132 kPa = 99132.0 Pa = 99132 kg/(m·s 2 )


= 1.399 

= 0.8 Δ

p = 2.312 kPa

SSV 

### 2.312 1 0.977 99.132 r   

#     

#   1.399 1 1.399

2 1.399 1
2

f 4 2 1.399 0.977 1

1.399 1 0.8 0.977 C 

  

   



 

 
C

f = 0.274

d 1 0.0287805 8.314472 298.15 57.625 0.274 0.01824 99132.0 C  

 

  C

d = 0.982 (d) SSV calibration . Perform the following steps to calibrate an SSV flow meter:(1) Calculate the Reynolds number, Re #

, for each reference molar flow rate, ref n 
, using the throat diameter of the venturi, d t . Because the dynamic viscosity, μ , is needed to compute Re # , you may use your own fluid viscosity model to determine μ for your calibration gas (usually air), using good engineering judgment. Alternatively, you may use the Sutherland three-coefficient viscosity model to approximate μ , as shown in the following sample calculation for Re # :

# mix ref

t 4 M n Re = d    

  

Eq. 1065.640-10 Where, using the Sutherland three-coefficient viscosity model:

3
2 in 0 0 0 in 

### T TS
T TS       

           Eq. 1065.640-11 Where:
μ 0 = Sutherland reference viscosity. T

0 = Sutherland reference temperature. S

= Sutherland constant.

Table 4 of §1065.640– Sutherland three-coefficient viscosity model parameters

Gas a μ 0 T 0 S Temp range within ±2 %

error b Pressure limit b

kg/(m·s) K K K kPa

Air 1.716·10 -5 273 111 170 to 1900 ≤ 1800

CO 2 1.370·10 -5 273 222 190 to 1700 ≤ 3600

H 2 O 1.12·10 -5 350 1064 360 to 1500 ≤ 10000

O 2 1.919·10 -5 273 139 190 to 2000 ≤ 2500

N 2 1.663·10 -5 273 107 100 to 1500 ≤ 1600

a Use tabulated parameters only for the pur e gases, as listed. Do not combine parameters in calculations to calculate viscosities of gas mixtures.
b The model results are valid only for ambient conditions in the specified
ranges.
Example:
μ 0 = 1.716·10 -5 kg/(m·s) T

0 = 273 K S

= 11 1 K

3
2 5 298.15 273 111 1.716 10 273 298.15 111      

         

μ = 1. 838 ·10 -5 kg/(m·s)

M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol = 0.0287805 kg/mol Comment [CAL16]: New text.

Deleted: μ = Dynamic viscosity of calibration gas.¶

Deleted: .11

Deleted: 0.56
Comment [CAL17]: Example problem updated.

Deleted: 837ref n  = 57.625 mol/s
d

t = 152.4 mm = 0.1524 m T

in = 298.15 K

#
5 

### 4 28.7805 57.625
3.14159 0.1524 1.838 10 Re =

 

###  

  Re # = 7. 538

· 10 8

(2) Create an equation for C d as a function of Re #

, using paired values of the two quantities

. T he equation may involve any mathematical expression, including a polynomial or a power series. The following equation is an example of a commonly used mathematical expression for relating C

d and Re # :

6

d 01 # 10 Caa R e   Eq. 1065.640-12 (3) Perform a least-squares regression analysis to determine the best-fit coefficients for the equation and calculate the equation’s regression statistic, SEE, according to §1065.602. (4) If the equation meets the criteria of SEE ≤ 0.5 % · refmax n  , you may use the equation to
determine C d for emission tests, as described in §1065.642. (5) If the equation does not meet the specified statistical criteria , you may use good engineering judgment to omit calibration data points ; however y ou must use at least seven calibration data points to demonstrate that you meet the criteria. For example, this may involve narrowing the range of flow rates for a better curve fit. (6) Take corrective action if the equation does not m eet the specified statistical criteria even after omitting calibration data points. For example, select another mathematical expression for the C d
versus Re # equation, check for leaks, or repeat the calibration process. If you must repeat the process, we recommend applying tighter tolerances to measurements and allowing more time for flows to stabilize. (7) Once you have an equation that meets the specified statistical criteria, you may use the equation only for the corresponding range of Re #

. (e) CFV calibration. Some CFV flow meters consist of a single venturi and some consist of multiple venturis, where different combinations of ve nturis are used to meter different flow rates. For CFV flow meters that consist of multiple venturis, either calibrate each venturi independently to determine a separate discharge coefficient, C d , for each venturi, or calibrate each combination of venturis as one venturi. In the case where you calibrate a combination of venturis, use the sum of the active venturi throat areas as A t , the square root of the sum of the squares of the active venturi throat diameters as d t , and the ratio of the venturi throat to inlet diameters as the ratio of the square root of the sum of the active venturi throat diameters ( d t ) to the diameter of the common entrance to all of the venturis ( D ). To determine the C d for a single venturi or a single combination of venturis, perform the following steps: (1) Use the data collected at each calibration set point to calculate an individual C d for each point using Eq. 1065.640-4. (2) Calculate the mean and standard deviation of all the C d values according to Eqs. 1065.602-1 and 1065.602-2. (3) If the standard deviation of all the C d values is less than or equal to 0.3 % of the mean C d , use the mean C d in Eq

. 1065.642- 4 , and use the CFV only up to the highest r measured during Comment [CAL18]: Example problem updated.

Deleted: 541

Deleted: 10 5

Deleted: versus

Deleted: ( Re #

, C d )

Deleted: For t

Deleted: , you
Deleted: use

Deleted: to

Deleted: s

Deleted: and r 2

Deleted: and r 2 ≥ 0.995

Deleted: SEE and r 2 criteria are not met

Deleted: to meet the regression statistics. Y

Deleted: If

Deleted: does not resolve outliers, take corrective action

Deleted: regression

Deleted: to determine

Deleted: flow rates that are within the range of the reference flow rates used to meet the C d versus Re # equation’s regression criteria

Deleted: 6calibration using the following equation:

CFV

in 1 p r p 

 
Eq. 1065.640-13 Where: 

p CFV = Differential static pressure; venturi inlet minus venturi outlet. (4) If the standard deviation of all the C d values exceeds 0.3 % of the mean C d , omit the C d value corresponding to the data poi nt collected at the highest r measured during calibration. (5) If the number of remaining data points is le ss than seven, take corrective action by checking your calibration data or repeatin g the calibration process. If you repeat the calibration process, we recommend checking for leaks, applying tighter tolerances to measurements and allowing more time for flows to stabilize. (6) If the number of remaining C d values is seven or greater, recalculate the mean and standard deviation of the remaining C d values. (7) If the standard devi ation of the remaining C d values is less than or equal to 0.3 % of the mean of the remaining C d , use that mean C d in Eq

. 1065.642- 4 , and use the CFV values only up to the highest r associated with the remaining C d

. (8) If the standard deviation of the remaining C d still exceeds 0.3 % of the mean of the remaining C

d values, repeat the steps in paragraph (e)(4) through (8) of this section.

§1065.642 SSV, CFV, and PDP molar flow rate calculations. This section describes the equations for calculati ng molar flow rates from various flow meters. After you calibrate a flow meter according to §1065.640, use the calculations described in this section to calculate flow during an emission test. (a) PDP molar flow rate . Based upon the speed at which you operate the PDP for a test interval, select the corresponding slope, a 1 , and intercept, a 0 , as calculated in §1065.640, to calculate molar flow rate, n  as follows:

in rev nPDP in p V n f R T 

 

 

Eq. 1065.642-1 Where:

out in 1 rev 0
nPDP out p p a V a f p   

Eq. 1065.642-2

Example:

a 1 = 0.8405 (m 3 /s) f

nPDP = 12.58 r/s
p out = 99

. 950 k Pa
p in = 98.575 kPa = 98575 Pa = 98575 kg/(m·s 2 )

a 0 = 0.056 (m 3 /r) R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K) T

in = 323.5 K Deleted: s

Deleted: 6

Comment [CAL19]: Corrected typo.

Deleted: 50.43 (m 3 /min) =

Deleted: nPDP f

Deleted: 755.0 r/min =rev 0.8405 99.950 98.575 0.056 12.58 99.950 V   

V

rev = 0.06383 m 3 /r


### 98575 0.06383 12.58 8.314472 323.5 n 

 

 

n  = 29.428 mol/s (b) SSV molar flow rate . Based on the C d versus Re # equation you determined according to §1065.640, calculate SSV molar flow rate, n  during an emission test as follows:

t in d f
mix in 

### A p n CC Z M RT 

 

  

Eq. 1065.642-3

Example: A t

= 0.01824 m 2

p in = 99.132 kPa = 99132 Pa = 99132 kg/(m·s 2 ) Z

= 1 M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol = 0.0287805 kg/mol R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K) T

in = 298.15 K Re # = 7.232·10 5



= 1.399 

= 0.8 

p = 2.312 kPa

Using Eq. 1065.640-7,

r ssv = 0.997

Using Eq. 1065.640-6, C f

= 0.274

Using Eq. 1065.640-5, C d

= 0.990 0.01824 99132

0.990 0.274 1 0.0287805 8.314472 298.15 n 



  

n  = 58.173 mol/s (c) CFV molar flow rate . Some CFV flow meters consist of a single venturi and some consist of multiple venturis, where different combinations of venturis are used to meter different flow rates. If you use multiple venturis and you calibrated each venturi independently to determine a separate discharge coefficient, C d (or calibration coefficient, K v ) , for each venturi, calculate the individual molar flow rates through each vent uri and sum all their flow rates to determine n  . If you use multiple venturis and you calibrated each combination of venturis, calculate n  using the sum of the active venturi throat areas as A t , the square root of the sum of the squares of the active venturi throat diameters as d t , and the ratio of the venturi throat to inlet diameters as the ratio of Deleted: C p = 1000 (J/m 3 )/kPa¶ C t = 60 s/min¶ Comment [CAL20]: Example problem updated.the square root of the sum of the active venturi throat diameters ( d t ) to the diameter of the common entrance to all of the venturis ( D ). (1) To calculate the molar flow rate through one venturi or one combination of venturis, use its respective mean C d and other constants you determined according to §1065.640 and calculate its molar flow rate n  during an emission test, as follows:

t in d f
mix in A p n CC Z M RT 

 

  

Eq. 1065.642-4 Example: C

d = 0.985 C

f = 0.7219 A t

= 0.00456 m 2

p in = 98.836 kPa = 98836 Pa = 98836 kg/(m·s 2 ) Z

= 1 M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol = 0.0287805 kg/mol R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K) T

in = 378.15 K 0.00456 98836 0.985 0.7219 1 0.0287805 8.314472 378.15 n 

 

  

n  = 33.690 mol/s (2) To calculate the molar flow rate through one venturi or a combination of venturis, you may use its respective mean K v and other constants you determined according to §1065.640 and calculate its molar flow rate n  during an emission test. Note that if you choose to follow the permissible ranges of dilution air dewpoint ve rsus calibration air dewpoint in Table 3 of §1065.640, you may set M mix-cal and M mix equal to 1. Calculate n  as follows:

mix-cal in std

std in mix v M Kp p n T R T M 

 

 

Eq. 1065.642-5 Where:

stdref in-cal

in-cal v V T K p 


Eq. 1065.642-6 V

stdref = volumetric flow of the standard at re ference conditions of 293.15 K and 101.325 kPa. T

in-cal = v enturi inlet temperature during calibration

. P in-cal = v enturi inlet pressure during calibration

. M

mix-cal = m olar mass of gas mixture used during calibration. M

mix = m olar mass of gas mixture during the emission test calculated using Equation 1065.640-9.

Example: V

stdref = 0.4895 m 3
T

in-cal = 302.52 K P in-cal = 99.654 kPa = 99654 Pa = 99654 kg/(m·s 2 )
p in = 98.836 kPa = 98836 Pa = 98836 kg/(m·s 2 ) Deleted: V

Deleted: V

Deleted: M

Deleted: Mp std = 101.325 kPa = 101325 Pa = 101325 kg/(m·s 2 ) M

mix-cal = 28.9656 g/mol = 0.0289656 kg/mol M

mix = 28.7805 g/mol = 0.0287805 kg/mol T

in = 353.15 K T

std

= 293.15 K R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K)

4 0.5 0.4895 302.52 0.000074954 m s K kg 99654 v K 

  

0.000074954 98936 101325 0.0289656
293.15 8.314472 353.15 0.0287805 n 

 

 

n  = 16.457 mol/s

§1065.644 Vacuum-decay leak rate. This section describes how to calculate the leak rate of a vacuum-decay leak verification, which is described in §1065.345(e). Use Eq. 1065.644-1 to calculate the leak rate, leak n  , and compare it to the criterion specified in §1065.345(e).



##  

2 1

2 1 vac leak
2 1 p p T T V n R t t  

    

 

 

Eq. 1065.644-1 Where: V

vac = geometric volume of the vacuum-side of the sampling system. R = molar gas constant.
p 2 = vacuum -side absolute pressure at time t 2
. T

2 = vacuum -side absolute temperature at time t 2
. p 1 = vacuum -side absolute pressure at time t 1
. T

1 = vacuum -side absolute temperature at time t 1
. t 2 = time at completion of vacuum-decay leak verification test.
t 1 = time at start of vacuum-decay leak verification test.

Example: V

vac = 2.0000 L = 0.00200 m 3
R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) = 8.314472 (m 2 ·kg)/(s 2 ·mol·K)
p 2 = 50.600 kPa = 50600 Pa = 50600 kg/(m·s 2 ) T

2 = 293.15 K
p 1 = 25.300 kPa = 25300 Pa = 25300 kg/(m·s 2 ) T

1 = 293.15 K
t 2 = 10:57:35 AM
t 1 = 10:56:25 AM



##  

leak 50600 25300 0.0002 293.15 293.15
8.314472 10 : 57 : 35 10 : 56 : 25 n  

    

 

  Deleted: Vacuum

Deleted: Vacuum

Deleted: Vacuum

Deleted: Vacuumleak 

### 0.00200 86.304
8.314472 70 n   

leak 0.00030 mol/s n  

§1065.645 Amount of water in an ideal gas. This section describes how to determine the amount of water in an ideal gas, which you need for various performance verifications and emission calculations. Use the equation for the vapor pressure of water in paragraph (a) of this section or another appropriate equation and, depending on whether you measure dewpoint or relative humidity, perform one of the calculations in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section. Paragraph (d) of this section provides an equation for determining dewpoint from relative humidity and dry bulb temperature measurements. The equations for the vapor pressure of water as presented in this section are derived from equations in “Saturation Pressure of Water on the New Kelvin Temperature Scale” (Goff, J.A., Transactions American Society of Heating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Vol. 63, No. 1607, pages 347 – 354). Note that the equations were originally published to derive vapor pressure in units of atmospheres and have been modified to derive results in units of kPa by converting the last term in each equation. (a) Vapor pressure of water . Calculate the vapor pressure of water for a given saturation temperature condition, T sat , as follows, or use good engineering judgment to use a different relationship of the vapor pressure of water to a given saturation temperature condition: (1) For humidity measurements made at ambient temperatures from (0 to 100) °C, or for humidity measurements made over super-cooled water at ambient temperatures from (–50 to 0) °C, use the following equation:

sat

sat 8.2969 1 4 273.16 sat 10 H2O 10

sat

273.16 4.76955 1 3 273.16 log ( ) 10.79574 1 5.02800 log 1.50475 10 1 10 273.16

0.42873 10 10 1 0.2138602 T

T T p T  

   

  

 

   

                                         Eq. 1065.645-1 Where:
p H2O = vapor pressure of water at saturation temperature condition, kPa. T

sat

= saturation temperature of water at measured conditions, K.

Example: T

sat

= 9.5 °C = 282.65 K

282.65 8.2969 1 4 273.16 10 H2O 10

273.16 4.76955 1 3 282.65 273.16 282.65 log ( ) 10.79574 1 5.02800 log 1.50475 10 1 10 282.65 273.16

0.42873 10 10 1 0.2138602 p  

   

  

 

   

                          

        log 10 ( p H2O ) = 0.074297

p H2O = 10 0.074297 = 1.186581 kPa Deleted: T sat = 9.5 + 273.15 = 282.65 K¶(2) For humidity measurements over ice at ambient temperatures from (–100 to 0) °C, use the following equation:

10 H2O 10

sat sat

sat 273.16 273.16 log ( ) 9.096853 1 3.566506 log

0.876812 1 0.2138602 273.16 p T T

T   

                    Eq. 1065.645-2

Example: T

ice = –15.4 °C = 257.75 K

10 H2O 10 273.16 273.16 log ( ) 9.096853 1 3.566506 log 257.75 257.75

257.75 0.876812 1 0.2138602 273.16 p   

                   

log 10 ( p H20 ) = –0.798207
p H2O = 10 –0.79821 = 0.159145 kPa

(b) Dewpoint . If you measure humidity as a dewpoint, determine the amount of water in an ideal
gas, x H2O , as follows:

H2O H2O abs p x p 
Eq. 1065.645-3

Where:

x H2O = amount of water in an ideal gas.
p H2O = water vapor pressure at the measured dewpoint, T sat

= T dew
. p abs = wet static absolute pressure at the location of your dewpoint measurement.

Example:
p abs = 99.980 kPa T

sat

= T dew = 9.5 °C Using Eq. 1065.645-1,
p H2O = 1.186581 kPa

x H2O = 1.186581 / 99.980

x H2O = 0.011868 mol/mol (c) Relative humidity . If you measure humidity as a relative humidity, RH %, determine the amount of water in an ideal gas, x H2O , as follows:

H2O H2O abs % RH p x p 


Eq. 1065.645-4 Deleted: T ice = –15.4 + 273.15 = 257.75 K¶Where:

x H2O = amount of water in an ideal gas. RH % = relative humidity.
p H2O = water vapor pressure at 100 % relative humidity at the location of your relative humidity measurement, T sat

= T amb
. p abs = wet static absolute pressure at the location of your relative humidity measurement.

Example: RH % = 50.77 %
p abs = 99.980 kPa T

sat

= T amb = 20 °C Using Eq. 1065.645-1,
p H2O = 2.3371 kPa

x H2O = (50.77 %

 2.3371) / 99.980

x H2O = 0.011868 mol/mol (d) Dewpoint determination from relative humidity and dry bulb temperature. This paragraph (d) describes how to calculate dewpoint temperature from relative humidity, RH %. This is based on “ITS-90 Formulations for Vapor Pressure, Frostpoint Temperature, Dewpoint Temperature, and Enhancement Factors in the Range –100 to +100 °C” (Hardy, B., The Proceedings of the Third International Symposium on Humidity & Moisture, Teddington, London, England, April 1998). Calculate p H20sat as described in paragraph (a) of this section based on setting T sat equal to T amb
. Calculate p H20scaled by multiplying p H20sat by RH %. Calculate the dewpoint, T dew , from p H20 using the following equation: 

###       2 3 21 1 6 H2O H2O H2O dew 2 3 13 5 H2O H2O H2O 2.0798233 10 2.0156028 10 ln 4.6778925 10 ln 9.2288067 10 ln

1 1.3319669 10 ln 5.6577518 10 ln 7.5172865 10 ln pp p T pp p  

          

       Eq. 1065.645-5

Where: ln(

p H2 O ) = the natural log of p H2Oscaled , which is the water vapor pressure scaled to the relative humidity at the location of the relative humidity measurement, T sat

= T amb
. Example: RH % = 39.61 % T

sat

= T amb = 20.00 °C = 293.15K Using Eq. 1065.645-1,
p H2 O sat = 2.3371 kPa

p H2Oscaled = (39.61 %  ) = 0.925717 kPa = 925.717 Pa 

###       2 3 21 1 6

dew 2 3 13 5 2.0798233 10 2.0156028 10 ln 925.717 4.6778925 10 ln 925.717 9.2288067 10 ln 925.717

1 1.3319669 10 ln 925.717 5.6577518 10 ln 925.717 7.5172865 10 ln 925.717 T  

          

       T

dew = 279.00 K = 5.85 °C

§1065.650 Emission calculations. (a) General . Calculate brake-specific emissions over each applicable duty cycle or test interval. For test intervals with zero work (or power), cal culate the emission mass (or mass rate), but do not calculate brake-specific emissions. For duty cycles with multiple test intervals, refer to the Deleted: ¶

Deleted: 0

Deleted: 0standard-setting part for calculations you need to determine a composite result, such as a calculation that weights and sums the results of individual test intervals in a duty cycle. If the standard-setting part does not include those calculations, use the equations in paragraph (g) of this section. This section is written based on rectangular integration, where each indexed value (i.e., “ i ”) represents (or approximates) the mean value of the parameter for its respective time interval, delta-t. You may also integrate continuous signals using trapezoidal integration consistent with good engineering judgment. (b) Brake-specific emissions over a test interval

. We specify three alternative ways to calculate brake-specific emissions over a test interval, as follows: (1) For any testing, you may calculate the total ma ss of emissions, as described in paragraph (c) of this section, and divide it by the total work generated over the test interval, as described in paragraph (d) of this section, using the following equation:



### m e W

= Eq. 1065.650-1 Example:

m NOx = 64.975 g W

= 25.783 kW·hr

e NOx = 64.975/25.783

e NOx = 2.520 g/(kW·hr) (2) For discrete-mode steady-state testing, you ma y calculate the brake-specific emissions over a test interval using the ratio of emission mass rate to power, as described in paragraph (e) of this section, using the following equation:

m e P

= 

Eq. 1065.650-2 (3) For field testing, you may calculate the ra tio of total mass to total work, where these individual values are determined as described in paragraph (f) of this section. You may also use this approach for laboratory testing, cons istent with good engineering judgment. Good engineering judgment dictates that this method not be used if there are any work flow paths described in §1065.210 that cross the system boundary, other than the primary output shaft (crankshaft). This is a special case in which you use a signal linearly proportional to raw exhaust molar flow rate to determine a value proportional to total emissions. You then use the same linearly proportional signal to determine total work using a chemical balance of fuel, intake air, and exhaust as described in §1065.655, plus info rmation about your engine’s brake-specific fuel consumption. Under this method, flow meters need not meet accuracy specifications, but they must meet the applicable linearity and repeatability specifications in subpart D or subpart J of this part. The result is a brake-specific emission value calculated as follows:



### m e W

= 

 Eq. 1065.650-3 Example:



### m  = 805.5 g


### W  = 52.102 kW·hr

e CO = 805.5/52.102e CO = 2.520 g/(kW·hr) (c) Total mass of emissions over a test interval . To calculate the total mass of an emission, multiply a concentration by its respective flow. For all systems, make preliminary calculations as described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section to correct concentrations. Next, use the method in paragraphs (c)(2) through (4) of this section that is appropriate for your system. Finally, if necessary, calculate the mass of NMHC as describe d in paragraph (c)(5) of this section for all systems. Calculate the total mass of emissions as follows: (1) Concentration corrections . Perform the following sequence of preliminary calculations on recorded concentrations: (i) Correct all gaseous emission analyzer concen tration readings, including continuous readings, sample bag readings, and dilution air background readings, for drift as described in §1065.672. Note that you must omit this step where brak e-specific emissions are calculated without the drift correction for performing the drift validation according to §1065.550(b). When applying the initial THC and CH 4 contamination readings according to §1065.520( f ), use the same values for both sets of calculations. You may also use as-measured values in the initial set of calculations and corrected values in the drift-corrected set of calculations as described in §1065.520(g)(7). (ii) Correct all THC and CH 4 concentrations for initial contamination as described in §1065.660(a) , including continuous readings, sample bags readings, and dilution air background readings. (iii) Correct all concentrations measured on a “dry ” basis to a “wet” basis, including dilution air background concentrations, as described in §1065.659. (iv) Calculate all NMHC and CH 4 concentrations, including dilution air background concentrations, as described in §1065.660. (v) For emission testing with an oxygenated fu el, calculate any HC concentrations, including dilution air background concentrations, as described in §1065.665. See subpart I of this part for testing with oxygenated fuels. (vi) Correct all the NO x concentrations, including dilution air background concentrations, for intake-air humidity as described in §1065.670. (2) Continuous sampling . For continuous sampling, you must frequently record a continuously updated concentration signal. You may measure th is concentration from a changing flow rate or a constant flow rate (including discrete -mode steady-state testing), as follows: (i) Varying flow rate . If you continuously sample from a changing exhaust flow rate, time align and then multiply concentration measurements by th e flow rate from which you extracted it. Use good engineering judgment to time-align flow a nd concentration data to match transformation time, t 50 , to within ±1 s. We consider the followin g to be examples of changing flows that require a continuous multiplication of concentration times molar flow rate: raw exhaust, exhaust diluted with a constant flow rate of dilution air, and CVS dilution with a CVS flow meter that does not have an upstream heat exchanger or electr onic flow control. This multiplication results in the flow rate of the emission itself. Integrat e the emission flow rate over a test interval to determine the total emission. If the total emission is a molar quantity, convert this quantity to a mass by multiplying it by its molar mass, M . The result is the mass of the emission, m

. Calculate m for continuous sampling with variable flow using the following equations:

i i i 1 N m M xn t

     

## 


Eq. 1065.650-4 Deleted: g

Deleted: , for initial contamination, as described in §1065.660(a)Where: ∆ t = 1/ f

record Eq. 1065.650-5

Example: M

NMHC = 13.875389 g/mol N

= 1200

x

NMHC1 = 84.5 μmol/mol = 84.5·  0 -6 mol/mol

x

NMHC2 = 86.0 μmol/mol = 86.0·10 -6 mol/mol

exh1 n  = 2.876 mol/s

exh2 n  = 2.224 mol/s f

record = 1 Hz Using Eq. 1065.650-5,  t

= 1/1 = 1 s

6 6 NMHC NMHC1200 13.875389 (84.5 10 2.876 86.0 10 2.224 ... ) 1 exh m xn             

m NMHC = 25.23 g (ii) Constant flow rate . If you continuously sample from a constant exhaust flow rate, use the same emission calculations described in paragraph (c)(2)(i) of this section or calculate the mean or flow-weighted concentration recorded over the test interval and treat the mean as a batch sample, as described in paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of th is section. We consider the following to be examples of constant exhaust flows: CVS diluted exhaust with a CVS flow meter that has either an upstream heat exchanger, electronic flow control, or both. (3) Batch sampling . For batch sampling, the concentration is a single value from a proportionally extracted batch sample (such as a bag, filter, impi nger, or cartridge). In this case, multiply the mean concentration of the batch sample by the total flow from which the sample was extracted. You may calculate total flow by integrating a changi ng flow rate or by determining the mean of a constant flow rate, as follows: (i) Varying flow rate . If you collect a batch sample from a changing exhaust flow rate, extract a sample proportional to the changing exhaust flow rate. We consider the following to be examples of changing flows that require proportional sampling: raw exhaust, exhaust diluted with a constant flow rate of dilution air, and CVS dilution with a CVS flow meter that does not have an upstream heat exchanger or electronic flow control. Integrate the flow rate over a test interval to determine the total flow from wh ich you extracted the proportional sample. Multiply the mean concentration of the batch sample by the total flow from which the sample was extracted. If the total emission is a molar quantity, convert this quantity to a mass by multiplying it by its molar mass, M . The result is the mass of the emission, m . In the case of PM emissions, where the mean PM concentration is already in units of mass per mole of sample, PM M , simply multiply it by the total flow. The result is the total mass of PM, m PM . Calculate m for batch sampling with variable flow using the following equation:

i i 1 N m Mx n t

     

## 


Eq. 1065.650-6

Example:M NOx = 46.0055 g/mol N

= 9000

N Ox x = 85.6 μmol/mol = 85.6

 10 -6 mol/mol

dexh1 n  = 25.534 mol/s

dexh2 n  = 26.950 mol/s f

record = 5 Hz Using Eq. 1065.650-5,  t

= 1/5 = 0.2

6 NOx exh9000 46.0055 85.6 10 (25.534 26.950 ... ) 0.2 m n         

m NOx = 4.201 g (ii) Constant flow rate . If you batch sample from a constant exhaust flow rate, extract a sample at a proportional or constant flow rate. We consider the following to be examples of constant exhaust flows: CVS diluted exhaust with a CVS fl ow meter that has either an upstream heat exchanger, electronic flow control, or both. Determine the mean molar flow rate from which you extracted the constant flow rate sample. Multiply the mean concentration of the batch sample by the mean molar flow rate of the exhaust from which the sample was extracted, and multiply the result by the time of the test interval. If th e total emission is a molar quantity, convert this quantity to a mass by multiplying it by its molar mass, M . The result is the mass of the emission,

m . In the case of PM emissions, where the mean PM concentration is already in units of mass per mole of sample, PM M , simply multiply it by the total flow, and the result is the total mass of PM, m PM , Calculate m for sampling with constant flow using the following equations:


### m Mxn t

     Eq. 1065.650-7 and for PM or any other analysis of a batch sample that yields a mass per mole of sample,


### M M x   Eq. 1065.650-8 Example:

PM M = 144.0  g/mol = 144.0·10 -6 g/mol

dexh n  = 57.692 mol/s
 t

= 1200 s

m PM = 144.0

 10 -6

 57.692

 1200

m PM = 9.9692 g (4) Additional provisions for diluted exhaust sampling; continuous or batch . The following additional provisions apply for sampling emissions from diluted exhaust: (i) For sampling with a constant dilution ratio, DR , of diluted exhaust versus exhaust flow (e.g., secondary dilution for PM sampling), calculate m using the following equation:

m PM = m PMdil · DR Eq. 1065.650-9 Example:

m PMdil = 6.853 g DR = 6:1

m PM = 6.853 · 6

m PM = 41.118 g(ii) For continuous or batch sampling, you may measure background emissions in the dilution air. You may then subtract the measured background emissions, as described in §1065.667. (5) Mass of NMHC . Compare the corrected mass of NMHC to corrected mass of THC. If the corrected mass of NMHC is greater than 0.98 times the corrected mass of THC, take the corrected mass of NMHC to be 0.98 times the corrected mass of THC. If you omit the NMHC calculations as described in §1065.660(b)(1), take the corrected mass of NMHC to be 0.98 times the corrected mass of THC. (d) Total work over a test interval . To calculate the total work from the engine over a test interval, add the total work from all the work paths described in §1065.210 that cross the system boundary including electrical energy/work, mechan ical shaft work, and fluid pumping work. For all work paths, except the engine’s primary output shaft (crankshaft), the total work for the path over the test interval is the integration of the net work flow rate (power) out of the system boundary. When energy/work flows into the system boundary, this work flow rate signal becomes negative; in this case, include these ne gative work rate values in the integration to calculate total work from that work path. Some work paths may result in a negative total work. Include negative total work values from any work path in the calculated total work from the engine rather than setting the values to zero. The rest of this paragraph (d) describes how to calculate total work from the engine’s primary output shaft over a test interval. Before integrating power on the engine’s primary output shaft, adjust the speed and torque data for the time alignment used in §1065.514(c). Any advance or delay used on the feedback signals for cycle validation must also be used for calculating work. Account for work of accessories according to §1065.110. Exclude any work during cranking and starting. Exclude work during actual motoring operation (negative feedback torques), unless the engine was connected to one or more energy storage devices. Examples of such energy storage devices include hybrid powertrain batteries and hydraulic accumulators, like the ones illustrated in Figure 1 of §1065.210. Exclude any work during reference zero-load idle periods (0 % speed or idle speed with 0 N·m reference torque). Note, that there must be two consecutive reference zero load idle points to establish a period where this applies. Include work during idle points with simulated minimum torque such as Curb Idle Transmissions Torque (CITT) for auto matic transmissions in “drive”. The work calculation method described in paragraphs (b)(1) though (7) of this section meets these requirements using rectangular integration. You may use other logic that gives equivalent results. For example, you may use a trapezoidal integration method as described in paragraph (b)(8) of this section. (1) Time align the recorded feedback speed and torque values by the amount used in §1065.514(c). (2) Calculate shaft power at each point during the test interval by multiplying all the recorded feedback engine speeds by their respective feedback torques. (3) Adjust (reduce) the shaft power values for accessories according to §1065.110. (4) Set all power values during any cranking or starting period to zero. See §1065.525 for more information about engine cranking. (5) Set all negative power values to zero, unless the engine was connected to one or more energy storage devices. If the engine was tested with an energy storage device, leave negative power values unaltered. (6) Set all power values to zero during idle pe riods with a corresponding reference torque of 0 N·m. (7) Integrate the resulting values for power over the test interval. Calculate total work asfollows:

i i 1 N W Pt

  



## 

Eq. 1065.650-10 Where: W

= total work from the primary output shaft P i = instantaneous power from the prim ary output shaft over an interval i

. P i = f ni · T i Eq. 1065.650-11

Example: N

= 9000 f

n1 = 1800.2 r/min f

n2 = 1805.8 r/min T

1 = 177.23 N·m T

2 = 175.00 N·m C

rev = 2·  rad/r C

t1 = 60 s/min C

p = 1000 (N·m·rad/s)/kW f

record = 5 Hz C

t2 = 3600 s/hr

1 

### 1800.2 177.23 2 3.14159
60 1000 

### P  



 P 1 = 33.41 kW P 2 = 33.09 kW Using Eq. 1065.650-5,  t

= 1/5 = 0.2 s

9000 

### (33.41 33.09 ... ) 0.2
3600 

### P W   



W

= 16.875 kW·hr

(8) You may use a trapezoidal integration method in stead of the rectangular integration described in this paragraph (d). To do this, you must in tegrate the fraction of work between points where the torque is positive. You may assume that sp eed and torque are linear between data points. You may not set negative values to zero before running the integration. (e) Steady-state mass rate divided by power . To determine steady-state brake-specific emissions for a test interval as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, calculate the mean steady-state mass rate of the emission, , and the mean steady-state power, , as follows: (1) To calculate , multiply its mean concentration, 

### x , by its corresponding mean molar flow

rate, 

### n  . If the result is a molar flow rate, convert this quantity to a mass rate by multiplying it by its molar mass, M . The result is the mean mass rate of the emission, 

### m  . In the case of PM emissions, where the mean PM concentration is already in units of mass per mole of sample,

PM M , simply multiply it by the mean molar flow rate, 

### n  . The result is the mass rate of PM, 

### m  

### P

m PM m  . Calculate 

### m  using the following equation:



### m Mxn

    Eq. 1065.650-12 (2) To calculate an engine’s mean steady-state total power, 

### P , add the mean steady-state power from all the work paths described in §1065.210 that cross the system boundary including electrical power, mechanical shaft power, and fluid pumping power. For all work paths, except the engine’s primary output shaft (crankshaft), th e mean steady-state power over the test interval is the integration of the net work flow rate (power) out of the system boundary divided by the period of the test interval. When power flows into the system boundary, the power/work flow rate signal becomes negative; in this case, incl ude these negative power/work rate values in the integration to calculate the mean power from that work path. Some work paths may result in a negative mean power. Include negative mean power values from any work path in the mean total power from the engine rather than setting these values to zero. The rest of this paragraph (e)(2) describes how to calculate the mean power from the engine’s primary output shaft.
Calculate 

### P using Equation 1065.650-13, noting that 

### P

, n f and 

### T refer to mean power, mean rotational shaft frequency, and mean torque from the primary output shaft. Account for the power of simulated accessories according to §1065.110 (reducing the mean primary output shaft power or torque by the accessory power or torque ). Set the power to zero during actual motoring operation (negative feedback torques), unless the engine was connected to one or more energy storage devices. Examples of such energy stor age devices include hybrid powertrain batteries and hydraulic accumulators, like the ones illustrate d in Figure 1 of §1065.210. Set the power to zero for modes with a zero reference load (0 N·m reference torque or 0 kW reference power). Include power during idle modes with simulated minimum torque or power.

n P f T

  Eq. 1065.650-13 (3) Divide emission mass rate by power to calculate a brake-specific emission result as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (4) The following example shows how to calculate mass of emissions using mean mass rate and
mean power: M

CO = 28.0101 g/mol

CO x = 12.00 mmol/mol = 0.01200 mol/mol



### n  = 1.530 mol/s

n f = 3584.5 r/min = 375.37 rad/s



### T = 121.50 N·m


### 28.0101 0.01200 1.530 m  

m  = 0.514 g/s = 1850.4 g/hr


### 121.5 375.37 P   

### P = 45607 W 

### P = 45.607 kW

e CO = 1850.4/45.61

e CO = 40.57 g/(kW·hr) (f) Ratio of total mass of emissions to total work . To determine brake-specific emissions for a test interval as described in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, calculate a value proportional to thetotal mass of each emission. Divide each proportional value by a value that is similarly proportional to total work. (1) Total mass . To determine a value proportional to the total mass of an emission, determine total mass as described in paragraph (c) of this s ection, except substitute for the molar flow rate,

n  , or the total flow, n , with a signal that is linearly proportional to molar flow rate, 

### n 
 , or linearly proportional to total flow, n  , as follows:

C i Ccombdryi fueli fuel H2Oexhdryi 1
1 M nx
m w x  

   





Eq. 1065.650-14 (2) Total work . To calculate a value proportional to total work over a test interval, integrate a value that is proportional to power. Use information about the brake-specific fuel consumption of your engine, e fuel , to convert a signal proportional to fuel flow rate to a signal proportional to power. To determine a signal proportional to fuel flow rate, divide a signal that is proportional to the mass rate of carbon products by the fraction of carbon in your fuel, w c. . You may use a measured w c or you may use default values for a given fuel as described in §1065.655(d). Calculate the mass rate of carbon from the amount of carbon and water in the exhaust, which you determine with a chemical balance of fuel, intake air, and exhaust as described in §1065.655. In the chemical balance, you must use concentrations from the flow that generated the signal proportional to molar flow rate, 

### n 
 , in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. Calculate a value proportional to total work as follows:

1 N

i i W Pt

  



##  

Eq. 1065.650-15 Where:

Eq. 1065.650-16 (3) Brake-specific emissions. Divide the valu e proportional to total mass by the value proportional to total work to determine brake-specific emissions, as described in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (4) Example. The following example shows how to calculate mass of emissions using proportional values: N

= 3000 f

record = 5 Hz

e fuel = 285 g/(kW·hr)

w fuel = 0.869 g/g M

c = 12.0107 g/mol

1 n 
 = 3.922 mol/s = 14119.2 mol/hr

x Ccombdry1 = 91.634 mmol/mol = 0.091634 mol/mol

x H2Oexh1 = 27.21 mmol/mol = 0.02721 mol/mol Using Eq. 1065.650-5,  t

= 0.2 s fueli i fuel m P
e

 


2 Ccombdry2 3000 Ccombdry3000

H2Oexh2 H2Oexh3000 3.922 0.091634 12.0107 ... 0.2 1 0.02721 1 1

285 0.869 nx n x

x x W  

           



  
 





### W  = 5.09 (kW·hr) (g) Brake-specific emissions over a duty cycle with multiple test intervals . The standard-setting part may specify a duty cycle with multiple te st intervals, such as with discrete-mode steadystate testing. Unless we specify otherwise, calcu late composite brake-specific emissions over the duty cycle as described in this paragraph (g). If a measured mass (or mass rate) is negative, set it to zero for calculating composite brake-specifi c emissions, but leave it unchanged for drift validation. In the case of calculating composite brake-specific emissions relative to a combined emission standard (such as a NO x + NMHC standard), change any negative mass (or mass rate) values to zero for a particular pollutant before combining the values for the different pollutants. (1) Use the following equation to calculate composite brake-specific emissions for duty cycles with multiple test intervals all with prescribed du rations, such as cold-start and hot-start transient cycles:

1

composite

1 N

i i i N

i i i WF m

e WF W 

 







# 


Eq. 1065.650-17

Where i = test interval number. N

= number of test intervals. WF = weighting factor for the test interval as defined in the standard-setting part.

m = mass of emissions over the test interval as determined in paragraph (c) of this section. W

= total work from the engine over the test interval as determined in paragraph (d) of this section.

Example: N

= 2 WF 1 = 0.1428 WF 2 = 0.8572

m 1 = 70.125 g

m 2 = 64.975 g W

1 = 25.783 kW·hr W

2 = 25.783 kW·hr 

##     NO composite (0.1428 70.125) 0.8572 64.975 (0.1428 25.783) 0.8572 25.783 x e 

 

e NOxcomposite = 2.548 g/kW·hr (2) Calculate composite brake-specific emissions for duty cycles with multiple test intervals that allow use of varying duration, such as discrete-mode steady-state duty cycles, as follows: (i) Use the following equation if you calculate br ake-specific emissions over test intervals based on total mass and total work as described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section:1 composite

1 N i i i i N i i i i m WF t e W WF t 

 







# 


Eq. 1065.650-18

Where i = test interval number. N

= number of test intervals. WF = weighting factor for the test interval as defined in the standard-setting part.

m = mass of emissions over the test interval as determined in paragraph (c) of this section. W

= total work from the engine over the test inte rval as determined in paragraph (d) of this section.

t = duration of the test interval.

Example: N

= 2 WF 1 = 0.85 WF 2 = 0.15

m 1 = 1.3753 g

m 2 = 0.4135 g
t 1 = 120 s
t 2 = 200 s W

1 = 2.8375 kW·hr W

2 = 0.0 kW·hr

NO composite 1.3753 0.4135 0.85 0.15 120 200 2.8375 0.0 0.85 0.15 120 200 x e           

           

e NOxcomposite = 0.5001 g/kW·hr (ii) Use the following equation if you calculate br ake-specific emissions over test intervals based on the ratio of mass rate to power as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section:

1 composite

1 N

i i i N

i i i WF m

e WF P 

 







# 
 

Eq. 1065.650-19

Where i = test interval number. N

= number of test intervals. WF = weighting factor for the test interval as defined in the standard-setting part.



### m  = mean steady-state mass rate of emissions over the test interval as determined in paragraph (e) of this section.

### P is the mean steady-state power over the test interval as described in paragraph (e) of this section.

Example: N

= 2 WF 1 = 0.85 WF 2 = 0.15

1 m  = 2.25842 g/hr

2 m  = 0.063443 g/hr

1 P = 4.5383 kW

2 P = 0.0 kW 

##     NO composite (0.85 2.25842) 0.15 0.063443 (0.85 4.5383) 0.15 0.0 x e  

  

e NOxcomposite = 0.5001 g/kW·hr (h) Rounding . Round the final brake-specific emission values to be compared to the applicable standard only after all calculations are comple te (including any drift correction, applicable deterioration factors, adjustment factors, and al lowances) and the result is in g/(kW·hr) or units equivalent to the units of the standard, such as g/(hp·hr). See the definition of “Round” in §1065.1001.

§1065.655 Chemical balances of fuel, intake air, and exhaust. (a) General . Chemical balances of fuel, intake air, and exhaust may be used to calculate flows, the amount of water in their flows, and the wet con centration of constituents in their flows. With one flow rate of either fuel, intake air, or exhaust, you may use chemical balances to determine the flows of the other two. For example, you may use chemical balances along with either intake air or fuel flow to determine raw exhaust flow. (b) Procedures that require chemical balances . We require chemical balances when you determine the following: (1) A value proportional to total work, 

### W  when you choose to determine brake-specific emissions as described in §1065.650(f). (2) The amount of water in a raw or diluted exhaust flow, x H2Oexh , when you do not measure the amount of water to correct for the amount of water removed by a sampling system. Correct for removed water according to §1065.659. (3) The calculated total dilution air flow when yo u do not measure dilution air flow to correct for background emissions as described in §1065.667(c) and (d). (c) Chemical balance procedure . The calculations for a chemical balance involve a system of equations that require iteration. We recommend using a computer to solve this system of equations. You must guess the initial values of up to three quantities: the amount of water in the measured flow, x H2Oexh , fraction of dilution air in diluted exhaust, x dil/exh , and the amount of products on a C 1 basis per dry mole of dry measured flow, x Ccombdry . You may use time-weighted mean values of combustion air humidity and dilution air humidity in the chemical balance; as long as your combustion air and dilution air humidities remain within tolerances of ±0.0025 mol/mol of their respective mean values over the test interval. For each emission concentration,

x , and amount of water, x H2Oexh , you must determine their completely dry concentrations, x dry andx H2Oexhdry . You must also use your fuel’s atomic hydrogen-to-carbon ratio,  , oxygen-to-carbon ratio, 

 sulfur-to-carbon ratio,  , and nitrogen-to-carbon ratio,  . You may calculate  , 

, 

, and  based on measured fuel composition as described in paragraphs (d)(1) or (d)(2) of this section, or you may use default values for a given fuel as described in §1065.655(d) (3) . Use the following steps to complete a chemical balance: (1) Convert your measured concentrations such as, x CO2meas , x NOmeas , and x H2Oint , to dry concentrations by dividing them by one minus the amount of water present during their respective measurements; for example: x H2OxCO2meas , x H2OxNOmeas , and x H2Oint . If the amount of water present during a “wet” measurement is the same as the unknown amount of water in the exhaust flow, x H2Oexh , iteratively solve for that value in the system of equations. If you measure only total NO x and not NO and NO 2 separately, use good engineering judgment to estimate a split in your total NO x concentration between NO and NO 2 for the chemical balances. For example, if you measure emissions from a stoichio metric spark-ignition engine, you may assume all NO x is NO. For a compression-ignition engine, you may assume that your molar concentration of NO x , x

NOx , is 75 % NO and 25 % NO 2 . For NO 2 storage aftertreatment systems,
you may assume x NOx is 25 % NO and 75 % NO 2 . Note that for calculating the mass of NO x emissions, you must use the molar mass of NO 2 for the effective molar mass of all NO x species, regardless of the actual NO 2 fraction of NO x . (2) Enter the equations in paragraph (c)(4) of this section into a computer program to iteratively solve for x H2Oexh , x Ccombdry , and x dil/exh . Use good engineering judgment to guess initial values for

x H2Oexh , x C combdry , and x dil/exh . We recommend guessing an initial amount of water that is about twice the amount of water in your intake or dilution air. We recommend guessing an initial value of x Ccombdry as the sum of your measured CO 2 , CO, and THC values. We also recommend guessing an initial x dil/exh between 0.75 and 0.95, such as 0.8. Iterate values in the system of equations until the most recently updated guesses are all within ±1 % of their respective most recently calculated values. (3) Use the following symbols and subscripts in the equations for this paragraph (c):

x dil/exh = amount of dilution gas or excess air per mole of exhaust.

x H2Oexh = amount of H 2 O in exhaust per mole of exhaust.

x Ccombdry = amount of carbon from fuel in the exhaust per mole of dry exhaust.

x H2dry = amount of H 2 in exhaust per amount of dry exhaust. K

H2Ogas = water-gas reaction equilibrium coefficient. You may use 3.5 or calculate your own value using good engineering judgment.

x H2Oexhdry = amount of H 2 O in exhaust per dry mole of dry exhaust.

x prod/intdry = amount of dry stoichiometric products per dry mole of intake air.

x dil/exhdry = amount of dilution gas and/or excess air per mole of dry exhaust.

x int/exhdry = amount of intake air required to produce actual combustion products per mole of dry (raw or diluted) exhaust.

x raw/exhdry = amount of undiluted exhaust, without excess air, per mole of dry (raw or diluted) exhaust.

x O2int = amount of intake air O 2 per mole of intake air.

x CO2intdry = amount of intake air CO 2 per mole of dry intake air. You may use x CO2intdry = 375 μmol/mol, but we recommend measuring the ac tual concentration in the intake air.

x H2Ointdry = amount of intake air H 2 O per mole of dry intake air.

x CO2int = amount of intake air CO 2 per mole of intake air.

x CO2dil = amount of dilution gas CO 2 per mole of dilution gas. Deleted: measure

Deleted: water

Deleted: waterx CO2dildry = amount of dilution gas CO 2 per mole of dry dilution gas. If you use air as diluent, you
may use x CO2dildry = 375 μmol/mol, but we recommend measuring the actual concentration in the intake air.

x H2Odildry = amount of dilution gas H 2 O per mole of dry dilution gas.

x H2Odil = amount of dilution gas H 2 O per mole of dilution gas.

x [emission]meas = amount of measured emission in the sample at the respective gas analyzer.

x [emission]dry = amount of emission per dry mole of dry sample.

x H2O[emission]meas = amount of H 2 O in sample at emission-detection location. Measure or estimate these values according to §1065.145(e)(2).

x H2Oint = amount of H 2 O in the intake air, based on a humidity measurement of intake air.



= atomic hydrogen-to-carbon ratio of the mixtur e of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. 

= atomic oxygen-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption.
 = atomic sulfur-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption.  = atomic nitrogen-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. (4) Use the following equations to iteratively solve for x dil/exh , x H2Oexh , and x Ccombdry :

raw/exhdry dil/exh H2Oexhdry 

### 1 1 

### x x x = - + Eq. 1065.655-1

H2Oexhdry H2Oexh H2Oexhdry 

### 1+



### x x x =
Eq. 1065.655-2

Ccombdry CO2dry COdry THCdry CO2dil dil/exhdry CO2int int/exhdry x x x x xx xx     Eq. 1065.655-3 

#  

  COdry H2Oexhdry H2Odil dil/exhdry H2dry H2O-gas CO2dry CO2dil dil/exhdry x x xx x K x xx  



  Eq. 1065.655-4 

#   H2Oexhdry Ccombdry THCdry H2Odil dil/exhdry H2Oint int/exhdry H2dry 

### 2 

### x x x xx xx x      
Eq. 1065.655-5

dil/exh dil/exhdry H2Oexh 1 x x x =

- Eq. 1065.655-6 

#    int/exhdry Ccombdry THCdry COdry NOdry NO2dry H2dry O2int 

### 1 22 2 2 2 

### x x x xx x x x    

###  

             

     Eq. 1065.655-7 

#    raw/exhdry Ccombdry THCdry THCdry COdry NO2dry H2dry int/exhdry 

### 1 2 2 2 

### x x x x xx x x    

###  

             

    Eq. 1065.655-8 Deleted: water

Deleted: waterCO2intdry O2int H2Ointdry 0.209820
1 x x x -

= +

Eq. 1065.655-9

CO2intdry CO2int H2Ointdry 1 x x x = +

Eq. 1065.655-10

H2Oint H2Ointdry H2Oint 1 x x x =

-

Eq. 1065.655-11

CO2dildry CO2dil H2Odildry 1 x x x = +

Eq. 1065.655-12

H2Odil H2Odildry H2Odil 1 x x x =

-

Eq. 1065.655-13

COmeas COdry
H2OCOmeas = 1 x x x

-

Eq. 1065.655-14

CO2meas CO2dry
H2OCO2meas = 1 x x x

-

Eq. 1065.655-15

NOmeas NOdry
H2ONOmeas = 1 x x x

-

Eq. 1065.655-16

NO2meas NO2dry
H2ONO2meas = 1 x x x

-

Eq. 1065.655-17

THCmeas THCdry
H2OTHCmeas = 1 x x x

-

Eq. 1065.655-18(5) The following example is a solution for x dil/exh , x H2Oexh , and x Ccombdry using the equations in paragraph (c)(4) of this section:

dil/exh 0.184 1 0.822 35.37 1 1000 x mol mol =- = +

H2Oexh 35.37 34.16 35.37 1+ 1000 x mmol mol = =

Ccombdry 

### 29.3 47.6 0.371 0.369 0.0252 0.851 0.172 0.0249 1000000 1000000 1000 1000 

### x mol mol        

##  

H2dry 29.3 0.034 0.012 0.851 8.5 25.2 0.371 3.5 0.851 1000 1000 x mol mol   

   

     

H2Oexhdry 1.8 47.6 8.5 0.0249 0.012 0.851 0.017 0.172 0.0353 2 1000000 1000000 x mol mol          

dil/exhdry 

### 0.822 0.851 1-0.034 

### x mol mol = =

int/exhdry 1.8 47.6 0.050 2 2 0.0003 0.0249 2 1000000 1 0.172 2 0.206 29.3 50.4 12.1 8.5 2 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 x mol mol  

           

  

 

           

raw/exhdry 1.8 47.6 0.050 0.0001 0.0249 2 1000000 1 0.172 0.184 2 47.6 29.3 12.1 8.5 2 1000000 1000000 1000000 1000000 x mol mol  

          

             

O2int 0.209820 0.000375 0.206 17.22 1 1000 x mol mol -
= = +

CO2int 0.000375 1000 0.369 17.22 1 1000 x mmol mol 

 


H2Ointdry 16.93 17.22 16.93 1 1000 x mmol mol = =

-CO2dil 0.375 0.371 12.01 1 1000 x mmol mol = = +

H2Odildry 11.87 =12.01 11.87 1 1000 x mmol mol =

-

COdry 29.0 = 29.3 8.601 1 1000 x mol mol m =

-

CO2dry 24.98 = 25.2 8.601 1 1000 x mmol mol =

-

NOdry 50.0 = 50.4 8.601 1 1000 x mol mol m =

-

NO2dry 12.0 = 12.1 8.601 1 1000 x mol mol m =

-

THCdry 46 = 47.6 34.16 1 1000 x mol mol m =

-



= 1.8 

= 0.05
 = 0.0003  = 0.0001 (d) Carbon mass fraction and fuel composition . Determine carbon mass fraction of fuel, w c , and fuel composition represented by α , β

, γ , and δ using one of the following methods: (1) You may calculate w c as described in this paragraph (d)(1) based on measured fuel properties. To do so, you must determine values for  and  in all cases, but you may set  and  to zero if the default value listed in Ta ble 1 of this section is zero. Calculate w c using the following equation:

C

c C H OS N 1
1 M w M M MMM   

      Eq. 1065.655-19 Where:

w c = carbon mass fraction of fuel. M

C = molar mass of carbon.



= atomic hydrogen-to-carbon ratio of the mixtur e of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. M

H = molar mass of hydrogen. 

= atomic oxygen-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. M

O = molar mass of oxygen.
 = atomic sulfur-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. M

S = molar mass of sulfur.  = atomic nitrogen-to-carbon ratio of the mixture of fuel(s) being combusted, weighted by molar consumption. M

N = molar mass of nitrogen.

Example:



= 1.8 

= 0.05
 = 0.0003  = 0.0001 M

C = 12.0107 Comment [CAL21]: This is a lower case omega in the Federal Register. It should be an italicized lower case w.M H = 1. 00794 M

O = 15.9994 M

S = 32.065 M

N = 14.0067

c 

### 1 12.0107
1 12.0107 1.8 1.00794 0.05 15.9994 0.0003 32.065 0.0001 14.0067 

### w 

        

w c = 0. 8206
(2) Determine a fuel’s elemental mass fractions and values for α , β

, γ , and δ as follows: (i) For gaseous fuels, use the default values for α , β

, γ , and δ in Table 1 of this section or use good engineering judgment to determine those values based on measurement. (ii) Determine mass fractions for liquid fuels as follows: (A) You may determine the fuel carbon and hydrogen mass fractions according to ASTM D5291 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). When using ASTM D5291 to determine carbon and hydrogen mass fractions from gasoline (with or without blended ethanol), use good engineering judgment to adapt the method as appropriate. (B) Determine oxygen mass fraction for gasoline (with or without blended ethanol) according to ASTM D5599 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). For all other liquid fuels, determine the oxygen mass fraction using good engineering judgment. (C) Determine the nitrogen mass fraction according to ASTM D4629 or ASTM D5762 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010) for all liquid fuels. Select the correct method based on the expected nitrogen content. (D) Determine the sulfur mass fraction according to subpart H of this part. (iii) For liquid fuels, use the default values for α , β

, γ , and δ in Table 1 of this section, or you may determine the value for any of these parameters based on measurement. Calculate measured values using the following equations:

H C

C H w M
w M  



 Eq. 1065.655-20

O C

C O w M
w M  



 Eq. 1065.655-21

S C

C S w M
w M  



 Eq. 1065.655-22

N C

C N w M
w M  



 Eq. 1065.655-23 Where:

w C = carbon mass fraction of fuel.

w H = hydrogen mass fraction of fuel.

w O = oxygen mass fraction of fuel.

w S = sulfur mass fraction of fuel. Deleted: 01

Comment [CAL22]: Example updated.

Deleted: 8205w N = nitrogen mass fraction of fuel.

Example:

w C = 0.8206

w H = 0.1239

w O = 0.0547

w S = 0.00066

Table 1 of §1065.655–Default values of  , 

, 

, 

, and w c , for various fuels

Fuel Atomic hydrogen, oxygen, sulfur, and nitrogen-to-carbon ratios

CH α O β S  N  Carbon mass fraction, w c g/g

Gasoline CH 1.85 O 0 S 0 N 0 0.866

E10 Gasoline CH 1.92 O 0.03 S 0 N 0 0.833

E15 Gasoline CH 1.95 O 0.05 S 0 N 0 0.817

E85 Gasoline CH 2.73 O 0.38 S 0 N 0 0.576

#1 Diesel CH 1.93 O 0 S 0 N 0 0.861

#2 Diesel CH 1.80 O 0 S 0 N 0 0.869 Liquefied p etroleum g as CH 2.64 O 0 S 0 N 0 0.819 Natural gas CH 3.78 O 0.016 S 0 N 0 0.747

E100 Ethanol CH 3 O 0.5 S 0 N 0 0.521

M100 Methanol CH 4 O 1 S 0 N 0 0.375

Residual fuel blends Must be determined by measured fuel properties as described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section.

(e) Calculated raw exhaust molar flow rate from meas ured intake air molar flow rate or fuel mass flow rate . You may calculate the raw exhaust mo lar flow rate from which you sampled emissions, exh n  , based on the measured intake air molar flow rate, int n  , or the measured fuel mass flow rate, fuel m  , and the values calculated using the chemical balance in paragraph (c) of this
section. T he chemical balance must be based on raw exhaust gas concentrations. Solve for the chemical balance in paragraph (c) of this section at the same frequency that you update and record int n  or fuel m 

. For laboratory tests, calculating raw exhaust molar flow rate using measured fuel mass flow rate is valid only for steady-state testing. See §1065.915(d)(5)(iv) for application to field testing. (1) Crankcase flow rate . If engines are not subject to crankcase controls under the standardsetting part, you may calculate raw exhaust flow based on int n  or fuel m  using one of the following: (i) You may measure flow rate through the crankcase vent and subtract it from the calculated exhaust flow. (ii) You may estimate flow rate through the crankcase vent by engineering analysis as long as the uncertainty in your calculation does not adversely affect your ability to show that your engines comply with applicable emission standards. (iii) You may assume your crankcase vent flow rate is zero. Deleted: (2) You may use the default values in the following table to determine w c for a given fuel:

Deleted: P

Deleted: G

Deleted: Note that t(2) Intake air molar flow rate calculation

. C alculate exh n  based on int n  using the following equation : 

#     int exh int/exhdry raw/exhdry

H2Oexhdry 1 1 n n
x x

x   

   

   



Eq. 1065.655- 24 Where:

exh n  = raw exhaust molar flow rate from which you measured emissions.

int n  = intake air molar flow rate including humidity in intake air.

Example:

int n  = 3.780 mol/s

x int/exhdry = 0.69021 mol/mol

x raw/exhdry = 1.10764 mol/mol

x H20exhdry = 107.64 mmol/mol = 0.10764 mol/mol


##     exh 3.780
0.69021 1.10764 1 1 0.10764 n   

   
   

exh n  = 6.066 mol/s (3) Fuel mass flow rate calculation

. This calculation may be used only for steady-state laboratory testing. See §1065.915(d)(5)(iv) for application to field testing. C alculate exh n  based

on fuel m  using the following equation : 

#   fuel c H2Oexhdry
exh c Ccombdry 1 mw x n M x  



 



Eq. 1065.655- 25 Where:

exh n  = raw exhaust molar flow rate from which you measured emissions.

fuel m  = fuel flow rate including humidity in intake air.

Example:

fuel m  = 7.559 g/s

w c = 0.869 g/g M

C = 12.0107 g/mol

x Ccombdry = 99.87 mmol/mol = 0.09987 mol/mol

x H20exhdry = 107.64 mmol/mol = 0.10764 mol/mol


##  

exh 7.559 0.869 1 0.10764
12.0107 0.09987 n  



  Deleted: Based on int n  , c

Field Code Changed

Deleted: as follows

Deleted: 20

Deleted: Based on fuel m  , c

Deleted: as follows

Deleted: 21exh n  = 6.066 mol/s (f) Calculated raw exhaust molar flow rate from measured intake air molar flow rate, dilute exhaust molar flow rate, and dilute chemical balance. You may calculate the raw exhaust molar flow rate, exh n  , based on the measured intake air molar flow rate, int n  , the measured dilute exhaust molar flow rate, dexh n  , and the values calculated using the chemical balance in paragraph (c) of this section. Note that the chemical balance must be based on dilute exhaust gas concentrations. For continuous-flow calculations, solve for the chemical balance in paragraph (c) of this section at the same frequency that you update and record int n  and dexh n  . This
calculated dexh n  may be used for the PM dilution ratio verification in §1065.546; the calculation of dilution air molar flow rate in the background correction in §1065.667; and the calculation of mass of emissions in §1065.650(c) for species that are measured in the raw exhaust. (1) Crankcase flow rate . If engines are not subject to crankcase controls under the standardsetting part, calculate raw exhaust flow as described in paragraph (e)(1) of this section. (2) Dilute exhaust and intake air molar flow rate calculation . Calculate exh n  as follows: 

#     exh raw/exhdry int/exhdry H2Oexh dexh int 1 n x x x nn        Eq. 1065.655- 26

Example:

int 7.930 mol/s n  

raw/exhdry 0.1544 mol/mol x  mol/mol 1451

. 0 int/exhdry  x

H2Oexh 32.46 mmol/mol 0.03246 mol/mol x  

dexh 49.02 mol/s n   

##     exh 0.1544 0.1451 1 0.03246 49.02 7.930 0.4411 7.930 8.371 mol/s n          (g) Calculated brake torque from fuel mass flow rate determined by a chemical balance of exhaust, measured engine speed, and brake-specific fuel consumption. If the standard-setting part allows it, you may calculate brake torque fr om fuel mass flow rate, as determined by a chemical balance of exhaust and measured exhaus t flow rate, along with measured engine speed, and a brake-specific fuel consumption, as follows: (1) Use the following equation to calculate brake torque, T :

fuel

n fuel m T f e



 

Eq. 1065.655-27 Where:

fuel m  = mass rate of fuel f

n = engine speed

e fuel = brake-specific fuel consumption

Example:

fuel m  = 3.32 g/s f

n = 3600 r/min Deleted: 22

Comment [CAL23]: How is this determined?e fuel = 253.61 g/(kW

· hr) C

p = 1000 (N

· m · rad/s)/kW C

t1 = 60 s/min C

t2 = 3600 s/hr C

rev = 2

· π rad/r 3.320 1000 60 3600
3600 253.61 2 3.14159 125.0 N m T

T  



 

 

(2) Use the following equation to calculate flow mass flow rate, fuel m  , from a chemical balance
of exhaust and measured exhaust flow rate: 

#   C Ccombdry exh fuel C H20exhdry 1 M x n m w x  

   



Eq. 1065.655-28

Example: M

c = 12.0107 g/mol

x Ccombdry = 99.87 mmol/mol = 0.09987 mol/mol

exh n  = 2.665 mol/s

w c = 0.869 g/g

x H20exhdry = 107.64 mmol/mol = 0.10764 mol/mol


##   fuel 12.0107 0.09987 2.665
0.869 1 0.10764 m  

   

fuel 3.32 g/s m  

§1065.659 Removed water correction. (a) If you remove water upstream of a concentration measurement, x , correct for the removed water. Perform this correction based on the amount of water at the concentration measurement,

x H2O[emission]meas , and at the flow meter, x H2Oexh , whose flow is used to determine the mass emission rate or total mass over a test interval. For continuous analyzers downstream of a sample dryer for transient and ramped-modal cycles, you must apply this correction on a continuous basis over the test interval, even if you use one of the options in §1065.145(e)(2) that results in a constant value for x H2O[emission]meas because x H2Oexh varies over the test interval. For batch analyzers, determine the flow-weighted average based on the continuous x H2Oexh values determined as described in paragraph (c) of this section. For batch analyzers, you may determine the flow-weighted average x H2Oexh based on a single value of x H2Oexh determined as described in paragraphs (c)(2) and (3) of this section, us ing flow-weighted average or batch concentration inputs. (b) Determine the amount of water remaining downstream of a sample dryer and at the concentration measurement using one of the methods described in §1065.145(e)(2). If you use a sample dryer upstream of an analyzer and if the calculated amount of water remaining downstream of the sample dryer and at the concentration measurement, x H2O[emission]meas , is higher than the amount of water at the flow meter, x H2Oexh , set x H2O[emission]meas equal to x H2Oexh . If you use a sample dryer upstream of storage media, you must be able to demonstrate that the sample Deleted: or upstream of a flow measurement, n,dryer is removing water continuously (i.e., x H2Oexh is higher than x H2O[emission]meas throughout the test interval). (c) For a concentration measurement where you did not remove water, you may set

x H2O[emission]meas equal to x H2Oexh . You may determine the amount of water at the flow meter,

x H2Oexh , using any of the following methods: (1) Measure the dewpoint and absolute pressure and calculate the amount of water as described in §1065.645. (2) If the measurement comes from raw exhaust, you may determine the amount of water based on intake-air humidity, plus a chemical balance of fuel, intake air, and exhaust as described in §1065.655. (3) If the measurement comes from diluted exhaust, you may determine the amount of water based on intake-air humidity, dilution air humidity, and a chemical balance of fuel, intake air, and exhaust as described in §1065.655. (d) Perform a removed water correction to the concentration measurement using the following equation:

H2Oexh [emission]meas H2O[emission]meas 1
1 x x x x  



   

   Eq. 1065.659-1 Example:

x COmeas = 29.0 μmol/mol

x H2OCOmeas = 8.601 mmol/mol = 0.008601 mol/mol

x H2Oexh = 34.04 mmol/mol = 0.03404 mol/mol

CO 1 0.03404 29.0 1 0.008601 x   

   

  

x CO = 28.3 μmol/mol

§1065.660 THC, NMHC, and CH 4 determination. (a) THC determination and initial THC/CH 4 contamination corrections . (1) If we require you to determine THC emissions, calculate x THC[THC-FID]cor using the initial THC contamination concentration x THC[THC-FID]init from §1065.520 as follows:

x THC[THC-FID]cor = x THC[THC-FID]uncor – x THC[THC-FID]init Eq. 1065.660-1 Example:

x THCuncor = 150.3 μmol/mol

x THCinit = 1.1 μmol/mol

x THCcor = 150.3 – 1.1

x THCcor = 149.2 μmol/mol

(2) For the NMHC determinatio n described in paragraph (b) of this section, correct x THC[THC-FID] for initial THC contamination using Equation 1065.660-1. You may correct x THC[NMC-FID] for initial contamination of the CH 4 sample train using Equation. 1065.660-1, substituting in CH 4 concentrations for THC. (3) For the CH 4 determination described in paragraph (c) of this section, you may correct

x THC[NMC-FID] for initial THC contamination of the CH 4 sample train using Equation 1065.660-1, substituting in CH 4 concentrations for THC.(b) NMHC determination . Use one of the following to determine NMHC concentration, x NMHC : (1) If you do not measure CH 4 , you may omit the calculation of NMHC concentrations and calculate the mass of NMHC as described in §1065.650(c)(5). (2) For nonmethane cutters, calculate x NMHC using the nonmethane cutter’s penetration fraction ( PF ) of CH 4 and the response factor penetration fraction ( RFPF ) of C 2 H 6 from §1065.365, the response factor ( RF ) of the THC FID to CH 4 from §1065.360, the initial THC contamination and dry-to-wet corrected THC concentration x THC[THC-FID]cor as determined in paragraph (a) of this section, and the dry-to-wet corrected CH 4 concentration x THC[NMC-FID]cor optionally corrected for initial THC contamination as determined in paragraph (a) of this section. (i) Use the following equation for penetration frac tions determined using an NMC configuration as outlined in §1065.365(d):

THC[THC-FID]cor THC[NMC-FID]cor CH4[THC-FID] NMHC C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4[THC-FID] 1 x x RF
x RFPF RF  



  Eq. 1065.660-2 Where:

x

NMHC = concentration of NMHC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to -wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC.

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the NMC FID during sampling through the NMC. RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC FID to CH 4 , according to §1065.360(d). RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter combined ethane response factor and penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(d).

Example:

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 20.5 μmol/mol RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.019 RF CH4[THC-FID] = 1.05

NMHC 

### 150.3 20.5 1.05
1 0.019 1.05 

### x  



 
x

NMHC = 131.4 μmol/mol

(ii) For penetration fractions determined using an NMC configuration as outlined in section §1065.365(e), use the following equation:

THC[THC-FID]cor CH4[NMC-FID] THC[NMC-FID]cor NMHC CH4[NMC-FID] C2H6[NMC-FID] x PF x
x PF PF  



 Eq. 1065.660-3 Where:

x

NMHC = concentration of NMHC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC contamination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC. PF CH4[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter CH 4 penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(e).

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling through the NMC.PF C2H6[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter ethane penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(e).

Example:

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol PF CH4[NMC-FID] = 0.990

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 20.5 μmol/mol PF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.020

NMHC 

### 150.3 0.990 20.5
0.990 0.020 

### x  




x

NMHC = 132.3 μmol/mol

(iii) For penetration fractions determined using an NMC configuration as outlined in section §1065.365(f), use the following equation:

THC[THC-FID]cor CH4[NMC-FID] THC[NMC-FID]cor CH4[THC-FID] NMHC CH4[NMC-FID] C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4[THC-FID] x PF x RF
x PF RFPF RF  



  Eq. 1065.660-4 Where:

x

NMHC = concentration of NMHC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC. PF CH4[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter CH 4 penetration fraction, ac cording to §1065.365(f).

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling through the NMC. RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter CH 4 combined ethane response factor and penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(f). RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC FID to CH 4 , according to §1065.360(d).

Example:

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol PF CH4[NMC-FID] = 0.990

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 20.5 μmol/mol RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.019 RF CH4[THC-FID] = 0.980

NMHC 

### 150.3 0.990 20.5 0.980
0.990 0.019 0.980 

### x  



 

x

NMHC = 132.5 μmol/mol (3) For a GC-FID, calculate x NMHC using the THC analyzer’s response factor ( RF ) for CH 4 , from §1065.360, and the initial THC contamination and dry-to-wet corrected THC concentration

x THC[THC-FID]cor as determined in paragraph (a ) of this section as follows:

NMHC THC[THC-FID]cor CH4[THC-FID] CH4 x x RF x   Eq. 1065.660-5 Where:

x

NMHC = concentration of NMHC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID.x CH4 = concentration of CH 4 , dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the GC-FID. RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC-FID to CH 4
. Example:

x THC[THC-FID[cor = 145.6 μmol/mol RF CH4[THC-FID] = 0.970

x CH4 = 18.9 μmol/mol

x

NMHC = 145.6 – 0.970 · 18.9

x

NMHC = 127.3 μmol/mol

(c) CH 4 determination . Use one of the following methods to determine CH 4 concentration, x CH4 : (1) For nonmethane cutters, calculate x CH4 using the nonmethane cutter’s penetration fraction ( PF ) of CH 4 and the response factor penetration fraction ( RFPF ) of C 2 H 6 from §1065.365, the response factor ( RF ) of the THC FID to CH 4 from §1065.360, the initial THC contamination and dry-to-wet corrected THC concentration x THC[THC-FID]cor as determined in paragraph (a) of this section, and the dry-to-wet corrected CH 4 concentration x THC[NMC-FID]cor optionally corrected for initial THC contamination as determined in paragraph (a) of this section. (i) Use the following equation for penetration frac tions determined using an NMC configuration as outlined in §1065.365(d):

THC[NMC-FID]cor THC[THC-FID]cor C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4 C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4[THC-FID] 1 x x RFPF
x RFPF RF  



 

Eq. 1065.660-6 Where:

x CH4 = concentration of CH 4
. x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC co ntamination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the NMC FID during sampling through the NMC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC. RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = the combined ethane response factor and penetration fraction of the nonmethane cutter, according to §1065.365(d). RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC FID to CH 4 , according to §1065.360(d).

Example:

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 10.4 μmol/mol

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.019 RF CH4[THC-FID] = 1.05

CH4 

### 10.4 150.3 0.019
1 0.019 1.05 

### x  



 

x CH4 = 7.69 μmol/mol

(ii) For penetration fractions determined us ing an NMC configuration as outlined in §1065.365(e), use the following equation:

#   THC[NMC-FID]cor THC[THC-FID]cor C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4 CH4[THC-FID] CH4[NMC-FID] C2H6[NMC-FID] x x PF
x RF PF PF  



  Eq. 1065.660-7 Where:

x CH4 = concentration of CH 4
. x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC co ntamination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the NMC FID during sampling through the NMC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC. PF C2H6[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter ethane penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(e). RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC FID to CH 4 , according to §1065.360(d). PF CH4[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter CH 4 penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(e).

Example:

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 10.4 μmol/mol

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol PF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.020 RF CH4[THC-FID] = 1.05 PF CH4[NMC-FID] = 0.990


##   CH4 10.4 150.3 0.020
1.05 0.990 0.020 x  



 

x CH4 = 7.25 μmol/mol

(iii) For penetration fractions determined us ing an NMC configuration as outlined in §1065.365(f), use the following equation:

THC[NMC-FID]cor THC[THC-FID]cor C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4 CH4[NMC-FID] C2H6[NMC-FID] CH4[THC-FID] 

### x x RFPF
x PF RFPF RF  



  Eq. 1065.660-8 Where:

x CH4 = concentration of CH 4
. x THC[NMC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC co ntamination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the NMC FID during sampling through the NMC.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = concentration of THC, initial THC cont amination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC FID during sampling while bypassing the NMC. RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = the combined ethane response factor and penetration fraction of the nonmethane cutter, according to §1065.365(f). PF CH4[NMC-FID] = nonmethane cutter CH 4 penetration fraction, according to §1065.365(f). RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC FID to CH 4 , according to §1065.360(d).

Example:

x THC[NMC-FID]cor = 10.4 μmol/mol

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 150.3 μmol/mol RFPF C2H6[NMC-FID] = 0.019 PF CH4[NMC-FID] = 0.990 RF CH4[THC-FID] = 1.05CH4 

### 10.4 150.3 0.019
0.990 0.019 1.05 

### x  



 
x CH4 = 7.78 μmol/mol (2) For a GC-FID, x CH4 is the actual dry-to-wet corrected CH 4 concentration as measured by the analyzer.

§1065.665 THCE and NMHCE determination. (a) If you measured an oxygenated hydrocarbon's mass concentration, first calculate its molar concentration in the exhaust sample stream fro m which the sample was taken (raw or diluted exhaust), and convert this into a C 1 -equivalent molar concentration. Add these C 1 -equivalent molar concentrations to the molar concentration of non-oxygenated total hydrocarbon ( NOTHC )

. The result is the molar concentration of total hydrocarbon equivalent ( THCE ) . Calculate THCE concentration using the following equations, noting that Eq. 1065.665-3 is required only if you need to convert your oxygenated hydrocarbon ( OHC ) concentration from mass to moles: 

##   THCE NOTHC OHCi OHCi-init 1 N

i x x xx

   

## 

Eq. 1065.665-1 

##   

#   NOTHC THC[THC-FID]cor OHCi OHCi-init OHCi[THC-FID] 1 N

i x x x x RF

    

## 

Eq. 1065.665-2

dexhOHCi

dexhOHCi

OHCi OHCi dexh dexh

dexh m

n

M x m n M  

Eq. 1065.665-3 Where:

x THCE = The sum of the C 1 -equivalent concentration s of non-oxygenated hydrocarbons, alcohols, and aldehydes.

x

NOTHC = The sum of the C 1 -equivalent concentration s of NO THC.

x OHCi = The C 1 -equivalent concentration of oxygenated species i in diluted exhaust, not corrected for initial contamination.

x OHCi-init = The C 1 -equivalent concentration of the initial system contamination (optional) of oxygenated species i , dry-to-wet corrected.

x THC[THC-FID]cor = The C 1 -equivalent response to NOTHC and all OHC in diluted exhaust, HC contamination and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the THC-FID. RF OHCi[THC-FID] = The response factor of the FID to species i relative to propane on a C 1 - equivalent basis. C # = the mean number of carbon atoms in the particular compound. M

dexh = The molar mass of diluted exhaust as determine in §1065.340.

m dexhOHCi = The mass of oxygenated species i in dilute exhaust. M

OHCi = The C 1 -equivalent molecular weight of oxygenated species i

. m dexh = The mass of diluted exhaust

n dexhOHCi = The number of moles of oxygenated species i in total diluted exhaust flow.

n dexh = The total diluted exhaust flow. Deleted: equation

Deleted: only

Comment [CAL24]: Equation updated.

Deleted: C 1 -equivalent

Deleted: of carbon mass contributions

Deleted: C 1 -equivalent

Deleted: nonoxygenated(b) If we require you to determine nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent ( NMHCE ) , use the following equation:

x

NMHCE = x THCE – RF CH4[THC-FID]  x CH4

Eq. 1065.665-4 Where:

x

NMHCE = The sum of the C 1 -equivalent concentration s of nonoxygenated nonmethane hydrocarbon (NO NMHC ) , alcohols, and aldehydes. RF CH4[THC-FID] = response factor of THC-FID to CH 4
. x CH4 = concentration of CH 4 , HC contamination (optional) and dry-to-wet corrected, as measured by the gas chromatograph FID. (c) The following example shows how to de termine NMHCE emissions based on ethanol (C 2 H 5 OH), methanol (CH 3 OH), acetaldehyde (C 2 H 4 O), and formaldehyde (HCHO) as C 1 - equivalent molar concentrations:

x THC[THC-FID]cor = 145.6 μmol/mol

x CH4 = 18.9 μmol/mol

x C2H5OH = 100.8 μmol/mol

x CH3OH = 1.1 μmol/mol

x C2H4O = 19.1 μmol/mol

x HCHO = 1.3 μmol/mol RF CH4[THC-FID] = 1.07 RF C2H5OH[THC-FID] = 0.76 RF CH3OH[THC-FID] = 0.74 RF H2H4O[THC-FID] = 0.50 RF HCHO[THC-FID] = 0.0

x

NMHCE = x THC[THC-FID]cor – ( x C2H5OH  RF C2H5OH[THC-FID] + x CH3OH  RF CH3OH[THC-FID] + x C2H4O  RF C2H4O[THC-FID] + x HCHO  RF HCHO[THC-FID]  + x C2H5OH + x CH3OH + x C2H4O + x HCHO – ( RFCH4[THCFID]  x CH4 )

x

NMHCE = 145.6 – (100.8



 0.76 + 1.1

 0.74 + 19.1

 0.50 + 1.3

 0  + 100.8 + 1.1 + 19.1 + 1.3 – (1.07

 18.9)

x

NMHCE = 160.71 μmol/mol

§1065.667 Dilution air background emission correction. (a) To determine the mass of background emissions to subtract from a diluted exhaust sample, first determine the total flow of dilution air, n dil , over the test interval. This may be a measured quantity or a calculated quantity. Multiply the total flow of dilution air by the mean mole fraction (i.e., concentration) of a background emission. This may be a time-weighted mean or a flow-weighted mean (e.g., a proportionally sampled background). Finally, multiply by the molar
mass, M , of the associated gaseous emission constituent. The product of n dil and the mean molar concentration of a background emission and its molar mass, M , is the total background emission
mass, m . In the case of PM, where the mean PM concentration is already in units of mass per mole of sample, PM M , multiply it by the total amount of dilution air flow, and the result is the total background mass of PM, m PM . Subtract total background mass from total mass to correct for background emissions. Deleted: sum of the

Deleted: of carbon mass contributions

Deleted:

-(b) You may determine the total flow of dilu tion air by a direct flow measurement. (c) You may determine the total flow of dilution air by subtracting the calculated raw exhaust molar flow as described in §10 65.655(f) from the measured dilute exhaust flow. This may be done by totaling continuous calculations or by using batch results. (d) You may determine the total flow of dilution air from the measured dilute exhaust flow and a chemical balance of the fuel, intake air, and dilu te exhaust as described in §1065.655. For this option, the molar flow of dilution air is calculate d by multiplying the dilute exhaust flow by the mole fraction of dilution gas to dilute exhaust, dil/exh x , from the dilute chemical balance. This may be done by totaling continuous calculations or by using batch results. For example, to use batch results, the total flow of dilution air is cal culated by multiplying the total flow of diluted exhaust, n dexh , by the flow-weighted mean mole fractio n of dilution air in diluted exhaust, dil/exh x

. Calculate dil/exh x using flow-weighted mean concentrations of emissions in the chemical balance, as described in §1065.655. The chemical balance in §1065.655 assumes that your engine operates stoichiometrically, even if it is a lean -burn engine, such as a compression-ignition engine. Note that for lean-burn engines this assumption could result in an error in emission calculations. This error could occur because th e chemical balance in §1065.655 treats excess air passing through a lean-burn engine as if it was dilu tion air. If an emission concentration expected at the standard is about 100 times its dilution air background concentration, this error is negligible. However, if an em ission concentration expected at the standard is similar to its background concentration, this error could be significant. If this error might affect your ability to show that your engines comply with applicable standards, we recommend that you either determine the total flow of dilution air using one of the more accurate methods in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, or remove background emissions from dilution air by HEPA filtration, chemical adsorption, or catalytic scrubbing. You might also consider using a partial-flow dilution technique such as a ba g mini-diluter, which uses puri fied air as the dilution air. (e) The following is an example of using the fl ow-weighted mean fraction of dilution air in diluted exhaust, dil/exh x , and the total mass of background emissions calculated using the total flow of diluted exhaust, n dexh , as described in §1065.650(c):

b kgnd dil/exh bkgnddexh m xm   Eq. 1065.667-1

b kgnddexh bkgnd dexh m Mx n   Eq. 1065.667-2 Example: M

NOx = 46.0055 g/mol

b kgnd x = 0.05 μmol/mol = 0.05

 10 -6 mol/mol

n dexh = 23280.5 mol

dil/exh x = 0.843 mol/mol

6

bkgndNOxdexh 46.0055 0.05 10 23280.5 m   

m bkgndNOxdexh = 0.0536 g

m bkgndNOx = 0.843 · 0.0536

m bkgndNOx = 0.0452 g (f) The following is an example of using the fraction of dilution air in diluted exhaust, x dil/exh , andthe mass rate of background emissions calculated using the flow rate of diluted exhaust, dexh n  , as described in §1065.650(c) :

b kgnd dil/exh bkgnddexh m xm     Eq. 1065.667-3

b kgnddexh bkgnd dexh m Mx n     Eq. 1065.667-4 Example: M

NOx = 46.0055 g/mol

x bkgnd = 0.05 μmol/mol = 0.05

 10 -6 mol/mol

dexh n  = 23280.5 mol/s

x dil/exh = 0.843 mol/mol

6 bkgndNOxdexh 46.0055 0.05 10 23280.5 m    

b kgndNOxdexh m  = 0.0536 g/hr

b kgndNOx m  = 0.843 · 0.0536

b kgndNOx m  = 0.0452 g/hr

§1065.670 NO x intake-air humidity and temperature corrections. See the standard-settin g part to determine if you may correct NO x emissions for the effects of intake-air humidity or temperature. Use the NO x intake-air humidity and temperature corrections specified in the standard-setting part instead of the NO x intake-air humidity correction specified in this part 1065. If the standard-setting part does not prohibit correcting NO x emissions for intake-air humidity according to this part 1065, correct NO x concentrations for intake-air humidity as described in this section. See §1065.650(c)(1) for the proper sequence for applying the NO x intake-air humidity and temperature corrections. You may use a time-weighted mean combustion air humidity to calculate this corr ection if your combustion air humidity remains within a tolerance of ±0.0025 mol/mol of the mean value over the test interval. For intake-air humidity correction, use one of the following approaches: (a) For compression-ignition engines, correct for intake-air humidity using the following equation:

x

NOxcor = x NOxuncor · (9.953 · x H2O + 0.832) Eq. 1065.670-1 Example:

x

NOxuncor = 700.5 μmol/mol

x H2O = 0.022 mol/mol

x

NOxcor = 700.5 · (9.953 · 0.022 + 0.832)

x

NOxcor = 736.2 μmol/mol (b) For spark-ignition engines, correct for in take-air humidity using the following equation:

x

NOxcor = x NOxuncor · (18.840 · x H2O + 0.68094) Eq. 1065.670-2 Example:

x

NOxuncor = 154.7 μmol/mol

x H2O = 0.022 mol/molx NOxcor = 154.7 · (18.840 · 0.022 + 0.68094)

x

NOxcor = 169.5 μmol/mol (c) Develop your own correction, based on good engineering judgment.

§1065.672 Drift correction. (a) Scope and frequency . Perform the calculations in this s ection to determine if gas analyzer drift invalidates the results of a test interval. If drift does not invalidate the results of a test interval, correct that test interval’s gas analyzer responses for drift according to this section. Use the drift-corrected gas analyzer responses in all subsequent emission calculations. Note that the acceptable threshold for gas analyzer drift over a test interval is specified in §1065.550 for both laboratory testing and field testing. (b) Correction principles . The calculations in this section utilize a gas analyzer’s responses to reference zero and span concentrations of analyti cal gases, as determined sometime before and after a test interval. The calculations correct the gas analyzer’s responses that were recorded during a test interval. The correction is based on an analyzer’s mean responses to reference zero and span gases, and it is based on the reference concentrations of the zero and span gases themselves. Validate and correct for drift as follows: (c) Drift validation . After applying all the other corrections–except drift correction–to all the gas analyzer signals, calculate brake-specific emi ssions according to §1065.650. Then correct all gas analyzer signals for drift according to this secti on. Recalculate brake-specific emissions using all of the drift-corrected gas analyzer signals. Validate and report the brake-specific emission results before and after drift correction according to §1065.550. (d) Drift correction . Correct all gas analyzer signals as follows: (1) Correct each recorded concentration, x i , for continuous sampling or for batch sampling, 

### x

. (2) Correct for drift using the following equation: 

#        i prezero postzero idriftcorrected refzero refspan refzero

p respan postspan prezero postzero 2 xx x x x xx xx xx        Eq. 1065.672-1

Where:

x idriftcorrected = concentration corrected for drift.

x refzero = reference concentration of the zero gas, which is usually zero unless known to be otherwise.

x refspan = reference concentration of the span gas.

x prespan = pre-test interval gas analyzer response to the span gas concentration.

x postspan = post-test interval gas analyzer response to the span gas concentration.

x i or 

### x = concentration recorded during test, before drift correction.

x prezero = pre-test interval gas analyzer response to the zero gas concentration.

x postzero = post-test interval gas analyzer response to the zero gas concentration.

Example:

x refzero = 0 μmol/mol

x refspan = 1800.0 μmol/mol

x prespan = 1800.5 μmol/mol

x postspan = 1695.8 μmol/molx i or 

### x = 435.5 μmol/mol

x prezero = 0.6 μmol/mol

x postzero = –5.2 μmol/mol 

##     

#      

#   idriftcorrected 2 435.5 0.6 5.2 0 1800.0 0 1800.5 1695.8 0.6 5.2 x         

x idriftcorrected = 450.2 μmol/mol (3) For any pre-test interval concentrations, use concentrations determined most recently before the test interval. For some test intervals, the most recent pre-zero or pre-span might have occurred before one or more previous test intervals. (4) For any post-test interval concentrations, use concentrations determined most recently after the test interval. For some test intervals, the most recent post-zero or post-span might have occurred after one or more subsequent test intervals. (5) If you do not record any pre-test interval analyzer response to the span gas concentration,

x prespan , set x prespan equal to the reference concentration of the span gas: x prespan = x refspan
. (6) If you do not record any pre-test interval analyzer response to the zero gas concentration,

x prezero , set x prezero equal to the reference concentration of the zero gas: x prezero = x refzero
. (7) Usually the reference concentration of the zero gas, x refzero , is zero: x refzero = 0 μmol/mol. However, in some cases you might know that x refzero has a non-zero concentration. For example, if you zero a CO 2 analyzer using ambient air, you may use the default ambient air concentration of CO 2 , which is 375 μmol/mol. In this case, x refzero = 375 μmol/mol. Note that when you zero an analyzer using a non-zero x refzero , you must set the analyzer to output the actual x refzero concentration. For example, if x refzero = 375 μmol/mol, set the analyzer to output a value of 375 μmol/mol when the zero gas is flowing to the analyzer.

§1065.675 CLD quench verification calculations. Perform CLD quench-check calculations as follows: (a) Perform a CLD analyzer quench verification test as described in §1065.370. (b) Estimate the maximum expected mole fraction of water during emission testing, x H2Oexp
. Make this estimate where the humidified NO span gas was introduced in §1065.370(e)(6). When estimating the maximum expected mole fraction of water, consider the maximum expected water content in combustion air, fuel combustion prod ucts, and dilution air (if applicable). If you introduced the humidified NO span gas into the sample system upstream of a sample dryer during the verification test, you need not estimate the maximum expected mole fraction of water and you must set x H2Oexp equal to x H2Omeas
. (c) Estimate the maximum expected CO 2 concentration during emission testing, x CO2exp . Make this estimate at the sample system location where the blended NO and CO 2 span gases are introduced according to §1065.370(d)(10). When estimating the maximum expected CO 2 concentration, consider the maximum expected CO 2 content in fuel combustion products and dilution air. (d) Calculate quench as follows:

NOwet

H2Oexp CO2exp NOmeas H2Omeas

NOdry H2Omeas NOact CO2act 1 1 1 100 %

x

x x x x quench

x xx x  

   

   

                 Eq. 1065.675-1

Where: quench = amount of CLD quench.

x NOdry = concentration of NO upstream of a bubbler, according to §1065.370(e)(4).

x NOwet = measured concentration of NO downstream of a bubbler, according to §1065.370(e)(9).

x H2Oexp = maximum expected mole fraction of water during emission testing, according to paragraph (b) of this section.

x H2Omeas = measured mole fraction of water du ring the quench verification, according to §1065.370(e)(7)

. x NOmeas = measured concentration of NO when NO span gas is blended with CO 2 span gas, according to §1065.370(d)(10).

x NOact = actual concentration of NO when NO span gas is blended with CO 2 span gas, according to §1065.370(d)(11) and calculated according to Equation 1065.675-2.

x CO2exp = maximum expected concentration of CO 2 during emission testing, according to paragraph (c) of this section.

x CO2act = actual concentration of CO 2 when NO span gas is blended with CO 2 span gas, according to §1065.370(d)(9)

.

CO2act NOact NOspan CO2span 1 x x x x  

 

    Eq. 1065.675-2 Where:

x

NOspan = the NO span gas concentration input to the gas divider, acco rding to §1065.370(d)(5).

x

CO2span = the CO 2 span gas concentration input to the gas divider, according to §1065.370(d)(4).

Example:

x NOdry = 1800.0 μmol/mol

x NOwet = 1739.6 μmol/mol

x H2Oexp = 0.030 mol/mol

x H2Omeas = 0.030 mol/mol

x NOmeas = 1515.2 μmol/mol

x NOspan = 3001.6 μmol/mol

x CO2exp = 3.2 %

x CO2span = 6.1 %

x CO2act = 2.98 %

NOact 2.98 1 3001.6 1535.24459 μ mol/mol 6.1 x  

  

   

1739.6 0.030 1515.2 3.2 1 0.030 1 1 100 % 1800.0 0.030 1535.24459 2.98 quench      

   

                  quench = (–0.0036655 – 0.014020171)

 100 % = –1.7685671 %§1065.690 Buoyancy correction for PM sample media. (a) General . Correct PM sample media for their buoyancy in air if you weigh them on a balance. The buoyancy correction depends on the sample media density, the density of air, and the density of the calibration weight used to calibrate the balance. The buoyancy correction does not account for the buoyancy of the PM itself, because the mass of PM typically accounts for only (0.01 to 0.10) % of the total weight. A correctio n to this small fraction of mass would be at the most 0.010 %. (b) PM sample media density . Different PM sample media ha ve different densities. Use the known density of your sample media, or use one of the densities for some common sampling media, as follows: (1) For PTFE-coated borosilicate glass, use a sample media density of 2300 kg/m 3

. (2) For PTFE membrane (film) media with an integral support ring of polymethylpentene that accounts for 95 % of the media mass, use a sample media density of 920 kg/m 3

. (3) For PTFE membrane (film) media with an integral support ring of PTFE, use a sample media density of 2144 kg/m 3

. (c) Air density . Because a PM balance environment must be tightly controlled to an ambient temperature of (22 ±1) °C and humidity has an insignificant effect on buoyancy correction, air density is primarily a function of atmospheric pressure. Therefore you may use nominal constant values for temperature and humidity in the buoyancy correction equation in Eq. 1065.690-2. (d) Calibration weight density . Use the stated density of the material of your metal calibration weight. The example calculation in this section uses a density of 8000 kg/m 3 , but you should know the density of your weight from the calibration weight supplier or the balance manufacturer if it is an internal weight. (e) Correction calculation . Correct the PM sample media for buoyancy using the following equations:

air

weight

cor uncor air

media 1

1 m m 



  

    

   

     Eq. 1065.690-1 Where:

m cor = PM mass corrected for buoyancy.

m uncor = PM mass uncorrected for buoyancy.


air

= density of air in balance environment.


weight = density of calibration weig ht used to span balance.


media = density of PM sample media, such as a filter.

abs mix air amb p M

R T  



 Eq. 1065.690-2 Where:
p abs = absolute pressure in balance environment. M

mix = molar mass of air in balance environment. R = molar gas constant. T

amb = absolute ambient temperature of balance environment.Example:
p abs = 99.980 kPa T

sat

= T dew = 9.5 °C Using Eq. 1065.645-1,
p H20 = 1.1866 kPa Using Eq. 1065.645-3,

x H2O = 0.011868 mol/mol Using Eq. 1065.640-9, M

mix = 28.83563 g/mol R = 8.314472 J/(mol·K) T

amb = 20 °C

air 

### 99.980 28.83563
8.314472 293.15  

### 



 

air

= 1.18282 kg/m 3

m uncorr = 100.0000 mg


weight = 8000 kg/m 3



media = 920 kg/m 3

cor 1.18282 1 8000 100.0000 1.18282 1 920 m  

  

   

    

m cor = 100.1139 mg

§1065.695 Data requirements. (a) To determine the information we require from engine tests, refer to the standard-setting part and request from your Designated Compliance Offi cer the format used to apply for certification or demonstrate compliance. We may require different information for different purposes, such as for certification applications, approval requests for alternate procedures, selective enforcement audits, laboratory audits, production-line test reports, and field-test reports. (b) See the standard-setting part and §1065.25 regarding recordkeeping. (c) We may ask you the following about your testing, and we may ask you for other information as allowed under the Act: (1) What approved alternate procedures did you use? For example: (i) Partial-flow dilution for proportional PM. (ii) CARB test procedures. (iii) ISO test procedures. (2) What laboratory equipment did you use? For example, the make, model, and description of the following: (i) Engine dynamometer and operator demand. (ii) Probes, dilution, transfer lines, and sample preconditioning components. (iii) Batch storage media (such as the bag material or PM filter material). (3) What measurement instruments did you use? For example, the make, model, and description of the following: (i) Speed and torque instruments. (ii) Flow meters.(iii) Gas analyzers. (iv) PM balance. (4) When did you conduct calibrations and performance checks and what were the results? For example, the dates and results of the following: (i) Linearity verification

. (ii) Interference checks. (iii) Response checks. (iv) Leak checks. (v) Flow meter checks. (5) What engine did you test? For example, the following: (i) Manufacturer. (ii) Family name on engine label. (iii) Model. (iv) Model year. (v) Identification number. (6) How did you prepare and configure your engine for testing? Consider the following examples: (i) Dates, hours, duty cycle and fuel used for service accumulation. (ii) Dates and description of scheduled and unscheduled maintenance. (iii) Allowable pressure range of intake restriction. (iv) Allowable pressure range of exhaust restriction. (v) Charge air cooler volume. (vi) Charge air cooler outlet temperature, specified engine conditions and location of temperature
measurement. (vii) Fuel temperature and location of measurement. (viii) Any aftertreatment system configuration and description. (ix) Any crankcase ventilation c onfiguration and description (e.g., open, closed, PCV, crankcase scavenged). (x) Number and type of preconditioning cycles. (7) How did you test your engine? For example: (i) Constant speed or variable speed. (ii) Mapping procedure (step or sweep). (iii) Continuous or batch sampling for each emission. (iv) Raw or dilute sampling; any dilution-air background sampling. (v) Duty cycle and test intervals. (vi) Cold-start, hot-start, warmed-up running. (vii) Absolute pressure, temperature, and dewpoint of intake and dilution air. (viii) Simulated engine loads, curb idle transmission torque value. (ix) Warm-idle speed value. (x) Simulated vehicle signals applied during testing. (xi) Bypassed governor controls during testing. (xii) Date, time, and location of test (e.g ., dynamometer laborato ry identification). (xiii) Cooling medium for engine and charge air. (xiv) Operating temperatures of coolant, head, and block. (xv) Natural or forced cool-down and cool-down time. (xvi) Canister loading. Deleted: checks(8) How did you validate your testing? For example, results from the following: (i) Duty cycle regression statistics for each test interval. (ii) Proportional sampling. (iii) Drift. (iv) Reference PM sample media in PM-stabilization environment. (9) How did you calculate results? For example, results from the following: (i) Drift correction. (ii) Noise correction. (iii) “Dry-to-wet” correction. (iv) NMHC, CH 4 , and contamination correction. (v) NO x humidity correction. (vi) Brake-specific emission formulation—total ma ss divided by total work, mass rate divided by power, or ratio of mass to work. (vii) Rounding emission results. (10) What were the results of your testing? For example: (i) Maximum mapped power and speed at maximum power. (ii) Maximum mapped torque and speed at maximum torque. (iii) For constant-speed engines: no-load governed speed. (iv) For constant-speed engines: test torque. (v) For variable-speed engines: maximum test speed. (vi) Speed versus torque map. (vii) Speed versus power map. (viii) Brake-specific emissions over the duty cycle and each test interval. (ix) Brake-specific fuel consumption. (11) What fuel did you use? For example: (i) Fuel that met specifications of subpart H of this part. (ii) Alternate fuel. (iii) Oxygenated fuel. (12) How did you field test your engine? For example: (i) Data from paragraphs (c)(1), (3), (4), (5), and (9) of this section. (ii) Probes, dilution, transfer lines, and sample preconditioning components. (iii) Batch storage media (such as the bag material or PM filter material). (iv) Continuous or batch sampling for each emission. (v) Raw or dilute sampling; any dilution air background sampling. (vi) Cold-start, hot-start, warmed-up running. (vii) Intake and dilution air absolute pressure, temperature, dewpoint. (viii) Curb idle transmission torque value. (ix) Warm idle speed value, any enhanced idle speed value. (x) Date, time, and location of test (e .g., identify the te sting laboratory). (xi) Proportional sampling validation. (xii) Drift validation. (xiii) Operating temperatures of coolant, head, and block. (xiv) Vehicle make, model, model year, identification number.Subpart H—Engine Fluids, Test Fuels, Analyt ical Gases and Other Calibration Standards

§1065.701 General requirements for test fuels. (a) General . For all emission measurements, use test fu els that meet the specifications in this subpart, unless the standard-setting part directs otherwise. Section 1065.10(c)(1) does not apply with respect to test fuels. Note that the stan dard-setting parts generally require that you design your emission controls to function properly when using commercially available fuels, even if they differ from the test fuel. Where we specify multiple grades of a certain fuel type (such as diesel fuel with different sulfur concentrations), see the standard-setting part to determine which grade to use. (b) Fuels meeting alternate specifications . We may allow you to use a different test fuel (such as California Phase 2 gasoline) if it does not affect your ability to show that your engines would comply with all applicable em ission standards using the fuel specified in this subpart. (c) Fuels not specified in this subpart . If you produce engines that run on a type of fuel (or mixture of fuels) that we do not specify in th is subpart, you must get our written approval to establish the appropriate test fuel. See the standard -setting part for provisions related to fuels and fuel mixtures not specified in this subpart. (1) For engines designed to operate on a single fuel, we will generally allow you to use the fuel if you show us all the following things are true: (i) Show that your engines will use only the designated fuel in service. (ii) Show that this type of fuel is commercially available. (iii) Show that operating the engines on the fuel we specify would be inappropriate, as in the following examples: (A) The engine will not run on the specified fuel. (B) The engine or emission controls will not be durable or work properly when operating with the specified fuel. (C) The measured emission results would otherwis e be substantially unrepresentative of in-use emissions. (2) For engines that are designed to operate on different fuel types, the provisions of paragraphs (c)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this section ap ply with respect to each fuel type. (3) For engines that are designed to operate on different fuel types as well as continuous mixtures of those fuels, we may require you to test with either the worst-case fuel mixture or the most representative fuel mixture, unless the st andard-setting part specifies otherwise. (d) Fuel specifications

. Specifications in this section apply as follows: (1) Measure and calculate values as described in the appropriate reference procedure. Record and report final values expressed to at least the same number of decimal places as the applicable limit value. The right-most digit for each limit va lue is significant unless specified otherwise. For example, for a specified distillation temperatur e of 60 °C, determine the test fuel’s value to the nearest whole number. (2) The fuel parameters specified in this subpart depend on measurement procedures that are incorporated by reference. For any of these procedures, you may instead rely upon the procedures identified in 40 CFR part 80 for measuring the same parameter. For example, we may identify different reference procedures for measuring gasoline parameters in 40 CFR 80.46. (e) Two-stroke fuel/oil mixing . For two-stroke engines, use a fuel/oil mixture meeting the manufacturer’s specifications.(f) Service accumulation and field testing fuels . If we do not specify a service-accumulation or field-testing fuel in the standard-setting part, us e an appropriate commercially available fuel such as those meeting minimum specifications from the following table:

Table 1 of §1065.701–Examples of service- accumulation and field-testing fuels. Fuel category Subcategory Reference procedure 1

Diesel Light distillate and light blends with residual ASTM D975

Middle distillate ASTM D6985 Biodiesel (B100) ASTM D6751 Intermediate and residual fuel All See §1065.705

Gasoline Motor vehicle gasoline ASTM D4814 Motor gasoline with ethanol concentrations up to 10 volume %. ASTM D4814

Alcohol Ethanol (E 51-83 ) ASTM D5798 Methanol (M70-M85) ASTM D5797

Aviation fuel Aviation gasoline ASTM D910 Gas turbine ASTM D1655 Jet B wide cut ASTM D6615 Gas turbine fuel General ASTM D2880
1 ASTM specifications are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010.

§1065.703 Distillate diesel fuel. (a) Distillate diesel fuels for testing must be clean and bright, with pour and cloud points adequate for proper engine operation. (b) There are three grades of #2 diesel fuel spec ified for use as a test fuel. See the standardsetting part to determine which grade to use. If the standard-setting part does not specify which grade to use, use good engineering judgment to select the grade that represents the fuel on which the engines will operate in use. The three grad es are specified in Table 1 of this section. (c) You may use the following nonmetallic a dditives with distillate diesel fuels: (1) Cetane improver. (2) Metal deactivator. (3) Antioxidant, dehazer. (4) Rust inhibitor. (5) Pour depressant. (6) Dye. (7) Dispersant. (8) Biocide. Deleted: -07b

Deleted: -04a

Deleted: -07b

Deleted: -07a

Deleted: Minor oxygenated gasoline blends Deleted: -07a

Deleted: d75-85

Deleted: -07

Deleted: -07

Deleted: -07

Deleted: -07e01

Deleted: -06

Deleted: -03Table 1 of §1065.703–Test fuel specifi cations for distillate diesel fuel

Property Unit Ultra Low Sulfur Low Sulfur High Sulfur Reference Procedure 1
Cetane Number — 40 - 50 40 - 50 40 - 50 ASTM D613 Distillation range: Initial boiling point 10 pct. point 50 pct. point 90 pct. point Endpoint °C 171 - 204 204 - 238 243 - 282 293 - 332 321 - 366 171 - 204 204 - 238 243 - 282 293 - 332 321 - 366 171 - 204 204 - 238 243 - 282 293 - 332 321 - 366 ASTM D86

Gravity °API 32 - 37 32 - 37 32 - 37 ASTM D4052 Total sulfur, ultra low sulfur mg/kg 7 – 15 See 40 CFR 80.580 Total sulfur, low and high sulfur mg/kg 300 - 500 800 - 2500 ASTM D2622or alternates as allowed under 40 CFR 80.580 Aromatics, min. (Remainder shall be paraffins, naphthenes, and olefins) g/kg 100 100 100 ASTM D5186

Flashpoint, min. °C 54 54 54 ASTM D93 Kinematic Viscosity cSt 2.0 - 3.2 2.0 - 3.2 2.0 - 3.2 ASTM D445

1 ASTM procedures are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.

§1065.705 Residual and intermediate residual fuel. This section describes the specifications for fuels meeting the definition of residual fuel in 40 CFR 80.2, including fuels marketed as interm ediate fuel. Residual fuels for service accumulation and any testing must me et the following specifications: (a) The fuel must be a commercially available fuel that is representative of the fuel that will be used by the engine in actual use. (b) The fuel must be free of used lubricating oil. Demonstrate this by showing that the fuel meets at least one of the following specifications. (1) Zinc is at or below 15 mg per kg of fuel based on the procedures specified in IP470, IP501, or ISO 8217 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). (2) Phosphorus is at or below 15 mg per kg of fuel based on the procedures specified in IP500, IP501, or ISO 8217 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). (3) Calcium is at or below 30 mg per kg of fuel based on the procedures specified in IP470, IP501, or ISO 8217 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). ( c ) The fuel must meet the specifications for one of the categories in the following table: Deleted: Item

Deleted: s

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -07a

Deleted: -96e01

Deleted: -07

Deleted: al Deleted: -03

Deleted: -09

Deleted: -09

Deleted: bTable 1 of §1065.705–Service accumulation and test fuel specifications for residual fuel.PropertyUnitCategory ISO-FReferenceProcedure1RMA30RMB30RMD80RME180RMF180RMG380RMH380RMK380RMH700RMK700Density at 15 °C, max. kg/m3960.0 975.0 980.0 991.0 991.0 1010.0 991.0 1010.0ISO 3675 or ISO 12185 (seealso ISO 8217)Kinematic viscosity at50 °C, max.cSt 30.0 80.0 180.0 380.0 700.0 ISO 3104Flash point, min. °C 60 60 60 60 60 ISO 2719 (see also ISO 8217)Pour point (upper)Winter quality, max.Summer quality, max.°C0624243030303030303030ISO 3016Carbon residue, max. (kg/kg) % 10 14 15 20 18 22 22 ISO 10370Ash, max. (kg/kg) % 0.10 0.100.10 0.15 0.15 0.15 ISO 6245Water, max. (m3/m3) % 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 ISO 3733Sulfur, max. (kg/kg) % 3.50 4.00 4.50 4.50 4.50ISO 8754 or ISO 14596 (seealso ISO 8217)Vanadium, max. mg/kg 150 350 200 500 300 600 600ISO 14597 or IP 501 or IP 470(see also ISO 8217)Total sedimentpotential, max.(kg/kg) % 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10ISO 10307-2 (see also ISO8217)Aluminium plussilicon, max.mg/kg 80 80 80 80 80ISO 10478 or IP 501 or IP 470(see also ISO 8217:2012)1ISO procedures are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.Deleted:CharacteristicDeleted:Test method rDeleted:: 1996/Cor 1:2001Deleted::2005(E) 7.1Deleted::1994/Cor 1:1997Deleted::2005(E) 7.2Deleted:¶ISO 3016Deleted::1993/Cor 1:1996Deleted:: 1998/Cor 1:1999Deleted::2005(E) 7.3Deleted::2005(E) 7.8Deleted::2005(E) 7.6Deleted:2005(E)Deleted:7.9Deleted:Used lubricating oil (ULO), max.¶¶Zinc¶Phosphorus¶Calcium... [1]§1065.710 Gasoline. (a) This section specifies test fuel properties for gasoline with ethanol (low-level blend only) and for gasoline without ethanol. Note that the “fuel type” for the fuels specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section is considered to be gasoline. In contrast, fuels with higher ethanol concentrations, such as fuel containing 82 percen t ethanol, are considered to be ethanol fuels rather than gasoline. We specify some test fuel parameters that apply uniquely for lowtemperature testing and for testing at altit udes above 1,219 m. For all other testing, , use the test fuel parameters specified for general testing. Unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise, use the fuel specified in paragraph (c) of this section for general testing. (b) The following specifications apply for a blen ded gasoline test fuel that has nominally 15 % ethanol (commonly called E15 test fuel): (1) Prepare the blended test fuel from typical refinery gasoline blending components. You may not use pure compounds, except as follows: (i) You may use neat ethanol as a blendstock. (ii) You may adjust the test fuel’s vapor pressure by adding butane. (iii) You may adjust the test fuel’s benzene content by adding benzene. (iv) You may adjust the test fuel’s sulfur content by adding sulfur compounds that are representative of those found with in-use fuels. (2) Table 1 of this section identifies limit valu es consistent with the units in the reference procedure for each fuel property. These values are generally specified in international units. Values presented in parentheses are for information only. Table 1 follows: Comment [CAL25]: AS: We might need to define the limit of what constitutes gasoline as a fuel type (if we haven’t already).

Deleted: Gasoline for testing must have octane values that represent commercially available fuels for the appropriate application.¶ (b) There are two grades of gasoline specified for use as a test fuel. If the standard-setting part requires testing with fuel appropriate for low temperatures, use the test fuel specified for low-temperature testing. Otherwise

Deleted: The two grades are specified in Table 1 of this section.Table 1 of §1065.710–Test fuel specifications for a low-level ethanol-gasoline blend

Property Unit SPECIFICATION
Reference Procedure 1 General Testing LowTemperature

Testing High Altitude Testing

Antiknock Index (R+M)/2 - 87.0 - 88.4 2 87.0 Minimum ASTM D2699 and D2700
Sensitivity (R-M)

- 7.5 Minimum ASTM D2699 and D2700 Dry Vapor Pressure Equivalent ( DVPE ) 3 kPa (psi) 60.0-63.4 (8.7-9.2) 77.2-81.4 (11.2-11.8) 52.4-55.2 (7.6-8.0) ASTM D5191

Distillation 10% evaporated ° C ( ° F) 49-60 (120-140) 43-54 (110-130) 49-60 (120-140)

ASTM D86 50% evaporated ° C ( ° F) 77-88 (170-190)
90% evaporated ° C ( ° F) 154-166 (310-330) Evaporated final boiling point ° C ( ° F) 193-216 (380-420)

Residue milliliter 2.0 Maximum
Total Aromatic Hydrocarbons volume % 19.5-24.5

ASTM D5769 C6 Aromatics (benzene) volume % 0.6-0.8

C7 Aromatics (toluene) volume % 4.4-5.5

C8 Aromatics volume % 5.5-6.9

C9 Aromatics volume % 5.0-6.2

C10+ Aromatics volume % 4.0-5.0

Olefins 4 mass % 4.5-11.5 ASTM D6550

Ethanol blended 5 volume % 14.6-15.0 See paragraph (b)(3) of this section. Ethanol confirmatory 6,7 volume % 14.3-15.3 ASTM D5599

Total Content of Oxygenates Other than Ethanol 7 volume % 0.1 Maximum ASTM D5599

Sulfur mg/kg 8.0-11.0 ASTM D2622, D5453 or D7039
Lead g/liter 0.0026 Maximum ASTM D3237
Phosphorus g/liter 0.0013 Maximum ASTM D3231
Copper Corrosion

- No. 1 Maximum ASTM D130
Solvent-Washed Gum Content mg/100 milliliter 3.0 Maximum ASTM D381

Oxidation Stability minute 1000 Minimum ASTM D525

1 ASTM procedures are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.
2 Octane specifications apply only for testing related to ex haust emissions. For engines or vehicles that require the use of premium fuel, as described in paragraph (d) of this section, the adjusted specification for antiknockindex is a minimum value of 91.0; no maximum value applies. All other specifications apply for this highoctane fuel.
3 Calculate dry vapor pressure equivalent, DVPE , based on the measured total vapor pressure, p T , in kPa usingthe following equation: DVPE = 0.956· p T - 2.39. DVPE is intended to be equivalent to Reid Vapor Pressure using a different test method.
4 The specified olefin concentration range equates to approximately 4 – 10 volume % when measured according to ASTM D1319.
5 The ethanol blended specification is based on the volume % ethanol content of the fuel as determined during blending by the fuel supplier and as stated by the supplier at the time of fuel delivery.
6 The ethanol confirmatory specification is based on the volume % ethanol as measured according to ASTM D5599.
7 The reference procedure prescribes measurement of ethanol concentration in mass %. Convert results to volume % as specified in ASTM D4815.
(3) Use good engineering judgment to determine the volume % of ethanol based on the volume of each blendstock. We recommend using a flow-based or gravimetric procedure that has an accuracy and repeatability of ± 0.1 %. (c) The specifications of this paragraph (c) apply for testing w ith neat gasoline. This is sometimes called indolene or E0 test fuel. Gasoline for testing must have octane values that represent commercially available fuels for the appropriate application. Test fuel specifications apply as follows:

Table 2 of §1065.710–Test fuel specifications for neat (E0) gasoline

Property Unit SPECIFICATION Reference Procedure 1 General Testing Low-Temperature Testing

Distillation Range: Evaporated i nitial boiling point 10% evaporated 50% evaporated 90% evaporated Evaporated final boiling point °C 24 - 35 2 49 - 57 93 - 110 149 - 163 Maximum, 213 24 - 36 37 - 48 82 - 101 158 - 174 Maximum, 212 ASTM D86

Hydrocarbon composition: Olefins Aromatics Saturates volume % Maximum, 0.10 Maximum, 0.35 Remainder Maximum, 0.175 Maximum, 0.304 Remainder ASTM D1319

Lead g/liter Maximum, 0.013 Maximum, 0.013 ASTM D3237 Phosphorous g/liter Maximum, 0.0013 Maximum, 0.005 ASTM D3231 Total sulfur mg/kg Maximum, 80 Maximum, 80 ASTM D2622 Dry vapor pressure equivalent 2 kPa 60.0 - 63.4 3 ,4 77.2 - 81.4 ASTM D5191

1 ASTM procedures are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.
2 Calculate dry vapor pressure equivalent, DVPE , based on the measured total vapor pressure, p T , in kPa using the following equation: DVPE = 0.956· p T - 2.39. DVPE is intended to be equivalent to Reid Vapor Pressure using a different test method.
3 For testing at altitudes above 1 219 m, the specified volatility range is (52.0 to 55.2) kPa and the specified initial boiling point range is (23.9 to 40.6) °C.
4 For testing unrelated to evaporative emissions, the specified range is (55.2 to 63.4) kPa.

(d) Use the high-octane gasoline specified in paragraph (b) of this section only for engines or vehicles for which the manufacturer conditions the warranty on the use of premium gasoline.

§1065.715 Natural gas. Deleted: 1

Deleted: Item

Deleted: s

Deleted: I

Deleted: point

Deleted: point

Deleted: point

Deleted: End Deleted: -07a

Deleted: m 3 /m 3

Deleted: -03

Deleted: (organic)

Deleted: -06e01

Deleted: -07

Deleted: -07

Deleted: Volatility (Reid Vapor Pressure) Deleted: 2,

Deleted: -07

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 3(a) Except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, natural gas for testing must meet the specifications in the following table:

Table 1 of §1065.715–Test fuel specifications for natural gas Property Value 1 Methane, CH 4 Minimum, 0.87 mol/mol Ethane, C 2 H 6 Maximum, 0.055 mol/mol Propane, C 3 H 8 Maximum, 0.012 mol/mol Butane, C 4 H 10 Maximum, 0.0035 mol/mol Pentane, C 5 H 12 Maximum, 0.0013 mol/mol C 6 and higher Maximum, 0.001 mol/mol Oxygen Maximum, 0.001 mol/mol Inert gases (sum of CO 2 and N 2 ) Maximum, 0.051 mol/mol

1 Demonstrate compliance with fuel specifications based on the reference procedures in ASTM D1945 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010) , or on other measurement procedures using good engineering judgment . See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.

(b) In certain cases you may use test fuel not meeting the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section, as follows: (1) You may use fuel that your in-use engines normally use, such as pipeline natural gas. (2) You may use fuel meeting alternate specifica tions if the standard-setting part allows it. (3) You may ask for approval to use fuel that does not meet the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section, but only if using the fuel would not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards. (c) When we conduct testing using natural gas, we will use fuel that meets the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section. (d) At ambient conditions, natural gas must have a distinctive odor detectable down to a concentration in air not more than one-fifth the lower flammable limit.

§1065.720 Liquefied petroleum gas. (a) Except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, liquefied petroleum gas for testing must meet the specifications in the following table: Table 1 of §1065.720–Test fuel specifications for liquefied petroleum gas Property Value Reference Procedure 1 Propane, C 3 H 8 Minimum, 0.85 m 3 /m 3 ASTM D2163 Vapor pressure at 38 °C Maximum, 1400 kPa ASTM D1267or 2598 2 Volatility residue (evaporated temperature, 35 °C) Maximum, -38 °C ASTM D1837 Butanes Maximum, 0.05 m 3 /m 3 ASTM D2163 Butenes Maximum, 0.02 m 3 /m 3 ASTM D2163 Pentenes and heavier Maximum, 0.005 m 3 /m 3 ASTM D2163 Propene Maximum, 0.1 m 3 /m 3 ASTM D2163 Residual matter (residue on evap. of 100) ml oil stain observ.) Maximum, 0.05 ml pass 3 ASTM D2158 Corrosion, copper strip Maximum, No. 1 ASTM D1838 Sulfur Maximum, 80 mg/kg ASTM D2784 Moisture content pass ASTM D2713

1 ASTM procedures are incorporated by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.701(d) for other allowed procedures.
2 If these two test methods yield different results, use the results from ASTM D1267.
3 The test fuel must not yield a persistent oil ring when you add 0.3 ml of solvent residue mixture to a filter paper in 0.1 ml increments and examine it in daylight after two minutes. Deleted: Item

Deleted: All parameters are

Deleted: -03

Deleted: Item

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -02¶

Deleted: -02

Deleted: -02a

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -05

Deleted: -07

Deleted: -06

Deleted: -91

Deleted: -02(b) In certain cases you may use test fuel not meeting the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section, as follows: (1) You may use fuel that your in-use engines normally use, such as commercial-quality liquefied petroleum gas. (2) You may use fuel meeting alternate specifica tions if the standard-setting part allows it. (3) You may ask for approval to use fuel that does not meet the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section, but only if using the fuel would not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with the applicable standards. (c) When we conduct testing using liquefied petroleum gas, we will use fuel that meets the specifications in paragraph (a) of this section. (d) At ambient conditions, liquefied petroleum ga s must have a distinctive odor detectable down to a concentration in air not more than one-fifth the lower flammable limit.

§1065.725 High-level ethanol-gasoline blends. For testing ethanol-fueled vehicles, create a hi gh-level ethanol-gasoline blend test fuel as follows: (a) Add ethanol to an E15 fuel meeting the specifications de scribed in §1065.710 until the ethanol content of the blended fuel is between 80 and 83 volume %. (b) You may alternatively add et hanol to a gasoline base fuel with no ethanol if you can demonstrate that such a base fuel blended with the proper amount of ethanol would meet all the specifications for E15 test fuel described in §1065.710, other than the ethanol content. (c) The ethanol used for blending must be either denatured ethanol meeting the specifications in 40 CFR 80.1510, or fuel-grade ethanol with no denaturant. Be sure to account for the volume of any denaturant when calculating volumetric percentages. (d) The blended test fuel must have a dry vapor pressure equivalent between 6.0 and 6.5 when measured using the procedure specified in §1065.710. You may add commercial grade butane as needed to meet this specification.

§1065.740 Lubricants. (a) Use commercially available lubric ating oil that represents the oil that will be used in your engine in use. (b) You may use lubrication additives, up to the levels that the additive manufacturer recommends.

§1065.745 Coolants. (a) You may use commercially available antifreeze mixtures or other coolants that will be used in your engine in use. (b) For laboratory testing of liquid-cooled engi nes, you may use water with or without rust inhibitors. (c) For coolants allowed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, you may use rust inhibitors and additives required for lubricity, up to the levels that the additive manufacturer recommends.

§1065.750 Analytical Gases. Analytical gases must meet the accuracy and purity specifications of this section, unless you can show that other specifications would not affect your ability to show that you comply with all applicable emission standards. Deleted: r engines(a) Subparts C, D, F, and J of this part refer to the following gas specifications: (1) Use purified gases to zero measurement instru ments and to blend with calibration gases. Use gases with contamination no higher than the highest of the following values in the gas cylinder or at the outlet of a zero-gas generator: (i) 2 % contamination, measured relative to the flow-weighted mean concentration expected at the standard. For example, if you would expect a flow-weighted CO concentration of 100.0
 mol/mol, then you would be allowed to use a ze ro gas with CO contamination less than or equal to 2.000  mol/mol. (ii) Contamination as specified in the following table:

Table 1 of §1065.750–General specifications for purified gases 1
Constituent Purified Air Purified N 2 THC (C 1 equivalent) ≤ 0.05  mol/mol ≤ 0.05  mol/mol CO ≤ 1  mol/mol ≤ 1  mol/mol CO 2 ≤ 10  mol/mol ≤ 10  mol/mol O 2 0.205 to 0.215 mol/mol ≤ 2  mol/mol NO x ≤ 0.02  mol/mol ≤ 0.02  mol/mol N 2 O 2 ≤ 0. 02  mol/mol ≤ 0. 02  mol/mol
1 We do not require these levels of purity to be NIST-traceable.
2 The N 2 O limit applies only if the standard-setting part requires you to report N 2 O or certify to an N 2 O standard

.
(2) Use the following gases with a FID analyzer: (i) FID fuel . Use FID fuel with a stated H 2 concentration of (0.39 to 0.41) mol/mol, balance He or N 2 , and a stated total hydrocarbon concentration of 0.05  mol/mol or less. For GC-FIDs that measure methane (CH 4 ) using a FID fuel that is balance N 2 , perform the CH 4 measurement as described in SAE J1151 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). (ii) FID burner air . Use FID burner air that meets the specifications of purified air in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. For field testing, you may use ambient air. (iii) FID zero gas . Zero flame-ionization detectors with pu rified gas that meets the specifications in paragraph (a)(1) of this secti on, except that the purified gas O 2 concentration may be any value. Note that FID zero balance gases may be any combination of purified air and purifiednitrogen. We recommend FID analyzer zero gases that contain approximately the expected flowweighted mean concentration of O 2 in the exhaust sample during testing. (iv) FID propane span gas . Span and calibrate THC FID with span concentrations of propane, C 3 H 8 . Calibrate on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span a FID to respond with a value of 600  mol/mol. Note that FID span balance gases may be any combination of purified air and purified nitrogen. We recommend FID analyzer span gases that contain approximately the flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 expected during testing. If the expected O 2 concentration in the exhaust sample is zero, we recommend using a balance gas of purified nitrogen. (v) FID CH 4 span gas . If you always span and calibrate a CH 4 FID with a nonmethane cutter, then span and calibrate the FID with span concentrations of CH 4 . Calibrate on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a CH 4 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span a FID to respond with a value of 200  mol/mol. Note that FID span balance gases may be any Deleted: Synthetic

Deleted: 1

Deleted: 1

Deleted: 05

Deleted: 05

Deleted: methane

Deleted: methane,combination of purified air and purified nitrogen. We recommend FID analyzer span gases that contain approximately the expected flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 in the exhaust sample during testing. If the expected O 2 concentration in the exha ust sample is zero, we recommend using a balance gas of purified nitrogen. (3) Use the following gas mixtures, with gases trace able within ±1 % of the NIST-accepted value or other gas standards we approve: (i) CH 4 , balance purified air and/or N 2 (as applicable). (ii) C 2 H 6 , balance purified air and/or N 2 (as applicable). (iii) C 3 H 8 , balance purified air and/or N 2 (as applicable). (iv) CO, balance purified N 2
. (v) CO 2 , balance purified N 2
. (vi) NO, balance purified N 2
. (vii)) NO 2 , balance purified air. (viii) O 2 , balance purified N 2
. (ix) C 3 H 8 , CO, CO 2 , NO, balance purified N 2
. (x) C 3 H 8 , CH 4 , CO, CO 2 , NO, balance purified N 2
. (xi) N 2 O, balance purified air and/or N 2 (as applicable). (4) You may use gases for species other than those listed in paragraph (a)(3) of this section (such as methanol in air, which you may use to determine response factors), as long as they are traceable to within ±3 % of th e NIST-accepted value or other similar standards we approve, and meet the stability requirements of paragraph (b) of this section. (5) You may generate your own calibration gases using a precision blending device, such as a gas divider, to dilute gases with purified N 2 or purified air. If your gas divider meet s the specifications in §1065.248, and the gases being blended meet the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) and (3) of this section, th e resulting blends are considered to meet the requirements of this paragraph (a). (b) Record the concentration of any calibration ga s standard and its expiration date specified by the gas supplier. (1) Do not use any calibration gas standard af ter its expiration date, except as allowed by paragraph (b)(2) of this section. (2) Calibration gases may be relabeled and used after their expiration date as follows: (i) Alcohol/carbonyl calibration gases used to determine response factors according to subpart I of this part may be relabeled as sp ecified in subpart I of this part. (ii) Other gases may be relabeled and used after the expiration date only if we approve it in advance. (c) Transfer gases from their source to analyzers using components that are dedicated to controlling and transferring only those gases. For example, do not use a regulator, valve, or transfer line for zero gas if those components were previously used to transfer a different gas mixture. We recommend that you label regulators, valves, and transfer lines to prevent contamination. Note that even small traces of a gas mixture in the dead volume of a regulator, valve, or transfer line can diffuse upstream into a high-pressure volume of gas, which would contaminate the entire high-pressure gas source, such as a compressed-gas cylinder. (d) To maintain stability and purity of gas standards, use good engineering judgment and follow the gas standard supplier's recommendations for storing and handling zero, span, and calibration gases. For example, it may be necessary to store bottles of condensable gases in a heated environment. Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: synthetic

Deleted: s§1065.790 Mass standards. (a) PM balance calibration weights . Use PM balance calibration weights that are certified as NIST-traceable within 0.1 % uncertainty. Calibration weights may be certified by any calibration lab that maintains NIST-traceability. Make sure your highest calibration weight has no greater than ten times the mass of an unused PM-sample medium. (b) Dynamometer calibration weights . [Reserved]Subpart I—Testing with Oxygenated Fuels

§1065.801 Applicability. (a) This subpart applies for testing with oxygen ated fuels. Unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise, the requirements of this subpart do not apply for fuels that contain less than 25 % oxygenated compounds by volume. For example, you generally do not need to follow the requirements of this subpart for tests performe d using a fuel containing 10 % ethanol and 90 % gasoline, but you must follow these requirements for tests performed using a fuel containing 85 % ethanol and 15 % gasoline. (b) Section 1065.805 applies for all other testing that requires measurement of any alcohols or carbonyls. (c) This subpart specifies sampling procedures and calculations that are different than those used for non-oxygenated fuels. All other test proce dures of this part 1065 apply for testing with oxygenated fuels.

§1065.805 Sampling system. (a) Dilute engine exhaust, and use batch sampli ng to collect proportional flow-weighted dilute samples of the applicable alcohols and carbonyls. You may not use raw sampling for alcohols and carbonyls. (b) You may collect background samples for correcting dilution air for background concentrations of alcohols and carbonyls. (c) Maintain sample temperatur es within the dilution tunnel, probes, and sample lines high enough to prevent aqueous condensation up to the point where a sample is collected to prevent loss of the alcohols and carbonyls by dissolution in condensed water. Use good engineering judgment to ensure that surface reactions of alcohols and carbonyls do not occur, as surface decomposition of methanol has been shown to oc cur at temperatures greater than 120 °C in exhaust from methanol-fueled engines. (d) You may bubble a sample of the exhaust through water to collect alcohols for later analysis. You may also use a photo-acoustic analyzer to quantify ethanol and methanol in an exhaust sample as described in §1065.269

. (e) Sample the exhaust through cartridges impregnated with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine to collect carbonyls for later analysis. If the standard-setting part specifies a duty cycle that has multiple test intervals (such as multiple engine starts or an engine-off soak phase), you may proportionally collect a single carbonyl sample for the entire duty cycle. For example, if the standard-setting part specifies a six-to-one wei ghting of hot-start to cold-start emissions, you may collect a single carbonyl sample for the entire duty cycle by using a hot-start sample flow rate that is six times the cold-start sample flow rate. (f) You may sample alcohols or carbonyls using "California Non-Methane Organic Gas Test Procedures" (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). If you use this method, follow its calculations to determine the mass of the alcohol/carbonyl in the exhaust sample, but follow subpart G of this part for all other calculations (40 CFR part 1066, subpart G, for vehicle testing). (g) Use good engineering judgment to sample other oxygenated hydrocarbon compounds in the exhaust.

§1065.845 Response factor determination.Since FID analyzers generally have an incomplete response to alcohols and carbonyls, determine each FID analyzer’s alcohol/carbonyl response factor ( RF OHCi[THC-FID] ) after FID optimization to subtract those responses from the FID reading. Use the most recently determined alcohol/carbonyl response factors to compensate for alcohol/carbonyl response. You are not required to determine the response factor for a compound unless you will subtract its response to compensate for a response. (a) You may generate response factors as described in paragraph (b) of this section, or you may use the following default response factors, consistent with good engineering judgment:

Table 1 of §1065. 84 5–Default values for THC FID response factor relative to propane on a C 1 -equivalent basis
Compound Response factor ( RF

) acetaldehyde 0.50

ethanol 0.75 formaldehyde 0.00

methanol 0.63 propanol 0.85

( b ) Determine the alcohol/carbonyl response factors as follows: (1) Select a C 3 H 8 span gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750. Note that FID zero and span balance gases may be any combination of purified air or purified nitrogen that meets the specifications of §1065.750. We recommend FID analyzer zero and span gases that contain approximately the flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 expected during testing. Record the C 3 H 8 concentration of the gas. (2) Select or prepare an alcohol/carbonyl cali bration gas that meets the specifications of §1065.750 and has a concentration typical of the peak concentration expected at the hydrocarbon standard. Record the calibration concentration of the gas. (3) Start and operate the FID analyzer according to the manufacturer’s instructions. (4) Confirm that the FID analyzer has been calibrated using C 3 H 8 . Calibrate on a carbon number basis of one (C 1 ). For example, if you use a C 3 H 8 span gas of concentration 200  mol/mol, span the FID to respond with a value of 600  mol/mol. (5) Zero the FID. Note that FID zero and span balance gases may be any combination of purified air or purified nitrogen that meets the specifications of §1065.750. We recommend FID analyzer zero and span gases that contain approximately the flow-weighted mean concentration of O 2 expected during testing. (6) Span the FID with the C 3 H 8 span gas that you selected under paragraph (a)(1) of this section. (7) Introduce at the inlet of the FID analyzer the alcohol/carbonyl calibration gas that you selected under paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (8) Allow time for the analyzer response to stab ilize. Stabilization time may include time to purge the analyzer and to account for its response. (9) While the analyzer measures the alcohol/car bonyl concentration, record 30 seconds of sampled data. Calculate the arithmetic mean of these values. (10) Divide the mean measured concentration by the recorded span concentration of the alcohol/carbonyl calibration gas. The result is the FID analyzer’s response factor for alcohol/carbonyl, RF OHCi[THC-FID]
. Deleted: such as

Deleted: MeOH

Deleted: Formaldehyde response is assumed to be zero and does not need to be determined. Use the most recent alcohol/carbonyl response factors to compensate for alcohol/carbonyl response.

Deleted: 66

Deleted: a

Deleted: MeOH( c ) Alcohol/carbonyl calibration gases must remain within ±2 % of the labeled concentration. You must demonstrate the stability based on a quarterly measurement procedure with a precision of ±2 % percent or another method that we approve. Your measurement procedure may incorporate multiple measurements. If the true conc entration of the gas cha nges deviates by more than ±2 %, but less than ±10 %, the gas ma y be relabeled with the new concentration.

§1065.850 Calculations. Use the calculations specified in §1065.665 to determine THCE or NMHCE and the calculations specified in 40 CFR 1066.665 to determine NMOG

. Deleted: bSubpart J—Field Testing and Portable Emission Measurement Systems

§1065.901 Applicability. (a) Field testing . This subpart specifies procedures for field-testing engines to determine brakespecific emissions using portable emission measur ement systems (PEMS). These procedures are designed primarily for in-field measurements of engines that remain installed in vehicles or equipment the field. Field-test procedures apply to your engines only as specified in the standard-setting part. (b) Laboratory testing . You may use PEMS for any testing in a laboratory or similar environment without restriction or prior approval if the PEMS meets all applicable specifications for laboratory testing. You may also use PEMS for any testing in a laboratory or similar environment if we approve it in advance, subject to the following provisions: (1) Follow the laboratory test procedures specified in this part 1065, according to §1065.905(e). (2) Do not apply any PEMS-related field-testin g adjustments or measur ement allowances to laboratory emission results or standards. (3) Do not use PEMS for laboratory measurements if it prevents you from demonstrating compliance with the applicable standards. Some of the PEMS requirements in this part 1065 are less stringent than the corresponding laborator y requirements. Depending on actual PEMS performance, you might therefore need to account for some additional measurement uncertainty when using PEMS for laboratory testing. If we ask, you must show us by engineering analysis that any additional measurement uncertainty due to your use of PEMS for laboratory testing is offset by the extent to which your engine’s emissions are below the applicable standards. For example, you might show that PEMS versus laboratory uncertainty represents 5 % of the standard, but your engine’s deteriorated emissions are at least 20 % below the standard for each pollutant.

§1065.905 General provisions. (a) General . Unless the standard-setting part specifies deviations from the provisions of this subpart, field testing and laboratory testing with PEMS must conform to the provisions of this subpart. Use good engineering judgment when testing with PEMS systems to ensure proper function of the instruments under test conditions . For example, this may require additional maintenance or calibration for field testing or may require verification after moving the PEMS unit. (b) Field-testing scope . Field testing conducted under this subpart may include any normal in-use operation of an engine. (c) Field testing and the standard-setting part . This subpart J specifies procedures for fieldtesting various categories of engines. See the standard-setting part for specific provisions for a particular type of engine. Before using this subpart's procedures for field testing, read the standard-setting part to answer at least the following questions: (1) How many engines must I test in the field? (2) How many times must I repeat a field test on an individual engine? (3) How do I select vehicles for field testing? (4) What maintenance steps may I take before or between tests? (5) What data are needed for a single field test on an individual engine?(6) What are the limits on ambient conditions for field testing? Note that the ambient condition limits in §1065.520 do not apply for field testing. Field testing may occur at any ambient temperature, pressure, and humidity unless othe rwise specified in the standard-setting part. (7) Which exhaust constituents do I need to measure? (8) How do I account for crankcase emissions? (9) Which engine and ambient parameters do I need to measure? (10) How do I process the data recorded during field testing to determine if my engine meets field-testing standards? How do I determine individual test intervals? Note that “test interval” is defined in subpart K of this part 1065.(11) Should I warm up the test engine before measuring emissions, or do I need to measure coldstart emissions during a warm-up segment of in-use operation? (12) Do any unique specifications apply for test fuels? (13) Do any special conditions invalidate part s of a field test or all of a field test? (14) Does any special measurement allowance apply to field-test emission results or standards, based on using PEMS for field-testing versus using laboratory equipment and instruments for laboratory testing? (15) Do results of initial field testing trigge r any requirement for additional field testing or laboratory testing? (16) How do I report field-testing results? (d) Field testing and this part 1065 . Use the following specifications for field testing: (1) Use the applicability and general provisions of subpart A of this part. (2) Use equipment specifications in §1065.101 and in the sections from §1065.140 to the end of subpart B of this part, with the exception of §1065.140(e)(1) and (4), §1065.170(c)(1)(vi), and §1065.195(c). Section 1065.910 identifies additiona l equipment that is specific to field testing. (i) For PM samples, configure dilution systems as follows: (A) Use good engineering judgment to control diluti on air temperature. If you choose to directly and actively control dilution air temperature, set the temperature to 25 °C. (B) Control sample temperature to a (32 to 62) °C tolerance, as measured anywhere within 20 cm upstream or downstream of the PM storage media (s uch as a filter or oscillating crystal), where the tolerance applies only during sampling. (C) Maintain filter face velocity to a (5 to 100) cm/s tolerance for flow-through media. Compliance with this provision can be verified by engineering analysis. This provision does not apply for non-flow-through media. (ii) For inertial PM balances, there is no requ irement to control the stabilization environment temperature or dewpoint. (3) Use measurement instruments in subpart C of this part, except as specified in §1065.915. (4) Use calibrations and verifications in subpart D of this part, except as specified in §1065.920. Section 1065.920 also specifies additional calibrations and verifications for field testing. (5) Use the provisions of the standard-setting pa rt for selecting and maintaining engines in the field instead of the specificati ons in subpart E of this part. (6) Use the procedures in §§1065.930 and 1065.935 to start and run a field test. If you use a gravimetric balance for PM, weigh PM samples according to §§1065.590 and 1065.595. (7) Use the calculations in subpart G of this part to calculate emissions over each test interval. Note that “test interval” is defined in subpart K of this part 1065, and that the standard setting part indicates how to determine test interval s for your engine. Section 1065.940 specifies additional calculations for field testing. Use an y calculations specified in the standard-setting Deleted: diluent (i.e.,

Deleted: )

Deleted: diluentpart to determine if your engines meet the field- testing standards. The standard-setting part may also contain additional calculations that dete rmine when further field testing is required. (8) Use a typical in-use fuel meeting the specifications of §1065.701(d). (9) Use the lubricant and coolant specifications in §1065.740 and §1065.745. (10) Use the analytical gases and other calibration standards in §1065.750 and §1065.790. (11) If you are testing with oxygenated fuels, use the procedures specified for testing with oxygenated fuels in subpart I of this part. (12) Apply the definitions and reference materials in subpart K of this part. (e) Laboratory testing using PEMS . You may use PEMS for testing in a laboratory as described in §1065.901(b). Use the following procedures and specifications when using PEMS for laboratory testing: (1) Use the applicability and general provisions of subpart A of this part. (2) Use equipment specifications in subpart B of this part. Section 1065.910 specifies additional equipment specific to testing with PEMS. (3) Use measurement instruments in subpart C of this part, except as specified in §1065.915. (4) Use calibrations and verifications in subpart D of this part, except as specified in §1065.920. Section 1065.920 also specifies additional calibration and verifications for PEMS. (5) Use the provisions of §1065.401 for selecting engines for testing. Use the provisions of subpart E of this part for maintaining engines, ex cept as specified in the standard-setting part. (6) Use the procedures in subpart F of this part and in the standard-setting part to start and run a laboratory test. (7) Use the calculations in subpart G of this part to calculate emissions over the applicable duty cycle. Section 1065.940 specifies additional calculations for testing with PEMS. (8) Use a fuel meeting the specifications of subpar t H of this part, as specified in the standardsetting part. (9) Use the lubricant and coolant specifications in §1065.740 and §1065.745. (10) Use the analytical gases and other calibration standards in §1065.750 and §1065.790. (11) If you are testing with oxygenated fuels, use the procedures specified for testing with oxygenated fuels in subpart I of this part. (12) Apply the definitions and reference materials in subpart K of this part. (f) Summary . The following table summarizes the requirements of paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section:Table 1 of §1065.905–Summary of testing requirements that are specified outside of this subpart JSubpart Applicability for field testing1Applicability for laboratory orsimilar testing with PEMSwithout restriction1Applicability for laboratory orsimilar testing with PEMS withrestrictions1A: Applicability and generalprovisionsUse all. Use all. Use all.B: Equipment for testingUse §1065.101 and §1065.140 through the end of subpart B, except§1065.140(e)(1) and (4), §1065.170(c)(1)(vi), and §1065.195(c).§1065.910 specifies equipment specific to field testing.Use all.Use all.§1065.910 specifies equipmentspecific to laboratory testingwith PEMS.C: Measurement instrumentsUse all.§1065.915 allows deviations.Use all except §1065.295(c).Use all except §1065.295(c).§1065.915 allows deviations.D: Calibrations andverificationsUse all except §1065.308 and §1065.309.§1065.920 allows deviations, but also has additional specifications.Use all.Use all.§1065.920 allows deviations, butalso has additionalspecifications.E: Test engine selection,maintenance, and durabilityDo not use.Use standard-setting part.Use all. Use all.F: Running an emission test inthe laboratoryUse §§1065.590 and 1065.595 for PM§1065.930 and §1065.935 to start and run a field test.Use all. Use all.G: Calculations and datarequirementsUse all.§1065.940 has additional calculation instructionsUse all.Use all.§1065.940 has additionalcalculation instructionsH: Fuels, engine fluids,analytical gases, and othercalibration materialsUse all. Use all. Use all.I: Testing with oxygenatedfuelsUse all. Use all. Use all.K: Definitions and referencematerialsUse all. Use all. Use all.1Refer to paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section for complete specifications.§1065.910 PEMS auxiliary equipment for field testing. For field testing you may use various types of auxiliary equipment to attach PEMS to a vehicle or engine and to power PEMS. (a) When you use PEMS, you may route engine intake air or exhaust through a flow meter. Route the engine intake air or exhaust as follows: (1) Flexible connections . Use short flexible connectors where necessary. (i) You may use flexible connectors to enlarge or reduce the pipe diameters to match that of your test equipment. (ii) We recommend that you use flexible connectors that do not exceed a length of three times their largest inside diameter. (iii) We recommend that you use four-ply silicone -fiberglass fabric with a temperature rating of at least 315 °C for flexible connectors. You may use connectors with a spring-steel wire helix for support and you may use Nomex TM coverings or linings for durability. You may also use any other nonreactive material with equivalent permea tion-resistance and durability, as long as it seals tightly. (iv) Use stainless-steel hose clamps to seal flexible connectors, or use clamps that seal equivalently. (v) You may use additional flexible conn ectors to connect to flow meters. (2) Tubing . Use rigid 300 series stainless steel tubing to connect between flexible connectors. Tubing may be straight or bent to accommodate vehicle geometry. You may use “T” or “Y” fittings made of 300 series stainless steel tubing to join multiple connections, or you may cap or plug redundant flow paths if the engine manufacturer recommends it. (3) Flow restriction . Use flow meters, connectors, and tubing that do not increase flow restriction so much that it exceeds the manufacturer’s maximum specified value. You mayverify this at the maximum exhaust flow rate by measuring pressure at the manufacturerspecified location with your system connected. You may also perform an engineering analysis to verify an acceptable configuration, taking into account the maximum exhaust flow rate expected, the field test system’s flexible connectors, and the tubing’s characteristics for pressure drops versus flow. (b) For vehicles or other motive equipment, we recommend installing PEMS in the same location where a passenger might sit. Follow PEMS manu facturer instructions for installing PEMS in cargo spaces, engine spaces, or externally such that PEMS is directly exposed to the outside environment. We recommend locating PEMS where it will be subject to minimal sources of the following parameters: (1) Ambient temperature changes. (2) Ambient pressure changes. (3) Electromagnetic radiation. (4) Mechanical shock and vibration. (5) Ambient hydrocarbons–if using a FID analyzer that uses ambient air as FID burner air. (c) Use mounting hardware as required for securing flexible connectors, ambient sensors, and other equipment. Use structurally sound mountin g points such as vehicle frames, trailer hitch receivers, walk spaces, and payload tie-down fittings. We recommend mounting hardware such as clamps, suction cups, and magnets that are specifically designed for your application. We also recommend considering mounting hardware such as commercially available bicycle racks, trailer hitches, and luggage racks where applicable.(d) Field testing may require portable electrical power to run your test equipment. Power your equipment, as follows: (1) You may use electrical power from the vehicle, equipment, or vessel, up to the highest power level, such that all the following are true: (i) The power system is capable of safely supplying power, such that the power demand for testing does not overload the power system. (ii) The engine emissions do not change significan tly as a result the power demand for testing. (iii) The power demand for testing does not increase output from the engine by more than 1 % of its maximum power. (2) You may install your own portable power supp ly. For example, you may use batteries, fuel cells, a portable generator, or any other power supply to supplement or replace your use of vehicle power. You may connect an external power source directly to the vehicle’s, vessel’s, or equipment’s power system; however, during a test interval (such as an NTE event) you must not supply power to the vehicle’s power system in excess of 1 % of the engine’s maximum power.

§1065.915 PEMS instruments. (a) Instrument specifications . We recommend that you use PEMS that meet the specifications of subpart C of this part. For unrestricted use of PEMS in a laboratory or similar environment, use a PEMS that meets the same specifications as each lab instrument it replaces. For field testing or for testing with PEMS in a laboratory or similar environment, under the provisions of §1065.905(b), the specifications in the following table apply instead of the specifications in Table 1 of §1065.205.Table 1 of §1065.915–Recommended minimum PEMS measurement instrument performanceMeasurementMeasuredquantity symbolRise time,t10-90,andFall time,t90-10Recording updatefrequencyAccuracy1Repeatability1Noise1Engine speed transducerfn1 s 1 Hz means5 % of pt. or1 % of max.2 % of pt. or1 % of max.0.5 % of maxEngine torque estimator, BSFC(This is a signal from an engine’s ECM)Tor BSFC 1 s 1 Hz means8 % of pt. or5 % of max.2 % of pt. or1 % of max.1 % of max.General pressure transducer(not a part of another instrument)p5 s 1 Hz5 % of pt. or5 % of max.2 % of pt. or0.5 % of max.1 % of maxAtmospheric pressure meterpatmos50 s 0.1 Hz 250 Pa 200 Pa 100 PaGeneral temperature sensor(not a part of another instrument)T5 s 1 Hz1 % of pt. K or5 K0.5 % of pt. K or2 K0.5 % of max0.5 KGeneral dewpoint sensorTdew50 s 0.1 Hz 3 K 1 K 1 KExhaust flow metern1 s 1 Hz means5 % of pt. or3 % of max.2 % of pt. 2 % of max.Dilution air, inlet air, exhaust, and sampleflow metersn1 s 1 Hz means2.5 % of pt. or1.5 % of max.1.25 % of pt. or0.75 % of max.1 % of max.Continuous gas analyzerx5 s 1 Hz4 % of pt. or4 % of meas.2 % of pt. or2 % of meas.1 % of max.Gravimetric PM balancemPMN/A N/A See §1065.7900.5gN/AInertial PM balancemPMN/A N/A4 % of pt. or4 % of meas.2 % of pt. or2 % of meas.1 % of max1Accuracy, repeatability, and noise are all determined with the same collected data, as described in §1065.305, and based on absolute values. “pt.” refers to the overallflow-weighted mean value expected at the standard; “max.” refers to the peak value expected at the standard over any test interval, not the maximum of the instrument’srange; “meas” refers to the actual flow-weighted mean measured over any test interval.(b) Redundant measurements . For all PEMS described in this subpart, you may use data from multiple instruments to calculate test results for a single test. If you use redundant systems, use good engineering judgment to use multiple measured values in calculations or to disregard individual measurements. Note that you must keep your results from all measurements, as described in §1065.25. This requirement applies whether or not you actually use the measurements in your calculations. (c) Field-testing ambient effects on PEMS . We recommend that you use PEMS that are only minimally affected by ambient conditions such as temperature, pressure, humidity, physical orientation, mechanical shock and vibrati on, electromagnetic radiation, and ambient hydrocarbons. Follow the PEMS manufacturer’s in structions for proper installation to isolate PEMS from ambient conditions that affect their performance. If a PEMS is inherently affected by ambient conditions that you cannot control, you may monitor those conditions and adjust the PEMS signals to compensate for the ambient effe ct. The standard-setting part may also specify the use of one or more field-testing adjustment s or measurement allowances that you apply to results or standards to account for ambient effects on PEMS. (d) ECM signals . You may use signals from the engine’s electronic control module (ECM) in place of values measured by individual instru ments within a PEMS, subject to the following provisions: (1) Recording ECM signals . If your ECM updates a broadcast signal more or less frequently than 1 Hz, process data as follows: (i) If your ECM updates a broadcast signal more frequently than 1 Hz, use PEMS to sample and record the signal’s value more frequently. Calculate and record the 1 Hz mean of the more frequently updated data. (ii) If your ECM updates a broadcast signal less frequently than 1 Hz, use PEMS to sample and record the signal’s value at the most frequent rate. Linearly interpolate between recorded values and record the interpolated values at 1 Hz. (iii) Optionally, you may use PEMS to electronical ly filter the ECM signals to meet the rise time and fall time specifications in Table 1 of this section. Record the filtered signal at 1 Hz. (2) Omitting ECM signals . Replace any discontinuous or ir rational ECM data with linearly interpolated values from adjacent data. (3) Aligning ECM signals with other data . You must perform time-alignment and dispersion of ECM signals, according to PEMS manufacturer instructions and using good engineering judgment. (4) ECM signals for determining test intervals . You may use any combination of ECM signals, with or without other measurements, to determine the start-time and end-time of a test interval. (5) ECM signals for determining brake-specific emissions . You may use any combination ofECM signals, with or without other measurements, to estimate engine speed, torque, brakespecific fuel consumption (BSFC, in units of mass of fuel per kW-hr), and fuel rate for use in brake-specific emission calculations. We recommend that the overall performance of any speed, torque, or BSFC estimator should meet the performance specifications in Table 1 of this section. We recommend using one of the following methods: (i) Speed . Use the engine speed signal directly from the ECM. This signal is generally accurate and precise. You may develop your own speed algorithm based on other ECM signals. (ii) Torque . Use one of the following:(A) ECM torque . Use the engine-torque signal directly fro m the ECM, if broadcast. Determine if this signal is proportional to indicated torque or brake torque. If it is proportional to indicated torque, subtract friction torque from indicated torque and record the result as brake torque. Friction torque may be a separate signal broadcast from the ECM or you may have to determine it from laboratory data as a function of engine speed. (B) ECM %-load . Use the %-load signal directly from th e ECM, if broadcast. Determine if this signal is proportional to indicated torque or brake torque. If it is propor tional to indicated torque, subtract the minimum %-load value from the %- load signal. Multiply this result by the maximum brake torque at the corresponding engine speed. Maximum brake torque versus speed information is commonly published by the engine manufacturer. (C) Your algorithms . You may develop and use your own combination of ECM signals to determine torque. (iii) BSFC . Use one of the following: (A) Use ECM engine speed and ECM fuel flow signals to interpolate brake-specific fuel consumption data, which might be available from an engine laboratory as a function of ECM engine speed and ECM fuel signals. (B) Use a single BSFC value that approximates the BSFC value over a test interval (as defined in subpart K of this part). This value may be a nominal BSFC value for all engine operation determined over one or more laboratory duty cycles, or it may be any other BSFC that you determine. If you use a nominal BSFC, we recommend that you select a value based on the BSFC measured over laboratory duty cycles that best represent the range of engine operation that defines a test interval for field-testing. You ma y use the methods of this paragraph (d)(5)(iii)(B) only if it does not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate compliance with applicable standards. (C) You may develop and use your own combination of ECM signals to determine BSFC. (iv) ECM fuel rate . Use the fuel rate signal directly from the ECM and chemical balance to determine the molar flow rate of exhaust. Use §1065.655(d) to determine the carbon mass fraction of fuel. Note that if the fuel rate drops below 10 % of the manufacturer-declared maximum fuel rate, the ratio of the emission concentr ations to fuel rate will be held constant at that value; this ratio will apply until the fuel rate increases above 10 % of the manufacturerdeclared maximum fuel rate. You may alternatively develop and use your own combination of ECM signals to determine fuel mass flow rate. (v) Other ECM signals . You may ask to use other ECM signals for determining brake-specific emissions, such as ECM air flow. We must approve the use of such signals in advance. (6) Permissible deviations . ECM signals may deviate from the specifications of this part 1065, but the expected deviation must not prevent you from demonstrating that you meet the applicable standards. For example, your emission results may be sufficiently below an applicable standard, such that the deviation would not significantly change the result. As another example, a very low engine-coolant temperature may define a l ogical statement that determines when a test interval may start. In this case, even if the ECM’s sensor for detecting coolant temperature was not very accurate or repeatable, its output would never deviate so far as to significantly affect when a test interval may start. (e) Engine speed transducers. You may use an externally mounted engine speed transducer to measure engine speed. Select an engine speed transducer that generates a signal in linear proportion to engine speed. We recommend that you use an engine speed transducer that meetsthe specifications in Table 1 of this section. R ecord engine speed transducer output according to this subpart J. Calibrate and verify engine transducer performance according to §1065.920(c). You may use any type of engine speed transducer that meets the calibration and verification requirements in §1065.920(c) , including the following specific types: (1) A magnetic flux sensor speed transducer mounted on the housing of an engine-driven alternator. (2) A ferromagnetic material sensor speed transducer (known as a “mag pickup”) that detects when a ferromagnetic rotating engine part periodically comes close to the sensor. (3) A ripple voltage sensor speed transducer co nnected across the positive and negative terminals of an engine’s electrical system, where the el ectrical system is powered by an engine-driven alternator. In some cases this sensor may be si mply plugged into an electric accessory receptacle such as for cigarette lighters. (4) An optical sensor speed transducer that det ects when a light-reflective rotating engine part periodically comes close to the sensor. Reflective tape or other reflective material may be added to the rotating engine part for clearer detection.

§1065.920 PEMS Calibrations and verifications. (a) Subsystem calibrations and verifications . Use all the applicable calibrations and verifications in subpart D of this part, including the linearity verifications in §1065.307, to calibrate and verify PEMS. Note that a PEMS does not have to meet the system-response and updating-recording verifications of §1065.308 and §1065.309 if it meets the overall verification described in paragraph (b) of this section or if it measures PM using any method other than that described in §1065.170(c)(1) . This section does not apply to ECM signals. Note that because the regulations of this part require you to use good engineering judgment, it may be necessary to perform additional verifications and analysis. It may also be necessary to limit the range of conditions under which the PEMS can be used or to include specific additional maintenance to ensure that it functions properly under the test conditions. As provided in 40 CFR 1068.5, we will deem your system to not meet the requirements of this section if we determine that you did not use good engineering judgment to verify the measurement equipment. We may also deem it to meet these requirements only under certain test conditions. If we ask for it, you must send us a summary of your verifications. We may also ask you to provide additional information or analysis to support your conclusions. (b) Overall verification

. This paragraph (b) specifies methods and criteria for verifying the overall performance of systems not fully compliant with requirements that apply for laboratory testing. Maintain records to show that the particular make, model, and configuration of your PEMS meets this verification. Y ou may rely on data and other information from the PEMS manufacturer. However, we recommend that you generate your own record to show that your specific PEMS meets this verification. If you upgrade or change the configuration of your PEMS, your record must show that your new configuration meets this verification. The verification required by this section consists of operating an engine over a duty cycle in the laboratory and statistically comparing data ge nerated and recorded by the PEMS with data simultaneously generated and recorded by laboratory equipment as follows: (1) Mount an engine on a dynamometer for laboratory testing. Prepare the laboratory and PEMS for emission testing, as described in this part, to get simultaneous measurements. We Deleted: We require only that you maintain a record showing

Deleted: We recommend that you generate your own record to show that your specific PEMS meets this verification, but y

Deleted: alsorecommend selecting an engine with emission leve ls close to the applicable duty-cycle standards, if possible. (2) Select or create a duty cycle th at has all the following characteristics: (i) Engine operation that represents normal in-use speeds, loads, and degree of transient activity. Consider using data from previous field tests to generate a cycle. (ii) A duration of (20 to 40) min. (iii) At least 50 % of engine operating time must include at least 10 valid test intervals for calculating emission levels for field testing. For example, for highway compression-ignition engines, select a duty cycle in which at least 50 % of the engine operating time can be used to calculate valid NTE events. (3) Starting with a warmed-up engine, run a va lid emission test with the duty cycle from paragraph (b)(2) of this section. The laboratory and PEMS must both meet applicable validation requirements, such as drift validation, hydroc arbon contamination validation, and proportional validation. (4) Determine the brake-specific emissions for e ach test interval for both laboratory and the PEMS measurements, as follows: (i) For both laboratory and PEMS measurements, use identical values to determine the beginning and end of each test interval. (ii) For both laboratory and PEMS measurements , use identical values to determine total work over each test interval. (iii) If the standard-setting part specifies the us e of a measurement allowance for field testing, also apply the measurement allowance during calibration using good engineering judgment. If the measurement allowance is normally added to the standard, this means you must subtract the measurement allowance from the measured PEMS brake-specific emission result. (iv) Round results to the same number of significant digits as the standard. (5) Repeat the engine duty cycle and calculations until you have at least 100 valid test intervals. (6) For each test interval and emission, s ubtract the lab result from the PEMS result. (7) The PEMS passes the verification of this paragraph (b) if any one of the following are true for each constituent: (i) 91 % or more of the differences are zero or greater than zero. (ii) The entire set of test-interval results passes the 95 % confidence alternate-procedure statistics for field testing (t-test and F-test) specified in §1065.12

. (c) Calibration and verification of engine speed transducers. Calibrate and verify the performance of externally mounted engine speed transducers in-situ as follows: (1) Scope and frequency. Calibrate and verify the transducer after you have mounted it to the equipment and connected it to the PEMS. Calibrate and verify the transducer using a reference tachometer. (2) Measurement principles. The transducer must be calibrated in-situ because its output signal (voltage, current, or frequency) may depend on an input signal from a component whose rotational speed differs from the engine’s rotational speed. (3) System requirements. Calibrate the speed transducer and verify the calculated conversion to engine speeds before starting each field test. The PEMS meets verification requirements if it records engine speed to within ±2.5 % of the appropriate reference speed at idle speed, at a midpoint engine speed, and at high engine speed. (4) Speed transducer calibration procedure. Calibrate the speed transducer as follows: Deleted: this

Deleted: less

Deleted: subpart A of this part

Comment [CAL26]: This begs the question – if the part rotates 1:1 with engine rpm, why is ex-situ not ok?(i) Select a reference tachometer that is NIST -traceable within ±0.1 % uncertainty over the engine’s speed range. Pair the reference tachometer with an engine component that has the same rotational speed as the crankshaft. You may accomplish this either by mechanically coupling the reference tachometer to the engine component or by using an optical reference tachometer that measures light reflected from the engine component. We recommend you use a reference tachometer that records average engine speed over at least a 30 second interval. (ii) Set up the reference tachometer according to the tachometer manufacturer’s instructions. Mount and connect the engine speed transducer and the PEMS as they will be installed during the field test according to transducer and PEMS manufacturers’ instructions. (iii) Start the engine and operate it at idle speed. Allow time for the engine speed to stabilize. This may include time for the engine to reach a stable operating temperature. (iv) While the PEMS receives the engine speed transducer signal and the reference tachometer measures engine speed, record at least 30 second s of this speed data with both the PEMS and the reference tachometer. Calculate the arithmetic means for the PEMS and the reference tachometer data. (v) Increase operator demand with no engine loading to achieve an engine speed at the highest speed expected during testing. Allow time for th e engine speed to stabilize. This may include time for the engine to reach a stable operating temperature at the higher speed. Repeat the measurement and calculation described in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section. (vi) Calculate the slope, a 1y , and intercept, a 0y , of the arithmetic means, using the reference tachometer’s means as the y i and the PEMS’s means as y refi . See §1065.602(h) and (i). Use these slope and intercept values to convert the engine speed transducer signals to engine speed. Do this by multiplying each value from the engine speed transducer by a 1y and then adding a 0y . We recommend programming this conversion into the PEMS such that it converts the speed transducer data directly to engine speed; you may instead do this conversion with a separate post-processor. (5) Speed conversion verification procedure. Verify the conversion of engine speed transducer data to engine speed as follows: (i) Start and operate it at idle speed. Allow ti me for the engine speed to stabilize. This may include time for the engine to reach a stable operating temperature. Perform the measurement and calculation described in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section. (ii) Increase operator demand with no engine loading to achieve an engine speed near the midpoint between idle speed and the high engine speed used for calibration. Allow time for the engine speed to stabilize. This may include time for the engine to reach a stable operating temperature at the higher speed. Repeat the measurement and calculation described in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section. (iii) Increase operator demand with no engine load ing to achieve an engine speed at the highest speed expected during testing. Allow time for th e engine speed to stabilize. This may include time for the engine to reach a stable operating temperature at the higher speed. Repeat the measurement and calculation described in paragraph (c)(4)(iv) of this section. (iv) Convert all engine speed transducer signals to engine speed as described in paragraph (c)(4)(vi) of this section. (v) Verify that all the converted engine speed values for all three engine speeds are within the performance specification in para graph (c)(3) of this section. Comment [CAL27]: The engine is already stabilized at idle, so this sentence is only meaningful if we say that they need to re-stabilize for high speed, or? On the other hand, if the engine runs on a thermostat, I'm not sure that this applies. Same applies for (c)(5).
Comment [CAL28]: (vi) Establishes that the measured speeds belong to the PEMS (based on speed transducer inputs). I might rather describe these as "speed transducer measurements", but if we go with these as PEMS measurements, let's use that consistently.(6) Remedial action. If any speed point falls outside the performance specification in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, we recommend taking the following remedial action and then repeating the calibration and verification procedure: (i) Verify that the speed transducer is mounted securely and that the reference tachometer is functioning properly. (ii) Verify that the rotating engine component sens ed by the transducer is not subject to problems such as a slipping belt that might prevent the component from rotating at the same speed as the engine’s crankshaft. (iii) Verify the linearity of the speed transducer in a laboratory as described in §1065.307. (7) Exception. You may perform an emission test after failing to meet the performance specification in paragraph (c)(3) of this section if you show that such a failure does not adversely affect your ability to demonstrate comp liance with applicable emission standards.

§1065.925 PEMS preparation for field testing. Take the following steps to prepare PEMS for field testing: (a) Verify that ambient conditions at the start of the test are within the limits specified in the standard-setting part. Continue to monitor th ese values to determine if ambient conditions exceed the limits during the test. (b) Install a PEMS and any accessories needed to conduct a field test. (c) Power the PEMS and allow pressures, temperat ures, and flows to stabilize to their operating set points. (d) Bypass or purge any gaseous sampling PEMS instruments with ambient air until sampling begins to prevent system contamination from excessive cold-start emissions. (e) Conduct calibrations and verifications. (f) Operate any PEMS dilution systems at th eir expected flow rates using a bypass. (g) If you use a gravimetric balance to determine whether an engine meets an applicable PM standard, follow the procedures for PM sample preconditioning and tare weighing as described in §1065.590. Operate the PM-sampling system at its expected flow rates using a bypass. (h) Verify the amount of contam ination in the PEMS HC sampling system before the start of the field test as follows: (1) Select the HC analyzer range for measuring the maximum concentration expected at the HC standard. (2) Zero the HC analyzer using a zero gas or ambient air introduced at the analyzer port. When zeroing a FID, use the FID’s burner air that would be used for in-use measurements (generally either ambient air or a portable source of burner air). (3) Span the HC analyzer using span gas introduced at the analyzer port. (4) Overflow zero or ambient air at the HC probe inlet or into a tee near the probe outlet. (5) Measure the HC concentration in the sampling system: (i) For continuous sampling, record the mean HC concentration as overflow zero air flows. (ii) For batch sampling, fill the sample medium and record its mean concentration. (6) Record this value as th e initial HC concentration, x THCinit , and use it to correct measured values as described in §1065.660. (7) If the initial HC concentration exceeds the greater of the followin g values, determine the source of the contamination and take corrective action, such as purging the system or replacing contaminated portions:(i) 2 % of the flow-weighted mean concentration expected at the standard or measured during testing. (ii) 2  mol/mol. (8) If corrective action does not resolve the deficiency, you may use a contaminated HC system if it does not prevent you from demonstrating comp liance with the applicable emission standards.

§1065.930 Engine starting, restarting, and shutdown. Unless the standard-setting part specifies otherwise, start, restart, and shut down the test engine for field testing as follows: (a) Start or restart the engine as described in the owners manual. (b) If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, stop cranking and determine the reason it failed to start. However, you may crank the engine longer than 15 seconds, as long as the owners manual or the service-repair manual describes the longer cranking time as normal. (c) Respond to engine stalling with the following steps: (1) If the engine stalls during a required warm-up before emission sampling begins, restart the engine and continue warm-up. (2) If the engine stalls at any other time afte r emission sampling begins, restart the engine and continue testing. (d) Shut down and restart the engine according to the manufacturer’s specifications, as needed during normal operation in-use, but continue emissi on sampling until the field test is complete.

§1065.935 Emission test sequence for field testing. (a) Time the start of field testing as follows: (1) If the standard-setting part requires only hot-stabilized emission measurements, operate the engine in-use until the engine coolant, block, or head absolute temperature is within ±10 % of its mean value for the previous 2 min or until an engi ne thermostat controls engine temperature with coolant or air flow. (2) If the standard-setting part requires hot-start emission measurements, shut down the engine after at least 2 min at the temperat ure tolerance specified in paragra ph (a)(1) of this section. Start the field test within 20 min of engine shutdown. (3) If the standard-setting part requires cold-start emission meas urements, proceed to the steps specified in paragraph (b) of this section. (b) Take the following steps before emission sampling begins: (1) For batch sampling, connect clean storage media, such as evacuated bags or tare-weighed PM sample media. (2) Operate the PEMS according to the instrument manufacturer’s instructions and using good engineering judgment. (3) Operate PEMS heaters, dilution systems, sample pumps, cooling fans, and the data-collection system. (4) Pre-heat or pre-cool PEMS heat exchangers in the sampling system to within their tolerances for operating temperatures. (5) Allow all other PEMS components such as samp le lines, filters, and pumps to stabilize at operating temperature. (6) Verify that no significant vacuum-side leak exists in the PEMS, as described in §1065.345. (7) Adjust PEMS flow rates to desired levels, using bypass flow if applicable.(8) Zero and span all PEMS gas analyzers using NIST-traceable gases that meet the specifications of §1065.750. (c) Start testing as follows: (1) Before the start of the first test interval, zero or re-zero any PEMS electronic integrating devices, as needed. (2) If the engine is already running and warmed up and starting is not part of field testing, start the field test by simultaneously starting to sample exhaust, record engine and ambient data, and integrate measured values using a PEMS. (3) If engine starting is part of field testing, start field testing by simultaneously starting to sample from the exhaust system, record engine and ambient data, and integrate measured values using a PEMS. Then start the engine. (d) Continue the test as follows:(1) Continue to sample exhaust, record data and integrate measured values throughout normal inuse operation of the engine. (2) Between each test interval, zero or re-zero an y electronic integrating devices, and reset batch storage media, as needed. (3) The engine may be stopped and started, but continue to sample emissions throughout the entire field test. (4) Conduct periodic verifications such as zero and span verifications on PEMS gas analyzers, as recommended by the PEMS manufacturer or as indicated by good engineering judgment. Results from these verifications will be used to calculate and correct for drift according to paragraph (g) of this section. Do not include data recorded during verifications in emission calculations. (5) You may periodically condition and analyze batch samples in-situ, including PM samples; for example you may condition an inertial PM balance substrate if you use an inertial balance to measure PM. (6) You may have personnel monitoring and adjusting the PEMS during a test, or you may operate the PEMS unattended. (e) Stop testing as follows: (1) Continue sampling as needed to get an appropriate amount of emission measurement, according to the standard setting part. If the stan dard-setting part does not describe when to stop sampling, develop a written protocol before you start testing to establish how you will stop sampling. You may not determine when to stop testing based on emission results. (2) At the end of the field test, allow the samplin g systems’ response time s to elapse and then stop sampling. Stop any integrators and indicate the end of the test cycle on the data-collection medium. (3) You may shut down the engine before or after you stop sampling. (f) For any proportional batch sample, such as a ba g sample or PM sample, verify for each test interval whether or not proportional sampling was maintained according to §1065.545. Void the sample for any test interval that did not maintain proportional sampling according to §1065.545. (g) Take the following steps after emission sampling is complete: (1) As soon as practical after the emission sampling, analyze any gaseous batch samples. (2) If you used dilution air, either analyze background samples or assume that background emissions were zero. Refer to §1065.140 for dilution-air specifications.(3) After quantifying all exhaust ga ses, record mean analyzer valu es after stabilizing a zero gas to each analyzer, then record mean analyzer values after stabilizing the span gas to the analyzer. Stabilization may include time to purge an analyzer of any sample gas, plus any additional time to account for analyzer response. Use these recorded values to correct for drift as described in §1065.550. (4) Invalidate any test intervals that do not meet the range criteria in §1065.550. Note that it is acceptable that analyzers exceed 100 % of their ranges when measuring emissions between test intervals, but not during test inte rvals. You do not have to retest an engine in the field if the range criteria are not met. (5) Invalidate any test intervals that do not meet the drift criterion in §1065.550. For NMHC,invalidate any test intervals if the difference between the uncorrected and the corrected brakespecific NMHC emission values are within ±10 % of the uncorrected results or the applicable standard, whichever is greater. For test intervals that do meet the drift criterion, correct those test intervals for drift according to §1065.672 and use the drift corrected results in emissions calculations. (6) Unless you weighed PM in-situ, such as by using an inertial PM balance, place any used PM samples into covered or sealed containers and return them to the PM-stabilization environment and weigh them as described in §1065.595.

§1065.940 Emission calculations. (a) Perform emission calculations as descri bed in §1065.650 to calculate brake-specific emissions for each test interval using any applicab le information and instructions in the standardsetting part. You must report emission results using the same calculation method (§1065.650(a)(1), §1065.650(a)(3), or §1065.915(d)(5)(iv)) for all regulated pollutants for a given shift-day. (b) You may use a fixed molar mass for the diluted exhaust mixture for field testing. Determine this fixed value by engineering analysis.Subpart K—Definitions and Other Reference Information

§1065.1001 Definitions. The definitions in this section apply to this part. The definitions apply to all subparts unless we note otherwise. All undefined terms have the meaning the Act gives them. The definitions follow: 300 series stainless steel means any stainless steel alloy with a Unified Numbering System for Metals and Alloys number designated from S30100 to S39000. For all instances in this part where we specify 300 series stainless st eel, such parts must also have a smooth innerwall construction. We recommend an average roughness, R a , no greater than 4  m. Accuracy means the absolute difference between a reference quantity and the arithmetic mean of ten mean measurements of that quantity. Determine instrument accuracy, repeatability, and noise from the same data set. We specify a procedure for determining accuracy in §1065.305. Act means the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. 7401 - 7671q. Adjustable parameter means any device, system, or element of design that someone can adjust (including those which are difficult to acces s) and that, if adjusted, may affect emissions or engine performance during emission testing or normal in-use operation. This includes, but is not limited to, parameters related to injection timi ng and fueling rate. In some cases, this may exclude a parameter that is difficult to access if it cannot be adjusted to affect emissions without significantly degrading engine performance, or if it will not be adjusted in a way that affects emissions during in-use operation. Aerodynamic diameter means the diameter of a spherical water droplet that settles at the same constant velocity as the particle being sampled. Aftertreatment means relating to a catalytic convert er, particulate filter, or any other system, component, or technology mounted downstream of the exhaust valve (or exhaust port) whose design function is to decrease emissions in the engine exhaust before it is exhausted to the environment. Exhaust-gas recirculation (EGR) and turbochargers are not aftertreatment. Allowed procedures means procedures that we either specify in this part 1065 or in the standard-setting part or approve under §1065.10. Alternate procedures means procedures allowed under §1065.10(c)(7). Applicable standard means an emission standard to which an engine is subject; or a family emission limit to which an engine is ce rtified under an emission credit program in the standard-setting part. Aqueous condensation means the precipitation of water-containing constituents from a gas phase to a liquid phase. Aqueous condens ation is a function of humidity, pressure, temperature, and concentrations of other constituents such as sulfuric acid. These parameters vary as a function of engine intake-air humidity, dilution-air humidity, engine air-to-fuel ratio, and fuel composition—including the amount of hydrogen and sulfur in the fuel. Atmospheric pressure means the wet, absolute, atmospheric static pressure. Note that if you measure atmospheric pressure in a duct, you must ensure that there are negligible pressure losses between the atmosphere and your measurement location, and you must account for changes in the duct’s static pr essure resulting from the flow. Auto-ranging means a gas analyzer function that automatically changes the analyzer digital resolution to a larger range of concentrations as the concentration approaches 100 % ofthe analyzer’s current range. Auto-ranging does not mean changing an analog amplifier gain within an analyzer. Auxiliary emission-control device means any element of design that senses temperature, motive speed, engine RPM, transmission gear, or any other parameter for the purpose ofactivating, modulating, delaying, or deactivating the operation of any part of the emissioncontrol system. Brake power has the meaning given in the standard-setting part. If it is not defined in the standard-setting part, brake power means the usab le power output of the engine, not including power required to fuel, lubricate, or heat the engi ne, circulate coolant to the engine, or to operate aftertreatment devices. If the engine does not po wer these accessories during a test, subtract the work required to perform these functions from th e total work used in brake-specific emission calculations. Subtract engine fan work from total work only for air-cooled engines. C 1 equivalent (or basis) means a convention of expressing HC concentrations based on the total number of carbon atoms present, such that the C 1 equivalent of a molar HC concentration equals the molar concentration mu ltiplied by the mean number of carbon atoms in each HC molecule. For example, the C 1 equivalent of 10  mol/mol of propane (C 3 H 8 ) is 30
 mol/mol. C 1 equivalent molar values may be denoted as “ppmC” in the standard-setting part. Molar mass may also be expressed on a C 1 basis. Note that calculating HC masses from molar concentrations and molar masses is only valid where they are each expressed on the same carbon basis. Calibration means the process of setting a measurement system’s response so that its output agrees with a range of reference si gnals. Contrast with “verification”. Calibration gas means a purified gas mixture used to calibrate gas analyzers. Calibration gases must meet the specifications of §1065.750. Note that calibration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analyzers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span gases. Certification means relating to the process of obtain ing a certificate of conformity for an engine family that complies with the emission standards and requirements in the standard-setting part. Compression-ignition means relating to a type of reciprocating, internal-combustion engine that is not a spark-ignition engine. Confidence interval means the range associated with a probability that a quantity will be considered statistically equivale nt to a reference quantity. Constant-speed engine means an engine whose certification is limited to constant-speed operation. Engines whose constant-speed governor function is removed or disabled are no longer constant-speed engines. Constant-speed operation means engine operation with a governor that automatically controls the operator demand to maintain engine speed, even under changing load. Governors do not always maintain speed exactly constant. Typically speed can decrease (0.1 to 10) % below the speed at zero load, such that the minimum speed occurs near the engine’s point of maximum
power. Coriolis meter means a flow-measurement instrument that determines the mass flow of a fluid by sensing the vibration and twist of sp ecially designed flow tubes as the flow passes through them. The twisting characteristic is calle d the Coriolis effect. According to Newton’sSecond Law of Motion, the amount of sensor tube twist is directly proportional to the mass flow rate of the fluid flowing through the tube. See §1065.220. Designated Compliance Officer means the Director, Compliance and Innovative Strategies Division (6405-J), U.S. Environmen tal Protection Agency, 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20460. Dewpoint means a measure of humidity stated as the equilibrium temperature at which water condenses under a given pressure from moist air with a given absolute humidity. Dewpoint is specified as a temperature in °C or K, and is valid only for the pressure at which it is measured. See §1065.645 to determine water vapor mole fractions from dewpoints using the pressure at which the dewpoint is measured. Discrete-mode means relating to a discrete-mode type of steady-state test, as described in the standard-setting part. Dispersion means either: (1) The broadening and lowering of a signal due to any fluid capacitance, fluid mixing, or electronic filtering in a sampling system. (Note: To adjust a signal so its dispersion matches that of another signal, you may adjust the system’s fluid capacitance, fluid mixing, or electronic filtering.) (2) The mixing of a fluid, especially as a result of fluid mechanical forces or chemical diffusion. Dilution ratio (DR) means the amount of diluted exhaust per amount of undiluted exhaust. Drift means the difference between a zero or calibration signal and the respective value reported by a measurement instrument immediately af ter it was used in an emission test, as long as you zeroed and spanned the instrument just before the test. Duty cycle means one of the following: (1) A series of speed and torque values (or power values) that an engine must follow during a laboratory test. Duty cycles are specified in the standard-setting part. A single duty cycle may consist of one or more test intervals. A series of speed and torque values meeting the definition of this paragraph (1) may also be considered a test cycle. For example, a duty cycle may be a ramped-modal cycle, which has one test interval; a cold-start plus hot-start transient cycle, which has two test intervals; or a discrete-mode cycl e, which has one test interval for each mode. (2) A set of weighting factors and the corresponding speed and torque values, where the weighting factors are used to co mbine the results of multiple te st intervals into a composite result. Electric power generation application means an application whose purpose is to generate a precise frequency of electricity, which is characterized by an engine that controls engine speed very precisely. This would generally not apply to welders or portable home generators. Electronic control module means an engine’s electronic device that uses data from engine sensors to control engine parameters. Emission-control system means any device, system, or element of design that controls or reduces the emissions of regulated pollutants from an engine. Emission-data engine means an engine that is tested for certification. This includes engines tested to establish deterioration factors. Emission-related maintenance means maintenance that substantially affects emissions or is likely to substantially af fect emission deterioration. Deleted: ¶ Engine means an engine to which this part applies.Engine family means a group of engines with similar emission characteristics throughout the useful life, as specified in the standard-setting part. Engine governed speed means the engine operating speed when it is controlled by the installed governor. Exhaust-gas recirculation means a technology that reduces emissions by routing exhaust gases that had been exhausted from the combustion chamber(s) back into the engine to be mixed with incoming air before or during combustion. The use of valve timing to increase the amount of residual exhaust gas in the combustion chamber(s) that is mixed with incoming air before or during combustion is not considered exhaust-gas recirculation for the purposes of this part. Fall time, t 90-10 , means the time interval of a measurement instrument’s response after any step decrease to the input between the following points: (1) The point at which the response has fallen 10% of the total amount it will fall in response to the step change. (2) The point at which the response has fallen 90% of the total amount it will fall in response to the step change. Flow-weighted mean means the mean of a quantity after it is weighted proportional to a corresponding flow rate. For example, if a ga s concentration is measured continuously from the raw exhaust of an engine, its flow-weighted mean concentration is the sum of the products of each recorded concentration times its respective exhaust flow rate, divided by the sum of the recorded flow rates. As another example, the bag concentration from a CVS system is the same as the flow-weighted mean concentration, becaus e the CVS system itself flow-weights the bag concentration. Fuel type means a general category of fuels such as gasoline or LPG. There can be multiple grades within a single type of fuel, such as all-season and winter-grade gasoline. Good engineering judgment means judgments made consistent with generally accepted scientific and engineering principles and all available relevant information. See 40 CFR 1068.5 for the administrative process we use to evaluate good engineering judgment. HEPA filter means high-efficiency pa rticulate air filters that are rated to achieve a minimum initial particle-removal efficiency of 99.97 % using ASTM F1471 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). High-idle speed means the engine speed at which an engine governor function controls engine speed with operator demand at maximum and with zero load applied. “Warm high-idle speed” is the high-idle speed of a warmed-up engine. High-speed governor means any device, system, or element of design that modulates the engine output torque for the purpose of limiting the maximum engine speed. Hydraulic diameter means the diameter of a circle whose area is equal to the area of a noncircular cross section of tubing, including its wa ll thickness. The wall thickness is included only for the purpose of facilitating a simplified and nonintrusive measurement. Hydrocarbon (HC) means THC, THCE, NMHC, or NMHCE, as applicable. Hydrocarbon generally means the hydrocarbon group on which the emission standards are based for each type of fuel and engine. Identification number means a unique specification (for example, a model number/serial number combination) that allows someone to distinguish a particular engine from other similar engines. Deleted: -93Idle speed means the engine speed at which an engine governor function controls engine speed with operator demand at minimum and with minimum load applied (greater than or equal to zero). For engines without a governor function that controls idle speed, idle speed means the manufacturer-declared value for lowest engine speed possible with minimum load. This definition does not apply for operation designated as “high-idle speed.” “Warm idle speed” is the idle speed of a warmed-up engine. Intermediate test speed has the meaning given in §1065.610. Linearity means the degree to which measured values agree with respective reference values. Linearity is quantified using a linear regression of pairs of measured values and reference values over a range of values expected or observed during testing. Perfect linearity would result in an intercept, a 0 , equal to zero, a slope, a 1 , of one, a coefficient of determination,

r 2 , of one, and a standard error of the estimate, SEE , of zero. The term "linearity" is not used in this part to refer to the shape of a measurement instrument’s unprocessed response curve, such as a curve relating emission concentration to volt age output. A properly performing instrument with a nonlinear response curve wi ll meet linearity specifications. Manufacturer has the meaning given in section 216(1) of the Act. In general, this term includes any person who manufactures an engine or vehicle for sale in the United States or otherwise introduces a new nonroad engine into commerce in the United States. This includes importers who import engines or vehicles for resale. Maximum test speed has the meaning given in §1065.610. Maximum test torque has the meaning given in §1065.610. Measurement allowance means a specified adjustment in the applicable emission standard or a measured emission value to reflect the relative quality of the measurement. See the standard-setting part to determine whether any measurement allowances apply for your testing. Measurement allowances generally apply only for field testing and are intended to account for reduced accuracy or precision that result from using field-grade measurement systems. Mode means one of the following: (1) A distinct combination of engine speed and load for steady-state testing. (2) A continuous combination of speeds and loads specifying a transition during a ramped-modal
test. (3) A distinct operator demand setting, such as would occur when testing locomotives or constant-speed engines. NIST-accepted means relating to a value that has been assigned or named by NIST. NIST-traceable means relating to a standard value that can be related to NIST-stated references through an unbroken chain of comparisons, all having stated uncertainties, as specified in NIST Technical Note 1297 (incorporated by reference in §1065.1010). Allowable uncertainty limits specified for NIST-traceability re fer to the propagated uncertainty specified by NIST. You may ask to use other internationally recognized standards that are equivalent to NIST standards. Noise means the precision of 30 seconds of updated recorded values from a measurement instrument as it quantifies a zero or reference valu e. Determine instrument noise, repeatability, and accuracy from the same data set. We specify a procedure for determining noise in §1065.305. Nonmethane hydrocarbons (NMHC) means the sum of all hydrocarbon species except methane. Refer to §1065.660 for NMHC determination.Nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent (NMHCE) means the sum of the carbon mass contributions of non-oxygenated nonmethane hydrocarbons, alcohols and aldehydes, or other organic compounds that are measured separately as contained in a gas sample, expressed as exhaust nonmethane hydrocarbon from petroleum-fueled engines. The hydrogen-to-carbon ratio of the equivalent hydrocarbon is 1.85:1. Nonroad means relating to nonroad engines. Nonroad engine has the meaning we give in 40 CFR 1068.30. In general this means all internal-combustion engines except motor vehicle engines, stationary engines, engines used solely for competition, or engines used in aircraft. Open crankcase emissions means any flow from an engine’s crankcase that is emitted directly into the environment. Crankcase emissions are not “open crankcase emissions” if the engine is designed to always route all crankcase emissions back into the engine (for example, through the intake system or an aftertreatment system) such that all the crankcase emissions, or their products, are emitted into the environment only through the engine exhaust system. Operator demand means an engine operator’s input to control engine output. The “operator” may be a person (i.e., manual), or a governor (i.e., automatic) that mechanically or electronically signals an input that demands engi ne output. Input may be from an accelerator pedal or signal, a throttle-control lever or signal, a fuel lever or signal, a speed lever or signal, or a governor setpoint or signal. Output means engine power, P , which is the product of engine speed , f

n , and engine torque, T

. Oxides of nitrogen means NO and NO 2 as measured by the procedures specified in §1065.270. Oxides of nitrogen are expressed quantitatively as if the NO is in the form of NO 2 , such that you use an effective molar mass for all oxides of nitrogen equivalent to that of NO 2
. Oxygenated fuels means fuels composed of at least 25 % oxygen-containing compounds, such as ethanol or methanol. Testing engines that use oxygenated fuels generally requires theuse of the sampling methods in subpart I of this part. However, you should read the standardsetting part and subpart I of this part to determine appropriate sampling methods. Partial pressure means the pressure, p , attributable to a single gas in a gas mixture. For an ideal gas, the partial pressure divided by the total pressure is equal to the constituent’s molar concentration, x

. Percent (%) means a representation of exactly 0.01. Numbers expressed as percentages in this part (such as a tolerance of ±2 %) have infinite precision, so 2 % and 2.000000000 % have the same meaning. This means that where we specify some percentage of a total value, the calculated value has the same number of significant digits as the total value. For example, 2 % of a span value where the span value is 101.3302 is 2.026604. Portable emission measurement system (PEMS) means a measurement system consisting of portable equipment that can be used to gene rate brake-specific emission measurements during field testing or laboratory testing. Precision means two times the standard deviation of a set of measured values of a single zero or reference quantity. See also the related definitions of noise and repeatability in this section. Procedures means all aspects of engine testing, including the equipment specifications, calibrations, calculations and other protocols and specifications needed to measure emissions, unless we specify otherwise.Proving ring is a device used to measure static force based on the linear relationship between stress and strain in an elastic material. It is typically a steel alloy ring, and you measure the deflection (strain) of its diameter when a sta tic force (stress) is applied across its diameter. PTFE means polytetrafluoroethylene, commonly known as TeflonTM. Ramped-modal means relating to a ramped-modal type of steady-state test, as described in the standard-setting part. Recommend has the meaning given in §1065.201. Regression statistics means any of the regression statistics specified in §1065.602. Regulated pollutant means an exhaust constituent for which an emission standard or a reporting requirement applies. Repeatability means the precision of ten mean measurements of a reference quantity. Determine instrument repeatability, accuracy, and noise from the same data set. We specify a procedure for determining repeatability in §1065.305. Revoke has the meaning given in 40 CFR 1068.30. Rise time, t 10-90 , means the time interval of a measurement instrument’s response after any step increase to the input between the following points: (1) The point at which the response has risen 10% of the total amount it will rise in response to the step change. (2) The point at which the response has risen 90% of the total amount it will rise in response to the step change. Roughness (or average roughness, R a ) means the size of finely distributed vertical surface deviations from a smooth surface, as determined when traversing a surface. It is an integral of the absolute value of the roughness prof ile measured over an evaluation length. Round means to apply the rounding convention specified in §1065.20(e), unless otherwise specified. Scheduled maintenance means adjusting, repairing, removing, disassembling, cleaning, or replacing components or systems periodically to keep a part or system from failing, malfunctioning, or wearing prematurely. It also may mean actions you expect are necessary to correct an overt indication of failure or malfunction for which periodic maintenance is not appropriate. Shared atmospheric pressure meter means an atmospheric pressure meter whose output is used as the atmospheric pressure for an entire test facility that has more than one dynamometer test cell. Shared humidity measurement means a humidity measurement that is used as the humidity for an entire test facility that has more than one dy namometer test cell. Span means to adjust an instrument so that it gives a proper response to a calibration standard that represents between 75 % and 100 % of the maximum value in the instrument range or expected range of use. Span gas means a purified gas mixture used to span gas analyzers. Span gases must meet the specifications of §1065.750. Note that cali bration gases and span gases are qualitatively the same, but differ in terms of their primary function. Various performance verification checks for gas analyzers and sample handling components might refer to either calibration gases or span
gases. Spark-ignition means relating to a gasoline-fueled engine or any other type of engine with a spark plug (or other sparking device) and with operating characteristics significantlysimilar to the theoretical Otto combustion cycle. Spark-ignition engines usually use a throttle to regulate intake air flow to control power during normal operation. Special procedures means procedures allowed under §1065.10(c)(2). Specified procedures means procedures we specify in this part 1065 or the standardsetting part. Other procedures allowed or requir ed by §1065.10(c) are not specified procedures. Standard deviation has the meaning given in §1065.602 . Note this is the standard deviation for a non-biased sample. Standard-setting part means the part in the Code of Federal Regulations that defines emission standards for a particular engine. See §1065.1(a). Steady-state means relating to emission tests in which engine speed and load are held at a finite set of nominally constant values. Steady -state tests are either discrete-mode tests or ramped-modal tests. Stoichiometric means relating to the particular ratio of air and fuel such that if the fuel were fully oxidized, there would be no remaining fuel or oxygen. For example, stoichiometric combustion in a gasoline-fueled engine typically occurs at an air-to-fuel mass ratio of about 14.7:1. Storage medium means a particulate filter, sample bag, or any other storage device used for batch sampling. Test engine means an engine in a test sample. Test interval means a duration of time over which you determine brake-specific emissions. For example, the standard-setting part may specify a complete laboratory duty cycle as a cold-start test interval, plus a hot-start test interval. As another example, a standard-setting part may specify a field-test interval, such as a “not-to-exceed” (NTE) event, as a duration of time over which an engine operates within a certain range of speed and torque. In cases where multiple test intervals occur over a duty cycle, the standard-setting part may specify additional calculations that weight and combine results to ar rive at composite values for comparison against the applicable standards. Test sample means the collection of engines selected from the population of an engine family for emission testing. Tolerance means the interval in which at least 95 % of a set of recorded values of a certain quantity must lie. Use the specified reco rding frequencies and time intervals to determine if a quantity is within the applic able tolerance. The concept of to lerance is intended to address random variability. You may not take advantage of the tolerance specification to incorporate a bias into a measurement. Total hydrocarbon (THC) means the combined mass of organic compounds measured by the specified procedure for measuring total hydrocarbon, expressed as a hydrocarbon with a hydrogen-to-carbon mass ratio of 1.85:1. Total hydrocarbon equivalent (THCE) means the sum of the carbon mass contributions of non-oxygenated hydrocarbons, alcohols and aldehydes, or other organic compounds that are measured separately as contained in a gas sample, expressed as exhaust hydrocarbon from petroleum-fueled engines. The hydrogen-to-carbon ratio of the equivalent hydrocarbon is 1.85:1. Transformation time, t 50 , means the overall system response time to any step change in input, generally the average of the time to reach 50% response to a step increase, t 0-50 , or to a step decrease, t 100-50
.t 0-50 means the time interval of a measurement system’s response after any step increase to the input between the following points: (1) The point at which the step change is initiated at the sample probe. (2) The point at which the response has risen 50% of the total amount it will rise in response to the step change.
t 100-50 means the time interval of a measurement system’s response after any step decrease to the input between the following points: (1) The point at which the step change is initiated at the sample probe. (2) The point at which the response has fallen 50% of the total amount it will fall in response to the step change. Uncertainty means uncertainty with respect to NIST-traceability. See the definition of NIST-traceable in this section. United States means the States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana Islands, Guam, American Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Useful life means the period during which a new engine is required to comply with all applicable emission standards. The standard-set ting part defines the specific useful-life periods for individual engines. Variable-speed engine means an engine that is not a constant-speed engine. Vehicle means any vehicle, vessel, or type of equipment using engines to which this part applies. For purposes of this part, the term “vehicle” may include nonmotive machines or equipment such as a pump or generator. Verification means to evaluate whether or not a measurement system’s outputs agree with a range of applied reference signals to within one or more predetermined thresholds for acceptance. Contrast with “calibration”. We (us, our) means the Administrator of the Envi ronmental Protection Agency and any authorized representatives. Work has the meaning given in §1065.110. Zero means to adjust an instrument so it gives a zero response to a zero calibration standard, such as purified nitrogen or purified air for measuring concentrations of emission constituents. Zero gas means a gas that yields a zero response in an analyzer. This may either be purified nitrogen, purified air, a combination of purified air and purified nitrogen. For field testing, zero gas may include ambient air.

§1065.1005 Symbols, abbreviations, acronyms, and units of measure. The procedures in this part gene rally follow the International System of Units (SI), as detailed in NIST Special Publication 811, which we incorporate by reference in §1065.1010. See §1065.20 for specific provisions related to these conventi ons. This section summarizes the way we use symbols, units of measure, and other abbreviations. (a) Symbols for quantities . This part uses the following symbols and units of measure for various quantities:

Symbol Quantity Unit Unit symbol Units in terms of SI base units

 atomic hydrogen to carbon ratio mole per mole mol/mol 1

A area square meter m 2 m 2a 0 intercept of least squares regression

a 1 slope of least squares regression

a g acceleration of Earth’s gravity meter per square second m/s 2 m/s 2
 ratio of diameters meter per meter m/m 1  atomic oxygen to carbon ratio mole per mole mol/mol 1

C # number of carbon atoms in a molecule
C

d discharge coefficient
C

f flow coefficient
δ atomic nitrogen to carbon ratio mole per mole mol/mol 1
d Diameter meter m m

DR dilution ratio mole per mol mol/mol 1

 error between a quantity and its reference

e brake-specific emission or fuel consumption gram per kilowatt hour g/(kW·hr) g·3.6 -1 ·10 6 ·m -2 ·kg·s 2

F

F-test statistic f frequency hertz Hz s -1 f n angular speed (shaft) revolutions per minute r/min 2· π ·60 -1 ·m·m -1 ·s -1

 ratio of specific heats (joule per kilogram kelvin) per (joule per kilogram kelvin) (J/(kg·K))/(J/(kg·K)) 1

 atomic sulfur to carbon ratio mole per mole mol/mol 1

K

correction factor 1

K

v calibration coefficient m 4 ·s·K 0.5 /kg m 4 ·s·K 0.5 ·kg -1

l length meter m m

 viscosity, dynamic pascal second Pa·s m -1 ·kg·s -1

M

molar mass 1 gram per mole g/mol 10 -3 ·kg·mol -1

m mass kilogram kg kg

m  mass rate kilogram per second kg/s kg·s -1

 viscosity, kinematic meter squared per second m 2 /s m 2 ·s -1

N

total number in series

n amount of substance mole mol mol

n  amount of substance rate mole per second mol/s mol·s -1

P

power kilowatt kW 10 3 ·m 2 ·kg·s -3

PF

penetration fraction

p pressure pascal Pa m -1 ·kg·s -2

 mass density kilogram per cubic
meter kg/m 3 kg·m -3

r ratio of pressures pascal per pascal Pa/Pa 1

r 2 coefficient of determination

Ra average surface roughness micrometer  m 10 -6 m
Re # Reynolds number

RF

response factor

RH relative humidity

 non-biased standard deviation

S Sutherland constant kelvin K K Deleted: A 0
Deleted: A 1

Comment [CAL29]: Updated.

Deleted: R 2SEE standard estimate of error

T absolute temperature kelvin K K

T Celsius temperature degree Celsius °C K-273.15

T torque (moment of force) newton meter N·m m 2 ·kg·s -2

 plane angle degrees ° rad

t time second s s



t time interval, period, 1/frequency second s s

V volume cubic meter m 3 m 3

V  volume rate cubic meter per second m 3 /s m 3 ·s -1

W

work kilowatt hour kW·hr 3.6·10 -6 ·m 2 ·kg·s -2

w c carbon mass fraction gram per gram g/g 1

x amount of substance mole fraction 2 mole per mole mol/mol 1

x flow-weighted mean concentration mole per mole mol/mol 1

y generic variable

Z compressibility factor

1 See paragraph (f)(2) of this section for the values to use for molar masses. Note that in the cases of NO x and HC, the regulations specify effective molar masses based on a ssumed speciation rather than actual speciation.
2 Note that mole fractions for THC, THCE, NMHC, NMHCE, and NOTHC are expressed on a C 1 equivalent basis.

(b) Symbols for chemical species . This part uses the following symbols for chemical species and exhaust constituents: Symbol Species Ar argon
C carbon
CH 3 OH methanol
CH 4 methane
C 2 H 4 O acetaldehyde
C 2 H 5 OH ethanol
C 2 H 6 ethane
C 3 H 7 OH propanol
C 3 H 8 propane C 4 H 10 butane
C 5 H 12 pentane
CO carbon monoxide
CO 2 carbon dioxide H atomic hydrogen

H 2 molecular hydrogen

H 2 O water

H 2 SO 4 sulfuric acid
HC hydrocarbon
HCHO formaldehyde
He helium

85 Kr krypton 85

N 2 molecular nitrogen

NH 3 ammonia NMHC nonmethane hydrocarbonNMHCE nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent
NO nitric oxide
NO 2 nitrogen dioxide
NO x oxides of nitrogen

N 2 O nitrous oxide
NMOG nonmethane organic gases
NONMHC non-oxygenated nonmethane hydrocarbon
NOTHC non

- oxygenated total hydrocarbon
O 2 molecular oxygen OHC oxygenated hydrocarbon

210 Po polonium 210 PM particulate matter
S sulfur
SVOC semi-volatile organic compound THC total hydrocarbon
THCE total hydrocarbon equivalent
ZrO 2 zirconium dioxide

(c) Prefixes . This part uses the following prefixes to define a quantity: Symbol Quantity Value

 micro 10 -6

m milli 10 -3

c centi 10 -2

k kilo 10 3
M mega 10 6

(d) Superscripts . This part uses the following superscripts to define a quantity: Superscript Quantity overbar (such as y ) arithmetic mean overdot (such as y  ) quantity per unit time

(e) Subscripts . This part uses the following subscripts to define a quantity: Subscript Quantity abs absolute quantity
act actual condition air air, dry
amb ambient atmos atmospheric bkgnd background cal calibration quantity
CFV critical flow venturi
comb combined composite composite value cor corrected quantity
dil dilution air
dew dewpoint Deleted: massdexh diluted exhaust dry dry condition dutycycle duty cycle
exh raw exhaust exp expected quantity
fn feedback speed
frict friction
fuel fuel consumption hi,idle condition at high-idle
i an individual of a series
idle condition at idle in quantity in init initial quantity, typically before an emission test
int intake air j an individual of a series mapped conditions over which an engine can operate

max the maximum (i.e., peak) value expected at the standard over a test interval; not the maximum of an instrument range meas measured quantity
media PM sample media
mix mixture of diluted exhaust and air

norm normalized out quantity out

P power part partial quantity PDP positive-displacement pump
post after the test interval

pre before the test interval prod stoichiometric product
record record rate ref reference quantity
rev revolution
sat saturated condition

s slip span span quantity
SSV subsonic venturi
std standard condition
stroke engine strokes per power stroke

T torque test test quantity test,alt alternate test quantity uncor uncorrected quantity

vac vacuum side of the sampling system weight calibration weight zero zero quantity Deleted: lip

Deleted: PDP(f) Constants . (1) This part uses the following constants for the composition of dry air: Symbol Quantity mol/mol

x Arair amount of argon in dry air 0.00934

x CO2air amount of carbon dioxide in dry air 0.000375

x N2air amount of nitrogen in dry air 0.78084

x O2air amount of oxygen in dry air 0.209445

(2) This part uses the following molar masses or effective molar masses of chemical species:

Symbol Quantity g/mol (10 -3 ·kg·mol -1 )

M

air

molar mass of dry air 1 28.96559

M

Ar

molar mass of argon 39.948

M

C molar mass of carbon 12.0107

M

CH3OH molar mass of methanol 32.04186

M

C2H5OH molar mass of ethanol 46.06844

M

C2H4O molar mass of acetaldehyde 44.05256

M

C3H8 molar mass of propane 44.09562

M

C3H7OH molar mass of propanol 60.09502

M

CO molar mass of carbon monoxide 28.0101

M

CH4 molar mass of methane 16.0425

M

CO2 molar mass of carbon dioxide 44.0095

M

H molar mass of atomic hydrogen 1.00794

M

H2 molar mass of molecular hydrogen 2.01588

M

H2O molar mass of water 18.01528

M

HCHO molar mass of formaldehyde 30.02598

M

He molar mass of helium 4.002602

M

N molar mass of atomic nitrogen 14.0067

M

N2 molar mass of molecular nitrogen 28.0134

M

NH3 molar mass of ammonia 17.03052

M

NMHC effective C 1 molar mass of nonmethane hydrocarbon 2 13.875389

M

NMHCE effective C 1 molar mass of nonmethane hydrocarbon equivalent 2 13.875389

M

NOx effective molar mass of oxides of nitrogen 3 46.0055

M

N2O molar mass of nitrous oxide 44.0128

M

O molar mass of atomic oxygen 15.9994

M

O2 molar mass of molecular oxygen 31.9988

M

S molar mass of sulfur 32.065

M

THC effective C 1 molar mass of total hydrocarbon 2 13.875389

M

THCE effective C 1 molar mass of total hydrocarbon equivalent 2 13.875389

1 See paragraph (f)(1) of this section for the composition of dry air.
2 The effective molar masses of THC, THCE, NMHC, and NMHCE are defined on a C 1 b asis and are based on an atomic hydrogen-to-carbon ratio,  , of 1.85 (with β

, γ , and δ equal to zero)

. 3 The effective molar mass of NO x is defined by the molar mass of nitrogen dioxide, NO 2 .
(3) This part uses the following mo lar gas constant for ideal gases:

Symbol Quantity J/(mol·K) (m 2 ·kg·s -2 ·mol -1 ·K -1 )
R molar gas constant 8.314472 Deleted: equivalent

Deleted: by(4) This part uses the following ratios of spec ific heats for dilution air and diluted exhaust: Symbol Quantity [J/(kg·K)]/[J/(kg·K)]


air ratio of specific heats for intake air or dilution air 1.399



dil ratio of specific heats for diluted exhaust 1.399



exh ratio of specific heats for raw exhaust 1.385

(g) Other acronyms and abbreviations . This part uses the following additional abbreviations and
acronyms: ABS acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials BMD bag mini-diluter BSFC brake-specific fuel consumption
CARB California Air Resources Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CFV critical-flow venturi CI compression-ignition CITT Curb Idle Transmission Torque
CLD chemiluminescent detector CVS constant-volume sampler
DF deterioration factor
ECM electronic control module
EFC electronic flow control

e.g. for example EGR exhaust gas recirculation EPA Environmental Protection Agency FEL Family Emission Limit
FID flame-ionization detector

FTIR Fourier transform infrared GC gas chromatograph GC-ECD gas chromatograph with an electron-capture detector GC-FID gas chromatograph with a flame ionization detector

HEPA high-efficiency particulate air IBP initial boiling point
i.e. in other words ISO International Organization for Standardization LPG liquefied petroleum gas

MPD magnetopneumatic detection NDIR nondispersive infrared NDUV nondispersive ultraviolet NIST National Institute for Standards and Technology
NMC nonmethane cutter PDP positive-displacement pump PEMS portable emission measurement systemPFD partial-flow dilution
PLOT porous layer open tubular

PMD paramagnetic detection PMP Polymethylpentene pt. a single point at the mean value expected at the standard. PTFE polytetrafluoroethylene (commonly known as TeflonTM) RE rounding error RESS rechargeable energy storage system

RFPF response factor penetration fraction RMC ramped-modal cycle

rms root-mean square RTD resistive temperature detector
SAW surface acoustic wave
SEE standard estimate of error
SSV subsonic venturi SI spark-ignition
THC-FID total hydrocarbon flame ionization detector

TINV inverse student t -test function in Microsoft Excel UCL upper confidence limit
UFM ultrasonic flow meter
U.S.C. United States Code

§1065.1010 Reference materials. The materials listed in this section are incorporated by reference into this part with the approval of the Director of the Federal Register under 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. To enforce any edition other than that specified in this se ction, a document must be published in the Federal Register and the material must be available to th e public. All approved materials are available for inspection at the Air and Radiation Docket and Information Center (Air Docket) in the EPA Docket Center (EPA/ DC) at Rm. 3334, EPA West Bldg., 1301 Constitution Ave. NW., Washington, DC. The EPA/DC Public Reading Room hours of operation are 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding legal holidays. The telephone number of the EPA/DC Public Reading Room is (202) 566–1744, and the telephone number for the Air Docket is (202) 566–1742. These approved materials are also av ailable for inspection at the National Archives and Records Administration (NARA). For informati on on the availability of this material at NARA, call (202) 741–6030 or go to http:// www.archives.gov/federal_register/ code_of_federal_regulations/ ibr_locations.html . In addition, these materials are available from the sources listed below. (a) ASTM materials . Copies of these materials may be obtained from ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959, or by calling (877) 909–ASTM, or at http://www.astm.org

. (1) ASTM D86– 12 , Standard Test Method for Distillati on of Petroleum Products at Atmospheric Pressure, IBR approved for §§1065.703, 1065.710. (2) ASTM D93– 12 , Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Pensky- Martens Closed Cup Tester, IBR approved for §1065.703. (3) ASTM D130-12 Standard Test Method for Corrosiveness to Copper from Petroleum Products by Copper Strip Test, IBR approved for §1065.710. Deleted: RMS

Comment [CAL30]: Review before FRM to make sure all methods are the latest published version.

AS: We also need to do a final check to make sure the ASTM list here is complete, and renumber accordingly.

Deleted: 07a

Deleted: 11b

Deleted: 09 (Approved December 15, 2009)(4) ASTM D381-12 Standard Test Method for Gum Content in Fuels by Jet Evaporation, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 5 ) ASTM D445– 12 , Standard Test Method for Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids (and Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity), IBR approved for §1065.703. (6) ASTM D525-12a Standard Test Method for Oxidation Stability of Gasoline (Induction Period Method), IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 7 ) ASTM D613– 10a , Standard Test Method for Cetane Number of Diesel Fuel Oil, IBR approved for §1065.703. ( 8 ) ASTM D910– 13 , Standard Specification for Aviation Gasolines, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 9 ) ASTM D975– 13 , Standard Specification for Diesel Fu el Oils, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 10 ) ASTM D1267– 12 , Standard Test Method for Gage Vapor Pressure of Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases (LP-Gas Method), IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 11 ) ASTM D1319– 13 , Standard Test Method for Hydrocarbon Types in Liquid Petroleum Products by Fluorescent Indicator Adsorption, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 12 ) ASTM D1655– 13 , Standard Specification for Aviati on Turbine Fuels, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 13 ) ASTM D1837– 11 , Standard Test Method for Volatility of Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases, IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 14 ) ASTM D1838– 12 a , Standard Test Method for Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases, IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 15 ) ASTM D1945–03 (Reapproved 2010) , Standard Test Method for Analysis of Natural Gas by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved for §1065.715. ( 16 ) ASTM D2158– 11 , Standard Test Method for Residues in Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases, IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 17 ) ASTM D2163– 07 , Standard Test Method for Analysis of Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases and Propene Concentrates by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 18 ) ASTM D2598– 12 , Standard Practice for Calculation of Certain Physical Properties of Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases from Compositional Analysis, IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 19 ) ASTM D2622– 10 , Standard Test Method for Sulfur in Petroleum Products by Wavelength Dispersive X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometry, IBR approved for §§1065.703, 1065.710. (20) ASTM D2699-12a, Standard Test Method for Research Octa ne Number of Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel, IBR approved for §§1065.710. (21) ASTM D2700-12a, Standard Test Method for Motor Octane Number of Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel, IBR approved for §§1065.710 ( 22 ) ASTM D2713– 12 , Standard Test Method for Dryness of Propane (Valve Freeze Method), IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 23 ) ASTM D2784– 11 , Standard Test Method for Sulfur in Liquefied Petroleum Gases (OxyHydrogen Burner or Lamp), IBR approved for §1065.720. ( 24 ) ASTM D2880– 13 , Standard Specification for Gas Tu rbine Fuel Oils, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 25 ) ASTM D2986–95a (Reapproved 1999 ; Withdrawn 2004 ), Standard Practice for Evaluation of Air Assay Media by the Monodisperse DOP (Dioctyl Phthalate) Smoke Test, IBR approved for §1065.170. Deleted: 3

Deleted: 09 (Approved July 1, 2009)

Deleted: 4

Deleted: 05

Deleted: 5

Deleted: 07

Deleted: 11

Deleted: 6

Deleted: 07b

Deleted: 12a

Deleted: 7

Deleted: 02 (Reapproved 2007)

Deleted: 8

Deleted: 03

Deleted: 10

Deleted: 9

Deleted: 07e01

Deleted: 12

Deleted: 10

Deleted: 02a (Reapproved 2007)

Deleted: 11

Deleted: 07

Deleted: 12

Deleted: 13

Deleted: 05

Deleted: 14

Deleted: 05

Deleted: 15

Deleted: 02 (Reapproved 2007)

Deleted: 16

Deleted: 07

Deleted: 91 (Reapproved 2001)

Deleted: 06

Deleted: 03 (Reapproved 2010)( 26 ) ASTM D3231– 11 , Standard Test Method for Phosphorus in Gasoline, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 27 ) ASTM D3237– 12 , Standard Test Method for Lead in Gasoline By Atomic Absorption Spectroscopy, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 28 ) ASTM D4052– 11 , Standard Test Method for Density and Relative Density of Liquids by Digital Density Meter, IBR approved for§1065.703. ( 29 ) ASTM D4629-12, Standard Test Method for Trace Nitrogen in Liquid Petroleum Hydrocarbons by Syringe/Inlet Oxidative Combustion and Chemiluminescence Detection, IBR approved for §1065.655. ( 30 ) ASTM D4814– 13 , Standard Specification for Automotive Spark-Ignition Engine Fuel, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 31 ) ASTM D4815-09, Standard Test Method for Determination of MTBE, ETBE, TAME, DIPE, tertiary-Amyl Alcohol and C 1 to C 4 Alcohols in Gasoline by Gas Chromatography, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 32 ) ASTM D5186–03 (Reapproved 2009) , Standard Test Method for Determination of the Aromatic Content and Polynuclear Aromatic Cont ent of Diesel Fuels and Aviation Turbine Fuels By Supercritical Fluid Chromatography, IBR approved for §1065.703. ( 33 ) ASTM D5191– 12 , Standard Test Method for Vapor Pressure of Petroleum Products (Mini Method), IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 34 ) ASTM D5291–10, Standard Test Method for Instrumental Determination of Carbon, Hydrogen, and Nitrogen in Petroleum Products and Lubricants, IBR approved for §1065.655. (34) ASTM D5453-12 Standard Test Method for Determination of Total Sulfur in Light Hydrocarbons, Spark Ignition Engine Fuel, Diesel Engine Fuel, and Engine Oil by Ultraviolet Fluorescence, IBR approved for §1065.710. (3 6 ) ASTM D5599–00 (Reapproved 2010), Standard Test Method for Determination of Oxygenates in Gasoline by Gas Chromatography and Oxygen Selective Flame Ionization Detection, IBR approved for §1065.655. (3 7 ) ASTM D5762-12 Standard Test Method for Ni trogen in Petroleum and Petroleum Products by Boat-Inlet Chemiluminescence, IBR approved for §1065.655. (38) ASTM D5769-10 Standard Test Method for Determination of Benzene, Toluene, and Total Aromatics in Finished Gasolines by Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.710. (3 9 ) ASTM D5797–07, Standard Specification for Fuel Methanol (M70– M85) for Automotive Spark-Ignition Engines, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 40 ) ASTM D5798– 13 , Standard Specification for Fuel Ethanol (Ed75– Ed85) for Automotive Spark-Ignition Engines, IBR approved for §1065.701. (41) ASTM D6550-10 Standard Test Method for De termination of Olefin Content of Gasolines by Supercritical-Fluid Chromatography, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 42 ) ASTM D6615– 11a , Standard Specification for Jet B Wide-Cut Aviation Turbine Fuel, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 43 ) ASTM D6751– 12 , Standard Specification for Biodiesel Fuel Blend Stock (B100) for Middle Distillate Fuels, IBR approved for §1065.701. ( 44 ) ASTM D6985–04a (Withdrawn 2010) , Standard Specification for Middle Distillate Fuel Oil—Military Marine Applications, IBR approved for §1065.701. Deleted: 07

Deleted: 06e01

Deleted: 96e01 (Reapproved 2002)

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 07a

Deleted: 11b

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 25

Deleted: 2

Deleted: 26

Deleted: 07

Deleted: 27

Deleted: 28

Deleted: 07

Deleted: 11

Deleted: 29

Deleted: 06

Deleted: 30

Deleted: 07b

Deleted: 31(45) ASTM D7039-07 Standard Test Method fo r Sulfur in Gasoline and Diesel Fuel by Monochromatic Wavelength Dispersive X-ray Fluorescence Spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.710. ( 46 ) ASTM F1471– 09 , Standard Test Method for Air Cleaning Performance of a HighEfficiency Particulate Air Filter System, IBR approved for §1065.1001. (b) California Air Resources Board material . Copies of these materials may be obtained from the California Air Resources Board, Haagen-Smit Laboratory, 9528 Telstar Ave., El Monte, CA 91731–2908, or by calling (800) 242–4450 , or at http://www.arb.ca.gov

. (1) California Non-Methane Organic Gas Test Procedures, Amended July 30, 2002, Mobile Source Division, California Air Resources Board, IBR approved for §1065.805. (2) [Reserved] (c) Institute of Petroleum material . Copies of these materials may be obtained from the Energy Institute, 61 New Cavendish St., London, W1G 7AR, UK, or by calling +44–(0)20–7467–7100,
or at http://www.energyinst.org

. (1) IP 470, 2005, Determination of aluminum, silicon, vanadium, nickel, iron, calcium, zinc, and sodium in residual fuels by atomic absorption spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (2) IP 500, 2003, Determination of the phosphorus content of residual fuels by ultra-violet spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (3) IP 501, 2005, Determination of aluminum, silicon, vanadium, nickel, iron, sodium, calcium, zinc and phosphorus in residual fuel oil by ashing, fusion and inductively coupled plasma emission spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (d) ISO material . Copies of these materials may be obtained from the International Organization for Standardization, 1, ch. de la Voie-Creuse, CP 56, CH–1211 Geneva 20, Switzerland, or by calling +41–22–749–01–11, or at http://www.iso.org

. (1) ISO 2719:2002, Determination of flash point—Pensky-Martens closed cup method, IBR approved for §1065.705. (2) ISO 3016:1994, Petroleum products—Determination of pour point, IBR approved for §1065.705. (3) ISO 3104:1994/Cor 1:1997, Petroleum products—Transparent and opaque liquids— Determination of kinematic viscosity and calculation of dynamic viscosity, IBR approved for §1065.705. (4) ISO 3675:1998, Crude petroleum and liquid petroleum products— Laboratory determination of density— Hydrometer method, IBR approved for §1065.705. (5) ISO 3733:1999, Petroleum products and bituminous materials— Determination of water— Distillation method, IBR approved for §1065.705. (6) ISO 6245:2001, Petroleum products—Determination of ash, IBR approved for §1065.705. (7) ISO 8217: 2012 , Petroleum products—Fuels (class F)—Specifications of marine fuels, IBR approved for §1065.705. (8) ISO 8754:2003, Petroleum products—Determina tion of sulfur content—Energy-dispersive X-ray Fluorescence spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (9) ISO 10307–2: 2009/Cor 1:2010 , Petroleum products—Total sediment in residual fuel oils— Part 2: Determination using standard procedures for ageing, IBR approved for §1065.705. (10) ISO 10370:1993/Cor 1:1996, Petroleum products—Determination of carbon residue— Micro method, IBR approved for §1065.705. Deleted: 32

Deleted: 93 (Reapproved 2001)

Deleted:

–

Deleted:

–

Deleted:

–

Deleted: 2005

Deleted: 1993(11) ISO 10478:1994, Petroleu m products—Determination of aluminium and silicon in fuel oils—Inductively coupled plasma emission and atomic absorption spectroscopy methods, IBR approved for §1065.705. (12) ISO 12185:1996/Cor 1:2001, Crude petroleum and petroleum products—Determination of density—Oscillating U-tube met hod, IBR approved for §1065.705.(13) ISO 14596:2007, Petroleum products—Determination of sulfur content—Wavelengthdispersive X-ray fluorescence spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (14) ISO 14597:1997, Petroleum products—Determination of vanadium and nickel content— Wavelength dispersive X-ray fluorescence spectrometry, IBR approved for §1065.705. (15) ISO 14644–1:1999, Cleanrooms and associated controlled environments, IBR approved for §1065.190. (e) NIST material . Copies of these materials may be ob tained from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) by calling (800) 553–6847 or from the U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO). To purchase a NIST pub lication you must have the order number. Order numbers are available from the Public Inquirie s Unit at (301) 975–NIST. Mailing address: Public Inquiries Unit, NIST, 100 Bureau Dr., Stop 1070, Gaithersburg, MD 20899–1070. If you have a GPO stock number, you can purchase printed copies of NIST publications from GPO. GPO orders may be: Mailed to the U.S. Government Printing Office, P.O. Box 979050, St. Louis, MO 63197–9000, placed by telephone at (866) 512–1800 (DC Area only: (202) 512– 1800), or faxed to (202) 512–2104. More information can also be found at http://www.nist.gov

. (1) NIST Special Publication 811, 1995 Edition, Guid e for the Use of the International System of Units (SI), Barry N. Taylor, Physics Laboratory, IBR approved for §§1065.20, 1065.1001, 1065.1005. (2) NIST Technical Note 1297, 1994 Edition, Guidelines for Evaluating and Expressing the Uncertainty of NIST Measurement Results, Barry N. Taylor and Chris E. Kuyatt, IBR approved for §1065.1001. (f) SAE material . Copies of these materials may be obtained from the Society of Automotive Engineers International, 400 Commonwealth Dr., Warrendale, PA 15096–0001, or by calling (724) 776–4841, or at http://www.sae.org

. (1) SAE 770141, 1977 , Optimization of Flame Ionization Detector for Determination of Hydrocarbon in Diluted Automotive Exhausts, Glenn D. Reschke, IBR approved for §1065.360. (2) SAE J1151, Methane Measurement Using Gas Chromatography, Revised September 2011, IBR approved for §§1065.267 and 1065.750. Deleted: 2001

Deleted: [Reserved]Subpart L—Methods for Unregulated and Special Pollutants

§1065.1101 Applicability. This subpart specifies procedures that may be used to measure emission constituents that are not measured (or not separately measured) by the test procedures in the other subparts of this part. These procedures are in cluded to facilitate consistent meas urement of unregulated pollutants primarily for purposes other than compliance with emission standards. Unless otherwise specified in the standard-setting part, use of thes e procedures is optional and does not replace any requirements in the rest of this part.

SEMI-VOLATILE ORGANIC COUMPOUNDS

§1065.1103 General provisions for SVOC measurement. The provisions of §§1065.1103 through 1065.1111 specify procedures for the measurement of semi-volatile organic compounds (SVOC) along with PM. The provisions of these sections specify how to collect a sample of the SVOCs during exhaust testing procedures, as well as how to use wet chemistry techniques to extract SVOCs from the sample media for analysis. Note that the precise method you use will depend on th e category of SVOCs be ing measured. For example, the method used to measure polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) will differ slightly from the method used to measure dioxins. (a) Laboratory cleanliness is especially important throughout the course of SVOC testing. Thoroughly clean all sample train components and glassware before testing to avoid sample contamination. (b) Throughout the course of your testing we recommend that media blanks be analyzed for each batch of media (sorbent, filters, etc.) that is prepared for testing. Blank sorbent modules (i.e., field blanks) should be stored in a sealed environment and should periodically accompany the test sample train throughout the course of a test , including the sample train and sorbent module disassembly, sample packaging, and storage. Use good engineering judgment to determine the frequency of field blanks. During testing, the field blank sample train should reside in close proximity to the sampler. (c) We recommend the use of isotope dilution te chniques, including the use of isotopically labeled surrogate, internal, alternate, and injection standards. (d) If your target analytes degrade when exposed to ultraviolet radiation (such as nPAH), perform these procedures in the dark or with ultraviolet filters installed over the lights. (e) Follow standard analytic chemistry methods for aspects of the analysis not specified. (f) The following definitions and abbrev iations apply for SVOC measurements: (1) Soxhlet extraction means the extraction met hod invented by Franz von Soxhlet, in which the sample is placed in a thimble and rinsed repeatedly with a recycle of the extraction solvent. (2) XAD-2 means a hydrophobic cross linked polystyrene copolymer resin adsorbent known commercially as Amberlite ® XAD ® -2, or an equivalent adsorbent. (3) Semi-volatile organic compound (SVOC) m eans an organic compound that is sufficiently volatile to exist in vapor form in engine exhaust, but that readily condenses to liquid or solid form under atmospheric conditions. Most SVOCs have at least 14 carbon atoms per molecule or have a boiling point between 240°C and 400°C. SVOCs include dioxin, quinone, and nitro-PAH compounds. They may be a natural byproduct of combustion or created post combustion. Note Deleted: with inlet and outlet covered

Deleted: andthat SVOCs may be detected as hydrocarbons and/or PM using the measurement procedures specified in this part; in other words, some fraction of measured mass of hydrocarbons and/or PM may be SVOCs. (4) Kuderna-Danish concentrator means laboratory glassware known by this name that consists of an air-cooled condenser on top of an extraction bulb. (5) Dean-Stark trap means laboratory glassware known by this name that uses a reflux condenser to collect water from samp les extracted under reflux. (6) PUF means polyurethane foam. (7) Isotopically labeled means relating to a compound in which either all of the hydrogen atoms are replaced with the atomic isotope hydrogen-2 (deuterium) or one of the carbon atoms at a defined position in the molecule is replaced with the atomic isotope carbon-13.

§1065.1105 Sampling system design. (a) General. We recommend that you design yo ur SVOC batch sampler to extract sample from undiluted emissions to minimize the amount of SVOCs lost to the system. To the extent practical, adjust sampling times based on the rate of emission of target analytes from the engine to obtain analyte concentrations above the limit of detection. In some instances you may need to run repeat test cycles without replacing the sample media or disassembly of the batch sampler. (b) Sample probe, transfer lines, and sample media holder design and construction. The sampling system should consist of a sample probe, transfer line, PM filter holder, cooling coil, sorbent module, and condensate trap. Construct sample probes, transfer lines, and sample media holders that have inside surfaces of Nickel, Tita nium or another nonreactive material capable of withstanding raw exhaust gas temperatures. All joints in the hot zone of the system should be sealed with gaskets made of nonreactive material similar to that of the sample train components. Teflon gaskets may be used in the cold zone . We recommend keepin g the sampling system length as short as possible by locating all componen ts as close to probes as practical to minimize the surface exposed to the exhaust. (c) Sample system configuration. This paragraph (c) specifies the components necessary to collect SVOC samples, along with our recommended design parameters. Where you do not follow our recommendations, use good engineering judgment to design your sampling system so that it does not result in loss of SVOC during sampling. The sampling system should contain the following components in series in the order listed: (1) Sample probe. Use a sample probe similar to the PM sample probe specified in subpart B of this part. (2) Filter holder. Use a PM filter holder similar to type of holder specified in subpart B of this part, although you will likely need to use a larger size to accommodate the high sample flow rates. We recommend the use of 110 mm filter for the testing of en gines that utilize exhaust after treatment for removal of PM and 293 mm filters for engines that do not. If you are not collecting gas-particle partitioned SVOCs, you do not have to control the temperature of the filter holder. Note that this differs from normal PM sampling pr ocedures which maintain the filter at a much lower temperature to capture a significant fract ion of exhaust SVOCs on the filter. In this method SVOCs that pass through the filter will be collected on the downstream sorbent module. If you are collecting gas-particle partitioned S VOCs, control your filter face temperature according to §1065.140(e)(4). Deleted: We recommend that you heat the sample probe with a set point no higher the 200 °C. Note that heat from the engine exhaust may cause the probe temperature to exceed 200°C at some points during the test.

Deleted: You may heat the filter holder, but we recommend that your set point does not exceed 200°C.(3) Cooling coil. Use good engineering judgment to design a cooling coil (to be used with the water bath described in paragraph (e) of this sec tion) that will drop the sample temperature to approximately 5°C. Note that downstream of the cooling coil, the sample will be a mixture of a vapor phase hydrocarbons in CO 2 and air and a primarily aqueous liquid phase. (4) Sorbent and sorbent module. Use a hydrophobic sorbent in a sealed sorbent module. Note that this sorbent module is intended to be th e final stage for collecting the SVOC sample and should be sized accordingly. We recommend sizing the module to hold 40 g of XAD-2 (or XAD-4) along with polyurethane (PUF) plugs at either end of the module , noting that you may vary the mass of XAD that you test with based on the anticipated SVOC emission rate

. (5) Condensate trap/drain. Incl ude a condensate trap to separate the aqueous liquid phase from the gas stream. We recommend using a peristaltic pump to remove water from the condensate trap over the course of the test to prevent build up of the condensate . Note that for some tests it may be appropriate to collect this water for analysis. (d) Sampler flow control. For testing using the recommended filter and sorb ent module sizes, we recommended targeting an average sample flow ra te of 70 l/min to maximize SVOC collection. The sampler must be designed to maintain proportional sampling throughout the test. Verify proportional sampling after an emission test as described in §1065.545. (e) Water bath. Design the sample system with a water bath in which the cooling coil, sorbent module, and condensate trap will be submerged. Use a heat exchanger or ice to maintain the bath temperature at (3 to 7) °C.

§1065.1107 Sample media and sample system preparation; sampler assembly. This section describes the types of sample media to be used as well as the cleaning procedure required to prepare the media and wetted sample surfaces for sampling. (a) Sample media. The sampling system uses two types of sample media in series: the first to simultaneously capture the PM an d some of the SVOCs, and a second to capture SVOCs that remain in the gas phase. Use the following sample media for capture of PM and gas phase SVOCs: (1) For capture of PM, we recommend us ing pure quartz filters that do not contain any binder. Size the filter diameter to account for the exp ected PM emission rate, sample flow rate, and number of repeat tests to minimize filter change in tervals. Note that when repeating test cycles to increase sample mass, you may replace the filt er without replacing the sorbent or otherwise disassembling the batch sampler. In those cases include all filters in the extraction. (2) For capture of gaseous SVOCs, utilize XAD-2 resin contained between two PUF plugs. (b) Sample media and sampler preparation. Prepare pre-cleaned PM filters and pre-cleaned PUF/XAD-2 as needed. If the media is not to be used immediately after cleaning, store it in containers protected from light and ambient air. (1) Pre-clean the filters via Soxhlet extraction with methylene chloride for 24 hours and dry over dry nitrogen in a low temperature vacuum oven. (2) Pre-clean PUF and XAD-2 via a series of Soxhlet extractions: 8 h with water, 22 h with methanol, 22 h with methylene chloride, and 22 hours with toluene followed by drying with nitrogen. (3) Clean sampler components including the probe, filter holder, condenser, sorbent module, and condensate collection vessel by rinsing three tim es with methylene chloride followed by three Deleted: erinses with toluene. Prepare pre-cleaned al uminum foil for capping the probe inlet of the sampler after the sample train has been assembled. (c) Sorbent spiking. Use good engineering judgment to verify the extent to which your extraction methods recover SVOCs absorbed to the sample media. We recommend spiking the XAD-2 resin with a surrogate standard prior to testing with a carbon-13 or hydrogen-2 isotopically labeled standard for each of the class of analytes targeted for analysis. Perform this spiking as follows: (1) Insert the lower PUF plug into the bottom of the sorbent module. (2) Add half of one portion of XAD-2 resin to the module and spike the XAD-2 in the module with the standard. (3) Wait 1 hour for the solvent from the standard(s) to evaporate and then add the remaining 20 g of the XAD-2 resin to the module followed by the top PUF plug. (4) Cover the inlet and outlet of the sorben t module with pre-cleaned aluminum foil. (d) Sample train assembly. Upon completion of the sample media and sampler preparation, assemble the condensate trap, cooling coil, filte r holder with filter, and sample probe to the sorbent module and lower assembly into the reservoir. Cover the probe inlet with pre-cleaned aluminum foil.

§1065.1109 Post-test sampler disassembly and sample extraction. This section describes the process for sample tr ain disassembly, sample train rinsing, sample extraction, and sample clean-up. (a) Sample train disassembly. Disassemble the sample train in a clean environment upon completion of the test . Prepare to extract the SVOCs as follows: (1) Remove the PM filter, PUF, and all of the XAD -2 from the sample train and place them into a Soxhlet extraction thimble. If the sample media are to be stored, store them at ≤ 37 °C. (2) Rinse sample train wetted surfaces upstream of the condensate trap with acetone followed by toluene (or a comparable solvent system), ensuring that all of the solvent that remains in liquid phase is collected (note that a fraction of the acet one and toluene will likely be lost via evaporation during mixing.) Rinse with solvent vo lumes that are sufficient to cover the all of the surfaces exposed to sample dur ing testing. We recommend three fresh solvent rinses with acetone and two with toluene. We recommend rinse volumes of 60 mL per rinse for all sample train components except the condenser coil, of which you should use 200 mL per rinse. Keep the acetone rinsate separate from the toluene rinsat e to the extent practicable. Rinsate fractions should be stored separately in glass bottles that have been pre-rinsed with acetone, hexane, and toluene (or bottles purchased pre-cleaned). (3) Use good engineering judgment to determine if you should analyze the aqueous condensate phase for SVOCs. If you determine that analysis is necessary, use toluene to perform a liquidliquid extraction of the SVOCs from the collected aqueous condensate using a sepratory funnel or equivalent. Add the toluen e from this aqueous extraction to the toluene rinsate fraction mentioned in paragraph (a)(2) of this section. (4) Reduce rinsate solvent volumes as needed using a Kuderna-Danish concentrator or rotary evaporator and retain these rinse solvents for re use during sample media extraction for the same test. Care should be taken when concentrating via rotary evaporation to avoid loss of low molecular weight analytes. Deleted: testing(b) Sample extraction. Extract the SVOCs from the sorbent using Soxhlet extraction (or an equivalent method, e. g. automated solvent extractor) as described in this paragraph (b). To accommodate the Soxhlet extractions of all SVOCs from a single sample, two 16 hour extractions are required. This will reduce the possibility of loss of low molecular weight SVOCs and promote water removal. We recommend performing the first extraction with acetone/hexane and the second using toluene (or an equivalent solvent system). (1) We recommend equipping the Soxhlet extracto r with a Dean-Stark trap to facilitate the removal of residual water from the sample train rinse. The Soxhlet apparatus must be large enough to allow extraction of the PUF, XAD-2, and filter in a single batch. Include in the extractor setup a glass thimble with a coarse or ex tra coarse sintered glass bottom. Pre-clean the extractor using proper glass cleaning procedures. We recommend that the Soxhlet apparatus be cleaned with a 4 to 8 hr Soxhlet extraction with methylene chloride at a cycling rate of 3 cycles per hour. Discard the solvent used for pre-cleaning (no analysis is necessary). (2) Load the extractor thimble before placing it in the extractor by first rolling the PM filter around the inner circumference of the thimble with the sampled side facing in. Push one PUF plug down into the bottom of the thimble then add approximately half of the XAD-2. Then spike the XAD-2 in the thimble with the isotopically labeled extraction standards of known mass. Target the center of the XAD-2 bed for extraction standard delivery. We recommend using multiple isotopically labeled extraction standard s that cover the range of target analytes. Generally this means that you should use isotopically labeled standards at least for the lowest and highest molecular weight analytes for each category of compounds (such as PAHs and dioxins). These extraction standards monitor the e fficiency of the extraction and are also used to determine analyte concentrations after analysis. Upon completion of spik ing, add the remaining XAD-2 to the thimble followed by the remaining PUF plug. Then place the thimble into the
extractor. Note that if you are collecting and analyzing for gas-particle phase partitioned SVOCs, perform separate extractions for the filter and XAD-2. (3) For the initial extraction, combine the concen trated acetone rinses (from the sample train in paragraph (a) of this section) with enough hexane to bring the solvent volume up to the target level of 700 mL. Assemble the extractor and turn on the heating controls and cooling water. Allow the sample to reflux for 16 hours with the rheostat adjusted so that the extraction cycles at a rate of 3.0±0.5 cycles per hour. Drain the water from the Dean-Stark trap as it accrues by opening the stopcock on the trap. Discard this wate r unless it is to be analyzed. In most cases, any water present will be removed within approx imately 2 hours of the start of the extraction. (4) Upon completion of the initial extraction, remove the solvent and concentrate it to 4.0 ±0.5 mL using a Kuderna-Danish concentrator that includes a condenser such as a three-ball Snyder column with venting dimples and graduated collec tion tube. The use of this concentrator will minimize evaporative loss of lower molecular weight analytes. (i) Rinse the round bottom flask of the extractor with 60 to 100 mL of hexane and add the rinsate to this concentrated extract. (ii) Concentrate the mixture to 4 ±0.5 mL us ing a Kuderna-Danish concentrator or similar concentration apparatus. (iii) Repeat paragraphs (b)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section 3 times or as necessary, to remove all of the residual solvent from the extractor round bottom flask, concentrating the final rinse to 4 ±0.5 mL. Deleted: extraction

Deleted: The(5) For the second extraction, co mbine the toluene rinses (from the sample train in paragraph (a) of this section) with an y additional toluene needed to bring th e solvent volume up to the target level of 700 mL. As noted in this paragraph (a) of this section, you may need to concentrate the rinse prior to addition to the extr action apparatus if the rinse solv ent volume is too large. Allow the sample to reflux for 16 hours with the rheostat adjusted so that the extraction cycles at a rate of 3.0 ±0.5 cycles per hour. Al though little or no water should be present during this stage, check the Dean-Stark trap during the first 2 hours of the extraction. (6) Upon completion of the second extraction, re move the solvent and c oncentrate it to 4 ±0.5 mL as described in paragraph (b)(4) of this section. Using hexane from paragraph (b) (4) of this section as the rinse solvent, effectively perfor ms a solvent exchange of toluene with hexane. (7) Combine the concentrated extract from paragra ph (b)(4) of this section with the concentrated extract from paragraph (b)(6) of this section. Di vide the extract into a number of fractions based on the number of analyses to be performed. Perform the separate sample clean up described in paragraph (c) of this section as needed for each fraction. (c) Sample clean up. This paragraph (c) describes how to perform sample cleaning to remove unwanted SVOCs (that is, those SVOCs which you are not analyzing for) and solids from the sample extract before analysis. This process, which is known as “sample clean up, reduces the potential for interference or co-elution of peaks during analytical analysis. Before proceeding with the sample clean up, spike the extract with an alternate standard that contains a known mass of isotopically labeled compounds that are identical (with the exception of the labeling) to the target analytes. The number of compounds that make up the standard will be determined by the category of the target analyte compounds (such as PAHs or dioxin). For example, PAHs require the use of 4 compounds in the alternate standard to cover the 4 basic ring structures of PAHs (2- ring, 3-ring, 4-ring, and 5-ring structures). Th ese alternate standards are used to monitor the efficiency of the clean up procedure. Before sample clean up, concentrate the fractionated sample to about 2 mL with a Kuderna-Danish concentrator or rotary evaporator, and then transfer the extract to an 8-mL test tube with hexane rinse. Concentrate to a volume of about 1 mL using a Kuderna-Danish concentrator. Since there are several column chromatographic cleanup options available, use good engineering judgment to select one appropriate for your target analytes. Note that these clean-up techniques generally remove compounds based on their polarity. The clean up procedures given in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section are examples of clean-up techniques for PAHs and nitropolynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (nPAHs). (1) PAH clean up. The following method is appropriate for cleaning up extracts intended for analysis of PAHs: (i) Pack a glass gravity column (250 mm x 10 mm recommended) by inserting a clean glass wool plug into the bottom of the column followed by the addition of 10 grams of activated silica gel in methylene chloride. Tap the column to settle the silica gel, and then add a 1 cm layer of anhydrous sodium sulfate. Since variations among batches of silica gel may affect the elution volume of the various PAH, the volume of solven t required to completely elute all of the PAH must be verified by the analyst. The weight of the silica gel can then be adjusted accordingly. (ii) Elute the column with 40 mL of hexane. Th e rate for all elutions should be about 2 mL/min and you may use dry air or N 2 to maintain the headspace slightly above atmospheric pressure to increase the elution rate. Discard the eluate just prior to expo sure of the sodium sulfate layer to the air or N 2 , transfer the 1 mL sample extract onto th e column using two additional 2 mL rinses of hexane to complete the transfer . Just prior to exposure of the sodium sulfate laye r to the air orN 2 , begin elution of the column with 25 mL of hexane followed by 25 mL of 40 volume % methylene chloride in hexane. Collect the entire eluate and concentrate it to about 5 mL using the Kuderna-Danish concentrator or a rotary evaporator. Make sure that you do not evaporate all of the solvent from the extract duri ng the concentration process. Transfer to a small sample vial using a hexane rinse and concentrate to 100 μ L using a stream of nitrogen, gentle enough to not violently disturb the solvent. Store the extracts in a refrigerator at 4 °C or lower away from light until analysis. (2) nPAH clean up. The following procedure, that was adapted from “Determination and Comparison of Nitrated-Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons Measured in Air and Diesel Particulate Reference Materials” (Bamford, H.A., et al , Chemosphere, Vol. 50, Issue 5, pages 575 – 587), is an appropriate method to clean up extracts intended for analysis of nPAHs: (i) Condition an aminopropyl solid phase extraction (SPE) cartridge by eluting it with 20 mL of 20 volume % methylene chloride in hexane before us e. Transfer the extract quantitatively to the SPE cartridge with at least two methylene chlori de rinsings. Elute the extract through the SPE cartridge by using 40 ml of 20 volume % methylene chloride in hexane to minimize potential interference of polar constituents. Then reduce the extract to 0.5 ml in hexane and subject theextract to normal-phase liquid chromatography using pre-prepared a 9.6 mm X 25 cm semipreparative Chromegabond ® amino/cyano column, 5 μ m particle size to isolate the nPAH fraction. The mobile phase is 20 volume % methylene chloride in hexane at a constant flow rate of 5 ml/min. Prior to each injection, the column should be back flashed with 60 ml of methylene chloride and then conditioned with 200 ml of 20 volume % methylene chloride in hexane. Collect the effluent and concentrate to about 2 mL using the Kuderna-Danish concentrator or a rotary evaporator. Transfer to a minivial using a hexane rinse and concentrate to 100 μ L using a gentle stream of nitrogen. Store the extracts at 4°C or lower away from light until analysis. (ii) [Reserved]

§1065.1111 Sample analysis. This subpart does not specify chromatographic or analytical methods to analyze extracts, because the selection of such methods is highly dependent on the nature of the target analytes. However, we recommend that prior to whichever sample anal ysis you choose, you spike the extract with an injection standard that contains a known mass of an isotopically labeled compound that is identical (with the exception of the labeling) to one of the target analytes. This injection standard is used to monitor the efficiency of the analytical process by verifying the volume of sample injected for analysis.Page 212: [1] Deleted LD Tier III FRM 8/27/2013 12:25:00 PM Used lubricating oil (ULO), max.

Zinc Phosphorus Calcium mg/kg Fuel shall be free of ULO. We consider a fuel to be free of ULO if one or more of the elements zinc, pho s below the specified limits. We consider a fuel to contain ULO if all three elements exceed the s

15 15 30